Yamaha Electone Stagea 01C de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: Electone Stagea 01C

Categorie: Synthesizer

Type: de handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

ELB-01

Owner’s Manual

ELB-01

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from

electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited

to, the following:

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The required

voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may

have accumulated on it.

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,

and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy

objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over,

or roll anything over it.

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable

parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use

immediately and have it inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill

into any openings.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a

sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual

smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the

power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the

instrument inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or

damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always

hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be

used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-

connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause

overheating in the outlet.

• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly

process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might

result in damage to the instrument or even injury.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme

cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the

day) to prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the

internal components.

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,

mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or

radio may generate noise.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might

accidentally fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.

• When setting up the instrument, make sure that the AC outlet you are using

is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately

turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet.

• Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch

from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly

result in the instrument overheating.

Power supply/Power cord

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/Power cord

Assembly

Location

(1)B-9 1/2

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off

the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all

components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the

volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the

volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening

level.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint

thinners, solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

• Do not insert a ﬁnger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the

panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and

unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument

inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this

might discolor the panel or keyboard.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and

do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or

uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss.

If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a

physician.

• Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or

step-ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury.

• Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the

possibility of accident or injury.

• Keep special watch over any small children so that they don’t fall off the

rear of the bench. Since the bench does not have a backrest, unsupervised

use may result in accident or injury.

• If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten

them periodically using the included tool.

Saving and backing up your data

• Always save data to a USB Flash Memory, in order to help prevent the loss

of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error.

Backing up the USB storage device

•To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that

you save your important data onto two external media.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use

or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Connections

Maintenance

Handling caution

Using the bench (If included)

Saving data

(1)B-9 2/2

The serial number of this product may be found on the

bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the

space provided below and retain this manual as a

permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in

the event of theft.

Model No. ELB-01

Serial No.

(bottom)

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Accessories

•Bench

•Dust Cover

•Music Rest

• Owner’s Manual

•Playing the ELB-01 — Tutorial Guidebook

• Assembly Instructions

Congratulations!

You are the proud owner of a ﬁne electronic organ, the Electone STAGEA ELB-01.

The Yamaha Electone combines the most advanced tone generation technology with state-of-the

art digital electronics and features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum musical

versatility.

In order to make the most of your Electone and its extensive performance potential, we urge you to

read the manual thoroughly while trying out the various features described. Keep the manual in a

safe place for later reference.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

AVE-TCP

™

, a TCP/IP protocol stack by ACCESS Co., Ltd., is installed in this product.

AVE

™

-SSL, an encryption module technology by ACCESS Co., Ltd., is installed in this

• This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or

with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without

limitation, all computer software, styles ﬁles, MIDI ﬁles, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized

use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of

• Copying of the commercially available music sequence data and/or digital audio ﬁles is strictly prohibited except

for your personal use.

•Electone and STAGEA are the trademarks of Yamaha Corporation.

• The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of

their respective companies.

• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may

appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.

The ELB-01 is compatible with the following formats.

“GM (General MIDI)” is one of the most common Voice allocation formats. “GM System

Level 2” is a standard speciﬁcation that enhances the original “GM” and improves Song data

compatibility. It provides for increased polyphony, greater Voice selection, expanded Voice

parameters, and integrated effect processing.

XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha

speciﬁcally to provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over

Voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future.

GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major

enhancement of the GM speciﬁcally to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations,

as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects.

The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single

uniﬁed format.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Contents

Congratulations! ........................................................ 4

Accessories ............................................................... 4

Main Features ............................................................ 8

Panel Layout ....................................9

Overview .................................................................... 9

Front Panel............................................................... 10

Quick Introductory Guide .............12

Getting Started......................................................... 12

Registration Menu.................................................... 14

Selecting Registrations from the Registration

Menu .............................................................. 14

Registration Menu List.................................... 15

Using the LCD display............................................. 17

LCD Display and LCD Buttons....................... 17

Changing the Display Page ........................... 18

Selecting a Voice or Rhythm .......................... 18

Basic Operation ....................................................... 19

Selecting the Display Language .................... 19

Factory Set (Initializing the Electone)............. 20

Confirming the Version of Your Electone ....... 20

Voices .............................................21

Voices for each keyboard........................................ 21

Voice Display ........................................................... 23

Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons.................. 25

Selecting Voices for Voice section 1.............. 25

Adjusting the Voice volume............................ 26

On/Off status of Voices .................................. 28

Selecting a Voice for Voice section 2 ...................... 29

Switching between Voice section 1

and Voice section 2........................................ 29

Selecting Voices for Voice Section 2 ............. 30

Selecting Voices from the User buttons .................. 32

Voice List ................................................................. 34

Voice Controls and Effects...........40

Selecting from the Voice Condition display............. 41

Selecting from the panel.......................................... 48

Reverb............................................................ 48

Sustain............................................................ 49

Rotary Speaker............................................... 50

Effect List ................................................................. 52

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion .....56

Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm buttons............. 56

To select and play a rhythm........................... 56

Operating the rhythm from the panel ............. 59

Adjusting the tempo ....................................... 61

Changing the rhythm volume/reverb.............. 62

Selecting rhythms from the User buttons ................ 63

To call up a User rhythm ................................ 64

Selecting Rhythm from an External Media ..... 65

Rhythm List..................................................... 67

Accompaniment ....................................................... 68

Automatic Accompaniment

—Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.)..................................... 71

Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) ...................................... 74

Keyboard Percussion............................................... 77

Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion.......... 77

Changing the Keyboard Percussion volume/

reverb ............................................................. 78

Preset Keyboard Percussion List ...................80

Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard

Percussion ...................................................... 88

Recalling the User Keyboard Percussion....... 92

Kit Assign List ................................................. 93

Registration Memory .................... 97

Storing Registrations ................................................ 97

Selecting Registrations ............................................99

Saving the Registration data to USB flash memory100

Initializing Registration Memory ............................. 100

Registration Shift .................................................... 102

Music Data Recorder (MDR)....... 107

Using the M.D.R. Function ..................................... 108

Formatting External Media ..................................... 109

Selecting a Song .................................................... 111

Recording............................................................... 117

Recording ..................................................... 117

Re-recording (Retry)..................................... 118

Recording Each Part Separately .................. 118

Punch-in Recording...................................... 121

Changing the Song/Folder Name ..........................122

Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File).... 124

Saving Two or More Registration Banks to

One Song...................................................... 126

Replacing Registrations ...............................127

Deleting Registrations ..................................128

Next Regist Settings (Using more than

16 Registrations in one song)....................... 129

Recalling Recorded Registrations .........................131

Loading Registrations................................... 131

Playing Back a Song .............................................. 132

Playing Back the Selected Part(s) ................ 133

Fast Forward, Rewind and Pause................. 134

Changing the Tempo.................................... 134

Repeat Playback ..........................................135

Playing Back XG Songs................................ 136

Song Copy/Delete/Convert, Folder Create/Delete . 137

Song Copy.................................................... 137

Song Delete/Folder Delete ...........................139

Creating folders ............................................ 140

Converting ELB format songs to EL .............141

Converting EL format songs to ELB .............142

Converting to XG format ............................... 144

Checking the Remaining Memory ................ 145

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voices

Quick Introductory

Guide

Voice Controls

and Effects

Rhythm/

Keyboard Percussion

Registration Memory

Music Data Recorder

(MDR)

Footswitches

Transpose and

Pitch Controls

Connections

Appendix

Footswitches................................146

Left Footswitch....................................................... 146

Transpose and Pitch Controls....150

Connections.................................151

Accessory Jacks and Controls .............................. 151

Connection Examples — External Devices ........... 153

Using Headphones ...................................... 153

Playing the Sounds of the Electone

Through an External Audio System.............. 153

Recording the Sounds of the Electone to an

External Recorder ........................................ 154

Controlling External MIDI Devices from the

Electone ....................................................... 154

Controlling the Electone from

an External Device ....................................... 155

Connecting USB storage devices................ 155

Connection with Computer .................................... 156

Using the USB terminal ................................ 156

Using the MIDI IN/OUT terminals................. 157

MIDI ....................................................................... 157

What is MIDI? ............................................... 157

MIDI Messages of the Electone ................... 159

MIDI Channels.............................................. 160

MIDI Control........................................................... 161

Appendix ......................................163

Assembly Instructions............................................ 163

Installing Optional Hardware ................................. 167

Installing the Floppy Disk Drive.................... 167

MIDI Data Format................................................... 168

MIDI Implementation Chart .......................... 178

Troubleshooting ..................................................... 180

Specifications ........................................................ 182

Index ...................................................................... 183

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Main Features

Wide Variety of Registration Menus page 14

The Registration Menu buttons feature a total of 330 Registrations, allowing you to instantly set up the

Electone for playing your favorite type of music. The Registrations in Registration Menu are divided into six

basic categories for ease of selection. Moreover, you can edit any of the Registrations and customize them to ﬁt

your own performance needs.

Richly textured, AWM Voices and High Quality Digital Effects

pages 21, 52

The ELB-01 contains a huge amount of exceptionally high-quality Voices—245 altogether—created with the

AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone generation system. The authentic touch response keyboard lets you

play these Voices with all the expressiveness and control of an actual acoustic instrument. What’s more, there

are wide variety of the effect types that you can apply to each Voice section—letting you enhance and even

completely change the character of the Voices.

Dynamic, Contemporary Rhythms and Auto Accompaniment page 56

The exceptionally wide selection of 133 rhythms lets you choose exactly the rhythm you need in your

performance. Each rhythm contains 15 variations (sections)—such as Main, Fill In, Intro, Ending, and

Break—that you can easily switch while you play, to make your performance even more dynamic and

professional. Each rhythm has its own matching accompaniment divided into ﬁve instrument parts, providing

basic backing as well as embellishments.

Keyboard Percussion page 77

This powerful feature allows you to play drum and percussion sounds from the keyboard. A wide range of

sounds and drum/percussion kits are available, for performing rhythms in real time. Each sound is assigned to

its own key, and the sounds include everything from conventional kicks and snares to a wide variety of ethnic

and Latin instruments, as well as special sound effects, such as thunder, laughing, animal cries and more.

Versatile Functions of the Music Data Recorder page 107

The Electone also features a Music Data Recorder (MDR) for recording your Registrations and performances

to USB ﬂash memory, and playing back those performances using the sounds of the Electone. In addition, the

MDR allows you to copy a song from one USB ﬂash memory device to another, letting you archive your

important recordings and Registration data. The Electone also allows you to convert the data format, letting

you play back songs that were recorded on other model Electones.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Panel Layout

Overview

Music Rest

Upper Keyboard

USB TO DEVICE A terminal

Lower Keyboard

MIDI IN/OUT terminals

USB TO DEVICE B terminal

USB TO HOST terminal

Right Footswitch

Left Footswitch

Expression Pedal

Pedalboard

Front Panel

Jacks

Speaker

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Front Panel

LEAD VOICE (page 21)

Selects the Lead Voices

for Upper Keyboard

PEDAL VOICE 1/2

(page 22)

Selects the Voices

for Pedalboard

MUSIC DATA RECORDER (page 107)

Allows recording and playback of your

keyboard performances, and lets you

store Registration data for future recall

Data Control [A] – [D]

buttons (page 17)

Selects the setting in the

display

LCD display (page 17)

Shows the current settings

of the Electone

[VOICE SECTION]

button (page 25)

Switches between Voice

sections 1 and 2

UPPER KEYBOARD

VOICE 1/2 (page 21)

Selects the Voices for

Upper Keyboard

LOWER KEYBOARD

VOICE 1/2 (page 22)

Selects the Voices for

Lower Keyboard

KEYBOARD

PERCUSSION (page 77)

Turns Keyboard

Percussion On or Off

RHYTHM CONTROL

(page 59)

Starts and stops the

rhythm, and adds

changes to the rhythm

RHYTHM (page 56)

Sets the rhythm

TEMPO buttons

(page 61)

Adjusts the speed

of the rhythm

BAR/BEAT display (page 61)

Shows the current tempo or

position in the measure

REGISTRATION

MENU (page 14)

Set the registration

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Display Select

[UTILITY] button (page 19)

[FOOTSWITCH] button (page 146)

[ROTARY SP SPEED] button (page 50)

[REVERB] button (page 48)

[VOICE DISPLAY] button (page 23)

[A.B.C./M.O.C.] button

(page 71)

[RHYTHM SEQUENCE] button (page 75)

[SUSTAIN] button (page 49)

PAGE buttons

(page 18)

Selects the Page

of the display

DATA CONTROL dial

(page 17)

Selects the setting in

the display

[M.] (Memory) button

(page 97)

[D.] (Disable) button

(page 99)

REGISTRATION MEORY

buttons

Records panel settings

made on the panel and LCD

MASTER VOLUME

dial (page 13)

USB TO DEVICE A

terminal (page 151)

Allows communication

with USB ﬂash memory

devices

POWER switch (page 12)

For turning the power on

or off.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

Whether you are an advanced performer or have never touched an electronic keyboard in

your life, we recommend that you take the time to go through this basic section. It shows

you in the simplest possible manner how to start playing your Electone.

Plug the power cord into an appropriate electrical outlet.

Turn on the Electone by pressing the POWER switch.

When you turn on the Electone, the following displays will appear one after the

other on the LCD display:

This last display, Voice Display, shows you the currently assigned voice settings

for each Voice section (page 23).

Getting Started

Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the Electone. The required voltage is

printed on the name plate of the Electone. Yamaha products are manufactured

speciﬁcally for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you intend

to use the instrument in another location, or if any doubt exists about the supply

voltage, please consult with a qualiﬁed technician.

¨”Strings1Î”Violin3

Ò”Piano1 ∏”FingrBs1

Electone STãGEã

ELB-O1

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

Set the MASTER VOLUME control.

The MASTER VOLUME control is an overall control that affects the volume of

the entire instrument.

Press the Expression pedal down with your foot.

Once you have set the MASTER VOLUME control to a suitable level, you can

use the Expression pedal to change the volume with your foot as you play.

Increases the volume

Decreases the volume

Maximum volume

Minimum volume

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

The Registration Menu is a simple, highly convenient way to instantly change all the

Electone settings for playing in speciﬁc music styles. A Registration consists of panel

settings including the selected Upper Keyboard Voices, Lower Keyboard Voices, Pedal

Voices, the assigned rhythm and so on. Each Registration Menu button (1 – 5)

includes 48 “hidden” Registrations (90 Registrations for the [★] button), with each

Registration specially suited for playing in a different music style.

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Selecting Registrations from the Registration Menu

Press one of the REGISTRATION MENU buttons.

Each button has different Registrations for different music genres. For example,

if you want to play Jazz, press the [4] button. For details on the Registration

Menu, see page 15.

From this main category, select the speciﬁc Registration you

want to use.

Each Registration Menu button actually contains many hidden Registrations,

and only the currently selected Registration is shown in the display.

Select the hidden Registrations in sequence by turning the DATA CONTROL

dial clockwise. Turning the DATA CONTROL dial counter-clockwise selects in

the reverse order.

Play your favorite song with the selected Registration.

Registration Menu

NOTE

Additional basic

Registrations are preset on

the Registration Memory

locations from 1 to 16. See

page 97 for details.

Kids

Pops & Rock

Dance & Ballad

Jazz & Latin

Symphony & World

★

Lesson

¸˛˝<KIDS>

¿01:Simple 8Beat 1

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Registration Menu List

[1] KIDS

[2] POPS & ROCK [3] DANCE & BALLAD [4] JAZZ & LATIN

No. Regist. Name

01 Simple 8Beat 1

02 Simple 8Beat 2

03 Light Step

04 Sunny Pop

05 Kids March 1

06 Kids March 2

07 Kids March 3

08 Synth. Rock

09 Symphon.March 1

10 Symphon.March 2

11 Bluegrass

12 Sea Carnival

13 Basic Waltz

14 Brass Ensemble

15 Pure Waltz

16 Rococo Ensemble

17 Pop Cha Cha

18 Comical Rumba

19 Comical Samba

20 Toy Orchestra

21 Charleston

22 Winter Swing

23 Snow Waltz 1

24 Snow Waltz 2

25 Alpine Polka *A

26 Alpine Polka *B

27 Alpine Polka *C

28 Alpine Polka *D

29 Dream Ballad *A

30 Dream Ballad *B

31 Dream Ballad *C

32 Dream Ballad *D

33 Pops Orches. *A

34 Pops Orches. *B

35 Pops Orches. *C

36 Pops Orches. *D

37 Kids On Stage*A

38 Kids On Stage*B

39 Kids On Stage*C

40 Kids On Stage*D

41 Galaxy March *A

42 Galaxy March *B

43 Galaxy March *C

44 Galaxy March *D

45 SE *A

46 SE *B

47 SE *C

48 SE *D

No. Regist. Name

01 Dynamic 8Beat

02 NY Ballad

03 British Pop

04 8Beat Modern

05 Rock Band

06 Detroit Pop

07 Techno Pop

08 Sheriff Reggae

09 Rock&Roll

10 Power Rock

11 60's GuitarRock

12 Unplugged

13 Motor City

14 Lovely Shufﬂe

15 Gospel Shufﬂe

16 Joyful Gospel

17 Frankly Soul

18 Soul

19 Gospel

20 6/8 Soul

21 Hit Pop

22 New Country

23 Eternal Pop

24 Ground Beat

25 Bounce Pop *A

26 Bounce Pop *B

27 Bounce Pop *C

28 Bounce Pop *D

29 Blues Jam *A

30 Blues Jam *B

31 Blues Jam *C

32 Blues Jam *D

33 Evergre.Waltz*A

34 Evergre.Waltz*B

35 Evergre.Waltz*C

36 Evergre.Waltz*D

37 16Beat Pop *A

38 16Beat Pop *B

39 16Beat Pop *C

40 16Beat Pop *D

41 Top Gear Rock*A

42 Top Gear Rock*B

43 Top Gear Rock*C

44 Top Gear Rock*D

45 Southern Pop *A

46 Southern Pop *B

47 Southern Pop *C

48 Southern Pop *D

No. Regist. Name

01 Organ Ballad

02 Dramatic Ballad

03 Love Ballad

04 Smooth Lead

05 Pop Ballad

06 Guitar Ballad

07 Acoustic Ballad

08 Healing Guitar

09 Chillout

10 Sweetheart 1

11 Sweetheart 2

12 Slow & Easy

13 Euro Trance

14 6/8 Trance

15 Cool Hip Hop

16 Latin House

17 Dance Beat

18 Euro Dance Pop

19 UK Pop

20 Jive

21 Disco Queen

22 Disco Soul

23 Pop Disco

24 Hot Disco

25 Ibiza *A

26 Ibiza *B

27 Ibiza *C

28 Ibiza *D

29 Power House *A

30 Power House *B

31 Power House *C

32 Power House *D

33 Dance Latino *A

34 Dance Latino *B

35 Dance Latino *C

36 Dance Latino *D

37 TwilightDisco*A

38 TwilightDisco*B

39 TwilightDisco*C

40 TwilightDisco*D

41 Love Song *A

42 Love Song *B

43 Love Song *C

44 Love Song *D

45 Movie Ballad *A

46 Movie Ballad *B

47 Movie Ballad *C

48 Movie Ballad *D

No. Regist. Name

01 Blow On Sax

02 Sax Ensemble

03 Moonlight

04 Big Band

05 Clarinet Swing

06 Jazz Combo

07 Medium Jazz

08 Organ Session

09 Guitar Combo

10 Tender Ballad

11 Jazz Waltz

12 Five-Four

13 Big Band Samba

14 Mambo Brass

15 Mambo Tenor

16 Montuno

17 Bossa Nova

18 Pop Bossa

19 Sweet Rumba

20 Beguine

21 Cha Cha Cha

22 Mellow Groove

23 Modern R&B

24 Dixieland Jazz

25 Jungle Drum *A

26 Jungle Drum *B

27 Jungle Drum *C

28 Jungle Drum *D

29 Jazz Club *A

30 Jazz Club *B

31 Jazz Club *C

32 Jazz Club *D

33 Afro Session *A

34 Afro Session *B

35 Afro Session *C

36 Afro Session *D

37 ChaChaGrandee*A

38 ChaChaGrandee*B

39 ChaChaGrandee*C

40 ChaChaGrandee*D

41 3/4 FastJazz *A

42 3/4 FastJazz *B

43 3/4 FastJazz *C

44 3/4 FastJazz *D

45 Twilight Sax *A

46 Twilight Sax *B

47 Twilight Sax *C

48 Twilight Sax *D

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

[5] SYMPHONY & WORLD

[★] LESSON

No. Regist. Name

01 Fanfare

02 StringOrchestra

03 Romantic Violin

04 Baroque

05 Flute&Harp

06 Serenade

07 Fast March

08 Wild West

09 Vienna Waltz

10 Polka

11 Chanson Club

12 Theatre Organ

13 Flamenco

14 Pop Flamenco

15 Mexican Dance

16 Mariachi

17 Celtic Dance

18 Folk Step

19 Italiano

20 Musette

21 Country

22 Hawaiian

23 ChineseNocturne

24 Japanese Sound

25 Orches.March *A

26 Orches.March *B

27 Orches.March *C

28 Orches.March *D

29 Pasodoble *A

30 Pasodoble *B

31 Pasodoble *C

32 Pasodoble *D

33 Tango *A

34 Tango *B

35 Tango *C

36 Tango *D

37 Show Time *A

38 Show Time *B

39 Show Time *C

40 Show Time *D

41 Majes. Sound *A

42 Majes. Sound *B

43 Majes. Sound *C

44 Majes. Sound *D

45 Orches.Swing *A

46 Orches.Swing *B

47 Orches.Swing *C

48 Orches.Swing *D

No. Regist. Name

01 Simple 1 St/St

02 Simple 2 St/Hr

03 Simple 3 Cl/St

04 Simple 4 Cl/Hr

05 Simple 5 Tp/St

06 Simple 6 Tp/Hr

07 Simple 7 Ob/St

08 Simple 8 Ob/Bsn

09 Simple 9 Fl/St

10 Simple 10 Fl/Cl

11 Simple 11 Cl/Cl

12 Simple 12 Pf/Pf

13 Sound Effect 1

14 Sound Effect 2

15 Sound Effect 3

16 Sound Effect 4

17 Sound Effect 5

18 Sound Effect 6

19 Sound Effect 7

20 Sound Effect 8

21 Sound Effect 9

22 Sound Effect 10

23 Sound Effect 11

24 Sound Effect 12

25 Sound Effect 13

26 Sound Effect 14

27 Sound Effect 15

28 Sound Effect 16

29 Strings Combi.1

30 Strings Combi.2

31 Strings Combi.3

32 Strings Combi.4

33 Strings Combi.5

34 Strings Combi.6

35 Strings Combi.7

36 Strings Combi.8

37 Strings Combi.9

38 StringsCombi.10

39 StringsCombi.11

40 StringsCombi.12

41 StringsCombi.13

42 StringsCombi.14

43 StringsCombi.15

44 Brass Combi. 1

45 Brass Combi. 2

46 Brass Combi. 3

47 Brass Combi. 4

48 Brass Combi. 5

No. Regist. Name

49 Brass Combi. 6

50 Brass Combi. 7

51 Brass Combi. 8

52 W.Wind Combi. 1

53 W.Wind Combi. 2

54 W.Wind Combi. 3

55 W.Wind Combi. 4

56 W.Wind Combi. 5

57 W.Wind Combi. 6

58 W.Wind Combi. 7

59 W.Wind Combi. 8

60 W.Wind Combi. 9

61 W.Wind Combi.10

62 W.Wind Combi.11

63 W.Wind Combi.12

64 W.Wind Combi.13

65 W.Wind Combi.14

66 W.Wind Combi.15

67 W.Wind Combi.16

68 W.Wind Combi.17

69 Decay 1

70 Decay 2

71 Decay 3

72 Decay 4

73 Decay 5

74 Decay 6

75 Decay 7

76 Sustained 1

77 Sustained 2

78 Sustained 3

79 Sustained 4

80 Synth. 1

81 Synth. 2

82 Synth. 3

83 Synth. 4

84 Synth. 5

85 Comping 1

86 Comping 2

87 Comping 3

88 Comping 4

89 Comping 5

90 Comping 6

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

Many of the Electone’s operations are done from the LCD display. Pressing a button on

the panel automatically calls up the relevant function for the corresponding button in

the display. Depending on the display that appears, you can conveniently perform

various functions and change values/settings by using the [A] – [D] buttons (located at

either side of the LCD) and the DATA CONTROL dial (at the right of the LCD).

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

LCD Display and LCD Buttons

The functions of the [A] – [D] buttons differ depending on the selected display. Keep

in mind that three types of indicators are used with the functions and parameters: a

ﬂashing indicator (¿ or ÷) a continuously lit indicator (¿ or ÷) and a square on/off

indicator (” or ’).

1 Flashing indicator (¿ or ÷)

When the indicator at an item is ﬂashing, you can directly select the item or parameter

(in this case, “Time”) by turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise. (When the

ﬁnal item is reached, turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise does not “wrap

around” to the ﬁrst item.) Turning the DATA CONTROL dial counter-clockwise

selects in the reverse order. (Similarly, when the ﬁrst item is reached, turning the DATA

CONTROL dial clockwise does not “wrap around” to the last item.) Also, you can

change the desired value/setting by successively pressing the corresponding [A] –[D]

button (in this case, the [B] button). The value or setting changes (in steps) each time

the button is pressed.

2 Continuously lit indicator (¿ or ÷)

This indicates that the corresponding item/parameter is not currently selected for

change. When the ¿/÷ indicator at an item is continuously lit, pressing the

corresponding [A] – [D] button (in this case, the [C] button, corresponding to the

Mode setting) switches to a ﬂashing indicator, letting you change value/setting with the

DATA CONTROL dial. Also, you can change the desired value/setting by successively

pressing the corresponding [A] – [D] button (in this case, the [C] button).

3 On/off indicator (” or ’)

A solid square (”) next to an item indicates that the corresponding function (in this

case, “Lead”) is on.

A hollow square (’) indicates that the function is off. Pressing the [A] – [D] button

corresponding to the desired item or parameter (in this case, the [D] button) alternates

between On and Off.

Using the LCD display

Ò<FOOT.SW> TIME÷1 ⁄

MODE¿GLIDE ”LEAD

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Changing the Display Page

PAGE buttons are used to select the various ‘pages’ of the display (when available), with

the currently selected page number appearing in highlight at the top right of the LCD.

Use the PAGE [▲] button to select the next page, and PAGE [▼] to select the previous

page.

Simultaneously pressing both buttons selects Page 1.

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Selecting a Voice or Rhythm

Press the desired Voice/Rhythm button on the panel (in this

example, the [STRINGS] button in Upper Keyboard Voice 1).

The selected Voice/Rhythm is shown in the display.

Select the desired Voice/Rhythm by turning the DATA CONTROL

dial.

When the ﬁnal item is reached, turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise

does not “wrap around” to the ﬁrst item. Similarly, when the ﬁrst item is

reached, turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise does not “wrap around”

to the last item.

Ò<FOOT.SW> TIME÷1 ⁄

MODE¿GLIDE ”LEAD

<STRINGS/VIOLIN> ¨1

¿01:Strings 1

Contains various

Strings Voices

Indicates currently selected Voice

<STRINGS/VIOLIN> ¨1

¿08:Pizzicato Strs 1

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Selecting the Display Language

The LCD display can be shown in two languages, English and Japanese. The default

setting is English.

Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel.

The Utility display appears. The language can be set in the Utility display Page 1.

Press the [C] or [D] button to select the corresponding language:

[C] for Japanese, or [D] for English.

Selecting from a recommended set of Voices/Rhythms

The Electone has a huge amount of available Voices and Rhythms—so many that it

may be difﬁcult to ﬁnd the ones you want. To help you ﬁnd the best Voice/Rhythm

for the selected instrument category, we’ve prepared some “recommended” or

popular selections in that category. Simply press the [A], [B] or [D] button while

the Voice/Rhythm menu is displayed to call up one of the recommended selections.

Basic Operation

<STRINGS/VIOLIN> ¨1

¿13:Strings&Violin

<æy∫/LANGUAGE> ⁄

’i-y∫ ”ENGLISH

<æy∫/LANGUAGE> ⁄

’i-y∫ ”ENGLISH

NOTE

The Language setting is not

actually set for the

instrument until you switch

to another display. Make

sure to switch to another

display before turning the

power off.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Factory Set (Initializing the Electone)

All current settings including Registration Memory and LCD Display settings can be

deleted at once by the following procedure. Be careful when executing Factory Set,

since it erases all your existing data. Always save your important data to external media,

such as a USB ﬂash memory.

Turn off the power.

While holding down the ENDING [1] button, turn the power back

on.

Release the ENDING [1] button after the Voice Display appears.

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Conﬁrming the Version of Your Electone

You can conﬁrm the version of your Electone by the following procedure.

Press the [UTILITY] button.

The Utility display appears.

Select Page 7 by using the PAGE buttons.

The Version appears in the display.

Reference Page

Storing Registrations

(page 97)

VERSIONx.xx ‡

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voices

This Electone features hundreds of high quality Voices. Any of these Voices can be used on

the Upper Keyboard, Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard. Up to three Voice sections are

available on the Upper Keyboard for playing together in a layer, while the Lower Keyboard

and Pedalboard each have two Voice sections.

Voices for the Upper Keyboard

Up to three different Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard for playing

together: Upper Keyboard Voice 1, Upper Keyboard Voice 2 and Lead Voice. Upper

Keyboard Voice 1 and Upper Keyboard Voice 2 can be selected from the panel’s Upper

Keyboard Voice 1/2 section, while the Lead Voice is selected from the Lead Voice

section.

The Lead Voice sounds only the highest note (or last note played) if two or more keys

are played together. This makes the Lead Voices ideal for solo instruments such as

Tr umpet and Saxophone—instruments that play the “leading” or highest part in an

orchestra or band.

Voices for each keyboard

Voices for the Upper Keyboard 1

and Upper Keyboard 2

Voices for the Lead Voice

Reference Page

Switching between Voice

section 1 and Voice section

2 (page 29)

Reference Page

Selecting Voices for Voice

Section 2 (page 30)

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voices

Voices for the Lower Keyboard

Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Lower Keyboard for playing

together: Lower Keyboard Voice 1 and Lower Keyboard Voice 2. Voices for each section

can be selected from the panel’s Lower Keyboard Voice 1/2 section.

Voices for Pedalboard

Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Pedalboard for playing together:

Pedal Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel’s

Pedal Voice 1/2 section. The Pedal Voice sounds one note at a time; when you

simultaneously press two or more keys, only the highest note will sound.

Voices for the Lower Keyboard 1

and Lower Keyboard 2

Voices for the Pedal Voice 1

and Pedal Voice 2

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voices

The Voice Display allows you to easily check which Voices are being used for each

keyboard. It also allows you to set whether the Voice for each section sounds or not by

changing the On/Off status in the display.

How to call up the Voice Display:

Pressing the [VOICE DISPLAY] button in the Display Select section selects the Voice

Display. (The Voice Display always appears when the Electone is turned on.)

Each of the keyboards and Pedalboard have two basic Voice sections: Voice section 1

and Voice section 2. To select a Voice, you need to ﬁrst select the desired Voice section.

For this reason, the Voice Display actually has two separate displays: one for checking

the Voice selected in Voice section 1, and the other for Voice section 2. To switch

between the Voice sections, press the [VOICE SECTION] button at the top left on the

panel.

Successive presses of the [VOICE SECTION] button at the top left on the panel

alternate between the two displays.

Voice Display

Reference Page

On/Off status of Voices

(page 28)

¨”Strings1Î”Violin3

Ò”Piano1 ∏”FingrBs1

Reference Page

Voices for each keyboard

(page 21)

Reference Page

Switching between Voice

section 1 and Voice section

2 (page 29)

Selected Voice section number’s lamp is lit

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voices

When the Voice section [1] lights up

From this display, you can check which Voices have been selected for Voice section 1 on

each keyboard (Upper Keyboard Voice 1, Lower Keyboard Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 1).

The Lead Voice, which only has one section, is shown only in the Voice section 1

display.

When the Voice section [2] lights up

From this display, you can check which Voices have been selected for Voice section 2 on

each keyboard (Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lower Keyboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2).

The Lead Voice is not shown in this display.

¨”Strings1Î”Violin3

Ò”Piano1 ∏”FingrBs1

Upper Keyboard Voice 1

Lower Keyboard Voice 1

Lead Voice

Pedal Voice 1

¨”Piano1

Ò”Strings1∏”ContBs1

Upper Keyboard Voice 2

Lower Keyboard Voice 2

Pedal Voice 2

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voices

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Selecting Voices for Voice section 1

Since selection of Voices follows the same procedure throughout all Voice sections

(except Lead Voice), instructions for only the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 of the Voice

section 1 are given here. For details on how to select a Voice of Voice section 2, see page

30.

Make sure that the lamp of the Voice section [1] is lit.

If the Voice section [2] lamp is lit instead, press the [VOICE SECTION] button

so that Voice section [1] lights.

When the Voice section [1] lamp is lit, you can select a Voice for Voice section 1

(in this case, the Upper Keyboard Voice 1), from the panel’s Upper Keyboard

Voice 1/2 section.

The Lead Voice can be selected regardless of whether Voice section [1] or Voice

section [2] is lit.

Press one of the Voice buttons in the Upper Keyboard Voice 1/2

section.

For example, if you have pressed the [ORGAN] button, the following display

(Voice Menu) will appear.

Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons

Indicates that you can select a Voice for Voice section 1

(in this case, Upper Keyboard Voice 1)

Reference Page

Switching between Voice

section 1 and Voice section

2 (page 29)

<ORGAN> ¨1

¿01:Pipe Organ 1

HINT

You can select the ideal

Voice by simply pressing the

[A]/ [B]/ [D] buttons when

the Voice menu is displayed.

Each Voice button has so

many Voices that this

function helps you selecting

the Voices.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voices

The Voice menu contains many Organ Voices, and only the currently selected

Organ Voice appears in the display.

Select the Voice in the Voice Menu display.

You can select other “hidden” Organ Voices in sequence by turning the DATA

CONTROL dial clockwise. Turning the DATA CONTROL dial counter-

clockwise selects in the reverse order.

Here we’ve selected Pipe Organ 3 for Upper Keyboard Voice 1.

Now go on to select voices for the Lower keyboard and Pedalboard as you did for the

Upper keyboard above.

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Adjusting the Voice volume

There are two ways to set the Voice volume: using the Volume buttons on the panel

and setting the volume in the display. The Volume buttons let you make coarse

adjustments to the volume while the setting in the display gives you ﬁne control.

Using the VOLUME buttons on the panel (coarse)

Press one of the Volume buttons of each Voice section on the panel to set the desired

level for each Voice. The controls have seven volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or

no sound, to a maximum of full volume.

<ORGAN> ¨1

¿03:Pipe Organ 3

You can also select other Voices in the Voice Menu display by pressing the [C]

button (once or repeatedly). Each press of the [C] button selects another hidden

Voice. If you press the [C] button when the last voice is shown, selection “wraps

around” back to the ﬁrst voice.

Increasing the volume

Decreasing the volume

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voices

Setting the Volume in the display (ﬁne)

Pressing the same Voice button on the panel again after selecting the Voice calls up the

Voice Condition display. The Volume is displayed in the top left of the Voice

Condition display Page 1. You can change the Volume by using the DATA

CONTROL dial when the arrow indicator (“¿” or “÷”) next to the Volume value is

ﬂashing. If the arrow indicator is not ﬂashing, press one of the [A] – [D] buttons

corresponding to the item or parameter you want to change to make the indicator

ﬂash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the desired control setting.

The range of the Fine volume control is 0 – 24.

NOTE

Depending on the volume

value (set in the display),

two adjacent Volume button

lamps may be lit at the same

time, indicating an

intermediate position.

Reference Page

Selecting from the Voice

Condition display (page 41)

Voice Condition Display

VOL.¿24 REV.÷20 ¨1⁄

TOUCH¿ 8 FEET÷PRESET

Pressing a Voice button once calls up the Voice Menu display for the selected

button. Pressing it a second time calls up the Voice Condition display. Successive

presses alternate between the two displays.

From the Voice Condition display, you can control Voice-related parameters such as

Pan, Effect, Volume, and so on. For more information on the Voice Condition

display, see page 41.

<STRINGS/VIOLIN> ¨1

¿01:Strings 1

VOL.¿24 REV.÷20 ¨1⁄

TOUCH¿ 8 FEET÷PRESET

Voice Menu Display

Voice Condition Display

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voices

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

On/Off status of Voices

You can set the whether the Voice sounds or not by setting the On/Off status in the

Voice display. To call up the Voice display, press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button.

Two different displays are available, depending on whether Voice section 1 or Voice

section 2 is lit. The instructions below use Voice section 1 as an example; however, the

method for changing the On/Off setting is same in both Voice section 1 and Voice

section 2.

On/Off settings:

Press the [A] – [D] buttons corresponding to the items or parameters you want to

change to alternate between On and Off. Selecting Off effectively mutes the sound of

the corresponding Voice, even when the keys are played.

Setting this to Off results in a Volume value of 0. If you increase the Volume by using

the Volume buttons, the On/Off status here changes to On.

The On/Off status for other Voices can be set in the other Voice Displays.

Reference Page

Voice Display (page 23)

Voice Display (Voice section [1] lit)

¨”Strings1Î”Violin3

Ò”Piano1 ∏”FingrBs1

Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Lead Voice

Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Pedal Voice 1

¨’Strings1Î”Violin3

Ò”Piano1 ∏”FingrBs1

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voices

This feature lets you blend two Voices together—Voice section 1 with a different Voice

in Voice section 2. This is useful for creating rich textures in the sound, playing the two

Voices in a layer. For details on how to select a Voice for Voice section 1, see page 25.

The instructions below explain how to selecting a Voice (Upper Keyboard Voice 2) for

Voice section 2.

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Switching between Voice section 1 and Voice section 2

To switch between Voice section 1 and Voice section 2, press the [VOICE SECTION]

button on the panel.

For the Voice section which is indicated as “xxx Voice 1/2” (Voice section name is

written in xxx) on the panel, you can select the Voice from each section by switching

between sections 1 and 2 by pressing the [VOICE SECTION] button.

Each press of the [VOICE SECTION] button alternates between the available Voice

sections 1 and 2. The lamp of the selected (available) Voice section number lights up.

Selecting a Voice for Voice section 2

NOTE

Switching between Voice

sections 1 and 2 has no

effect on which Voice is

sounded by the keyboard.

[VOICE SECTION] button

Upper Keyboard Voice 1

Lower Keyboard Voice 1

Lead Voice

Pedal Voice 1

Upper Keyboard Voice 2

Lower Keyboard Voice 2

Pedal Voice 2

Lead Voice

Since the Voice section 1 is selected,

you can select the Upper Keyboard

Voice 1, Lower Keyboard Voice 1 and

Pedal Voice 1.

When Voice section [1] is lit When Voice section [2] is lit

Since the Voice section 2 is selected,

you can select the Upper Keyboard

Voice 2, Lower Keyboard Voice 2 and

Pedal Voice 2.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voices

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Selecting Voices for Voice Section 2

Since selection of Voices for Voice section 2 follows the same procedure throughout all

Keyboard sections, instructions for only the Upper Keyboard, Upper Keyboard Voice

2, are given here.

Make sure that the lamp of Voice section [2] is lit.

If the Voice section [1] lamp is lit instead, press the [VOICE SECTION] button

so that Voice section [2] lights.

Press one of the Voice buttons in the Upper Keyboard Voice 1/2

section.

Select the Voices you want to play by using the DATA CONTROL

dial.

Indicates that you can select a Voice for Voice section 2

(in this case, Upper Keyboard Voice 2)

<PERCUSSION> ¨2

¿01:Vibraphone 1

Indicates Upper Keyboard

Voice 2 is selected.

NOTE

Once calling up the Voice

Menu display, it has no

change even when you

switch the Voice section 1 or

<PERCUSSION> ¨2

¿03:Marimba

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voices

Press one of the Volume buttons of the Upper Keyboard Voice 1/2

section on the panel to increase the Volume level for the Upper

Keyboard Voice 2.

Since the default Volume level for Voice section 2 is set to minimum, the Upper

Keyboard Voice 2, Lower Keyboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2 will produce no

sound even after you select the Voices for Voice section 2. To play the Voices for

Voice section 2, make sure to press the Volume buttons of the selected Voice 1/2

section on the panel to increase the Volume level. When the lamp of the Voice

section [2] is lit, the Volume buttons of the Voice sections (except the Lead

Voice) can be used to set the Volume level speciﬁcally for Voice section 2.

Now set the Voices for Lower keyboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2 as you did for Upper

keyboard Voice 2 above.

If you want to turn off the Voices of Voice section 2, set the volume level to minimum

by using the Volume buttons of the selected Voice sections on the panel, or select the

Off status in the Voice Display when the lamp of the Voice section [2] is lit.

Reference Page

On/Off status of Voices

(page 28)

About the To Lower function

Voices selected for the Lead Voice, Pedal Voice 1, and Pedal Voice 2 sections can also

be played on the Lower Keyboard when the [TO LOWER] button in each section is

on.

Keep in mind that when [TO LOWER] is on, the Lead Voice and Pedal Voice

cannot be played on the Upper Keyboard and Pedalboard, respectively. Also, Initial

Touch is not effective on Pedal Voices played on the Lower Keyboard.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voices

This Electone has a variety of Voices from which you can choose—greater than what is

immediately apparent from the front panel controls. You’ve already learned (in

“Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons” above) how to select different Voices that are

available in the Voice Menu display of each panel voice.

The Electone also has User buttons in each voice section, giving you access to even

more voices. These User buttons function as ‘wild card’ Voice Menu selectors; any

internal voices can be selected from these buttons.

The User buttons have two basic uses:

•For playing any Voice of the Voice Menus from any of the keyboards or Pedalboard.

You can play on the Upper Keyboard, for example, Voices from the sixteen Voice

Menu pages (including the four Voice Menu pages of the Pedal Voice section), and

not be limited to only the twelve buttons (equivalent to twelve Voice Menu pages)

that make up the Upper Voice section.

•For having two different Voices from the same Voice Menu page available for

selection in the same song. For example, you can assign one of the Voices to a User

button in the Upper Keyboard Voice 1/2 section, the second Voice to the other User

button in the same section.

For example, select Bell Pad 3 for User button [1] in Upper Keyboard Voice 1.

Make sure that the lamp of Voice section [1] is lit.

If the Voice section [2] lamp is lit instead, press the [VOICE SECTION] button

so that Voice section [1] lights.

Selecting Voices from the User buttons

User buttons

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voices

Press one of the User buttons in any of the Voice sections.

The name of the selected category (Woodwind/Flute) is displayed.

Select one of the sixteen Pages (categories) with the PAGE

buttons (in this case, “Pad,” Page 7).

Select Bell Pad 3 by using the DATA CONTROL dial.

Now you’ve assigned Bell Pad 3 to be called up by User button [1] in Upper

Keyboard Voice 1. You can set voices to the User buttons in any other Voice

sections just as you did for Upper keyboard Voice 1 above.

<WOODWIND/FLUTE>¨1 ›

¿17:Alto Sax 1

<PAD> ¨1 ‡

¿01:Smooth Pad 1

Currently selected Page

Directly selecting the category

To directly select the desired category, hold down one of the User buttons and

simultaneously press the desired Voice button.

1. While holding down the User button...

2. Press the Voice button.

<PAD> ¨1 ‡

¿12:Bell Pad 3

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voices

The letters A, B and D printed at the right side of each Voice name in this list indicate the corresponding DATA

CONTROL button’s name. Pressing that button selects the corresponding Voice.

Voice List

Category Voice Name Description

STRINGS/VIOLIN 01 Strings 1 These voices feature string ensemble sounds, with accurate simulation of all string

instruments, including contrabass, cello, viola and violin. Variations include light plucking

sounds, bow scratching noises and deep resonant sounds.

02 Strings 2

03 Strings 3

04 Strings 4

05 Strings 5

06 Chamber Strs 1 Strings ensemble for chamber music.

07 Chamber Strs 2

08 Pizzicato Strs 1 A The sound of stringed instruments being plucked instead of bowed.

09 Pizzicato Strs 2

10 Tremolo Strings Tremolo strings.

11 Strings1&5 Combination of Strings 1 and Strings 5.

12 Strings&Viola Combination of Strings 2 and Viola.

13 Strings&Violin B Combination of Strings 5 and Violin 3 with deep vibrato.

14 Violin&Cello String ensemble consisting of Violin 3 and Cello.

15 Octave Strings Strings ensemble sound with octave unison voices playable from a single key.

16 Violin 1 D Deeply expressive sounds, suitable not only for classical music but also jazz and country &

western. Tonal variations include bright voices and soft ones.

17 Violin 2

18 Violin 3

19 Viola Slightly larger (and deeper) than a violin. Used for mid-range parts.

20 Cello Warm and deep sounds.

21 Pizzicato Violin Violin sound played by plucking.

CONTRABASS 01 Contrabass 1 A Used for the lowest pitched parts. Variations range from deep to solo-type sounds.

02 Contrabass 2

03 Contrabass 3

04 Acoustic Bass B Acoustic bass sound ideal for jazz. This instrument goes by many different names, including

“standup bass” and “upright bass.”

05 Pizzicato Bass D Contrabass sound played by plucking.

BRASS/TRUMPET 01 Brass Section 1 Trumpet-based brass section. Variations include sounds for classical, big band and other

music.

02 Brass Section 2 A

03 Brass Section 3

04 Brass Section 4

05 Trombone Sec 1 Trombone brass section. Variations include a deep sound for classical music and a sweet,

smooth sound for jazz ballads.

06 Trombone Sec 2

07 Brass&Trp 1 Combination of Brass Section 1 and Trumpet 4.

08 Brass&Trp 2 Combination of Brass Section 2 and Trumpet 4.

09 Horn 1&3 Combination of Horn 1 and Horn 3.

10 Octave Brass 1 Octave brass with variations. Features rich variations from strong, dynamic impact voices

with quick attack, to soft, warm voices that enrich the overall sound.

11 Octave Brass 2

12 Octave Brass 3

13 Octave Brass 4

14 Trumpet 1 B Bright, multi-purpose trumpet sounds.

15 Trumpet 2

16 Trumpet 3

17 Trumpet 4

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voices

BRASS/TRUMPET 18 Muted Trumpet This recreates the distinctive sound that results when a mute is inserted in the bell of trumpet.

The normal “blasting” sound of the trumpet is suppressed, and the resulting sound is thin and

metallic.

19 Flugel Horn A brass instrument with a characteristically warm and soft sound.

20 Trombone 1 The slide trombone has a distinctive “stretching” and “shrinking” sound and features a wide

range of expressional power, from brilliant and strong to soft and sweet.

21 Trombone 2

22 Trombone 3

23 Muted Trombone A mute effect makes the volume softer and alters the characteristics of this trombone voice.

24 Horn 1 D These voices are all recreations of horns with coiled tubing, and feature a soft, mellow sound.

The voices are indispensable for orchestra and brass band since they blend well with

virtually any instrument sound, woodwind or brass.

25 Horn 2

26 Horn 3

27 Horn 4

28 Muted Horn This horn has a sound that is made sharp and metallic by using a mute, and is even capable

of mimicking the sound of a human voice.

29 Tuba This instrument is meant to be played in the lower octaves and has a rich, stable sound that

supports brass band and orchestra. It has a wide expressive range, and is often used in

playing humorous phrases.

30 Euphonium Features a characteristically broad and deep—even noble—sound, and is frequently used as

a solo instrument.

31 Brass Bass 1 Brass ensemble for playing in the lower octaves. Brass Bass 2 also has a timpani sound in

unison.

32 Brass Bass 2

WOODWIND/

FLUTE

01 Flute 1 A A light and transparent instrument voice that sounds like a bird singing. This instrument is

equally good for both fast, quickly executed passages and smooth melodies.

02 Flute 2

03 Flute 3

04 Piccolo This instrument is one octave higher than ﬂute and is meant to be played in the higher

octaves.

05 Recorder This basic ﬂute instrument is used in grade school music classes, and can be heard in some

medieval and baroque music. It has a relatively hard and round sound.

06 Ocarina This instrument has a long history and features a simple, warm sound. The pitch and the

sound quality are changed by the strength of the breath.

07 Whistle Recreation of a human whistling sound.

08 Clarinet 1 B This instrument has a wide sound range and distinctive character—with rich sound in the low

end and crisp, bright tones in the high. It is used extensively in a variety of music styles

including classical chamber music and swing jazz.

09 Clarinet 2

10 Clarinet 3

11 Bass Clarinet This instrument has a thick, deep voice and is played one octave lower than the normal

clarinet.

12 Oboe 1 D An instrument of the woodwind double reed family, this has a high, reedy, sometimes nasal

tone—yet it is also rich and warm, and can handle a wide range of expression and emotion.

13 Oboe 2

14 English Horn Also known as “cor anglais,” this is larger than the oboe, and its timbre is well-suited to

performance of expressive, melancholic solos in slow orchestral pieces.

15 Bassoon 1 This belongs to the double reed family and is used in the lower range. It is known for its

humorous, expressive character as well as its wide range and agility, and can also be used

as a solo instrument. It is also called “fagott,” from the German word meaning “bundle of

sticks.”

16 Bassoon 2

17 Alto Sax 1 Among the woodwind instruments, this is capable of the loudest sound, and plays a highly

prominent role. Its wide expressional power makes it ideal for both classical music and jazz.

18 Alto Sax 2

19 Tenor Sax 1 This voice is active in a wide range of genres, including classical and jazz. It is often used in

soul and R&B music, or in slow, moody pieces.

20 Tenor Sax 2

21 Soprano Sax 1 Features a characteristic high, ‘stretching’ sound, perfect for legato phrasing and sweet,

emotional passages.

22 Baritone Sax Soft and low baritone sax sound, also used in R&B music.

23 Sax Ens 1 Saxophone ensemble with variations, such as mellow sounds for classical and sax section for

big band.

24 Sax Ens 2

25 Woodwind Ens 1 Woodwind ensemble sound that varies the instrument depending on the register played.

26 Woodwind Ens 2

Category Voice Name Description

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voices

TUTTI 01 Strings&Winds A Unison strings and woodwind ensemble.

02 Strings&Brass B Unison strings and brass ensemble.

03 Strings&Horn D Strings and horn ensemble.

04 Brass&Sax 1 Brass and sax tutti.

05 Brass&Sax 2

06 Brass&Winds Brass and woodwind tutti.

07 Orchestra Hit A popular, widely used sampled sound in which the many instruments of the orchestra play

together on one chord or note. Used for dramatic hits and accents.

CHOIR 01 Choir 1 Vocal chorus sound. Variations include a male “ooh” sound, female “ahh,” and mixed choirs.

02 Choir 2

03 Choir 3 A

04 Choir 4 B

05 Choir 5 D

06 Choir 6

07 Vocal Solo human voice singing “ahh.”

PAD01Smooth Pad 1 A These continuous, sustained synth sounds feature a smooth, warm character that help

support the other voices in a passage, and often serve as transition sounds.

02 Smooth Pad 2

03 Smooth Pad 3

04 Smooth Pad 4

05 Resonance Pad 1 These voices have more of unique character and distinctiveness than the other synth pads,

and feature sweeping ﬁlter effects and other dynamic sound variations when held.

06 Resonance Pad 2

07 Resonance Pad 3

08 Resonance Pad 4 B

09 Resonance Pad 5

10 Bell Pad 1 D These continuous pad voices feature gentle, bell sounds. There are several types of voices

here—including an initial bell sound, as a bright bell that pulses softly and continuously.

11 Bell Pad 2

12 Bell Pad 3

13 Bell Pad 4

14 Bell Pad 5

15 Space Pad 1 This pad features a mysterious, spacey sound.

16 Space Pad 2

17 Space Pad 3

18 Space Pad 4

19 Noisy Pad 1 Bright, buzzy continuous synth sound with soft pad.

20 Noisy Pad 2

21 Noisy Pad 3

22 Noisy Pad 4

SYNTH 01 Synth Lead 1 A These special synth sounds are designed for solo parts and lead lines. Included is a synth

voice that has a strong layered fourth interval below the main pitch.

02 Synth Lead 2

03 Synth Lead 3

04 Synth Lead 4

05 Synth Lead 5

06 Synth Lead 6

07 Pop Lead 1 A light and round synth sound, appropriate for solos and leads.

08 Pop Lead 2

09 Pop Lead 3

10 Pop Lead 4

11 Pop Lead 5

Category Voice Name Description

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voices

SYNTH 12 Synth Cla 1 A bright, round and fresh synth sound, reminiscent of the clarinet.

13 Synth Cla 2

14 Synth Cla 3

15 Synth Cla 4

16 Synth Brass 1 B An abundant variety of synth brass voices, from conventional sounds and octave unisons to

unique, comical sounds.

17 Synth Brass 2

18 Synth Brass 3

19 Synth Brass 4

20 Synth Brass 5

21 Synth Brass 6

22 Synth Strs 1 Spacious synth strings sound.

23 Synth Strs 2

24 Synth Strs 3

25 Synth Strs 4

26 Synth Bell 1 Synth sounds with variations including crisp, clangorous bright bell and soft, glassy sounds.

27 Synth Bell 2 D

28 Synth Bell 3

29 Synth Bell 4

30 Synth Decay Unique decaying synth sound.

ORGAN 01 Pipe Organ 1 A The pipe organ has its roots in churches and cathedrals, and features a solemn, rich,

majestic sound. The voices here range from soft to powerful.

02 Pipe Organ 2

03 Pipe Organ 3

04 Harmonica 1 B This instrument has a wide expressive range, and can be used for emotional, soft ballads

and solos.

05 Harmonica 2

06 Theatre Organ 1 This instrument evokes feelings of nostalgia, having been used extensively in silent movie

theaters, skating rinks, restaurants (especially pizzerias) and baseball stadiums.

07 Theatre Organ 2

08 Accordion 1 D A versatile, multi-purpose instrument that has a home in a wide variety of genres, including

French chanson, Argentinian tango, polka and Tex-Mex music.

09 Accordion 2

10 Bandoneon This musical instrument is often used for tango, and features a characteristic initial attack.

11 Reed Organ This is a small organ without pipes and features a warm sound.

12 Jazz Organ 1 These electric organ sounds—great for jazz and R&B—are designed to be used with the rich

rotary speaker effect.

13 Jazz Organ 2

14 Jazz Organ 3

15 Pop Organ 1 Multi-purpose organ sounds.

16 Pop Organ 2

17 Pop Organ 3

18 Rock Organ 1 Hard, overdriven, distorted organ sound, ideal for rock.

19 Rock Organ 2

20 Organ Bass 1 Pipe organ bass and jazz organ bass sounds for lower register parts.

21 Organ Bass 2

22 Organ Bass 3

23 Organ Bass 4

PIANO 01 Piano 1 A Multi-purpose piano sounds.

02 Piano 2

03 Honkytonk Piano Purposely out-of-tune piano sound, used in ragtime, older jazz and blues and country rock

music.

04 Harpsichord B The deﬁnitive instrument for baroque music. Since harpsichord uses plucked strings, there is

no touch response. There is, however, a characteristic additional sound when the keys are

released.

Category Voice Name Description

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voices

PIANO 05 Clavichord Soft keyboard instrument for classical music, with unique sound when keys are released.

06 DX E.Piano 1 D Electric piano sounds from the popular DX-7 synthesizer.

07 DX E.Piano 2

08 Stage E.Piano 1 These electric piano voices feature the characteristic hammer and tine sound, with a bright

yet warm feel. The #2 sound also has a tremolo effect.

09 Stage E.Piano 2

10 Stage E.Piano 3

11 Stage E.Piano 4

12 Stack E.Piano This bright electric piano is characterized by its sharp attack sound.

13 Clavi 1 Funky clavi.

14 Clavi 2

GUITAR 01 Nylon Guitar A Acoustic guitar. Nylon string.

02 Steel Guitar Acoustic guitar. Steel string.

03 12Str Guitar 12-string classic guitar with gorgeous sounds.

04 Jazz Guitar This soft electric guitar is good for jazz solo passages.

05 Harp 1 B The gentle, beautiful sound of this instrument makes it ideal for soft passages, and is often

played glissando for dramatic effect.

06 Harp 2

07 Elec Guitar 1 D These electric guitar sounds include distortion and overdrive effects, as well a clean electric

guitar with realistic decay.

08 Elec Guitar 2

09 Elec Guitar 3

10 Muted Guitar Muted guitar.

11 Distortion Gtr 1 Distorted guitar.

12 Distortion Gtr 2

13 Banjo For country and dixieland jazz.

14 Mandolin This instrument is used in much Italian music and features a realistic plucked sound.

15 Pedal Steel Gtr Hawaiian guitar. Effective when used with the glide function.

PERCUSSION 01 Vibraphone 1 A This percussion instrument utilizes resonators ﬁtted with metal discs, which in turn are

connected by rod to a motor—which produces the distinctive, warm tremolo effect heard in

some jazz music.

02 Vibraphone 2

03 Marimba B This instrument is similar to the xylophone and has resonant tubes under the sound plates.

However, the wooden keys give it a soft, more organic sound, and it has an especially rich

lower register-giving it a wide expressive range and making it useful as a solo instrument.

04 Xylophone Dry and tight sounds.

05 Glockenspiel 1 This is the sound of a small glockenspiel, and features a soft, shining sound.

06 Glockenspiel 2 D

07 Celesta The celesta is similar in structure to the piano. Hammers move and hit metal bars (similar to

the glockenspiel) when the keys are played, producing a pretty, somewhat fragile bell sound.

08 Music Box Music box

09 Chime 1 Chime

10 Chime 2

TIMPANI 01 Timpani A This dramatic sounding percussion instrument is unlike most drums in that it produces a

deﬁnite pitch. It adds extra power and dynamic impact when played in unison with other

instruments and plays a very important role in orchestral music.

02 Timpani Roll B/D Timpani played with a drum roll technique.

ELECTRIC BASS 01 Fingered Bass 1 A Electric bass played with ﬁngers.

02 Fingered Bass 2

03 Fingered Bass 3

04 Slap Bass 1 B Percussive, slapped bass sounds. These slap bass voices feature variations in the

‘thickness’ of the sounds and differences in how the strings are played.

05 Slap Bass 2

06 Slap Bass 3

07 Picked Bass 1 These electric bass voices feature the bright attack of playing with a pick, and have

variations in the ‘thickness’ of the sounds.

08 Picked Bass 2 D

09 Fretless Bass Smooth fretless bass. This fretless bass voice has a unique sound, and is best used with

subtle, sliding pitch changes.

Category Voice Name Description

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voices

SYNTH BASS 01 Funk Bass 1 A Synth bass suitable for rock and blues.

02 Funk Bass 2

03 Funk Bass 3

04 Dance Bass 1 B Synth bass suitable for dance music.

05 Dance Bass 2

06 Smooth Bass 1 Contemporary, “cool” synth bass sounds.

07 Smooth Bass 2 D

08 Smooth Bass 3

WORLD 01 Pan Flute A The panﬂute (also known as “pan pipes”) is a simple instrument used in folk music of various

countries, and consists of several stopped pipes of increasing length bound together in one

line. It is a beautiful instrument that evokes the sound of wind in nature and is named after the

Greek mythological god Pan.

02 Bagpipe A traditional Scottish instrument, usually played with a continuous, low drone. The sound can

be melancholy as well dramatic and inspiring.

03 Dulcimer A characteristically clear and beautiful voice.

04 Shakuhachi Traditional Japanese recorder made of bamboo.

05 Yokobue Traditional Japanese ﬂute.

06 Shamisen B This traditional Japanese instrument features three strings and a small body covered with

animal skin. The bright, slightly buzzy sound is similar to the banjo, yet has a very strong

Oriental ﬂavor.

07 Koto Japanese Koto.

08 Taishokoto Japanese Taisho Koto.

09 Erhu D Also known as the “Chinese violin,” this is a two-stringed bowed instrument, capable of

producing sad, mysterious, or joyful melodies.

10 Sheng The Chinese sheng is a mouth-blown free reed instrument consisting of vertical tubes, and

apparently inspired the invention of the harmonica, accordion and reed organ.

11 Pipa A Chinese lute with a pear-shaped body, it is used often for solo parts as well as

accompaniment and ensemble.

12 Sitar Indian (or Hindustani) classical instrument with different resonances in the lower and mid/

high ranges.

13 Steel Drum This pitched percussion instrument, originating in Trinidad in the West Indies, is made from

55-gallon oil drums and is apparently the only acoustic instrument invented in the 20th

century. It has a bright and joyful tropical sound that belies its industrial source.

14 Kalimba African instrument.

Category Voice Name Description

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

The Electone is equipped with two general kinds of functions that can be used to change the

sound of the Voices: Voice Controls and Effects.

Each Voice has been given certain factory-preset effect settings to best enhance its sound.

However, if you wish, you can change the sound to suit your preferences by using the

controls and effects described in this section. All built-in effects are digital.

The chart below shows the various Voice controls and effects for the individual Voice

sections. Available functions are indicated by circles. The controls and effects are applied

differently according to the different types: independently for each Voice section,

independently for each keyboard or globally for the entire system.

Controls and Effects

Reference

page for

changing

the settings

Voice sections to which the controls/effects are applied

Upper Keyboard Lead Voice Lower Keyboard Pedal board

Upper Keyboard

Voice 1, 2

Lead Voice

Lower Keyboard

Voice 1, 2

Pedal board

Voice 1, 2

Selecting from the Voice Condition display, Pages 1-6

Page 1

Volume page 42 OOOO

Reverb (send level) page 42 OOOO

Initial Touch page 42 O O O –

Feet page 42 OOOO

Page 2

Pan page 43 OOOO

Tune page 43 OOOO

Transpose page 43 OOOO

Page 3 Vibrato page 44 OOOO

Page

4/5

Reverb page 45 OOOO

Delay page 45 OOOO

Karaoke page 45 OOOO

Chorus page 45 OOOO

Flanger page 45 OOOO

Phaser page 45 OOOO

Tremolo/Auto Pan page 45 OOOO

Rotary Speaker page 45 OOOO

Distortion page 45 OOOO

Wah page 45 OOOO

Dynamic page 45 OOOO

EQ/Enhancer page 45 OOOO

Page 6 Slide page 47 – O – –

Selecting from

the panel

Reverb page 48 O

Sustain page 49 O – O O

Rotary Speaker page 50 OOOO

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

To call up the Voice Condition display:

Choose a Voice on the panel, then press the same button on the panel again. The Voice

Condition display appears.

Each voice group’s Voice Condition (except for Lead Voice) is consists of ﬁve display

pages. Voice Condition of the Lead Voice consists of six pages.

Selecting from the Voice Condition display

Voice Condition Display

Setting and adjusting the parameters

You can change the items or parameters when the arrow indicator “¿(÷)” in the

display is ﬂashing. Press the [A] – [D] buttons corresponding to the items or

parameters you want to change to make the indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to select the desired control setting.

With the indicator ﬂashing, you can also directly change the items or parameters by

using the DATA CONTROL dial. For details, see “Using the LCD display” on

page 17.

VOL.¿24 REV.÷20 ¨1⁄

TOUCH¿ 8 FEET÷PRESET

Currently selected page

NOTE

After pressing one of the [A]

– [D] buttons (to make the

indicator ﬂash), you can

continue pressing the same

button to change the item or

parameter.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

In this display, you can adjust the basic Voice controls, including panning, touch

sensitivity and volume.

The items included in this page differ between the Pedal Voice sections and the other

sections. Initial Touch is not applied to the Pedal Voices.

1 Volume

Fine adjustment of the Voice volume. See page 26 for more information.

2 Reverb

Determines the amount of reverb applied to each Voice section.

When the Reverb Depth setting in the Reverb display is set to the minimum, the

setting here will have no effect. See page 48 for details.

Press the [B] button to make the “÷” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA CONTROL

dial to change the setting.

3 Touch

Controls volume and timbre according to the velocity at which you play the keys. The

harder you play the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter the timbre will

become.

Higher settings make the change wider. The minimum setting produces no effect. This

function is not applied to the Pedal Voices.

Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA CONTROL

dial to change the setting.

Range: 0 – 14

4 Feet

Determines the octave setting of the Voice, letting you use the Voice over a wide

setting is added to the Pedal Voice sections. Preset is the original (factory) setting.

Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA CONTROL

dial to change the setting.

Voice Condition [Page 1]

VOL.¿24 REV.÷20 ¨1⁄

TOUCH¿ 8 FEET÷PRESET

Reference Page

Reverb (page 48)

NOTE

Initial Touch may not be

effective on some Voices,

such as Organ Voices.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 2.

1 Panning

Determines the position of the Voice in the stereo image. Seven pan positions are

available.

Press the [A] button to make the “¿” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA CONTROL

dial to change the setting.

Range: L3 – C – R3

2 Tune

Determines the ﬁne pitch settings for each Voice section, letting you create a warmer,

richer sound by slightly detuning one Voice relative to another.

Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA CONTROL

dial to change the setting.

Range: -64 – +63

3 Transpose

Changes the pitch in semitones for each Voice section.

Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA CONTROL

dial to change the setting.

Range: -6 – +6

Voice Condition [Page 2]

PAN ¿C ¨1¤

TUNE¿ 0 TRANSP.÷ 0

Reference Page

Pitch (for entire instrument);

(page 150)

Reference Page

Transpose (for entire

instrument); (page 150)

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 3.

Vibrato

The Vibrato function varies the level of the Voices, making them sound warmer and

more animated. This effect is applied independently to each Voice section. For some

Voices, vibrato may not be effective at all or the effect may not sound as expected.

1 Preset/User

Each press of the [A] button toggles

between Preset and User.

Selecting Preset calls up the original

(factory) vibrato settings for the Voice.

When Preset is selected, the Delay, Depth

and Speed parameters cannot be edited.

Selecting User lets you adjust the vibrato settings for yourself.

2 Depth

Determines the intensity of the vibrato effect. Higher settings result in a more

pronounced vibrato. The minimum setting cancels the vibrato effect.

Press the [B] button to make the “÷” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to change the setting.

Range: 0 – 14

3 Delay

Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and

the start of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the delay of the vibrato

onset.

Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to change the setting.

Range: 0 – 14

4 Speed

Determines the speed of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the speed of

the vibrato.

Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to change the setting.

Range: 0 – 14

Voice Condition [Page 3]

VIB¿PRESET ¨1‹

Vibrato Control

Delay

Speed

Depth

VIB¿USER DEPTH÷ 0¨1‹

DELAY¿ 0 SPEED÷ 0

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 4.

Effect

You can select the effects applied to each Voice section.

1 Effect Category

You can select the Effect Category applied to each Voice section.

Press the [A] button to make the “¿” indicator ﬂash, then you can select the

Effect Categories in sequence: Preset → Reverb → Delay → ... → Dynamic →

EQ/Enhancer → Thru by turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise.

Turning the DATA CONTROL dial counter-clockwise selects in the reverse

order.

Voice Condition [Page 4]

PRESET The effect type that best matches and is most suited to the currently

selected sound is automatically selected.

REVERB Produces a gentle “wash” of aftertones in the sound, recreating the

subtle ambience and depth of actual performance spaces and rooms.

DELAY Produces delayed distinct repeats of the sound, or echoes. This is also

useful for creating rhythmic repeats in the sound.

KARAOKE Produces a deep echo effect like that used in Karaoke sing-along

applications.

CHORUS Creates a warm effect as if several of the same sound were playing at

once. Makes the overall sound richer, “fatter” and more animated.

FLANGER This creates a metallic periodic “sweeping” effect, similar to Chorus but

with a brighter more resonant sound.

PHASER Similar to Flanger, this produces rolling timbre changes and a

pronounced up/down ﬁlter sweep effect.

TREMOLO/

AUTO PAN

This periodically changes the volume and has the effect of moving the

sound image both front and back, and left and right.

ROTARY

SPEAKER

This popular effect (used mainly for electronic organ sounds) recreates

the rich, animated pulsing sound of a rotating speaker horn.

DISTORTION This effect adds distortion to the sound.

WAH This uses an automatic up/down ﬁlter sweep to change the timbre of the

sound, producing a “wah-wah” sound.

DYNAMIC This effect (also called compression) “squeezes” the overall dynamic

range of the sound, and has a gain control—letting you make soft

sounds louder, and thus give more “punch” to the sound.

EQ/ENHANCER EQ: This processing tool lets you change the level for speciﬁc frequency

ranges in the sound, and affects the overall sound quality.

Enhancer: This effect emphasizes and enhances the overtones in the

high frequency sound range overtone—not merely making the sound

brighter, but giving it more clarity and presence.

THRU Bypass control. This cancels the effect processing.

EFFECT¿PRESET ¨1›

TYPE¿01:THRU

EFFECT¿PRESET

EFFECT¿REVERB

EFFECT¿EQ/ENHANCE

EFFECT¿THRU

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

When Preset is selected, the original (factory) effect category for the selected

Voice is automatically set. Selecting Thru bypasses the effect (no effect is added

to the selected Voice).

2 Effect Type

Effect types are displayed corresponding to the selected effect category.

Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to change the setting.

Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 5.

Effect Parameters

You can set the parameters of effect type selected in the Voice Condition display, Page 4.

Generally, the effect parameters settings are automatically well-balanced to the selected

effect type, so there is no need to follow the steps below unless you want to change the

setting.

If you want to change the setting, select the parameter, then change the value. Since

selection of Parameters and setting of value follow the same procedure throughout all

Effect Type, instructions for only “Hall 1” of Reverb are given here.

For details, see page 52.

1 Parameters

Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the selected effect type.Press

the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA CONTROL

dial to select the parameters. In this case, the Time parameter is selected.

2 Value setting

Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to change the setting.

Reference Page

Effect List (page 52)

Voice Condition [Page 5]

TYPE:Hall 1 ¨1ﬁ

¿Time ÷2.1s

Time ÷2.1s

Dry/Wet ÷D24>W

Currently selected Effect Type

TYPE:Hall 1 ¨1ﬁ

¿Time ÷2.1s

1 2

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 6.

In this Page, determines whether or not the Slide function is applied to the Lead Voice.

Slide

Applies a portamento effect to notes played in legato. The Slide function is effective

within a one-octave range for the Lead Voice.

1 Slide On/Off

Determines the on/off status of the Slide effect.

Each press of the [A] button toggles between On and Off.

2 Slide Time

Determines the speed of the slide or portamento effect. The higher the value, the

slower the speed.

Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to change the setting.

Range: 0 – 14

Voice Condition [Page 6] (only for Lead Voice)

’SLIDE Î ﬂ

SLIDE TIME¿ 0

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

The Reverb, Sustain and Rotary Speaker displays are called up by pressing the

respective buttons on the panel.

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Reverb

Reverb adds an echo-like effect to the sound, giving the impression of a performance in

a large room or concert hall. You can adjust the reverb volume for each Voice section or

the entire system. Also, you can adjust the reverb volume for rhythm and

accompaniment separately.

Call up the Reverb display to set the Reverb effect by pressing the [REVERB] button

on the panel.

Each press of the [REVERB] button toggles between On and Off. When set to On, the

lamp of the button lights up to indicate that Reverb is on.

1 Type

Selects the Reverb Type.

Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA CONTROL

dial to change the setting.

2 Depth

Determines the depth of reverberation or the level of the reﬂected sounds. This allows

ﬁne control over the depth. When this parameter is set to the minimum, the settings in

Voice Condition display, Page 2 (page 43) have no effect.

Press the [B] button to make the “÷” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA CONTROL

dial to change the setting.

Range: 0 - 24

3 Time

Determines the reverb length for each of the Voice sections.

Higher settings result in a longer reverb sound.

Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA CONTROL

dial to change the setting.

Range: 0.3s – 30.0s

Selecting from the panel

Reference Pages

Changing the rhythm

volume/reverb (page 62)

Reverb (page 42)

Reverb Display

<REVERB> DEPTH÷ 0

¿XG HALL 1 TIM÷ 2.1

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Sustain

The sustain effect, selectable for the Upper, Lower and Pedal Voices, causes Voices to

gradually fade out when the keys are released. The sustain on/off and sustain length

settings are independent for each keyboard, providing maximum expressive control.

Call up the Sustain display to set the Sustain effect by pressing the [SUSTAIN] button

on the panel.

Sustain On/Off

For Upper Voices, press the corresponding [B] button to toggle between On and Off.

For Lower Voices, press the corresponding [C] button to toggle between On and Off.

For Pedal Voices, press the corresponding [D] button to toggle between On and Off.

Sustain cannot be applied to the Lead Voices.

The lamp of the [SUSTAIN] button lights up when you turn on the Sustain effect for

one of the Upper, Lower and Pedal Voices in the Sustain display. When you turn off the

Sustain effect for all Voices in the Sustain display, the lamp turns off. Remember to

check whether the sustain effects are on or off in the Sustain display before you start to

play.

Sustain Length

The display shows the current sustain length values for each keyboard.

Press the appropriate button to make the “¿(÷)” indicator ﬂash (Upper Keyboard: [B]

button; Lower Keyboard: [C] button; Pedal Keyboard: [D] button), then use the

DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting.

Sustain Display

<SUSTAIN> ’UPPER÷10

’LOWER¿10 ’PEDAL÷ 6

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Rotary Speaker

Rotary Speaker recreates the rich, swirling sound of the popular rotating speaker effect.

The Rotary Speaker effect can be switched in real time as you play, with either the front

panel button or the Left Footswitch (when properly set for Footswitch operation).

Keep in mind that the Rotary Speaker effect CANNOT be turned on only by turning

on the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button. To use the Rotary Speaker effect, follow the

steps below.

Select the Rotary Speaker effect from the desired Voice.

When you want to set Rotary Speaker for one of the Voice sections, you can

select the effect category of Rotary Speaker in the Voice Condition display, Page

4. See page 45 for details.

Adjust the rotating speed and mode of the Rotary Speaker.

Press the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button to call up the Rotary Speaker display.

The settings in this display are common to all Voice sections.

1 Speed

Determines the speed of the speaker rotation.

Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to change the setting.

Range: 2.69Hz – 39.7Hz

2 Mode

Determines the slow/stop mode when the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button is off.

If Slow is selected, a slow chorus effect is applied when you turn off the button

on the panel. If Stop is selected, the Rotary Speaker effect turns off (stops

completely) when you turn off the button on the panel.

Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to change the setting.

Once the Rotary Speaker effect has been turned on and set, you can control the

effect in real time from the panel or from the Left Footswitch.

EFFECT¿ROTARY SP.¨1›

TYPE¿01:XG ROTARY SP

Select “Rotary Speaker” here

SPEED¿4.88 MODE÷SLOW

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

Control the Rotary Speaker effect from the panel or from the Left

Footswitch.

You can control Rotary Speaker on/off not only from the panel but also by using

the Left Footswitch, if the Footswitch has been properly assigned.

See “4 Rotary Speaker” on page 149 for details.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

PRESET

The effect type that best matches and is most suited

to the currently selected sound is automatically

selected.

REVERB

Produces a gentle “wash” of aftertones in the sound,

recreating the subtle ambience and depth of actual

performance spaces and rooms.

DELAY

Produces delayed distinct repeats of the sound, or

echoes. This is also useful for creating rhythmic

repeats in the sound.

KARAOKE

Produces a deep echo effect like that used in Karaoke

sing-along applications.

Effect List

No. Type No. Type

01 HALL 1 14 STAGE 2

02 HALL 2 15 PLATE 1

03 HALL 3 16 PLATE 2

04 HALL M 17 XG HALL 1

05 HALL L 18 XG HALL 2

06 ROOM 1 19 XG ROOM 1

07 ROOM 2 20 XG ROOM 2

08 ROOM 3 21 XG ROOM 3

09 ROOM 4 22 XG STAGE 1

10 ROOM S 23 XG STAGE 2

11 ROOM M 24 XG PLATE

12 ROOM L 25 GM PLATE

13 STAGE 1

Parameter Range Description

Time 0.3 – 30.0 s Determines the decay time of the

reverb.

Dry/Wet D63>W – D<W63 Determines the balance of the

original sound (dry) and the effect

sound (wet).

No. Type

01 DELAY LCR

02 XG DLY LCR

03 DELAY LR

04 ECHO

05 CROSS DELAY

06 TEMPO DELAY

Parameter Range Description

L DelayTime 0.1 – 743.0 msec

Echo: 0.1 – 371.5

msec

Determines the time that elapses

between the original sound and

the delayed repeat in the left

channel.

R DelayTime 0.1 – 743.0 msec

Echo: 0.1 – 371.5

msec

Determines the time that elapses

between the original sound and

the delayed repeat in the right

channel.

C DelayTime 0.1 – 743.0 msec Determines the time that elapses

between the original sound and

the delayed repeat in the center

of the stereo image.

L>R Delay 0.1 – 371.5 msec Determines the time for the sound

to move from left to right (when

using Cross Delay).

R>L Delay 0.1 – 371.5 msec Determines the time for the sound

to move from right to left (when

using Cross Delay).

DelayTime 16th – 8th. When using Tempo Delay, this

sets the time between delayed

repeats to match the tempo of the

rhythm/song.

InputSelect L, R, L/R Determines the input

conﬁguration.

FB Delay 0.1 – 743.0 msec Determines the feedback time of

the delayed repeats. The larger

the value, the longer the time

between delayed repeats. (For

Delay LR, the left and right

channels can be set

independently.)

FB Level -63 – +63 Determines the amount of

delayed repeats in the sound.

When this is set to 0%, the

delayed repeat from the second

time will not sound.

Dry/Wet D63>W – D<W63 Determines the balance of

original sound and the effect

sound.

No. Type

01 KARAOKE 1

02 KARAOKE 2

03 KARAOKE 3

Parameter Range Description

DelayTime 0.1 – 400 msec Determines the time that elapses

between the original sound and

the delayed repeat.

FB Level -63 – +63 Determines the amount of

delayed repeats in the sound.

When this is set to 0%, the

delayed repeat from the second

time will not sound.

Dry/Wet D63>W – D<W63 Determines the balance of the

original sound and effect sound.

Parameter Range Description

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

CHORUS

Creates a warm effect as if several of the same sound

were playing at once. Makes the overall sound richer,

“fatter” and more animated.

FLANGER

This creates a metallic periodic “sweeping” effect,

similar to Chorus but with a brighter more resonant

sound.

PHASER

Similar to Flanger, this produces rolling timbre

changes and a pronounced up/down ﬁlter sweep

effect.

TREMOLO/AUTO PAN

This periodically changes the volume and has the

effect of moving the sound image both front and

back, and left and right.

No. Type No. Type

01 CHORUS 1 10 GM CHORUS 4

02 CHORUS 2 11 FB CHORUS

03 XG CHORUS 1 12 CELESTE 1

04 XG CHORUS 2 13 CELESTE 2

05 XG CHORUS 3 14 CELESTE 3

06 XG CHORUS 4 15 CELESTE 4

07 GM CHORUS 1 16 SYMPHONIC

08 GM CHORUS 2 17 XG SYMPHONIC

09 GM CHORUS 3

Parameter Value Description

LFO Freq. 0.00 – 39.7 Hz Determines the frequency of

oscillation, or the speed of the

wavering effect.

LFO Depth 0 – 127 Determines the depth of

oscillation, or the amount of the

wavering effect.

Dry/Wet D63>W – D<W63 Determines the balance of the

original sound and the effect

sound.

Input Mode Mono/Stereo Determines the input

conﬁguration.

No. Type

18 ENS DETUNE

Parameter Value Description

Detune -50 – +50 cent Determines the amount of

detuning (or pitch shifting) is

applied to the delayed repeats.

L DelayTime 0.0 – 50.0 msec Determines the time that elapses

between the original sound and

the delayed repeat in the left

channel.

R DelayTime 0.0 – 50.0 msec Determines the time that elapses

between the original sound and

the delayed repeat in the right

channel.

Dry/Wet D63>W – D<W63 Determines the balance of the

original sound and the effect

sound.

No. Type

01 FLANGER 1

02 FLANGER 2

03 XG FLANGER 1

04 XG FLANGER 2

05 XG FLANGER 3

06 GM FLANGER

Parameter Value Description

LFO Freq. 0.00 – 39.7 Hz Determines the frequency of

oscillation, or the speed of the

wavering effect.

LFO Depth 0 – 127 Determines the depth of

oscillation, or the amount of the

wavering effect.

FB Level -63 – +63 Determines the amount of output

sound (with the ﬂanging effect)

that is returned to the input. The

larger the value, the more

complex and pronounced the

ﬂanging effect becomes.

Dry/Wet D63>W – D<W63 Determines the original sound

and the effect sound.

No. Type

01 PHASER

02 EP PHASER 1

03 EP PHASER 2

04 EP PHASER 3

Parameter Value Description

LFO Freq. 0.00 – 39.7 Hz Determines the frequency of

oscillation, or the speed of the

wavering effect.

L/R Depth 0 – 127 Determines the depth of

oscillation, or the amount of the

wavering effect.

Phase Shift 0 – 127 Determines the phase

relationship between the

processed signal and the

original. This changes the sound

characteristics of the Phaser

effect.

FB Level -63 – +63 Determines the amount of output

sound (with the phasing effect)

that is returned to the input. The

larger the value, the more

complex and pronounced the

phasing effect becomes.

Dry/Wet D63>W – D<W63 Determines the balance of the

original sound and the effect

sound.

No. Type

01 TREMOLO 1

02 TREMOLO 2

03 XG TREMOLO

04 EP TREMOLO

05 GT TREMOLO 1

06 GT TREMOLO 2

07 ORGAN TREM.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

ROTARY SPEAKER

This popular effect (used mainly for electronic organ

sounds) recreates the rich, animated pulsing sound of

a rotating speaker horn.

DISTORTION

This effect adds distortion to the sound.

WAH

This uses an automatic up/down ﬁlter sweep to

change the timbre of the sound, producing a “wah-

wah” sound.

Parameter Range Description

LFO Freq. 0.00 – 39.7 Hz Determines the tremolo speed.

AM Depth 0 – 127 Determines the amount of volume

change.

PM Depth 0 – 127 Determines the amount of pitch

change in the sound.

Input Mode Mono/Stereo Determines the input

conﬁguration.

LFO Depth 0 – 127 Determines the depth of the

Tremolo effect.

L/R Depth 0 – 127 Determines the depth of panning

between the left and right

channels.

F/R Depth 0 – 127 Front/rear. Determines the depth

of the front and rear panning

effect. This controls both level

and pitch at the same time.

No. Type

08 AUTO PAN

09 XG AT PAN

10 EP AUTO PAN

Parameter Value Description

LFO Freq. 0.00 – 39.7 Hz Determines the frequency of the

Auto Pan effect, or how fast the

sound shifts between the left and

right channels.

L/R Depth 0 – 127 Determines the depth of the left/

right panning effect.

F/R Depth 0 – 127 Determines the depth of the front/

rear panning effect. This controls

both level and pitch at the same

time.

Pan L<->R

L->R

L<-R

Lturn

Rturn

L/R

Determines the Auto Pan type.

(“L<->R” is a sine wave and “L/R”

is a sawtooth wave.)

No. Type

01 XG ROTARY SP

02 ROTARY SP 1

03 ROTARY SP 2

04 ROTARY SP 3

05 ROTARY SP 4

Parameter Value Description

EQ LowFreq. 32 – 2.0k Hz Determines the central frequency

of the low frequency range that is

boosted or cut.

EQ Low Gain -12 – +12 dB Determines the amount over

which the low frequency range is

boosted or cut.

EQ Hi.Freq. 500 – 16k Hz Determines the central frequency

of the high frequency range that

is boosted or cut.

EQ Hi.Gain -12 – +12 dB Determines the amount over

which the high frequency range is

boosted or cut.

No. Type

01 DIST HARD

02 DIST SOFT

03 OVERDRIVE

04 XG DIST

05 XG AMP SIM

Parameter Value Description

Drive 0 – 127 Determines the amount or degree

of distortion in the sound.

Amp. Type Off

Stack

Combo

Tube

Determines the type of ampliﬁer

that is simulated.

LPF Cutoff 1.0 – 18k Hz

Thru

Determines the cutoff frequency

of the low pass ﬁlter. Frequencies

above this value are cut or ﬁltered

out.

OutputLevel 0 – 127 Determines the level or volume of

the processed sound.

EQ Low Gain -12 – +12 dB Determines the amount of EQ

boost or cut in the low frequency

range.

EQ Mid.Gain -12 – +12 dB Determines the amount of EQ

boost or cut in the mid frequency

range.

Dry/Wet D63>W – D<W63 Determines the balance of the

original sound and the effect

sound.

No. Type

01 AUTO WAH

02 XG AUTO WAH

03 TOUCH WAH 1

04 TOUCH WAH 2

05 CLAVI TC WAH

06 EP TOUCH WAH

Parameter Value Description

LFO Freq. 0.00 – 39.7 Hz Determines the speed of the Wah

effect.

LFO Depth 0 – 127 Determines the depth of the Wah

effect.

Cutoff 0 – 127 Determines the central frequency

that the wah ﬁlter acts upon.

Resonance 1.0 – 12.0 Determines the frequency

bandwidth (around the central

frequency set in Cutoff above)

that the wah ﬁlter affects.

Parameter Value Description

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Voice Controls and Effects

DYNAMIC

This effect (also called compression) “squeezes” the

overall dynamic range of the sound, and has a gain

control—letting you make soft sounds louder, and

thus give more “punch” to the sound.

EQ/ENHANCER

This processing tool lets you change the level for

speciﬁc frequency ranges in the sound, and affects the

overall sound quality.

ENHANCER

This effect emphasizes and enhances the overtones in

the high frequency sound range overtone—not

merely making the sound brighter, but giving it more

clarity and presence.

THRU

Bypass control. This cancels the effect processing.

Sensitivity 0 – 127 Determines the degree to which

the wah ﬁlter is affected by your

playing touch.

Dry/Wet D63>W – D<W63 Determines the balance of the

original sound and the effect

sound.

No. Type

01 COMPRESSOR

02 NOISE GATE

Parameter Value Description

Attack 1 – 40 msec Determines how soon the

compression effect is applied,

once the compressor has been

triggered (as a result of Threshold

below.

Release 10 – 680 msec Determines how soon the

compressor returns to its normal

gain, once the trigger signal

drops below the Threshold point.

Threshold Compressor:

-48 – -6 dB

Noise Gate:

-72 – -30 dB

Determines the level of the input

signal required to trigger the

compressor. Signals at a level

below the Threshold pass

through unaffected; signals at

and above the Threshold are

compressed.

Ratio 1.0 – 20.0 Determines the amount of

compression of the sound (for

signals passing the Threshold).

This is expressed as a ratio—the

change in output signal relative to

the change in input. The range

here is 1/1 (no change in output

signal, hence no compression) to

20/1. Higher ratios result in

greater compression.

OutputLevel 0 – 127 Determines the overall output of

the compressed signal. Use this

to bring up the overall level after

you’ve reduced the dynamic

range with compression.

No. Type

01 ST 2BAND EQ

02 ST 3BAND EQ

03 XG 3BAND EQ

04 EQ DISCO

05 EQ TEL

Parameter Value Description Parameter Value Description

EQ LowFreq. 50 – 2.0k Hz

ST 2Band EQ:

32 – 2.0k Hz

Determines the central frequency

of the low frequency range that is

to be boosted or cut.

EQ Low Gain -12 – +12 dB Determines the amount over

which the low frequency range is

boosted or cut.

EQ Mid.Freq 100 – 16k Hz Determines the central frequency

of the middle frequency range

that is to be boosted or cut.

EQ Mid.Gain -12 – +12 dB Determines the amount over

which the middle frequency

range is boosted or cut.

EQ M Width 0.1 – 12.0 Determines the bandwidth or the

range of frequencies around the

speciﬁc middle frequency that is

to be boosted or cut. Lower

values let you narrow in on a

speciﬁc frequency, while higher

values select a broader range of

frequencies to be affected.

EQ Hi.Freq 500 Hz – 16k Hz Determines the central frequency

of the high frequency range that

is to be boosted or cut.

EQ Hi.Gain -12 – +12 dB Determines how much increase/

decrease the wave frequency

point of EQ high frequency.

No. Type

06 HM ENHANCER

07 XG HM ENHNCE

Parameter Value Description

HPF Cutoff 500 Hz – 16k Hz Determines the cutoff frequency

of the low pass ﬁlter. Frequencies

above this value are cut or ﬁltered

out.

Drive 0 – 127 Determines the amount or depth

of the Enhancer effect.

Mix Level 0 – 127 Determines how much of the

processed enhanced sound is

mixed together with the original

sound.

No. Type

01 Thru

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

This Electone features 133 different real rhythms featuring actual drum and percussion

sampled sounds. Automatic Accompaniment functions are used with the rhythms, providing

appropriate and completely automatic accompaniment to match the style of the selected

rhythm. Moreover, the Electone has a Keyboard Percussion feature that allows you to

directly play drum and percussion sounds from the Upper/Lower keyboards and Pedalboard.

A total of 133 rhythms can be instantly selected with the ten rhythm buttons on the

front panel.

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

To select and play a rhythm

Press one of the Rhythm buttons in the RHYTHM section on the

front panel.

For example, if you have pressed the [DANCE] button, the following display

(Rhythm Menu) will appear.

The Rhythm Menu contains many Dance rhythms, and the currently selected

Dance rhythm is shown in the display.

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm buttons

<DANCE>

¿01:Ibiza

Rhythm Menu display

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Select the Rhythm in the Rhythm Menu display.

You can select the hidden dance rhythms in sequence (forward or reverse) by

using the DATA CONTROL dial.

Here, we’ve selected “UK Pop.”

Press the [START] button to immediately start the rhythm.

To stop the rhythm, press this button again.

You can turn the rhythm on/off and switch the sections as desired by pressing

the buttons on the panel—and add the accompaniment to the rhythm.

Set the volume using the panel rhythm volume buttons.

The buttons have seven volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to

a maximum of full volume.

Fine adjustments in the volume of the rhythm can also be made from the

Rhythm Condition display (page 62).

<DANCE>

¿04:UK Pop

You can select the rhythm in the Rhythm Menu display by pressing the [C] button

one or more times. Each press of the [C] button selects subsequent hidden rhythms.

When the ﬁnal item is reached, pressing the [C] button “wraps around” to the ﬁrst

item.

Reference Page

Operating the rhythm from

the panel (page 59)

Reference Page

Accompaniment (page 68)

Reference Page

Changing the rhythm

volume/reverb (page 62)

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Rhythm Structure

Each rhythm is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a variation of the basic

rhythm, you can use them to add “spice” to your performance and mix up the beats

while you are playing. You can freely change the section while the rhythm is played

back.

INTRO

This is used for the beginning of the song. There are three Intro sections that can be selected

with INTRO [1] – [3] buttons. When the Intro ﬁnishes playing, the rhythm automatically

shifts to the Main section.

MAIN

This is used for playing the main part of the song. There are four Main sections that can be

selected with MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons. The rhythm pattern of several measures

repeats indeﬁnitely.

FILL IN

This is designed for use as a temporary and regular rhythmic pattern to spice up a repeating

rhythm. There are four Fill In sections that can be played by pressing the selected (lit)

MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons as desired. When one measure pattern of Fill In ﬁnishes

playing, the rhythm is automatically shifts to the Main section.

BREAK

This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm pattern. The Break section is

selected by pressing the [BREAK] button. When the one-measure Break pattern ﬁnishes

playing, the rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section.

ENDING

This is used for the ending of the song. When the ending is ﬁnished, the rhythm

automatically stops. There are three Ending sections that can be selected with the ENDING

[1] – [3] buttons.

Selected Intro section’s lamp is lit

Selected Main section’s lamp is lit

Selected Fill In section’s lamp ﬂashes

The lamp is lit when the Break section is selected

Selected Ending section’s lamp is lit

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Operating the rhythm from the panel

You can turn the rhythm on/off and switch the sections as desired by pressing the

buttons on the panel. Using the Fill Ins and Break patterns let you add dynamic

interest and “spice” to your performance.

To start/stop the rhythm:

START

The rhythm begins as soon as the [START] button is pressed. To stop the rhythm, press the

button again.

SYNCHRO START

The [SYNCHRO START] button puts the rhythm in “standby.” The rhythm starts when you

press a note on the Lower keyboard or Pedalboard. When you start the rhythm with the

[SYNCHRO START] button, pressing this button again stops the rhythm.

INTRO

Pressing one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons automatically adds a short introduction before

starting the actual (Main) rhythm. First press one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons, then press

the [START] or [SYNCHRO START] button to actually start the rhythm.

While the introduction is playing, the BAR/BEAT display shows the countdown to the ﬁrst

measure of the pattern. For example, if there is a four-measure lead-in for a pattern in 4/4 time,

the display at right appears:

ENDING

Pressing one of the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons automatically adds an ending phrase before

stopping the rhythm. When you press the Ending button while rhythm is playing back, the

rhythm will automatically stop after the ending phrase is played. You can have the ending

gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the ENDING button once again, while the

ending is playing.

NOTE

When you start the rhythm

with [SYNCHRO START]

button, set the Lower/Pedal

Memory to on. When

Memory is off, releasing

your ﬁngers from Lower

keyboard stops the rhythm.

For details on Memory and

the A.B.C. function, see

page 71.

NOTE

Pressing the ENDING [1]

button during playback of

the Main section will ﬁrst call

up the Fill In pattern, then

the Ending 1 pattern.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

To switch the rhythm sections:

You can change the rhythm section of the Main phrase by pressing the desired MAIN/

FILL IN [A] – [D] button. The selected section's lamp (above the button) lights.

To use the Fill In patterns:

As you play the Electone along with the rhythm, occasionally press the selected MAIN/

FILL button as desired. The Fill In pattern (one measure) will be played and the

selected Fill In section’s lamp (above the button) ﬂashes.

When you use the Auto Fill In function, Fill Ins will be played automatically. The Auto

Fill In function is set in the Page 1 of the Rhythm Condition display. To call up the

Rhythm Condition display, select the desired rhythm and press the same rhythm

button again.

When Auto Fill is set to On (”) in the right side of the display, the Fill In pattern is

automatically played whenever you switch the Main sections. Each press of the [B]

button toggles between On (”) and Off (’).

To use the Break patterns:

As you play the Electone along with the rhythm, occasionally press the [BREAK]

button. This lets you vary a repeating rhythm with dynamic breaks.

<PERCUSSION>”AUTO.F⁄

VOL.¿12 REV.÷ 8

Reference Page

To select and play a rhythm

(page 56)

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Adjusting the tempo

You can adjust the rhythm tempo by pressing the TEMPO buttons.

1 TEMPO buttons

For adjusting the speed of the rhythm. Pressing the right button increases the tempo

and pressing the left button decreases it.

Each rhythm has its original (preset) tempo. Press the TEMPO buttons simultaneously

to restore the tempo to the original setting.

2 TEMPO Display (BAR/BEAT Indicator)

TEMPO display shows the current tempo. Displayed values are given in beats per

minute.

The tempo range is 40 to 240 beats per minute.

When the rhythm begins playing, the TEMPO indicator changes function to a BAR/

BEAT indicator.

The number on the left in the BAR/BEAT indicator indicates the current bar or

measure and the one on the right indicates the current beat in the bar.

3 BAR/BEAT indicator

The beat indicator lamp above the TEMPO display also indicates the beats.

TEMPO Indicator

BAR/BEAT Indicator

Bar (measure) Beat

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Changing the rhythm volume/reverb

You can adjust the rhythm volume or amount of reverb applied to the rhythms and the

percussion sounds used in the rhythms in the Rhythm Condition display. You can also

have a Fill In play automatically by setting the Auto Fill function to ON.

To call up the Rhythm Condition display, select the desired rhythm and press the same

rhythm button again.

The buttons at the right and left side of the display and DATA CONTROL dial can

control the rhythm volume and reverb.

1 Auto Fill

When Auto Fill is set to On (”) in the display, the Fill In pattern is automatically

played whenever you switch the Main sections.

For details on how to set to On, see page 17.

2 Volume

Fine Adjustment of rhythm volume.

Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA CONTROL

dial to change the setting.

Range: 0 – 24

3 Reverb

Determines the amount of reverb applied to the rhythm.

Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA CONTROL

dial to change the setting.

When the Reverb Depth (for entire instrument) is set to the minimum, the setting here

will have no effect.

Range: 0 – 24

<PERCUSSION>”AUTO.F⁄

VOL.¿12 REV.÷ 8

[Page 1] Rhythm Condition Display

NOTE

Depending on the volume

value (set in the display),

two adjacent Volume button

lamps may be lit at the same

time, indicating an

intermediate position.

Reference Page

Reverb Depth (page 48)

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

As with the Voice sections, the Rhythm section also has User buttons (numbered 1 or

2) from which rhythms can be selected. You can select original User rhythms that have

been created with this Electone or other models equipped with the Rhythm Pattern

Program function (such as the ELS-01/01C/01X). For details on selecting original User

rhythms, see next page.

This also allows you to assign two or three rhythms from the same category to be

selected from different buttons; one from the original Rhythm button, and the others

from the User buttons.

For example, to call up “Modern R&B,” select the R&B category.

Press one of the User buttons at the right of the Rhythm buttons.

Select one of the pages with the Page buttons.

In this case, select Page 5 “R&B.”

Select the “Modern R&B” rhythm with the DATA CONTROL dial.

This step assigns “Modern R&B” to the User button [1]. You can call up the

“Modern R&B” the next time you press the [1] button.

Selecting rhythms from the User buttons

<USER> [FILE]⁄⁄

¿01:User 1

<R&B> ﬁ

¿01:Motor City

Currently selected Page

<R&B> ﬁ

¿06:Modern R&B

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

To call up a User rhythm

User rhythms created on other Electones that have Rhythm Pattern Programming

functions, such as the ELS-01/01C/01X, can be selected and played from the User

buttons in the panel Rhythm section.

To call up the User rhythm, load back the registration containing the User rhythm to

Electone in advance.

For details on loading back the Registration, see “Playing Back a Song” on page 132.

This procedure assigns the User rhythms to the User numbers 1 – 48.

Press one of the User buttons at the right of the Rhythm buttons.

Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 11 (User Page).

Select the User rhythm number by turning the DATA CONTROL

dial.

<USER> [FILE]⁄⁄

¿01:User 1

<USER> [FILE]⁄⁄

¿04:User 4

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Selecting Rhythm from an External Media

You can load rhythms from a USB storage device, and select them as User Rhythms.

Style File Format ﬁles (extension: STY or ST2) can also be loaded.

Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

Press one of the User buttons at the right of the Rhythm buttons.

Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 11 (User Page).

Select the User number to which you want to load back the

pattern ﬁle.

Press the [B] button corresponding to [FILE] in the display to

turn on the ﬁle loading function.

The File Select display appears.

<USER> [FILE]⁄⁄

¿01:User 1

<USER> [FILE]⁄⁄

¿04:User 4

<FILE SELECT> ⁄⁄

¿Ã001:USB 01 [Õ]

<USER> [FILE]⁄⁄

¿04:User 4

NOTE

File loading cannot be done

while the M.D.R. function is

used or sequence data is

playing back.

The rhythm stops

automatically if the File

Select display is called up

while the rhythm is being

played.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Select the pattern ﬁle you want to load to the Electone.

File selection is done in the same way as song selection on page 111.

Press the [D] button corresponding to the [EXE] in the display to

load the ﬁle back to the Electone.

This step assigns the pattern ﬁle to the User number selected in the step 4.

For details on playing back the User rhythm, see “To call up a

User rhythm” on page 64.

<FILE SELECT> [˜]⁄⁄

¿ 001:SoftRock [EXE]

NOTE

To play back the User

rhythm, ﬁrst quit the File

Select display.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Rhythm List

This list shows all available rhythms on the Electone. Numbers written at the left side of each column in this list

indicate the numbered buttons displayed in the Rhythm Menu.

The letters A, B and D printed at the right side of each column in this list indicate the corresponding DATA

CONTROL button’s name. Pressing that button selects the corresponding rhythm.

MARCH

01 Marching Band 1 A

02 Marching Band 2

03 Marching Band 3

04 6/8 March B

05 6/8 Kids

06 6/8 Organ March

07 Broadway

08 SF March

09 Wild West

10 Baroque

11 Metronome 2/4 D

WALTZ

01 Gentle Waltz

02 Guitar Serenade

03 Snow Waltz

04 Classic Waltz A

05 Mariachi

06 Musette

07 Jazz Waltz 1 B

08 Jazz Waltz 2

09 Metronome 3/4 D

SWING&JAZZ

01 Big Band 1 A

02 Big Band 2

03 Big Band Bop

04 Orch. Big Band

05 Orchestra Swing

06 Jungle Drum

07 Medium Jazz B

08 Afro Cuban

09 Five-Four

10 Jazz Ballad

11 Moonlight

12 Winter Song

13 Dixieland

14 Dixieland Jazz

15 Charleston D

POPS

01 8Beat Light 1 A

02 8Beat Light 2

03 Folk Rock

04 Asian Pops

05 Unplugged

06 Bubblegum Pop

07 Guitar Pop

08 British 16Beat B

09 Fusion Shufﬂe

10 Jazz Pop

11 Pop Shufﬂe

12 British Pop

13 Metronome 4/4 D

R&B

01 Motor City

02 Soul A

03 Frankly Soul

04 Jazz Funk

05 Detroit Pop

06 Modern R&B B

07 New Gospel

08 Gospel Shufﬂe

09 Gospel Sisters

10 6/8 Soul

11 Blues Shufﬂe D

LATIN

01 Big Band Samba A

02 Light Samba

03 Bossa Nova

04 Pop Bossa B

05 Mambo 1

06 Mambo 2

07 Montuno

08 Calypso

09 Cha Cha Cha

10 Big Band Cha Cha

11 Pop Cha Cha

12 Rumba

13 Beguine

14 Tango 1 D

15 Tango 2

WORLD MUSIC

01 Bolero

02 Flamenco

03 Pop Flamenco

04 Pasodoble

05 Polka 1 A

06 Polka 2

07 Banda Polka

08 Irish Dance B

09 Tarantella

10 Enka

11 Sheriff Reggae

12 Bluegrass

13 Hoedown

14 Hawaiian D

15 Mexican Dance

BALLAD

01 Power Ballad

02 Dramatic Ballad

03 Movie Ballad

04 Carpenters Pop

05 Love Song

06 16Beat Ballad 1 A

07 16Beat Ballad 2

08 Easy Ballad

09 Guitar Ballad

10 Organ Ballad

11 Chart Ballad

12 Analog Ballad

13 8Beat Modern B

14 Chillout

15 Slow&Easy

16 6/8 Slow Rock D

ROCK

01 Power Rock A

02 Southern Rock

03 60's Rock

04 Hard Rock B

05 Rock Shufﬂe D

06 Tears Rock 1

07 Tears Rock 2

08 British Rock

09 New Country

10 Rock&Roll

11 Jive

DANCE

01 Ibiza A

02 Euro Trance

03 Techno Party

04 UK Pop

05 Swing House

06 US Hip Hop B

07 Ground Beat

08 Hip Hop Pop

09 Club Latin

10 Latin Disco D

11 Garage

12 6/8 Trance

13 80's Dance

14 Pop Beat

15 Disco Philly

16 70's Disco

17 Disco Chocolate

Certain rhythms that have been created for use with

slow, soft songs or for songs that do not use a bass part at

the beginning, may not have drum sections. To use these

rhythms, refer to the following information.

The following rhythms/sections do not contain a drum

part. To play back these rhythms/sections, make sure to

turn the accompaniment parts on.

Some sections of the following three rhythms do not

contain an Auto Bass part. This means that even though

the Auto Bass Chord is turned on, the bass part will not

sound.

• WALTZ: Guitar Serenade

• WORLD MUSIC: Pop Flamenco

• ROCK: New Country

• Metronome 2/4

• Metronome 3/4

• Metronome 4/4

Category Rhythm Sections

MARCH

6/8 Organ March Main A, Main B

Baroque All sections except Intro 1

WALTZ Guitar Serenade All sections except Intro 1

WORLD MUSIC

Banda Polka Main A, Fill In A

Mexican Dance Main A, Fill In A

BALLAD Dramatic Ballad Main A

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

The Accompaniment function provides arpeggiated chords and other instrumental

embellishments when rhythms are used. This control is selected from Page 3 and Page 4

of the Rhythm Condition display.

Select the desired rhythm and press the same button on the

panel again.

The Rhythm Condition display appears.

Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 3 or Page 4.

Each rhythm consists of seven parts, and you can visually conﬁrm the On/Off

status for all parts in Page 3 and Page 4 of the Rhythm Condition display. These

parts, with the exception of the Main Drum and Add Drum, are

Accompaniment parts.

The Accompaniment consists of ﬁve parts, Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase 1,

and Phrase 2, and each of them can be set to on or off by pressing corresponding

button. If you turn all the parts off, the Accompaniment does not sound.

Accompaniment

<PERCUSSION>”AUTO.F⁄

VOL.¿12 REV.÷ 8

<PERCUSSION>”AUTO.F⁄

VOL.¿12 REV.÷ 8

”MAIN DR. ”ADD DR.‹

’CHORD1 ’CHORD2

’PAD ›

’PHRASE1 ’PHRASE2

[Page 3] Rhythm Condition Display

[Page 4] Rhythm Condition Display

Accompaniment

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Turn the desired parts on.

Successive presses of the [A] – [D] buttons corresponding to the desired

accompaniment parts alternates between On and Off.

1 Chord 1

2 Chord 2

These are the rhythmic chord backing parts.

To set the On/Off status for Chord 1, use the [C] button in Page 3 of the

Rhythm Condition display; for Chord 2, use the [D] button.

3 Pad

This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds, such as

strings and organ.

To set the On/Off status for Pad, use the [A] button in Page 4 of the Rhythm

Condition display.

4 Phrase 1

5 Phrase 2

These parts are used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song,

such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios.

To set the On/Off status for Phrase 1, use the [C] button in Page 4 of the

Rhythm Condition display; for Phrase 2, use the [D] button.

Not all parts contain accompaniment data. Some parts may be empty depending

on the selected rhythm and rhythm section.

Main Drum and Add Drum contains the drum and percussion rhythm patterns.

When you turn both Main Drum and Add Drum off, the drum and percussion do

not sound.

Generally, Main Drum contains the main part of the rhythm and Add Drum has

additional percussion sounds, such as tambourine.

”MAIN DR. ”ADD DR.‹

’CHORD1 ’CHORD2

’PAD ›

’PHRASE1 ”PHRASE2

[Page 3] Rhythm Condition Display

[Page 4] Rhythm Condition Display

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Press the [START] button to start the rhythm, and then play the

Lower Keyboard.

To adjust the volume and amount of reverb applied to the

Accompaniment:

Make settings in Page 2 of the Rhythm Condition display.

Select the desired rhythm and then press the same rhythm

button on the panel again.

The Rhythm Condition display appears.

Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 2.

Determine the reverb and volume settings.

1 Volume

Determines the accompaniment volume.

Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to change the setting.

Range: 0 – 24

2 Reverb

Determines the amount of reverb applied to accompaniment. When the Reverb

Depth (for entire instrument) is set to the minimum, the setting here will have

no effect.

Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to change the setting.

Range: 0 – 24

Reference Page

Rhythm Condition display

(page 62)

<PERCUSSION>”AUTO.F⁄

VOL.¿12 REV.÷ 8

<ACCOMPANIMENT> ¤

VOL.¿16 REV.÷ 8

[Page 2] Rhythm Condition Display

Reference Page

Reverb Depth (page 48)

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

The Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) function works with the Rhythm section of the

Electone to automatically produce bass accompaniment as you play. It adds an entirely

new dimension to your performance by effectively putting a full backing band at your

disposal. There are three modes used for producing Automatic Accompaniment

patterns. You can select the desired mode in Page 1 of the A.B.C. display.

To set the A.B.C. function:

Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button.

The A.B.C. display appears.

Select the desired mode by turning the DATA CONTROL dial.

A.B.C. Mode

You can select modes in sequence: Off → Single Finger → Fingered Chord → Custom

A.B.C. by turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise. Turning the DATA

CONTROL dial counter-clockwise selects in the reverse order.

When you start the rhythm with the [SYNCHRO START] button, set the Lower/

Pedal Memory to on. When Memory is off, releasing your ﬁngers from Lower keyboard

stops the rhythm. For details, see “Memory” on page 73.

1 Off

Cancels the Auto Bass Chord function.

Automatic Accompaniment—Auto Bass

Chord (A.B.C.)

[Page 1] A.B.C. Display

<ABC> ’L.MEMORY⁄

¿OFF ’P.MEMORY

OFF

SINGLE

FINGERED

CUSTOM

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

2 Single

You can produce major, minor, 7th, and minor 7th chords by simply using one, or at

most, two or three ﬁngers to play the chords. The Single Finger mode provides the

fastest and easiest means to obtain many different chord/bass combinations. The chord

produced will sound in the same octave regardless of where it is played on the Lower

keyboard.

Key of C

Major chords:

Press the root of the chord (the note that corresponds to the chord’s

name).

Minor chords:

Simultaneously press the root and any one black key to the left of it.

7th chords:

Simultaneously press the root and any one white key to the left of it.

Minor 7th chords:

Simultaneously press the root as well as any black key and any white

key to the left of it.

Playing single ﬁnger chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous

chords to your performance.

3 Fingered Chord

The Fingered Chord mode automatically produces bass accompaniment for chords

played in the Lower keyboard. It allows you to use a wider range of chord types than in

the Single Finger mode. In the Fingered Chord mode, you play full chords while the

Auto Bass Chord function automatically selects the appropriate bass pattern. If you

play only one or two notes in the Lower keyboard, the appropriate chord will sound on

the basis of the previously played chord.

Key of C

Playing ﬁngered chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous

chords to your performance.

4 Custom A.B.C.

The Custom A.B.C. mode is a slight variation on the Fingered Chord mode.

It allows you to determine what bass notes will be played in the accompaniment by

playing notes on the Pedalboard along with the chords you play in the Lower keyboard.

NOTE

When the A.B.C. function

mode is set to Single or

Fingered Chord, the bass

part will not sound even if

you play the pedals of the

Pedalboard.

Cm7

C Cm C7 Cm7 Cmaj7

CaugCm maj7 Cdim Cdim7 Csus4

Cm7-5C7sus4 C6 Cm6 Cadd9

NOTE

When playing certain

chords (aug, dim7, sus4, 6,

and m6), make sure that the

lowest not you play is the

root of the chord.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Memory

The Memory function is a convenient performance tool in the A.B.C. features that

makes playing with the accompaniment even smoother and more ﬂuid. It is available

separately for both the Lower keyboard and Pedalboard. To use it, turn Memory on,

start the rhythm and play chords and bass notes according to the selected A.B.C. mode.

With Memory on, the accompaniment continues to play, even when you release your

ﬁngers (and foot). When you want to change to the next chord, simply play it and

release it, and the auto accompaniment keeps playing with the new chord and bass

note. This means that you can play a chord/bass note brieﬂy, release it, and take your

time before playing the next—you don’t have to hold a chord down to keep the

accompaniment going.

When A.B.C. is turned off (but Memory is on), the auto accompaniment of the

rhythmic chords and bass pattern do not sound, but the sound of the Lower keyboard

and/or Pedalboard continues until you play the next chord/bass note.

1 Lower Memory

When this is set to on, the Lower keyboard Voices and chord accompaniment

keep playing even after you release your ﬁngers from the Lower keyboard, while

the rhythm plays.

Successive pressing of the [B] button alternates between On and Off.

2 Pedal Memory

When this is set to on, the Pedalboard Voices and bass accompaniment keep

playing even after you release your foot from the Pedalboard, while the rhythm

plays.

Successive pressing of the [D] button alternates between On and Off.

(In the Single Finger and Fingered modes:) When this is set to on, the bass

accompaniment of the Pedalboard Voices keeps playing even after you release

your ﬁngers from the Lower keyboard.

<ABC> ’L.MEMORY⁄

¿OFF ’P.MEMORY

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

The Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) feature automatically adds a harmony part to the

melodies you play on the Upper keyboard. The harmony is derived from the chords

you play on the Lower keyboard—or from the chords that are played for you, if you use

Automatic Accompaniment.

To set the M.O.C. function:

Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button.

The A.B.C. display appears.

Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 2.

M.O.C. display appears.

Turn the M.O.C. on.

Successive pressing of the [C] button alternates between On and Off.

On:

Produces harmonies of up to two notes in a range close to the melody played.

Off:

Cancels the Melody On Chord function.

Melody On Chord can be heard only when the Upper Keyboard Voice section’s

volume is set to the appropriate value.

Melody On Chord does not apply to the Lead Voice.

Melody On Chord (M.O.C.)

<ABC> ’L.MEMORY⁄

¿OFF ’P.MEMORY

<MOC> ¤

MODE¿OFF

[Page 2] M.O.C. Display

<MOC> ¤

MODE¿ON

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Rhythm Sequence

Rhythm Sequence lets you create your own rhythm compositions, connecting

together any of the Electone’s existing rhythms as well as original rhythms created

on other Electones that have the Rhythm Sequence Program function (such as

ELS-01).

Although the ELB-01 does not have the full Rhythm Sequence Program function,

you can load four rhythm compositions to Sequence numbers 1 – 4 in the display

for future recall, using the steps below.

When the rhythm sequence contains Registration Sequence data or Next

Registration data, these data also can be loaded and played on the ELB-01.

While a rhythm is playing, sequence data in the Registration data cannot be

loaded.

Insert the media that contains the desired rhythm sequence

data into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

Press the [MDR] button and select the desired song you want

to load back to Electone.

This is necessary because the rhythm sequence data is stored as part of the

registration data in the song.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button in the MDR section to load

back the desired registration.

Now the rhythm sequence data has been loaded to Sequence numbers 1—4.

ÃUSB 01 [˜] ⁄

¿ 001:SONG 1

Reference Pages

Songs (page 116)

Selecting a Song

(page 111)

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Press the [RHYTHM SEQUENCE] button to call up the Rhythm

Sequence display.

Select the sequence by pressing the [A] – [D] buttons

corresponding to the desired sequence number in the display

to be played back.

Successive pressing of the [A] – [D] buttons alternates between On and Off.

Use the [A] button for Sequence 1, [B] for Sequence 2, [C] for Sequence 3

and [D] for Sequence 4.

Press the [START] button in the Rhythm section to play back

the rhythm sequence.

Only those sequences set to On can be played. Two or more rhythm

sequences can be played back in succession in numeric order. After playing

back, the solid square indication turns to a hollow square in the display.

NOTE

Sequence numbers 1 – 4

can be turned on at the

same time.

”SEQ.1 ”SEQ.2

’SEQ.3 ’SEQ.4

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

The Keyboard Percussion function provides many different drum and percussion

sounds, playable from the keyboards and Pedalboard. Keyboard Percussion has two

different modes, Preset and User. Preset Keyboard Percussion lets you play the preset

drum kit sounds from the keyboards (assigned beforehand to the keys), while the User

Keyboard Percussion lets you freely assign the drum sounds to any key or pedal you

wish.

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion

Turn off the Upper, Lower and/or Pedal Voices by setting each

Voice’s volume to MIN.

Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the

Keyboard Percussion [1] or [2] button. Press the [1] button to

play Percussion sounds on the Upper/Lower keyboards, and

press the [2] button for the Pedalboard.

Select the desired percussion kit.

You can select a kit from a total of 15 different kits.

Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to select the kit.

Keyboard Percussion

Reference Page

On/Off status of Voices

(page 28)

<KBP1> ⁄

¿PRE1 KIT÷Wonder

[Page 1] Keyboard Percussion Display

NOTE

Two Keyboard Percussion

sets, [1] and [2], can be

played at the same time by

setting both buttons to on.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Select the desired percussion kit.

You can select a kit from a total of 15 different kits.

Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to select the kit.

Play some notes on the keyboards and/or Pedalboard.

For details of percussion assignments for each kit, see the “Preset Keyboard

Percussion List” on page 80.

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Changing the Keyboard Percussion volume/reverb

You can make settings in Page 2 of the Keyboard Percussion display.

Turn off the Upper, Lower and/or Pedal Voices by setting each

Voice’s volume to MIN.

Press the Keyboard Percussion button.

Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 2 of the Keyboard

Percussion display.

<KBP1> ⁄

¿PRE1 KIT÷Wonder

Reference Page

On/Off status of Voices

(page 28)

<KBP1> ⁄

¿PRE1 KIT÷Wonder

Reference Pages

Using the Preset Keyboard

Percussion (page 77)

Recalling the User

Keyboard Percussion

(page 92)

<KBP1> ¤

VOL.¿16 REV.÷ 8

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

You can adjust the Keyboard Percussion volume/reverb in the display.

1 Volume

Determine the Keyboard Percussion volume.

Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA CONTROL

dial to select the kit.

Range: 0 – 24

2 Reverb

Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Keyboard Percussion.

When the Reverb depth (for entire instrument) is set to the minimum, the setting here

will have no effect.

Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA CONTROL

dial to select the kit.

Range: 0 – 24

[Page 2] Keyboard Percussion Display

<KBP1> ¤

VOL.¿16 REV.÷ 8

Reference Page

Reverb Depth (page 48)

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Preset Keyboard Percussion List

Indicates the drum/percussion sounds and their key assignments.

: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.

Wonderland Kit EL Drum Kit

Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK)

Thunder Laser Beam BD Heavy

Horse Laser Shot SD BrRoll

Bass Drum Water Phone SD Heavy

Footsteps Bubble SD BrShot 1 Claves

Snare Puddle SD Reverb 1

Snare Roll Thunder SD Light

Footsteps Shower Tom 3 Synth Tom 3

Lion Beach SD Rim 1 Concert BD

Footsteps Stream Tom 2 Synth Tom 2

Oxen Footsteps HH Close BD Heavy

Footsteps Door Squeak Tom 1 Synth Tom 1

Door Slam Door Slam HH Open BD Light

Big Clock Bass Drum Bass Drum Ride Cym 1 SD Heavy –

Footsteps Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Synth Tom 3 SD BrRoll –

Starship Tom 2 Tom 2 Crash Cym 1 SD Heavy –

Footsteps Tom 1 Tom 1 Synth Tom 2 SD BrShot 1 –

Train Snare Snare Orch Cym SD Reverb 1 –

Car Crash Snare Roll Snare Roll SD Light –

Footsteps HH Closed HH Closed Synth Tom 1 To m 3 –

Puddle Cymbal Cymbal SD Rim 1 –

HH Open HH Open Tom 2 –

Tambourine Tambourine HH Close –

FingerSnaps FingerSnaps Tom 1 –

Castanet Castanet HH Open –

Tr iangle M Tr iangle M Ride Cym 1 –

Woodblock L Woodblock L Orch SD –

Tr iangle O Tr iangle O Crash Cym 1 –

Woodblock H Woodblock H SD Roll –

Handclap Handclap Orch Cym –

Jingle Bell Jingle Bell OrchCymRoll –

Bell Tree Bell Tree Tr iangle M –

Alarm Bell Alarm Bell Ta mbourine –

Train Train Tr iangle O –

Horn 1 Horn 1 Castanet –

Horn 2 Horn 2 Cowbell 1 –

Siren Siren Timbale 1 L –

Car Engine Car Engine Timbale 1 H –

Car Crash Car Crash WoodBlock L –

Helicopter Helicopter Conga L –

Starship Starship WoodBlock H –

Sheep Sheep Conga H –

Goat Goat Bongo L –

Oxen Oxen Agogo L –

Whinny Whinny Bongo H –

Horse Horse Agogo H –

Lion Lion Cuica L –

Dog Dog Hand Claps –

Cat Cat Cuica H –

Rooster Rooster Shaker –

Owl –

Insects –

Frog –

Tweet 1 –

Tweet 2 –

CuckooClock –

Big Clock –

Bell –

Telephone –

Camera –

Gnaw –

Applause –



ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2

Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK)

Kick – Kick Short –

Side Stick Surdo Mute SideStick L Surdo Mute

Snare Surdo Open Snare Short Surdo Open

Hand Clap Hi Q Hand Clap Hi Q

Snare Tight Whip Slap SnareTightH Whip Slap

Floor Tom L Scratch H Floor Tom L Scratch H

HH Closed Scratch L HH Closed Scratch L

Floor Tom H Finger Snap Floor Tom H Finger Snap

HH Pedal Click Noise HH Pedal Click Noise

Low Tom Metro.Click Low Tom Metro.Click

HH Open Metro.Bell HH Open Metro.Bell

Mid Tom L Seq Click L Mid Tom L Seq Click L

Mid Tom H Seq Click H – Mid Tom H Seq Click H –

Crash Cym 1 Brush Tap – Crash Cym 1 Brush Tap –

High Tom Brush Swirl – High Tom Brush Swirl –

Ride Cym 1 Brush Slap – Ride Cym 1 Brush Slap –

Chinese Cym Br TapSwirl – Chinese Cym Br TapSwirl –

RideCym Cup Snare Roll – RideCym Cup Snare Roll –

Tambourine Castanet – Ta mbourine Castanet –

Splash Cym Snare Soft – Splash Cym SnareSoft 2 –

Sticks – Sticks –

Kick Soft – Kick Soft –

OpenRimShot – OpRimShot H –

Kick Tight – Kick Tight –

Kick Bongo H Kick Short Bongo H

Side Stick Bongo L SideStick L Bongo L

Snare CongaH Mute Snare Short CongaH Mute

Hand Clap CongaH Open Hand Clap CongaH Open

Snare Tight Conga L SnareTightH Conga L

Floor Tom L Timbale H Floor Tom L Timbale H

HH Closed Timbale L HH Closed Timbale L

Floor Tom H Agogo H Floor Tom H Agogo H

HH Pedal Agogo L HH Pedal Agogo L

Low Tom Cabasa Low Tom Cabasa

HH Open Maracas HH Open Maracas

Mid Tom L SambaWhis.H Mid Tom L SambaWhis.H

Mid Tom H SambaWhis.L Mid Tom H SambaWhis.L

Crash Cym 1 Guiro Short Crash Cym 1 Guiro Short

High Tom Guiro Long High Tom Guiro Long

Ride Cym 1 Claves Ride Cym 1 Claves

Chinese Cym WoodBlock H Chinese Cym WoodBlock H

RideCym Cup WoodBlock L RideCym Cup WoodBlock L

Tambourine Cuica Mute Ta mbourine Cuica Mute

Splash Cym Cuica Open Splash Cym Cuica Open

Cowbell Tr iangle M Cowbell Triangle M

Crash Cym 2 Tr iangle O Crash Cym 2 Tr iangle O

Vibraslap Shaker Vibraslap Shaker

Ride Cym 2 JingleBells Ride Cym 2 JingleBells

– Bell Tree – Bell Tree

– –



ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Hit Kit Room Kit

Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK)

KickTight H – Kick –

StickAmbien Surdo Mute Side Stick Surdo Mute

SnareAmbien Surdo Open SnareSnappy Surdo Open

Hand Clap Hi Q Hand Clap Hi Q

SnareTight2 Whip Slap SnrTightSnp Whip Slap

HybridTom 1 Scratch H To m Room 1 Scratch H

HH Closed 2 Scratch L HH Closed Scratch L

HybridTom 2 Finger Snap Tom Room 2 Finger Snap

HH Pedal 2 Click Noise HH Pedal Click Noise

HybridTom 3 Metro.Click To m Room 3 Metro.Click

HH Open 2 Metro.Bell HH Open Metro.Bell

HybridTom 4 Seq Click L To m Room 4 Seq Click L

HybridTom 5 Seq Click H – To m Room 5 Seq Click H –

Crash Cym 1 Brush Tap – Crash Cym 1 Brush Tap –

HybridTom 6 Brush Swirl – Tom Room 6 Brush Swirl –

Ride Cym 1 Brush Slap – Ride Cym 1 Brush Slap –

Chinese Cym Br TapSwirl – Chinese Cym Br TapSwirl –

RideCym Cup Snare Roll – RideCym Cup Snare Roll –

TambourineL Castanet – Tambourine Castanet –

Splash Cym Snr Electro – Splash Cym Snare Soft –

Sticks – Sticks –

KickTight L – Kick Soft –

Snare Pitch – OpenRimShot –

Kick Wet – Kick Tight –

KickTight H Bongo H Kick Bongo H

StickAmbien Bongo L Side Stick Bongo L

SnareAmbien CongaH Mute SnareSnappy CongaH Mute

Hand Clap CongaH Open Hand Clap CongaH Open

SnareTight2 Conga L SnrTightSnp Conga L

HybridTom 1 Timbale H To m Room 1 Timbale H

HH Closed 2 Timbale L HH Closed Timbale L

HybridTom 2 Agogo H To m Room 2 Agogo H

HH Pedal 2 Agogo L HH Pedal Agogo L

HybridTom 3 Cabasa To m Room 3 Cabasa

HH Open 2 Maracas HH Open Maracas

HybridTom 4 SambaWhis.H To m Room 4 SambaWhis.H

HybridTom 5 SambaWhis.L To m Room 5 SambaWhis.L

Crash Cym 1 Guiro Short Crash Cym 1 Guiro Short

HybridTom 6 Guiro Long To m Room 6 Guiro Long

Ride Cym 1 Claves Ride Cym 1 Claves

Chinese Cym WoodBlock H Chinese Cym WoodBlock H

RideCym Cup WoodBlock L RideCym Cup WoodBlock L

TambourineL Cuica Mute Ta mbourine Cuica Mute

Splash Cym Cuica Open Splash Cym Cuica Open

Cowbell Tr iangle M Cowbell Triangle M

Crash Cym 2 Tr iangle O Crash Cym 2 Tr iangle O

Vibraslap Shaker Vibraslap Shaker

Ride Cym 2 JingleBells Ride Cym 2 JingleBells

– Bell Tree – Bell Tree

– –



ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Rock Kit Electro Kit

Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK)

Kick Gate – KickGateHvy –

Side Stick Surdo Mute Side Stick Surdo Mute

Snare Rock Surdo Open SnareNoisy2 Surdo Open

Hand Clap Hi Q Hand Clap Hi Q

SnRockTight Whip Slap SnareNoisy3 Whip Slap

Tom Rock 1 Scratch H To mElectro1 Scratch H

HH Closed Scratch L HH Closed Scratch L

Tom Rock 2 Finger Snap TomElectro2 Finger Snap

HH Pedal Click Noise HH Pedal Click Noise

Tom Rock 3 Metro.Click To mElectro3 Metro.Click

HH Open Metro.Bell HH Open Metro.Bell

Tom Rock 4 Seq Click L To mElectro4 Seq Click L

Tom Rock 5 Seq Click H – To mElectro5 Seq Click H –

Crash Cym 1 Brush Tap – Crash Cym 1 Brush Tap –

Tom Rock 6 Brush Swirl – TomElectro6 Brush Swirl –

Ride Cym 1 Brush Slap – Ride Cym 1 Brush Slap –

Chinese Cym Br TapSwirl – Chinese Cym Reverse Cym –

RideCym Cup Snare Roll – RideCym Cup Snare Roll –

Tambourine Castanet – Ta mbourine Hi Q 2 –

Splash Cym Snare Noisy – Splash Cym SnrSnapElec –

Sticks – Sticks –

Kick Soft – Kick 3 –

OpenRimShot – OpenRimShot –

Kick 2 – Kick Gate –

Kick Gate Bongo H KickGateHvy Bongo H

Side Stick Bongo L Side Stick Bongo L

Snare Rock CongaH Mute SnareNoisy2 CongaH Mute

Hand Clap CongaH Open Hand Clap CongaH Open

SnRockTight Conga L SnareNoisy3 Conga L

Tom Rock 1 Timbale H To mElectro1 Timbale H

HH Closed Timbale L HH Closed Timbale L

Tom Rock 2 Agogo H TomElectro2 Agogo H

HH Pedal Agogo L HH Pedal Agogo L

Tom Rock 3 Cabasa To mElectro3 Cabasa

HH Open Maracas HH Open Maracas

Tom Rock 4 SambaWhis.H To mElectro4 SambaWhis.H

Tom Rock 5 SambaWhis.L TomElectro5 SambaWhis.L

Crash Cym 1 Guiro Short Crash Cym 1 Guiro Short

Tom Rock 6 Guiro Long To mElectro6 Guiro Long

Ride Cym 1 Claves Ride Cym 1 Claves

Chinese Cym WoodBlock H Chinese Cym WoodBlock H

RideCym Cup WoodBlock L RideCym Cup WoodBlock L

Tambourine Cuica Mute Ta mbourine Scratch H 2

Splash Cym Cuica Open Splash Cym Scratch L 2

Cowbell Tr iangle M Cowbell Triangle M

Crash Cym 2 Tr iangle O Crash Cym 2 Tr iangle O

Vibraslap Shaker Vibraslap Shaker

Ride Cym 2 JingleBells Ride Cym 2 JingleBells

– Bell Tree – Bell Tree

– –



ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Analog Kit Jazz Kit

Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK)

Kick Analog – Kick Jazz –

SideStickAn Surdo Mute SideStick L Surdo Mute

SnareAnalog Surdo Open SnareJazz L Surdo Open

Hand Clap Hi Q Hand Clap Hi Q

SnareAnlg 2 Whip Slap SnareJazz M Whip Slap

TomAnalog 1 Scratch H Floor Tom L Scratch H

Hat CloseAn Scratch L HH Closed Scratch L

TomAnalog 2 Finger Snap Floor Tom H Finger Snap

HatCloseAn2 Click Noise HH Pedal Click Noise

TomAnalog 3 Metro.Click Low Tom Metro.Click

Hat Open An Metro.Bell HH Open Metro.Bell

TomAnalog 4 Seq Click L Mid Tom L Seq Click L

TomAnalog 5 Seq Click H – Mid Tom H Seq Click H –

CrashAnalog Brush Tap – Crash Cym 1 Brush Tap –

TomAnalog 6 Brush Swirl – High Tom Brush Swirl –

Ride Cym 1 Brush Slap – Ride Cym 1 Brush Slap –

Chinese Cym Reverse Cym – Chinese Cym Br TapSwirl –

RideCym Cup Snare Roll – RideCym Cup Snare Roll –

Tambourine Hi Q 2 – Ta mbourine Castanet –

Splash Cym SnareNoisy4 – Splash Cym SnareJazz H –

Sticks – Sticks –

Kick 3 – Kick Soft –

OpenRimShot – OpenRimShot –

KickAnlgSht – Kick Tight –

Kick Analog Bongo H Kick Jazz Bongo H

SideStickAn Bongo L SideStick L Bongo L

SnareAnalog CongaAnlg H SnareJazz L CongaH Mute

Hand Clap CongaAnlg M Hand Clap CongaH Open

SnareAnlg 2 CongaAnlg L SnareJazz M Conga L

TomAnalog 1 Timbale H Floor Tom L Timbale H

Hat CloseAn Timbale L HH Closed Timbale L

TomAnalog 2 Agogo H Floor Tom H Agogo H

HatCloseAn2 Agogo L HH Pedal Agogo L

TomAnalog 3 Cabasa Low Tom Cabasa

Hat Open An Maracas 2 HH Open Maracas

TomAnalog 4 SambaWhis.H Mid Tom L SambaWhis.H

TomAnalog 5 SambaWhis.L Mid Tom H SambaWhis.L

CrashAnalog Guiro Short Crash Cym 1 Guiro Short

TomAnalog 6 Guiro Long High Tom Guiro Long

Ride Cym 1 Claves 2 Ride Cym 1 Claves

Chinese Cym WoodBlock H Chinese Cym WoodBlock H

RideCym Cup WoodBlock L RideCym Cup WoodBlock L

Tambourine Scratch H 2 Tambourine Cuica Mute

Splash Cym Scratch L 2 Splash Cym Cuica Open

CowbellAnlg Tr iangle M Cowbell Tr iangle M

Crash Cym 2 Tr iangle O Crash Cym 2 Tr iangle O

Vibraslap Shaker Vibraslap Shaker

Ride Cym 2 JingleBells Ride Cym 2 JingleBells

– Bell Tree – Bell Tree

– –



ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Brush Kit Symphony Kit

Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK)

Kick Jazz – GranCassa M –

SideStick L Surdo Mute Side Stick Surdo Mute

BrushSlap 3 Surdo Open Band Snare Surdo Open

Hand Clap Hi Q Hand Clap Hi Q

Brush Tap 2 Whip Slap BandSnare 2 Whip Slap

Tom Brush 1 Scratch H Floor Tom L Scratch H

HH Closed Scratch L HH Closed Scratch L

Tom Brush 2 Finger Snap Floor Tom H Finger Snap

HH Pedal Click Noise HH Pedal Click Noise

Tom Brush 3 Metro.Click Low Tom Metro.Click

HH Open Metro.Bell HH Open Metro.Bell

Tom Brush 4 Seq Click L Mid Tom L Seq Click L

Tom Brush 5 Seq Click H – Mid Tom H Seq Click H –

Crash Cym 1 Brush Tap – Hand Cymbal Brush Tap –

Tom Brush 6 Brush Swirl – High Tom Brush Swirl –

Ride Cym 1 Brush Slap – Hand Cym S Brush Slap –

Chinese Cym Br TapSwirl – Chinese Cym Br TapSwirl –

RideCym Cup Snare Roll – RideCym Cup Snare Roll –

Tambourine Castanet – Ta mbourine Castanet –

Splash Cym BrushSlap 2 – Splash Cym Snare Soft –

Sticks – Sticks –

Kick Soft – Kick Soft 2 –

OpenRimShot – OpenRimShot –

Kick Tight – Gran Cassa –

Kick Jazz Bongo H GranCassa M Bongo H

SideStick L Bongo L Side Stick Bongo L

BrushSlap 3 CongaH Mute Band Snare CongaH Mute

Hand Clap CongaH Open Hand Clap CongaH Open

Brush Tap 2 Conga L BandSnare 2 Conga L

Tom Brush 1 Timbale H Floor Tom L Timbale H

HH Closed Timbale L HH Closed Timbale L

Tom Brush 2 Agogo H Floor Tom H Agogo H

HH Pedal Agogo L HH Pedal Agogo L

Tom Brush 3 Cabasa Low Tom Cabasa

HH Open Maracas HH Open Maracas

Tom Brush 4 SambaWhis.H Mid Tom L SambaWhis.H

Tom Brush 5 SambaWhis.L Mid Tom H SambaWhis.L

Crash Cym 1 Guiro Short Hand Cymbal Guiro Short

Tom Brush 6 Guiro Long High Tom Guiro Long

Ride Cym 1 Claves Hand Cym S Claves

Chinese Cym WoodBlock H Chinese Cym WoodBlock H

RideCym Cup WoodBlock L RideCym Cup WoodBlock L

Tambourine Cuica Mute Ta mbourine Cuica Mute

Splash Cym Cuica Open Splash Cym Cuica Open

Cowbell Tr iangle M Cowbell Triangle M

Crash Cym 2 Tr iangle O Hand Cym 2 Tr iangle O

Vibraslap Shaker Vibraslap Shaker

Ride Cym 2 JingleBells HandCym 2 S JingleBells

– Bell Tree – Bell Tree

– –



ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

SFX1 SFX2

Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK)

CutingNoiz1 – Phone Call –

CutingNoiz2 – Door Squeak –

– – Door Slam –

String Slap – Scratch Cut –

– – Scratch H 3 –

– – Wind Chime –

– – Phone Ring –

– – – –

– – – – – –

Fl.KeyClick – – CarEngnIgni – –

– – – CarTiresSql – –

– – – Car Passing – –

– – – Car Crash – –

– – – –

CutingNoiz1 – Phone Call Burst

CutingNoiz2 – Door Squeak Coaster

– – Door Slam Submarine

String Slap – Scratch Cut –

– – Scratch H 3 –

– – Wind Chime –

– – Phone Ring –

– – – –

– Shower – Laugh

– Thunder – Scream

– Wind – Punch

– Stream – Heart Beat

– Bubble – Foot Steps

– Feed – –

– – – –

Fl.KeyClick – CarEngnIgni –

– – CarTiresSql –

– – Car Passing –

– – Car Crash –

– – Siren –

– – Tr ain –

– – Jet Plane –

– – Starship –

– Dog – Machine Gun

– Horse – Laser Gun

Bird Tweet Explosion

– Firework

– –

Ghost –

Maou –

– –



ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

ArabicKit

Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK)

Kick Soft –

Side Stick –

Snare Soft –

Arabic Clap –

Snare Drum –

Floor Tom L –

HH Closed –

Floor Tom H –

HH Pedal –

Low Tom –

HH Open –

Mid Tom L –

Mid Tom H Nakarazan D –

Crash Cym 1 Cabasa –

High Tom Nakarazan E –

Ride Cym 1 Hager Dom –

Crash Cym 2 Hager Edge –

Duhulla Dom Bongo H –

Tambourine Bongo L –

Duhulla Tak CongaH Mute –

CongaH Open –

Conga L –

Zagrouda H –

Zagrouda L –

Kick Soft Katem Dom

Side Stick Katem Tak

Snare Soft Katem Sak

Arabic Clap Katem Tak

Snare Drum Doff Tak

Floor Tom L Ta bla Dom

HH Closed Ta bla Tak 1

Floor Tom H Tab la Tik

HH Pedal Ta bla Tak 2

Low Tom Ta bla Sak

HH Open Ta bla Roll

Mid Tom L Ta bla Flam

Mid Tom H Sagat 1

Crash Cym 1 Tabel Dom

High Tom Sagat 3

Ride Cym 1 Tabel Tak

Crash Cym 2 Sagat 2

Duhulla Dom Rik Dom

Tambourine Rik Tak 2

Duhulla Tak Rik Finger1

Cowbell Rik Tak 1

Duhulla Sak Rik Finger2

Claves Rik Tremolo

Doff Dom Rik Sak

– Rik Tik

–



ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion

You can assign any desired drum and percussion sound to any key or pedal, and your

original setups can be saved to eight memory locations: User 1 through User 8. The

User setting saved in the User memory location can be called up by using the Keyboard

Percussion [1] or [2] buttons.

In the instructions below, drum sounds are assigned to User 1 and called up with

Keyboard Percussion [1] button.

Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the

Keyboard Percussion [1] button.

The Keyboard Percussion display appears.

Select “User 1” here.

Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to select “User 1.”

Select the desired percussion kit.

Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to select the kit.

Refer to the “Kit Assign List” on page 93.

<KBP1> ⁄

¿PRE1 KIT÷Wonder

[Page 1] Keyboard Percussion Display

<KBP1> ⁄

¿USER1 KIT÷Wonder

<KBP1> ⁄

¿USER1 KIT÷EL

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 3.

In this Page, you can assign speciﬁc drum sounds to any of the keys.

1 Category

This allows you to select the desired percussion category using the [A] buttons.

Refer to the “Kit Assign List” on page 93.

2 Instrument Names

The individual instruments are shown in the display and can be selected with

the appropriate [A] – [D] buttons.

Refer to the “Kit Assign List” on page 93.

3 Set

Assigns the selected instrument to the desired key. (See the following

explanation in step 7.)

4 Clear

This function is used to erase the User assignment for User 1. Clear works in

two ways: either to erase a single instrument, or to erase all instruments. (See the

following explanation on page 91.)

Select the desired percussion group.

Press the [A] button to make the “¿” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to select the category.

<KBP1> ⁄

¿USER1 KIT÷EL

¿<CYMBAL> [SET]‹

¿01:Crash Cym 1[CLR]

[Page 3] Keyboard Percussion Display

¿<BASS DRUM> [SET]‹

¿01:BD light [CLR]

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Select the desired instruments.

Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to select instrument.

To assign an instrument to a particular key or pedal.

Simultaneously hold down the Data Control button corresponding to [Set] and

press the key (or pedal) to which the instrument is to be assigned. The currently

displayed instrument will be assigned to the key you press down as a part of User

Repeat the operation steps above as necessary to construct your

own User Keyboard Percussion set.

¿<BASS DRUM> [SET]‹

¿02:BD Heavy [CLR]

NOTE

Though eight User

Keyboard Percussion

setups can be created, they

cannot be memorized to

Registration Memory. Only

on/off data and the

Keyboard Percussion Menu

are memorized to

Registration Memory.

¿<BASS DRUM> [SET]‹

¿02:BD Heavy [CLR]

1. While holding down [B] button...

2. Press the key.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

To erase one instrument:

Simultaneously hold down the [D] button corresponding to the [Clear] in the display

and press the key (or pedal) corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase.

(A short ‘beep’ sound indicates that the instrument has been erased.)

To erase all instruments:

You can clear all assignments in Page 3 of the Keyboard Percussion display.

Press, then release the [D] button corresponding to [CLEAR] in

the display.

The following display appears, prompting conﬁrmation of the operation. You

can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] button corresponding

to [Cancel].

Press the [C] button to erase all data. When the [C] button is

pressed, a “Completed” message momentarily appears on the

display.

The Keyboard Percussion setting you have created is automatically saved when

you switch to another display.

Do not turn the power off while the Keyboard Percussion settings are being saved.

¿<BASS DRUM> [SET]‹

¿02:BD Heavy [CLR]

Press the [D] button…

Press the key.

¿<BASS DRUM> [SET]‹

¿02:BD Heavy [CLR]

≤Clear assignments?≤

≤[Clear] [Cancel]≤

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Recalling the User Keyboard Percussion

Press the Keyboard Percussion button.

Select the desired User Keyboard percussion kit.

Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to select the desired User number.

Play some notes on the keyboards and/or Pedalboard.

<KBP1> ⁄

¿USER1 KIT÷Wonder

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Kit Assign List

Wonderland Kit

EL Drum Kit

Standard Kit 1

Standard Kit 2

SFX

Laser Beam

Laser Shot

Water Phone

Bubble

Puddle

NATURE

Thunder

Shower

Beach

Stream

DAILY

Footsteps

Door Squeak

Door Slam

Alarm Bell

CuckooClock

Big Clock

Bell

Telephone

Camera

Gnaw

Applause

PERCUSSION

Bass Drum

Gran Cassa

Tom 1

Tom 2

Snare

Snare Roll

HH Closed

HH Open

Cymbal

Tambourine

FingerSnaps

Castanet

Triangle M

Triangle O

Woodblock L

Woodblock H

Handclap

Jingle Bell

Bell Tree

VEHICLE

Train

Horn 1

Horn 2

Siren

Car Engine

Car Crash

Helicopter

Starship

ANIMAL

Sheep

Goat

Oxen

Whinny

Horse

Lion

Dog

Cat

Rooster

Owl

Insects

Frog

Tweet 1

Tweet 2

CYMBAL

Crash Cym 1

Crash Cym 2

Crash Cym M

Ride Cym 1

Ride Cym 2

RideCym Cup

Orch Cym

OrchCymRoll

Orch Cym M

Cym March

Cym BrShot

Tam-Tam

HIHAT

HH Open

HH Close

HH Pedal 1

HH Pedal 2

Analog HH O

Analog HH C

SNARE DRUM

SD Light

SD Heavy

SD Rim 1

SD Rim 2

SD Accent 1

SD Accent 2

SD Reverb 1

SD Reverb 2

Synth SD

Orch SD

SD Roll

Analog SD

SNARE BRUSH

SD BrShot 1

SD BrShot 2

SD BrRoll

TOM

Tom 1

Tom 2

Tom 3

Tom 4

TomBrShot 1

TomBrShot 2

TomBrShot 3

TomBrShot 4

Synth Tom 1

Synth Tom 2

Synth Tom 3

BASS DRUM

BD Light

BD Heavy

BD Attack

Synth BD

BD March

Concert BD

Analog BD S

Analog BD L

CONGA/BONGO

Conga H

Conga L

Conga Slap

Conga Muff

Conga Slide

Bongo H

Bongo L

Bongo Slap

Bongo Mute

CUICA/SURDO

Cuica H

Cuica M

Cuica L

Tamborim O

Tamborim M

Surdo Open

Surdo Mute

Surdo Rim

Surdo Muff

TIMBALE/COWBELL

Timbale 1 H

Timbale 1 L

Timbale 2 H

Timbale 2 L

Timbale 3 H

Timbale 3 L

Timbale 4 H

Timbale 4 L

Cowbell 1

Cowbell 2

Cowbell 3

Cowbell 4

PERCUSSION 1

Cabasa

Shaker

Maracas H

Maracas L

Guiro Short

Guiro Long

WoodBlock H

WoodBlock M

WoodBlock L

Claves

Castanet

Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

Agogo H

Agogo L

Triangle O

Triangle M

WindbellDwn

Windbell Up

Tambourine

Pandeiro

Bells

Hand Claps

Finger Snap

Scratch

Noise Perc.

PERCUSSION 3

Kotsuzumi 1

Kotsuzumi 2

Kotsuzumi 3

Kotsuzumi 4

Ohtsuzumi 1

Ohtsuzumi 2

Taiko 1

Taiko 2

Ohdaiko 1

Ohdaiko 2

Kakegoe 1

Kakegoe 2

Kakegoe 3

CYMBAL

Crash Cym 1

Crash Cym 2

Splash Cym

Chinese Cym

Ride Cym 1

Ride Cym 2

RideCym Cup

HH Open

HH Closed

HH Pedal

SNARE DRUM

Snare

Snare Tight

Snare Soft

Snare Roll

Side Stick

OpenRimShot

Brush Tap

Brush Slap

Brush Swirl

Br TapSwirl

TOM

Floor Tom L

Floor Tom H

Low Tom

Mid Tom L

Mid Tom H

High Tom

BASS DRUM

Kick

Kick Tight

Kick Soft

PERCUSSION 1

CongaH Open

Conga L

CongaH Mute

Bongo H

Bongo L

Timbale H

Timbale L

Cowbell

Claves

Guiro Long

Guiro Short

Maracas

Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

Surdo Mute

Surdo Open

Cuica Mute

Cuica Open

Cabasa

Shaker

Agogo H

Agogo L

SambaWhis.H

SambaWhis.L

PERCUSSION 3

Tambourine

Castanet

JingleBells

Bell Tree

Triangle O

Triangle M

WoodBlock H

WoodBlock L

Sticks

Whip Slap

Finger Snap

Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

Hi Q

Click Noise

Scratch H

Scratch L

Seq Click L

Seq Click H

Metro.Click

Metro.Bell

CYMBAL

Crash Cym 1

Crash Cym 2

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Hit Kit

Room Kit

Rock Kit

Splash Cym

Chinese Cym

Ride Cym 1

Ride Cym 2

RideCym Cup

HH Open

HH Closed

HH Pedal

SNARE DRUM

Snare Short

SnareTightH

SnareSoft 2

Snare Roll

SideStick L

OpRimShot H

Brush Tap

Brush Slap

Brush Swirl

Br TapSwirl

TOM

Floor Tom L

Floor Tom H

Low Tom

Mid Tom L

Mid Tom H

High Tom

BASS DRUM

Kick Short

Kick Tight

Kick Soft

PERCUSSION 1

CongaH Open

Conga L

CongaH Mute

Bongo H

Bongo L

Timbale H

Timbale L

Cowbell

Claves

Guiro Long

Guiro Short

Maracas

Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

Surdo Mute

Surdo Open

Cuica Mute

Cuica Open

Cabasa

Shaker

Agogo H

Agogo L

SambaWhis.H

SambaWhis.L

PERCUSSION 3

Tambourine

Castanet

JingleBells

Bell Tree

Triangle O

Triangle M

WoodBlock H

WoodBlock L

Sticks

Whip Slap

Finger Snap

Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

Hi Q

Click Noise

Scratch H

Scratch L

Seq Click L

Seq Click H

Metro.Click

Metro.Bell

CYMBAL

Crash Cym 1

Crash Cym 2

Splash Cym

Chinese Cym

Ride Cym 1

Ride Cym 2

RideCym Cup

HH Open 2

HH Closed 2

HH Pedal 2

SNARE DRUM

SnareAmbien

SnareTight2

Snr Electro

Snare Roll

StickAmbien

Snare Pitch

Brush Tap

Brush Slap

Brush Swirl

Br TapSwirl

TOM

HybridTom 1

HybridTom 2

HybridTom 3

HybridTom 4

HybridTom 5

HybridTom 6

BASS DRUM

KickTight H

Kick Wet

KickTight L

PERCUSSION 1

CongaH Open

Conga L

CongaH Mute

Bongo H

Bongo L

Timbale H

Timbale L

Cowbell

Claves

Guiro Long

Guiro Short

Maracas

Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

Surdo Mute

Surdo Open

Cuica Mute

Cuica Open

Cabasa

Shaker

Agogo H

Agogo L

SambaWhis.H

SambaWhis.L

PERCUSSION 3

TambourineL

Castanet

JingleBells

Bell Tree

Triangle O

Triangle M

WoodBlock H

WoodBlock L

Sticks

Whip Slap

Finger Snap

Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

Hi Q

Click Noise

Scratch H

Scratch L

Seq Click L

Seq Click H

Metro.Click

Metro.Bell

CYMBAL

Crash Cym 1

Crash Cym 2

Splash Cym

Chinese Cym

Ride Cym 1

Ride Cym 2

RideCym Cup

HH Open

HH Closed

HH Pedal

SNARE DRUM

SnareSnappy

SnrTightSnp

Snare Soft

Snare Roll

Side Stick

OpenRimShot

Brush Tap

Brush Slap

Brush Swirl

Br TapSwirl

TOM

Tom Room 1

Tom Room 2

Tom Room 3

Tom Room 4

Tom Room 5

Tom Room 6

BASS DRUM

Kick

Kick Tight

Kick Soft

PERCUSSION 1

CongaH Open

Conga L

CongaH Mute

Bongo H

Bongo L

Timbale H

Timbale L

Cowbell

Claves

Guiro Long

Guiro Short

Maracas

Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

Surdo Mute

Surdo Open

Cuica Mute

Cuica Open

Cabasa

Shaker

Agogo H

Agogo L

SambaWhis.H

SambaWhis.L

PERCUSSION 3

Tambourine

Castanet

JingleBells

Bell Tree

Triangle O

Triangle M

WoodBlock H

WoodBlock L

Sticks

Whip Slap

Finger Snap

Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

Hi Q

Click Noise

Scratch H

Scratch L

Seq Click L

Seq Click H

Metro.Click

Metro.Bell

CYMBAL

Crash Cym 1

Crash Cym 2

Splash Cym

Chinese Cym

Ride Cym 1

Ride Cym 2

RideCym Cup

HH Open

HH Closed

HH Pedal

SNARE DRUM

Snare Rock

SnRockTight

Snare Noisy

Snare Roll

Side Stick

OpenRimShot

Brush Tap

Brush Slap

Brush Swirl

Br TapSwirl

TOM

Tom Rock 1

Tom Rock 2

Tom Rock 3

Tom Rock 4

Tom Rock 5

Tom Rock 6

BASS DRUM

Kick Gate

Kick 2

Kick Soft

PERCUSSION 1

CongaH Open

Conga L

CongaH Mute

Bongo H

Bongo L

Timbale H

Timbale L

Cowbell

Claves

Guiro Long

Guiro Short

Maracas

Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

Surdo Mute

Surdo Open

Cuica Mute

Cuica Open

Cabasa

Shaker

Agogo H

Agogo L

SambaWhis.H

SambaWhis.L

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Electro Kit

Analog Kit

Jazz Kit

Brush Kit

PERCUSSION 3

Tambourine

Castanet

JingleBells

Bell Tree

Triangle O

Triangle M

WoodBlock H

WoodBlock L

Sticks

Whip Slap

Finger Snap

Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

Hi Q

Click Noise

Scratch H

Scratch L

Seq Click L

Seq Click H

Metro.Click

Metro.Bell

CYMBAL

Crash Cym 1

Crash Cym 2

Splash Cym

Chinese Cym

Ride Cym 1

Ride Cym 2

RideCym Cup

HH Open

HH Closed

HH Pedal

SNARE DRUM

SnareNoisy2

SnareNoisy3

SnrSnapElec

Snare Roll

Side Stick

OpenRimShot

Brush Tap

Brush Slap

Brush Swirl

Reverse Cym

TOM

TomElectro1

TomElectro2

TomElectro3

TomElectro4

TomElectro5

TomElectro6

BASS DRUM

KickGateHvy

Kick Gate

Kick 3

PERCUSSION1

CongaH Open

Conga L

CongaH Mute

Bongo H

Bongo L

Timbale H

Timbale L

Cowbell

Claves

Guiro Long

Guiro Short

Maracas

Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

Surdo Mute

Surdo Open

Scratch H 2

Scratch L 2

Cabasa

Shaker

Agogo H

Agogo L

SambaWhis.H

SambaWhis.L

PERCUSSION 3

Tambourine

Hi Q 2

JingleBells

Bell Tree

Triangle O

Triangle M

WoodBlock H

WoodBlock L

Sticks

Whip Slap

Finger Snap

Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

Hi Q

Click Noise

Scratch H

Scratch L

Seq Click L

Seq Click H

Metro.Click

Metro.Bell

CYMBAL

CrashAnalog

Crash Cym 2

Splash Cym

Chinese Cym

Ride Cym 1

Ride Cym 2

RideCym Cup

Hat Open An

Hat CloseAn

HatCloseAn2

SNARE DRUM

SnareAnalog

SnareAnlg 2

SnareNoisy4

Snare Roll

SideStickAn

OpenRimShot

Brush Tap

Brush Slap

Brush Swirl

Reverse Cym

TOM

TomAnalog 1

TomAnalog 2

TomAnalog 3

TomAnalog 4

TomAnalog 5

TomAnalog 6

BASS DRUM

Kick Analog

KickAnlgSht

Kick 3

PERCUSSION 1

CongaAnlg M

CongaAnlg L

CongaAnlg H

Bongo H

Bongo L

Timbale H

Timbale L

CowbellAnlg

Claves 2

Guiro Long

Guiro Short

Maracas 2

Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

Surdo Mute

Surdo Open

Scratch H 2

Scratch L 2

Cabasa

Shaker

Agogo H

Agogo L

SambaWhis.H

SambaWhis.L

PERCUSSION 3

Tambourine

Hi Q 2

JingleBells

Bell Tree

Triangle O

Triangle M

WoodBlock H

WoodBlock L

Sticks

Whip Slap

Finger Snap

Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

Hi Q

Click Noise

Scratch H

Scratch L

Seq Click L

Seq Click H

Metro.Click

Metro.Bell

CYMBAL

Crash Cym 1

Crash Cym 2

Splash Cym

Chinese Cym

Ride Cym 1

Ride Cym 2

RideCym Cup

HH Open

HH Closed

HH Pedal

SNARE DRUM

SnareJazz L

SnareJazz M

SnareJazz H

Snare Roll

SideStick L

OpenRimShot

Brush Tap

Brush Slap

Brush Swirl

Br TapSwirl

TOM

Floor Tom L

Floor Tom H

Low Tom

Mid Tom L

Mid Tom H

High Tom

BASS DRUM

Kick Jazz

Kick Tight

Kick Soft

PERCUSSION 1

CongaH Open

Conga L

CongaH Mute

Bongo H

Bongo L

Timbale H

Timbale L

Cowbell

Claves

Guiro Long

Guiro Short

Maracas

Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

Surdo Mute

Surdo Open

Cuica Mute

Cuica Open

Cabasa

Shaker

Agogo H

Agogo L

SambaWhis.H

SambaWhis.L

PERCUSSION 3

Tambourine

Castanet

JingleBells

Bell Tree

Triangle O

Triangle M

WoodBlock H

WoodBlock L

Sticks

Whip Slap

Finger Snap

Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

Hi Q

Click Noise

Scratch H

Scratch L

Seq Click L

Seq Click H

Metro.Click

Metro.Bell

CYMBAL

Crash Cym 1

Crash Cym 2

Splash Cym

Chinese Cym

Ride Cym 1

Ride Cym 2

RideCym Cup

HH Open

HH Closed

HH Pedal

SNARE DRUM

BrushSlap 3

Brush Tap 2

BrushSlap 2

Snare Roll

SideStick L

OpenRimShot

Brush Tap

Brush Slap

Brush Swirl

Br TapSwirl

TOM

Tom Brush 1

Tom Brush 2

Tom Brush 3

Tom Brush 4

Tom Brush 5

Tom Brush 6

BASS DRUM

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Symphony Kit

SFX1

SFX2

Arabic Kit

Kick Jazz

Kick Tight

Kick Soft

PERCUSSION 1

CongaH Open

Conga L

CongaH Mute

Bongo H

Bongo L

Timbale H

Timbale L

Cowbell

Claves

Guiro Long

Guiro Short

Maracas

Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

Surdo Mute

Surdo Open

Cuica Mute

Cuica Open

Cabasa

Shaker

Agogo H

Agogo L

SambaWhis.H

SambaWhis.L

PERCUSSION 3

Tambourine

Castanet

JingleBells

Bell Tree

Triangle O

Triangle M

WoodBlock H

WoodBlock L

Sticks

Whip Slap

Finger Snap

Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

Hi Q

Click Noise

Scratch H

Scratch L

Seq Click L

Seq Click H

Metro.Click

Metro.Bell

CYMBAL

Hand Cymbal

Hand Cym 2

Splash Cym

Chinese Cym

Hand Cym S

HandCym 2 S

RideCym Cup

HH Open

HH Closed

HH Pedal

SNARE DRUM

Band Snare

BandSnare 2

Snare Soft

Snare Roll

Side Stick

OpenRimShot

Brush Tap

Brush Slap

Brush Swirl

Br TapSwirl

TOM

Floor Tom L

Floor Tom H

Low Tom

Mid Tom L

Mid Tom H

High Tom

BASS DRUM

GranCassa M

Gran Cassa

Kick Soft 2

PERCUSSION 1

CongaH Open

Conga L

CongaH Mute

Bongo H

Bongo L

Timbale H

Timbale L

Cowbell

Claves

Guiro Long

Guiro Short

Maracas

Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2

Surdo Mute

Surdo Open

Cuica Mute

Cuica Open

Cabasa

Shaker

Agogo H

Agogo L

SambaWhis.H

SambaWhis.L

PERCUSSION 3

Tambourine

Castanet

JingleBells

Bell Tree

Triangle O

Triangle M

WoodBlock H

WoodBlock L

Sticks

Whip Slap

Finger Snap

Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4

Hi Q

Click Noise

Scratch H

Scratch L

Seq Click L

Seq Click H

Metro.Click

Metro.Bell

SFX

CutingNoiz1

CutingNoiz2

String Slap

Fl.KeyClick

Shower

Thunder

Wind

Stream

Bubble

Feed

Ghost

Maou

Dog

Horse

Bird Tweet

SFX 1

Phone Call

Phone Ring

Wind Chime

Door Squeak

Door Slam

Scratch Cut

Scratch H 3

Laugh

Scream

Punch

Heart Beat

Foot Steps

SFX 2

CarEngnIgni

CarTiresSql

Car Passing

Car Crash

Siren

Train

Jet Plane

Starship

Burst

Coaster

Submarine

Machine Gun

Laser Gun

Explosion

Firework

ARABIC 1

Nakarazan D

Nakarazan E

Hager Dom

Hager Edge

Zagrouda H

Zagrouda L

Arabic Clap

Duhulla Dom

Duhulla Tak

Duhulla Sak

Doff Dom

Doff Tak

ARABIC 2

Katem Dom

Katem Tak

Katem Sak

Tabla Dom

Tabla Tak 1

Tabla Tak 2

Tabla Sak

Tabla Tik

Tabla Roll

Tabla Flam

Tabel Dom

Tabel Tak

ARABIC 3

Sagat 1

Sagat 2

Sagat 3

Rik Dom

Rik Tak 1

Rik Tak 2

Rik Sak

Rik Tik

Rik Finger1

Rik Finger2

Rik Tremolo

CYMBAL/SNARE DRUM

Crash Cym 1

Crash Cym 2

Ride Cym 1

HH Open

HH Closed

HH Pedal

Snare Drum

Snare Soft

Side Stick

TOM/BASS DRUM

Floor Tom L

Floor Tom H

Low Tom

Mid Tom L

Mid Tom H

High Tom

Kick Soft

PERCUSSION

CongaH Open

Conga L

CongaH Mute

Bongo H

Bongo L

Cowbell

Claves

Cabasa

Tambourine

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Registration Memory

Registration Memory is a powerful performance tool that helps you sound like a

professional. It lets you store virtually all the settings you make on the panel and LCD,

conveniently allowing you to instantly change all Voice settings and rhythms while you're

playing—simply by pressing a single Registration Memory button. The buttons are

conveniently located at the top right on the panel for easy access while playing. Just press

the numbered button that corresponds to the Registration you wish to select.

Moreover, you can also recall the settings using the right footswitch. All Registrations in

Registration Memory can also be saved to USB ﬂash memory.

Various types of basic Registrations have been programmed to the numbered Registration

Memory buttons [1] – [8], with additional Registration Memory presets 9 – 16 which can also

be called up easily. You can of course record your own Registration settings to a numbered

button, but keep in mind that the preset Registration for that button will be overwritten and

erased. You can recall the original factory preset settings (and delete your own) by

initializing the Registration Memory.

Basic Registration

Your newly created Registrations you make can be stored to the Registration Memory

panel buttons. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to USB ﬂash

memory.

Create your original Registration by making all desired panel

settings.

No. Image No. Image

1 Strings ensemble 9 Big band jazz

2 Brass ensemble 10 Rock band

3Woodwind ensemble 11 Fun time

4Orchestra 12 Synth pop

5 Flute combo 13 Pop organ

6 Piano ballad 14 Cathedral

7 Jazz combo 15 Synth bell

8 Pop ballad 16 Music box

Storing Registrations

Reference Pages

Selecting a Voice (page 25)

Selecting a Rhythm (page

56)

Voice Controls and Effects

(page 40)

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Registration Memory

While holding down the [M.] (Memory) button in the Registration

Memory section, press the numbered button to which you wish

to save your Registration.

When the Registration is stored, the LED above the numbered the numbered

button ﬂashes momentarily.

Although the ELB-01 has just eight Registration Memory buttons, up to sixteen

Registrations can be stored. To store Registrations 9 – 16, simultaneously hold

down both the [VOICE DISPLAY] button in the Display Select section and the

[M.] (Memory) button in the Registration Memory, and press the desired

numbered button (in this case, indicated as [1] – [8]) to which you wish to save

your Registration. When the Registration is stored, the numbered button’s LED

ﬂashes momentarily

Do not turn the power off while the Registration is being saved.

Functions and settings that cannot be memorized:

• Pitch (page 150)

• MIDI Control settings (page 161)

• LCD related settings (page 19)

The following settings are common to all Registration Memory numbers 1 – 16 and

cannot be stored individually for each number.

• Transpose (page 150)

• Registration Shift (page 102)

• Auto Fill setting (page 60)

• Reverb type (page 48)

• User rhythms (page 64)

• User Keyboard Percussion (page 92)

• Rhythm Sequences (page 75)

• Disable setting (page 99)

1. While holding down [M.] button...

2. Press desired numbered button.

Reference Page

Saving Registrations as

Registration Data (File);

(page 124)

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

Registration Memory

Simply press the numbered button ([1] – [8]) that corresponds to the Registration you

wish to select. (The selected button’s LED lights.)

To call up one of the Registrations 9 – 16, simultaneously hold down the [VOICE

DISPLAY] button in the Display Select section and press the appropriate numbered

button. (For Registrations 9 – 16, the LEDs do not light.)

You can also recall Registrations in a pre-programmed order by using the right

footswitch. This function is called “Registration Shift” (page 102).

Selecting Registrations

Using the [D.] (Disable) button:

Keep in mind that rhythm and automatic accompaniment patterns also change

when you select different Registration Memory buttons. There may be times during

your performance when you want to keep the same rhythm going, even when you

make Registration Memory changes. Pressing the [D.] (Disable) button allows you

to keep the same rhythm, accompaniment patterns, tempo, and so on throughout

all your Registration changes, or make your own rhythm selections if you want to.

When the [D.] button is on, the following functions will not change, even when

you change the Registration Memory number.

• Rhythm menu, Rhythm section, Rhythm tempo, Rhythm volume, Rhythm

reverb

•Accompaniment volume, Accompaniment reverb, On/Off status of

Accompaniment parts

• A.B.C. mode, A.B.C. memory

• M.O.C. mode

91011 12 13 14 15 16

While holding down

the [VOICE DISPLAY] button,

press the desired numbered button.

Corresponding Registration Memory Number

Example: Calling up Registration Number 11

[D.] (Disable) button

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

100

Registration Memory

If you want to restore the original factory-programmed Registration Memory presets,

you can initialize the Electone settings. Keep in mind that this deletes any of your

custom Registration Memory and LCD Display settings. Always save your important

data to external media, such as USB ﬂash memory.

When turning the power on after initializing the Electone, the preset settings will be

recalled and your own Registration setting(s) will be erased and replaced with the

factory defaults.

For details on how to initialize the Electone, refer to “Factory Set (Initializing the

Electone)” on page 20.

You can save your Registration Memory settings to an external storage device, such as

USB ﬂash memory, with sixteen Registrations stored to a single ﬁle.

For details about using other external storage devices, see Chapter 6, Music Data

Recorder (M.D.R.). The instructions below explain how to save the Registration data

to a USB ﬂash memory.

Insert the USB ﬂash memory into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

Press the [MDR] button.

The MDR display appears.

Initializing Registration Memory

Saving the Registration data to USB ﬂash

memory

Reference Page

Songs (page 116)

Reference Page

USB TO DEVICE terminal

(page 151)

<SONG SELECT> ⁄

¿Ã001:USB 01 [Õ]

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

101

Registration Memory

Select the song to which you want to save the Registration data

(page 111).

Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 9.

The Registration Save Page is displayed.

Press the [B] button corresponding to the [EXE] (Execute) in the

display.

A message appears, indicating the Registration data is currently being saved.

When the operation is completed, the message closes. Your Registration

Memory settings are saved to the external storage device, with sixteen

Registrations stored to a single ﬁle.

ÃUSB 01 [˜] ⁄

¿ ___:new song

ÃUSB 01 [˜] ⁄

¿ ___:new song

<REG.SAVE> [EXE] ·

___:new song ¸:__

<REG.SAVE> [EXE] ·

___:new song ¸:__

<REG.SAVE> [EXE] ·

001:SONG 1 ¸÷01

Reference Pages

Recalling Recorded

Registrations (page 131)

Changing the Song/Folder

Name (page 122)

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

102

Registration Memory

The Registration Shift function conveniently allows you to change Registrations

without taking your hands from the keyboards.

By using the Right Footswitch on the expression pedal, you can “jump” to a speciﬁed

Registration or step through the panel Registrations in sequence, either in numeric

order or in any order you specify.

You can set the Registration Shift order in the Registration Shift display.

Press the [FOOTSWITCH] button.

If the Footswitch Page is displayed, press the [A] button to switch to the

Registration Shift Page.

Registration Shift has three modes: Shift, Jump and User. These

are set in the Regist Shift display by turning the DATA CONTROL

dial.

Select each in order (Shift → Jump → User) by turning the DATA CONTROL

dial clockwise. Turning the DATA CONTROL dial counter-clockwise selects in

the reverse order. The [C] button can also be used to select the modes.

Registration Shift

Right Footswitch

Expression Pedal

NOTE

Pressing the

[FOOTSWITCH] button calls

up one of two different

displays, the Registration

Shift Display or Footswitch

Display. These displays can

be switched by pressing the

A button. When you press

the [FOOTSWITCH] button,

the previously selected

display will appear.

¸<REG.SHIFT>

MODE¿OFF

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

103

Registration Memory

1 Off

Turns off the Registration Shift assignment. When Off is selected, Registrations

cannot be changed by using the Right Footswitch.

2 Shift

In the Shift mode, each press of the Right Footswitch selects the Registration

Memory presets in their numerical order. After the last Registration is reached,

the function ‘wraps around’ to select the ﬁrst preset again. The LEDs of

numbered buttons ([1] – [8]) light up as they are selected. Keep in mind that the

numbered buttons’ LEDs do not light up if Registrations 9 – 16 are selected.

3 Jump

Pressing the Right Footswitch jumps to select the designated panel Registration.

Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator ﬂash, then select the Jump

“destination” with the DATA CONTROL dial or [D] button.

4 User

In the User mode, each press of the Right Footswitch selects Registrations

according to the order you’ve speciﬁed. You can also specify an end point for the

Registration Shift function. User Shift can be set in Page 2, and Shift End can be

set in Page 1 of the Registration Shift display.

¸<REG.SHIFT>

MODE¿OFF

OFF

SHIFT

JUMP

USER

¸<REG.SHIFT>

MODE¿OFF

¸<REG.SHIFT>

MODE¿SHIFT 1˘ 2

Next Registration

¸<REG.SHIFT>

MODE¿JUMP REGIST÷ 1

Registration number of the destination

¸<REG.SHIFT> ⁄

MODE¿USER END÷STOP

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

104

Registration Memory

To set the User Registration order:

Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 2.

Press the desired numbered button in the Registration Memory

section.

Press the [B] button corresponding to the [INS] (Insert) in the

display.

The Registration number appears in the display, indicating that

the Registration is entered.

Repeat steps 2 through 4 above to set additional numbers in the

Registration order.

Up to 80 steps (Registrations) can be memorized.

¸<REG.SHIFT> ⁄

MODE¿USER END÷STOP

¸<REG.SHIFT> [INS]¤

T: ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ [DEL]

Enter the Registration Number

NOTE

When you want to set

Registration Memory 9 – 16,

press the desired numbered

button while holding down

the [VOICE DISPLAY]

button. (The Voice display

appears.) Press the

[FOOTSWITCH] button to

call up Page 2 of the

Registration Shift display.

¸<REG.SHIFT> [INS]¤

T: ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ [DEL]

Flashing cursor indicates the data entry position.

¸<REG.SHIFT> [INS]¤

T: 3 ~ ~ ~ ~ [DEL]

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

105

Registration Memory

Move the cursor to the desired point with the [C] button or DATA CONTROL

dial, then insert or delete the desired number by using the [B] and [D] buttons.

Data Entry Position: Flashing cursor indicates the current data entry

position.

If you want to move the cursor to the left, press the [C] button or turn the

DATA CONTROL dial counter-clockwise. If you want to move the cursor to

the right, turn the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise.

Insert: Use the [B] button.

This is for initially entering a Registration number to a blank space in the

Registration row, or for replacing a number at the current cursor position.

To enter a number, press the desired Registration Memory button, then press the

[B] button corresponding to [INS] (Insert) in the display. The entered

Registration number will appear in the Registration row. After using [INS] to

enter Registrations, the cursor can be moved among the numbers.

Insert can also be used to insert a Registration number just before the current

cursor position. To perform the operation, ﬁrst move the data entry position to a

numbered position. Then, press the desired Registration Memory button, and

press the [B] button corresponding to [INS] (Insert) in the display. The new

Registration number is inserted at the cursor position and all other numbers to

the right of the cursor are moved to accommodate the new numbers.

Registration numbers cannot be entered beyond the Registration Shift function’s

capacity of 80. If the insert operation exceeds this capacity, a “Cannot insert

additional data” message appears and the operation cannot be executed.

Delete: Use the [D] button.

To delete the unnecessary number, move the cursor to a numbered position and

press the [D] button corresponding to [DEL] (Delete) in the display.

¸<REG.SHIFT> [INS]¤

T: 3 2 5 ~ ~ [DEL]

Move the cursor position

Insert the number

Delete the number

NOTE

Registration data cannot be

added or deleted the when

the cursor position is at the

“T” (found at the lower left of

the screen) after inputting

the number. Add or delete

the data after moving the

cursor by rotating the DATA

CONTROL dial clockwise.

NOTE

Up to six Registration

numbers can be displayed

at once in the LCD; however,

screen scrolling is enabled

when ﬁve or more

Registration numbers are

input. Turn the DATA

CONTROL dial counter-

clockwise to scroll back

toward the beginning.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

106

Registration Memory

Shift End:

Determines the end point for the Registration Shift function.

Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 1.

Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA CONTROL

dial to change the setting.

Stop: Selects the last Registration and quits the operation.

Top: After the last preset is reached, the ﬁrst preset is called up again, starting the

sequence over again from the beginning.

Next Regist: After the last preset is reached, the next Registration data in the Song is

called up. This function is available only when two or more Registration data sets are

saved in one Song. This function is handy when you need to play a song with more

than sixteen Registrations.

The Shift End mark (¯: Top, N: Next) will automatically be put at the end of the

Registrations you entered when Top or Next Regist is selected as the Shift End.

¸<REG.SHIFT>

MODE¿USER END÷STOP

STOP

TOP

Reference Page

Saving Two or More

Registration Banks to One

Song (page 126)

NOTE

In order to playback a song

on the MDR used by the

next Registration, press the

[PLAY/PAUSE] button (not

the [CUSTOM PLAY]

button), then start the MDR.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

107

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

The Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) is a sophisticated recording system built into the Electone

that lets you record your performances and Registration settings to a USB ﬂash memory

device or other external media. Moreover, the M.D.R. allows you to perform various other

operations to your song data (such as copy, delete and convert).

Before purchasing any USB storage device, you should check with your Yamaha dealer or an

authorized Yamaha distributor for advice on compatibility.

Song data

USB ﬂash memory

Copy

Convert

Delete

By installing the optional UD-FD01 ﬂoppy disk drive to the ELB-01, you can play songs stored to ﬂoppy

disks. For information on how to install the UD-FD01, see page 167. Keep in mind, however, that you cannot

save special Protected Original Songs or the Protected Edit Songs to ﬂoppy disks. For details about these

protected songs, see page 139.

Before using a USB device, read through the important section “Precautions when using the USB TO

DEVICE terminals” on page 155. About USB devices compatible with the Electone, see “Compatible USB

devices” on page 155.

To protect your data (write-protect switch):

Some USB ﬂash memory devices are equipped with a write-protect switch. To prevent accidental erasure of

important data saved in USB ﬂash memory, slide the write-protect switch on the device to the “protect”

position. When saving data, make sure that the write-protect switch is set to the “overwrite” position.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

108

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Press the [MDR] button in the panel to call up the M.D.R. display. All operations

related to the M.D.R., such as recording and playing your performances, can be done

in the M.D.R. display.

The M.D.R. display consists of thirteen display Pages. Each Page is devoted to a

speciﬁc function, and you can call up the desired function or operation by selecting the

appropriate Page. (For example, select Page 4 to change the name of the recorded song,

or Page 8 to recall the recorded registrations.)

Pressing any button other than the [MDR] button while the M.D.R. display is open

exits from the M.D.R. display. If you exit from the function inadvertently, simply press

the [MDR] button again to recall the M.D.R. display.

After executing operations such as deleting or converting songs, make sure to return to

Page 1 (Song Select display).

Using the M.D.R. Function

NOTE

If you press the [MDR]

button even when no media

is inserted into the USB TO

DEVICE terminal, the

selection “Internet” appears

at the bottom of the display.

However, the Internet

function is not available.

MDR Display

Display Page Function

Page 1 Song Select Select a song.

Page 2 Playback Setting Set the playback tempo or order.

Page 3 Part Set the recording status for Lead or KBP.

Page 4 Rename Change the name of a song/folder.

Page 5 Copy Copy a song.

Page 6 Delete Delete a song/folder.

Page 7 Convert Convert the data format.

Page 8 Registration Load Load Registration data back to the ELB-01.

Page 9 Registration Save Save Registration data to external media.

Page 10 Registration Delete Delete Registrations from a song.

Page 11 Create Folder Create a folder.

Page 12 Format Format the media.

Page 13 Remain Check the remaining memory.

<SONG SELECT> ⁄

¿Ã001:USB 01 [Õ]

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

109

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

If you ﬁnd that you are unable to use new, blank USB ﬂash memory/ﬂoppy disks or old

ones that have been used with other devices, you may need to format them. Formatting

erases all the data in the media and makes it ready to record. The data erased by

formatting will be lost permanently. Check whether or not the media contains any

important data you wish to keep before executing the operation

Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

Press the [MDR] button on the panel to call up the M.D.R. display.

Select the desired media you want to format.

To format a USB ﬂash memory device, select “USB xx” (xx indicates the number

of the device). If you insert two media/devices, the media inserted ﬁrst will be

shown as “USB 01” and the latter one will be shown as “USB 02.”

Select the desired media by turning the DATA CONTROL dial or by successive

pressing of the [C] button when the desired media is not displayed

Formatting External Media

<SONG SELECT> ⁄

¿Ã001:USB 01 [Õ]

<SONG SELECT> ⁄

¿Ã001:USB 01 [Õ]

NOTE

By installing the optional

UD-FD01 ﬂoppy disk drive

to the ELB-01, you can

format ﬂoppy disks. Floppy

disks will be shown in the

display as “USB-FDxx” (xx

indicates the number of the

disk).

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

110

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 12.

The Format display appears.

Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the

display.

A message appears prompting conﬁrmation of operation. You can cancel the

operation at this point by pressing the [D] button corresponding to [Cancel].

Press the [C] button, corresponding to [Format] in the display, to

format the media.

When the operation is completed, the LCD returns to Page 12 (Format display).

Simultaneously press the PAGE buttons to return to Page 1 (Song Select

display).

<SONG SELECT> ⁄

¿Ã001:USB 01 [Õ]

<FORMAT> [EXE]⁄¤

USB 01

Currently selected media name

≤OK to format? ≤

≤[Format] [Cancel]≤

<FORMAT> [EXE]⁄¤

USB 01

≤OK to format? ≤

≤[Format] [Cancel]≤

CAUTION

Do not remove the media

while the formatting

operation is in process.

<SONG SELECT> ⁄

¿Ã001:USB 01 [Õ]

<FORMAT> [EXE]⁄¤

USB 01

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

111

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

In order to record your performance to the media or to load Registrations in the media

back to the Electone, you will need to select a song, as described below.

To record your performance, you will need to specify a Song for recording. To copy or

convert songs, you will need to specify not only the song to be copied or converted but

also the song to which you want to save the newly created data.

To select the desired song:

Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal, then press the

[MDR] button.

The Song Select display (Page 1) appears.

In the Song Select display, you can select a blank song for recording your

performance or saving the Registration settings, or you can select a desired song

for playback.

Selecting a Song

What is a Song?

You can think of a song as a “container” for

storing the Electone data for a piece of music,

recorded to external media. A single song can

contain both the recorded performance and

Registrations.

Registration data

Performance

data

Song

Reference Page

Media Contents: Folders,

Songs, and Files (page 116)

CAUTION

While the instrument is

accessing data, do NOT

remove the media. (Some

USB ﬂash memory

devices are equipped with

an LED. The LED will ﬂash

while the media is being

accessed.)

<SONG SELECT> ⁄

¿Ã001:USB 01 [Õ]

Media icon

Currently selected media

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

112

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Select the desired media.

To use a USB ﬂash memory device, select “USB xx” (xx indicates the number of

the device). If you insert two USB ﬂash memory devices, the device inserted ﬁrst

will be shown as “USB 01” and the latter one will be shown as “USB 02.” To use

a ﬂoppy disk, select “USB-FD xx” (xx indicates the number of the disk).

Select the desired media by turning the DATA CONTROL dial or by successive

pressing of the [C] button when the desired media is not displayed.

When selecting the media, the selection “Internet” will appear at the bottom of

the display. However, the Internet function is not available.

Select a Song

Press the [D] button corresponding to the [Õ] in the display, to call up the

desired song or folder in the selected media.

If the selected media has no data, “new song” (blank song) will be selected

automatically. If the selected media contains both folders and songs, the folder

will be selected ﬁrst, and you can use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the

following items in sequence: folders → new song → songs (containing data) by

turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise. You can also select the song

(folder) by successively pressing the [C] button.

For details about how to select songs in a folder, see “Selecting a Song in a

Folder” on page 113.

<SONG SELECT> ⁄

¿Ã001:USB 01 [Õ]

ÃUSB 01 [˜] ⁄

¿ ___:new song

<SONG SELECT> ⁄

¿Ã001:USB 01 [Õ]

Select the desired song here

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

113

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Select a “new song” (blank song) if you want to make a new recording or save

data.

To simply play an existing song, select the desired song (containing data),

referring to the song name and icons

Selecting the Song in the Folder:

Keep in mind that, depending on much data stored in your device and how many

folders have been created, the song you want to use may be easily located in the media’s

root directory, or it may be buried deep in the folder hierarchy with other songs.

The illustrations below shows you how to use the display to access a speciﬁc song in a

folder of a storage device (in this case, calling up the song “Twinkle Twinkle Little

Star”).

The illustration below shows the levels of folders and songs in the device. Follow the

dark arrows and the accompanying instruction steps to select the desired song,

“Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.”

Songs or folders in the same level can be selected in sequence by turning the DATA

CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the [C] button.

ÃUSB 01 [˜] ⁄

¿ ___:new song

NOTE

The new song is a blank

song which is automatically

created in the media/folder,

if the number of the songs in

the media/folder is less than

100.

Reference Page

Recording (page 117)

ÃUSB 01 [˜] ⁄

¿ 001:SONG 1 ´

Reference Pages

Changing the Song/Folder

Name (page 122)

Song Icons (page 116)

Reference Page

Playing Back a Song

(page 132)

Twinkle

Little Star

USB ﬂash memory

(USB 01)

FOLDER_001

FOLDER_002

new song new song SONG 1

NOTE

The new song is a blank

song which is automatically

created in the media/folder

unless the number of the

songs in the media/folder is

under 100.

Twinkle Twinkle

Little Star

1. Press the [D] button

2. Use the DATA CONTROL dial or the [C] button

3. Press the [D] button

4. Use the DATA CONTROL dial or the [C] button

First level

(root directory)

Second level in

the root directory

Third level in the

root directory

USB ﬂash memory (USB 01)

FOLDER_001 FOLDER_002 new song

new song

SONG 1

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

114

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Here is the actual procedure again, in linear form:

Press the [D] button to call up the folder in the selected media at

the bottom of the display.

FOLDER_001 is displayed.

Select the FOLDER_002 by turning the DATA CONTROL dial or

successively pressing the [C] button.

Press the [D] button to call up the song in the FOLDER_002 at the

bottom of the display.

In this case, “new song” is displayed.

Select the desired song, “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star,” by turning

the DATA CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the [C]

button.

<SONG SELECT> ⁄

¿Ã001:USB 01 [Õ]

ÃUSB 01 [˜] ⁄

¿¶001:FOLDER_001 [Õ]

ÃUSB 01 [˜] ⁄

¿¶002:FOLDER_002 [Õ]

ÃUSB 01 [˜] ⁄

¿¶002:FOLDER_002 [Õ]

Ã¶FOLDER_002 [˜] ⁄

¿ ___:new song

Ã¶FOLDER_002 [˜] ⁄

¿ 001:Twinkle ´

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

115

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

To change the Media/Folder:

Make sure to select Song Select display (Page 1) when you want to change the media/

folder/song.

1 Current media/folder/song

Displays the currently selected media/folder/song. In this case, the folder named

“FOLDER_003” is shown.

2 Changing the current media/folder/song

The current media/folder/song can be selected by turning the DATA CONTROL dial

or by successively pressing the [C] button.

3 Display the entire song name

To show the entire name of the currently selected folder/song (up to 36 characters) in

the display, hold down the [A] button.

4 Upper level folder or media

This shows the upper level folder/media which contains the currently selected folder/

song. The media icon (

Ã) and the folder icon (¶) shown at the top left of the display

indicates the current location in the media. For example, “Ã¶FOLDER_002”

indicates that the folder named “FOLDER_002” in the root directory of the media.

For folders deeper in the hierarchy (lower than the third level), the folder icon

“Ã...¶” is shown.

5 Move to upper level

Select the upper level by pressing the [B] button.

If you are at a level lower than the second level, you can instantly jump back to the ﬁrst

level by holding down the [B] button (for more than two seconds).

6 Move to lower level

Select the lower level by pressing the [D] button.

If a song is selected, [Õ] is not shown in the display.

Ã¶FOLDER_002 [˜] ⁄

¿ 003:FOLDER_003 [Õ]

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

116

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Song Icons

These icons are shown when you select a media, folder, and song.

Icons Description

Indicates media such as a USB ﬂash memory or a ﬂoppy disk.

Indicates a folder.



Indicates a Protected Song unavailable for editing. See page

139 for details.

Indicates a Protected Song available for editing.

Indicates a song that has been converted from a song in media

for which write-protect or copy-protect is effective. For details,

see “Converting EL format to ELB” on page 142.

Indicates that the performance data is contained in the song.

E001:SONG 1

Indicates a song that has been created with an EL-series

Electone, such as the EL-900 or EL-100.

X001:XGSONG001

Indicates an XG song.

Media Contents: Folders, Songs, and Files

Folders:

A folder is a storage location in the media, used to organize multiple songs in

groups.

If you've saved hundreds of songs to a USB ﬂash memory device, it may be difﬁcult

to ﬁnd the desired song quickly. Organizing your songs in folders, with similar

songs grouped together (for example, according to genre or tempo), makes it easier

to ﬁnd the songs you want.

Songs:

A song is a “container” for storing the Electone data for a piece of music, recorded

to external media. A single song can contain both the recorded performance and

Registrations. A blank song containing no data is displayed as a “new song.”

When a song containing the performance data is selected, a note icon (´) appears in

the display.

Files:

A ﬁle is an element of data in a song. For example, a single song consists of various

ﬁles, such as Registration ﬁles and performance ﬁles.The ﬁle types listed below are

created with the M.D.R. (The extension will not appear in the Electone display.

They will, however, be displayed on a computer.)

Song

Song 1

Song Song Song

Song 4

USB ﬂash memory

Creating folders

Folder 001

Folder 002

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

117

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Recording

Before recording, set up the Electone just as you’ll need it for the entire recording. Set

the desired Registrations you’ll use throughout the performance/recording in

Registration Memory and make sure also to select the Registration that you will use at

the beginning of the song

Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

Select the blank song (new song) for recording your

performance.

For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112.

Press the [RECORD] button.

The lamp above the [RECORD] button lights, indicating that the Electone is

ready to record.

You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [STOP] button.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

The lamp above the [PLAY/PAUSE] button lights up and a small arrow

indicator ﬂashes across from left to right at the top right of the LCD display.

This indicates that the M.D.R. is reading the registrations.

After “REC~~” appears at the top right of the LCD display, begin

playing.

Files in the song

Recording

File Explanation Extension

Performance

data

This ﬁle contains performance data, played on the

keyboards and pedals of the Electone.

.mid

Registration

data

This ﬁle contains Registration settings, User Voices, User

rhythms, and Rhythm Sequences.

.b00

XG-converted

data

This ﬁle contains XG song data, for which Electone

performance data is converted to XG-compatible format.

.mid

NOTE

When you record the song

using the Next Regist

function, make sure to press

the [PLAY/PAUSE] button

before pressing the

[RECORD] button. For

details, see page 129.

ÃUSB 01 [˜] ⁄

¿ ___:new song

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

118

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

When you ﬁnish playing, press the [STOP] button.

Recording stops and your performance is written to the song.

The song to which your performance is recorded is automatically named

“SONG xx” (xx indicates the number). You can change the song name as

desired. (For details, see page 122.)

To hear your newly recorded performance, press the [PLAY/

PAUSE] button.

Playback will begin after a couple of seconds, as the Electone reads the

Registration. For more information on playback and other playback-related

functions, see page 132.

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Re-recording (Retry)

If you make a mistake during recording, you can re-record the song from the

beginning.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button while the song is still running.

This automatically stops recording and returns you to the starting point of the

song. The lamp above the [PLAY/PAUSE] button starts ﬂashing, indicating that

you can re-record the song.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button again.

Re-recording starts from the beginning of the song and replaces the previously

recorded performance with the newly recorded performance.

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Recording Each Part Separately

You can also record the parts of your performance independently. This function lets

you record Keyboard Percussion and performance control data, such as Registration

changes and expression pedal operation, separately from the other parts of the song.

Even Keyboard Percussion and Lead Voice can be recorded separately. The following

instruction is an example: First, record the chords and bass to the song using the Lower

and Pedalboard, and then record the melody using the Upper Keyboard.

Follow steps 1 through 3 on page 117 to call up the Rec Standby

display.

CAUTION

Do not remove the media

from the instrument during

recording (while the

message is shown).

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

119

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Select the parts for recording.

Each press of a part button switches the status: Play (green LED), Off (LED is

off) and Rec (red LED). Press each part button to turn off the parts you don’t

want to record, and make sure the green LED is lit for the parts you want to play

and the red lit for the part you want to record.

Play (green LED):

Playback of parts that have been recorded.

Off (LED is off):

Recording or playback is not active.

Record (red LED):

Recording of the part.

To r ecord the performances on the Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard, turn off the

LED above the [UPPER] button, and make sure that the red LEDs above the

[LOWER] button and the [PEDAL] button are lit, as shown in the lower

illustration above.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. After “REC~~” appears at the top

right of the LCD display, begin playing.

Press the [Stop] button when you are ﬁnished with your

performance to stop recording.

Now you’ve recorded the ﬁrst parts of your performance.

Setting up recording of the next part—Upper part in this case.

Press the [RECORD] button.

A message appears prompting conﬁrmation of operation. To overwrite, press the

[C] button corresponding to [OK] in the display.

Select the parts for recording.

Set the parts you want to record next (in this case, the Upper part) to “Rec” (red

LED). Also set the part already recorded (in this case, the Lower and Pedal parts)

to “Play” (green LED), so that you can hear the previously recorded parts as you

record new ones.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

120

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Press the [CUSTOM PLAY] button to start recording of the new

part or parts.

Playback of the previously recorded parts starts immediately. The [CUSTOM

PLAY] button is used here to record only the parts that have been selected for

recording, and plays back only those parts that have been selected for playback.

While you listen to the parts being played back, start playing the melody on the

Upper Keyboard.

When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback is automatically

stopped. The length of a subsequently recorded part cannot exceed the length of

the previously recorded parts.

Separately recording for Lead Voice and/or Keyboard

Percussion parts:

The Lead voice and the Keyboard Percussion can be recorded/played back

separately although there are no buttons for these parts. Set these in the display

shown in step 2 on page 119.

Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 3.

Press the [B] button to make the “÷” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to select the status for the Lead Voice.

Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to select the status for Keyboard Percussion.

You cannot set both Upper and Lead to “Rec” at the same time; neither can the

Lower and Keyboard Percussion parts be recorded at the same time.

NOTE

When you record the

Keyboard Percussion, make

sure that the KEYBOARD

PERCUSSION [1] and/or [2]

button is set to on.

<PART> LEAD÷PLAY‹

XG VOL.¿100 KBP÷OFF

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

121

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Punch-in Recording

This lets you re-record over a speciﬁc phrase or section—either that of a speciﬁc part(s)

or all parts.

Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

Select the song which contains the phrase you want to change.

For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback of the song.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button at the point you want to execute

punch-in recording.

The current song is stopped momentarily.

Press the [RECORD] button.

The lamp above the [RECORD] button lights, indicating that the M.D.R. is

ready to record.

Set the parts which you want to change to “Rec” status and other

parts to “Play.”

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start punch-in recording. Play

the new phrase, as you want it to be changed.

Press the [STOP] button to quit the punch-in recording as soon

as you reach the end of the phrase.

NOTE

This function is best used

when the phrase to be re-

recorded has deﬁnite

beginning and end points,

with slight pauses before

and after.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

122

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Even though the Electone automatically assigns a generic name to each recorded song,

it’s best to give each song a “meaningful” name, such as an original title or even a date

indicating when it was recorded.

Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

Select the song/folder whose name you want to change.

For details on selecting a song or a folder, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112.

Use the PAGE buttons to select the Rename display (Page 4).

The Rename display appears.

Move the cursor to the desired point by using the [C] [D] buttons.

Pressing the [D] button moves the cursor one step to the right, while pressing

the [C] button moves it to the left

Change the character at the cursor position.

Replace the current character at the cursor by using the DATA CONTROL dial.

Turn it clockwise to select the characters in order, and counter-clockwise for

reverse order.

Changing the Song/Folder Name

<RENAME> [EXE] ›

« 001:SONG 1 »

Cursor

NOTE

A blank song cannot be

named. Once a song

contains data, it can be

named.

<RENAME> [EXE] ›

« 001:SONG 1 »

Cursor

<RENAME> [EXE] ›

« 001:SONH 1 »

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

123

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

To delete a character:

Move the cursor to the character you want to delete, and press the [C] button

while holding down the [A] button.

When the character is deleted, all other numbers to the right of the cursor are

moved one step to the left.

To insert a space:

Move the cursor to the position at which you want to enter the space, and press

the [D] button while holding down the [A] button.

Repeat steps 4 through step 5 above to ﬁnish entering the song

name.

Up to 36 characters can be entered.

After ﬁnishing, press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE]

(Execute) in the display.

A message appears prompting conﬁrmation of operation. You can cancel the

operation at this point by pressing the [D] button.

To actually enter the change, press the [C] button corresponding

to [Rename] in the display.

The renamed song/folder is displayed.

Blank

A – Z (capital)

a – z (lower case)

Japanese Katakana:

Marks

Number 0 – 9

NOTE

If “English” is selected as

the Language in the Utility

display (page 19),

Japanese katakana

characters are unavailable.

≤Rename? ≤

≤[Rename] [Cancel]≤

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

124

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

You can also record Registrations by themselves to a song, without having to record

them along with a performance. All Registrations 1 – 16 stored to the Registration

Memory buttons as well as the Registration Shift settings and so on can be saved to the

song. Even if you’ve only created a couple of Registrations yourself, 16 separate

Registration Memory settings are always stored when saving to a song—the factory

preset Registrations being stored if no new settings have been made to the numbers.

There are two ways to save the Registrations.

Method 1

Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

First make all the desired Electone settings to create your

original Registration.

An error message (“This name is not available”) may appear when pressing the [C]

button to ﬁnish entering the name. If this message appears, the name is invalid and

you’ll need to enter a different name. The following names cannot be used. (The

letters “xx” indicate numbers.)

MDR_xx.EVT ELS_SONG.NAM MDR_xxx.TMP TMP

MDR_xx.MID MDR_xxx.MID REG_xxx.TMP TMP.E02

MDR_xx.Bxx REG_xxx.B00 ELS_SONG.TMP

MDR_xx.Vxx SONG_xxx.C02

SONG.NAM

Saving Registrations as Registration Data

(File)

Reference Page

Functions and settngs that

cannot be memorized (page

98)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Registrations 1 – 16 stored

to the numbered buttons are

saved together as a bank

Save

Registrations

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

125

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Press the [MDR] button, and select the destination (blank song).

Select the blank song. For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page

112.

Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 9.

Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the

display.

A message appears, indicating that the Registration data is currently being saved.

After the message disappears, the song to which the Registration is recorded is

automatically named “SONG xx” (“xx” indicates the number).

Method 2

First make all the desired settings you want to save, then select

the destination (blank song) as you did in steps 1 and 3 above.

Press the [RECORD] button to enable recording on the M.D.R.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to record the Registrations, then

press the [STOP] button before the “REC~~” indication is shown

at the top right of the display.

This is the same procedure as the one shown when you start recording. The

“REC~~” at the top right of the display indicates that the M.D.R. is recording

the Registrations and being set up for normal recording; pressing the [STOP]

button interrupts this process.

<REG.SAVE> [EXE] ·

___:new song ¸:__

Reference Page

Changing the Song/Folder

Name (page 122)

ÃUSB 01 »~~ ⁄

¿ ___:new song

ÃUSB 01 REC~~⁄

¿ ___:new song

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

126

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song

When you save the Registrations, Registrations 1 – 16 will be saved as a Registration

bank. When you want to use more than 16 Registration numbers in a song, you can

save additional Registration banks—up to a maximum of 50 in a single song—with the

following procedure.

First make all the desired settings you want to save.

Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

Press the [MDR] button, and select the destination song (the one

that already contains the previous Registrations).

For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112.

Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 9.

Any Registration banks previously been saved to the song are indicated in the

display (as “¸÷01” or similar).

Select the blank Registration bank “¸÷__” to which you want to

save the additional Registration bank, by using the DATA

CONTROL dial.

You can also select the blank bank by successively pressing the [D] button.

R:01

R:02

R:50

...

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Song

Add

Registrations Bank

Registration

Registration to be added

<REG.SAVE> [EXE] ·

001:SONG 1 ¸÷01

<REG.SAVE> [EXE] ·

001:SONG 1 ¸÷__

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

127

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the

display.

The Registration bank will be added and follows previously contained banks.

When you play back this song, the top Registration in this display will be loaded

to the Electone.

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Replacing Registrations

The M.D.R. also lets you change the Registrations of an existing song without

changing the performance data.

First make all the desired settings you want to save to the new

Registration.

Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

Press the [MDR] button, and then select the desired song

containing the Registration you wish to replace.

For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112.

Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 9.

The Registration bank number will be shown at the bottom right of the display.

Select the Registration bank number you wish to overwrite by

using the DATA CONTROL dial.

If you select a numbered bank, such as “01” instead of “_ _”, this procedure will

overwrite the numbered bank. For details, see step 6 of “Replacing Registrations” on

page 128.

Reference Page

Files (page 116)

Reference Page

Song Icons (page 116)

<REG.SAVE> [EXE] ·

001:SONG 1 ¸÷01

Registration

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

128

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the

display.

A message appears prompting conﬁrmation of operation.

You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] button.

Press the [C] button corresponding to [OK] in the display to

overwrite (replace).

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Deleting Registrations

This function lets you delete the Registration banks saved to a song.

Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

Press the [MDR] button, and then select the song containing the

Registrations you wish to delete.

For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112.

Use the PAGE buttons to select the Registration Delete display

(Page 10).

The Registration Delete display appears.

Select the Registration bank number you want to delete by using

the DATA CONTROL dial.

You can also select the Registration bank number by successively pressing the

[D] button.

<REG.SAVE> [EXE] ·

001:SONG 1 ¸÷01

<REG.DEL> [EXE]⁄‚

001:SONG 1 ¸÷01

<REG.DEL> [EXE]⁄‚

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

129

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the

display.

A message appears prompting conﬁrmation of operation.

You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] button.

Press the [C] button corresponding to [Delete] in the display to

delete the Registration.

When several Registrations are stored to a song, the Registrations following the

deleted one are moved back to replace it in the order

Next Regist Settings (Using more than 16 Registrations

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

in one song)

You’ve learned in an earlier section that by using a bank of 16 Registrations, you can

program a maximum of 80 settings to be recalled in a speciﬁed order, with the Regist

Shift function described on page 106.

When playing back a song which uses more than 16 Registration numbers, you can

have two or more Registration banks saved to a single song and recall them one by one

as you play the song. This function that makes this possible is called Next Regist.

Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

Set the Registration Shift mode to User, and select Next as the

Shift End in Page 1 of the Registration Shift display. In Page 2, set

the Use Registration order.

For details, see “Registration Shift” on page 103.

Press the [MDR] button, and select the destination song.

For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112.

Save the Registrations.

Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 9.

Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the display.

A message appears, indicating that the Registration data is currently being saved.

After the message disappears, the song to which the Registration is recorded is

automatically named “SONG xx” (“xx” indicates the number).

R:01

16 1 16

R:02

MEMORY MEMORY MEMORY MEMORY

<REG.SAVE> [EXE] ·

___:new song ¸:__

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

130

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Repeat steps 2 through 4 above to save the Registration banks in

the order you want to recall them in the same song. When making

new Registration Shift setting, delete the previous settings, then

continue.

For details, see “Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song” on

page 126.

Once the Next Regist function has been turned on and set, you can use the function,

following the steps below.

Press the [MDR] button, and select the song for which the Next

Regist function has been set.

See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting Songs.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

If the song contains more than two Registration banks, the ﬁrst one (¸:01) will

be loaded. You can check the Registration order in Page 2 of the Registration

Shift display.

As you play the Electone, press the Right Footswitch.

Each press of the Right Footswitch selects Registrations according to the order

you’ve speciﬁed.

After ﬁnishing the play back of the “¸:01,” the next Registration bank “¸:02”

begins loading automatically, and can be selected by pressing the Right

Footswitch.

Expression Pedal

Right Footswitch

NOTE

While a rhythm is playing,

sequence data and User

rhythm in the Registration

data created on the

Electone such as ELS-01/

01C/01X cannot be loaded.

When you record or play the song using the Next Regist function, make sure to load

the top Registration bank (R:01) to the Electone by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE]

button after selecting the desired song. If you begin the recording procedure instead

by pressing the [RECORD] button, even as another bank (R:02, etc.) is loading,

R:01 is overwritten by the current panel settings and will be lost.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

131

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Registrations (and bulk data) recorded to song numbers can be easily loaded back to

the Electone. Use this function if you want to recall a speciﬁc Registration bank

(R:02~) from a song which contains more than two Registration banks

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Loading Registrations

Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

Press the [MDR] button and select the song containing the

Registrations you want to load back to the Electone.

For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112.

Use the PAGE buttons to select the Registration Load display

(Page 8).

Select the Registration bank you want to load to the Electone.

Select the desired Registration bank number by turning the DATA CONTROL

dial.

Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the

display.

A message appears, indicating the Registration data is currently being loaded.

After the Registration data is loaded, the LCD returns to the Registration Load

display.

Recalling Recorded Registrations

<REG.LOAD> [EXE] °

001:SONG 1 ¸÷01

<REG.LOAD> [EXE] °

001:SONG 1 ¸÷02

NOTE

If you load a Registration

while a rhythm is playing,

User rhythms in the

Registration data cannot be

loaded.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

132

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

This operation lets you automatically load the Registration data saved to a song when

playing back your recorded performances.

Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

Press the [MDR] button, then select the desired song for

playback.

For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to load the Registration data.

“»~~” appears at the top right of the display, indicating the Registration data is

currently being loaded.

If the song contains more than two Registration banks, the ﬁrst one will be

loaded.

Playback starts automatically after reading the Registration data.

The elapsed time will be showed on the display, and song playback starts (if the

song contains performance data). In general, all parts recorded to the song are

played back; however, you can mute speciﬁc parts and playback only selected

parts (page 133). When the end of the recorded performance is reached,

playback automatically stops. You can, however, stop playback in the middle of

the song by pressing the [STOP] button. If the song contains no performance

data, after loading the Registration data, the LCD returns to the Song Select

display.

Playing Back a Song

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Song

Registrations

Performance

data

Play back

Load

Loading the 16

Registrations to the

numbered buttons on

the panel.

Reference Page

Saving Two or More

Registration Banks to One

Song (page 126)

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

133

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Playing Back the Selected Part(s)

You can also play back selected parts of your recorded performance, while other parts

are temporarily turned off. This function is especially useful for playing a single part,

such as the melody, over previously recorded accompaniment parts.

To play back the selected part(s):

Before or during playback, press each part button to turn the part you want to playback

to “Play” and the part you want to mute to “Off.”

Custom Play

If you want to play back the song without resetting the Registrations, press the

[CUSTOM PLAY] button instead of the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. This displays the

song time and starts playback immediately.

When you play the song using the Next Regist function, make sure to press the

[PLAY/PAUSE] button to start the song, not the [CUSTOM PLAY] button.

Reference Page

Recording Each Part

Separately (page 118)

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

134

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Fast Forward, Rewind and Pause

Fast Forward and Rewind:

During playback, press the [FF] (Fast forward) button or [REW] (Rewind) button and

hold it down until the time reaches the desired position. When the button is released,

playback is paused at the desired position. To resume playback from the point you’ve

advanced or reversed to, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button or [CUSTOM PLAY]

button.

Pause:

If you want to temporarily stop playback of the song or songs, press the [PLAY/

PAUSE] button. To resume playback from the point at which the song was paused,

press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button again or press the [CUSTOM PLAY] button.

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Changing the Tempo

You can change the tempo of the song as the song is playing in the M.D.R. display,

either while the song is stopped or while it is playing. The TEMPO buttons on the

panel cannot be used to change the tempo for the Music Data Recorder.)

To Change the Tempo:

Press the [MDR] button.

The Song Select display appears.

Select the song to be played back.

See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs.

Use the PAGE buttons to select the Playback Setting display

(Page 2).

The tempo value is shown at the bottom left of the display

Changing the Tempo.

Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to change the setting. The range is 50 – 200%. The original

recorded tempo is 100%; values less than 100% result in a slower tempo, while

values greater than 100% result in a faster tempo.

<PLAYBACK SETTING> ¤

TMP¿100% RPT÷OFF

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

135

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Repeat Playback

This feature allows you to repeatedly play back either all songs on a folder or only one

speciﬁc song.

Select the song you wish to repeatedly play back.

If you wish to play back all songs on a folder, select the ﬁrst song that will be

played back. See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs.

Use the PAGE buttons to select the Playback Setting display

(Page 2).

The Repeat mode is shown at the bottom right of the display.

Select the repeat mode.

Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to select the setting.

1 Off

Cancels repeat playback.

2 All

Repeats all songs in the currently selected folder in order.

3 Single

Repeats the currently selected song indeﬁnitely.

4 Random

Repeats all songs in the currently selected folder randomly.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to begin playback.

When you stop playback, the repeat setting is automatically cancelled.

<PLAYBACK SETTING> ¤

TMP¿100% RPT÷OFF

OFF

ALL

SINGLE

RANDOM

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

136

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Playing Back XG Songs

The Electone allows you to playback XG song data, created on the computer or

converted from Electone song format to XG format. Naturally, you can use the fast

forward, rewind and pause controls, just as with songs (performances) recorded on the

Electone.

Insert the media containing the XG song data, then press the

[MDR] button.

Select the media that contains the desired XG song in the Song

Select display, and then select the desired song for playback.

See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs.

Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 3.

You can set the volume or mute settings for each part.

1 Part

Select the desired channel “CH1” through “CH16” or “ALL” to specify the part

to mute/play or to change the volume.

Press the [A] button to make the “¿” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to select the setting.

2 Playback/Off

Sets the selected part for playback or mute (off). Select “Play” for the part you

want to play back and select “Off” for the part you want to mute. Press the [B]

button to make the “÷” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to

select the setting.

3 Volume

You can adjust the volume for the selected part within a range of 0 – 100.

Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to select the setting.

The item “Volume” will be changed to “XG Volume” when the selected song

contains an XG part, even when the song has been created on the ELB-01 or

EL-900. You can adjust the XG part volume from Page 3, in the same way as you

did with the XG songs.

Reference Page

Converting to XG format

(page 144)

<PART>¿ALL ÷PLAY‹

VOL.¿100

CH1

CH2

CH16

ALL

...

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

137

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

These operations let you copy, delete or convert song data, as well as create or delete

folders.

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Song Copy

This function lets you copy recorded data from one song to another song. Songs

created with the ELS-01/01C/01X or XG songs can be copied. (Only songs created

with the EL-series, such as the EL-900, cannot be copied.) This function also lets you

copy and exchange data between two different media.

Make sure to check the remaining memory of the destination media in advance. If

memory space is insufﬁcient, or if the folder already contains 100 songs, Song Copy is

not available.

Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal.

If you want to copy the song between two different media, you will need to

insert the appropriate destination media.

Press the [MDR] button, then select the song to be copied.

See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs.

Use the PAGE buttons to select the Copy display (Page 5).

Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the

display.

The Copy Destination display appears.

Song Copy/Delete/Convert,

Folder Create/Delete

<COPY> [EXE] ﬁ

001:SONG 1

<COPY> [EXE] ﬁ

001:SONG 1

<COPY DEST> [˜] ﬁ

¿ ___:new song [EXE]

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

138

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Select the destination song.

The new song or the folder that contains the source song will be automatically

displayed at the bottom of the display as the destination. If the folder is

displayed, select the new song. See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on

selecting songs.

If you want to copy an XG song, you’ll need to select another folder as the

destination, since the same folder containing the source XG song cannot be

selected as the destination. If the remaining memory of the destination media is

insufﬁcient, XG Song Copy cannot be executed. (An error message will appear

and the operation is cancelled.) Up to 120 XG songs can be saved in one folder

Press the [D] button to execute Song Copy.

When the operation is completed, the LCD returns to the Copy display.

The name of the destination song is the same as the one of the source song,

except that “*” is attached at the beginning (not including XG songs). For

instructions on changing the song name, see page 122.

About Copying Protected Songs

Protected Original songs or Protected Edit songs can be copied as long as you select

the same folder that contains the source Protected Song as the destination. If you

select another folder/media, the message “Move?” will be displayed. If you select

[OK] by pressing the [C] button, the currently selected Protected Original song and

Protected Edit song created from a Protected Original song are all moved to another

folder/media you have speciﬁed. In this case, the data is not copied, but moved.

<COPY DEST> [˜] ﬁ

¿ ___:new song [EXE]

Reference Page

About Protected Songs

(page 139)

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

139

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Song Delete/Folder Delete

These operations let you delete songs and folders.

(Only songs created with the EL-series, such as the EL-900, cannot be deleted.)

Insert the media, then press the [MDR] button.

Select the song/folder you want to delete.

See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs/folders.

Use the PAGE buttons to select the Delete display (Page 6).

Conﬁrm that the desired song/folder to be deleted is shown at the bottom of the

display.

If you want to change the song, return to Page 1 by pressing both PAGE buttons

simultaneously, and then select the desired song.

About Protected Songs

If you buy or download song data, it may be protected from being deleted (to

prevent accidental erasure) or from being copied (to protect copyright ownership).

These are called “Protected songs.” A Protected song can be played back in the same

way as songs you’ve created, but it cannot be converted to XG format or EL format.

Registration data in the Protected song cannot be edited, nor can the performance

data be overwritten. If you want to edit a Protected song, ﬁrst copy it within one

media/folder, then edit the copy. (You cannot copy to another media/folder.) The

copied song (called “Protected Edit song”) is available only when the original song

(called “Protected Original song”) exists in the same folder. Be careful not to delete

the Protected Original song.

If you move or copy the protected song data on the computer without the

Musicsoft Downloader application, the song cannot be played back. Always

use the Musicsoft Downloader when moving or copying protected songs on

the computer.

Musicsoft Downloader can be obtained at the following Internet address:

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

Protected

Original Song

Protected Edit

Song

Folder

Copy

This song cannot be edited

This song can be edited, but only

when it is in the folder that

contains the related

CAUTION

When you want to edit a

protected song, turn the

power to the instrument

off and back on again,

then select the song to be

edited. (The Registration

data of the previous

protected song will be

initialized.) Otherwise the

edited protected song may

not be saved.

<DELETE> [EXE] ﬂ

001:SONG 1

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

140

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the

display.

A message appears prompting conﬁrmation of operation.

You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] button.

Press the [C] button to execute the operation.

When the operation is completed, the LCD returns to the Delete display.

To prevent inadvertent erasure of important data, make sure to return to the

Page 1 by pressing both PAGE buttons simultaneously.

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Creating folders

Insert the media, then press the [MDR] button.

Select the media/folder in which you want to create the folder,

then press the [D] button.

Use the PAGE buttons to select the Create Folder display (Page

11).

Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the

display.

To see the newly created folder, ﬁrst return to Page 1 by pressing both PAGE

buttons simultaneously, then select the newly created folder.

The newly created folder is automatically named “FOLDER_xxx” (xxx indicates

the number). For instructions on changing the folder name, see page 122.

<CREATE FLD> [EXE]⁄⁄

ÃUSB 01 [˜] ⁄

¿¶001:FOLDER_001 [Õ]

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

141

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Converting ELB format songs to EL

You can convert songs created on the ELB-01 to the EL-series format, and save them to

a ﬂoppy disk. The converted data can be used with EL-series Electones, such as the EL-

900. This function is not available for Protected songs. To use ﬂoppy disks with the

Electone, install the optional UD-FD01 ﬂoppy disk drive. Make sure to check the

remaining memory of the destination media in advance. If memory space is

insufﬁcient, the Convert operation is not available.

Insert the media containing the song created with the Electone,

and the ﬂoppy disk as the destination.

Press the [MDR] button, then select the song to be converted to

the EL-series format.

See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs.

Use the PAGE buttons to select the Convert display (Page 7).

Select the conversion format.

Select “EL” by using the DATA CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the

[A] button.

Reference Page

About Protected Songs

(page 139)

Installing the Floppy Disk

Drive (page 167)

NOTE

ELB songs can be used on

Electone models such as

the ELS-01/01C/01X with no

need for conversion.

<CONV>¿EL [EXE] ‡

001:SONG 1 ´

<CONV>¿EL [EXE] ‡

001:SONG 1 ´

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

142

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the

display.

The new song is displayed as the destination in the ﬂoppy disk.

When a new song is not displayed, select a new song by turning the DATA

CONTROL dial or successively pressing the [C] button.

Press the [D] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the

display.

A message appears prompting conﬁrmation of operation. You can cancel the

operation at this point by pressing the [D] button.

Press the [C] button corresponding to [Convert] in the display to

start conversion.

After conversion is ﬁnished, the LCD returns to the Convert display. The song

converted to EL format is automatically named “EXXX: SONG x” (x indicates

the number).

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Converting EL format songs to ELB

You can convert the songs in a ﬂoppy disk created with an EL-series Electone, such as

the EL-900, to the ELB-01 format, and save it to a USB ﬂash memory device. The

songs in write-protected or copy-protected media for the EL series can be converted

only one time. To use a ﬂoppy disk, you’ll need to install the optional UD-FD01 ﬂoppy

disk drive. Depending on the original song data, the sound or tempo of the converted

song may differ from the original, and/or the Next Song function of the original song

may not be effective.

Make sure to check the remaining memory of the destination media in advance. If

memory space is insufﬁcient, the Convert operation is not available.

<CONV>¿EL [EXE] ‡

001:SONG 1 ´

<CONV DEST> ‡

¿ ___:new song [EXE]

Reference Page

Installing the Floppy Disk

Drive (page 167)

NOTE

When converting protected

EL data to the ELB format,

make sure to set the write-

protect tab of the EL disk to

the “overwrite” position (tab

closed).

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

143

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Insert the ﬂoppy disk that containing the song you want to

convert to the ELB format, and insert the USB ﬂash memory

device for use as the destination.

Press the [MDR] button, then select the song you want to convert

to ELB format.

See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs.

Use the PAGE buttons to select the Convert display (Page 7).

Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the

display.

The Convert Destination display appears.

Select the blank song as the destination in the USB ﬂash memory

device.

Press the [D] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the

display.

A message appears prompting conﬁrmation of operation. You can cancel the

operation at this point by pressing the [D] button.

Press the [C] button corresponding to [Convert] in the display to

start conversion.

After conversion is ﬁnished, the LCD returns to the Convert display.

<CONV>:ELB [EXE] ‡

E001:SONG 1

<CONV DEST> [˜] ‡

¿ ___:new song [EXE]

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

144

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Converting to XG format

This function allows you to convert ELB-01 song data to XG format data. You can play

back the data using XG devices. The converted XG song data may not sound the same

as the original data.

Make sure to check the remaining memory of the destination media in advance. If

memory space is insufﬁcient, the Convert operation is not available. Protected songs

cannot be converted to XG format.

Select the song to be converted to the XG format.

See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs.

Use the PAGE buttons to select the Convert display (Page 7).

Select the conversion format.

Select “XG” by using the DATA CONTROL dial or successively pressing the

[A] button.

Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the

display.

The Convert Destination display appears.

Select the blank song as destination.

Press the [D] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the

display.

A message will appear, prompting conﬁrmation of the converted

data. Press the [C] button to play back the data.

After playback is ﬁnished, the LCD return to the Convert display. The song

converted to XG format is automatically named “XGSONGxxx” (xxx indicates

the number). For instructions on changing the song name, see page 122.

<CONV>¿EL [EXE] ‡

001:SONG 1 ´

≤Check the data. ≤

≤[OK] [Cancel]≤

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

145

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Checking the Remaining Memory

You can check the remaining memory in the media.

Insert the media, and press the [MDR] button.

Select the desired media by using the DATA CONTROL dial or by

successively pressing the [C] button.

Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 13.

The remaining memory is displayed.

<REMAIN> ⁄‹

USB 01 xx.xx MB

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

146

Footswitches

These leg- and foot-operated controls allow you to execute various performance functions

and switch the effects on/off, without taking your hands from the keyboard.

The Electone has two Footswitches on the expression pedal. The Right Footswitch is

used for the Registration Shift function, while the Left Footswitch can be set to control

one of three functions: Rhythm, Glide, or Rotary Speaker. Instructions for setting the

Left Footswitch (in the Footswitch Page) are given here. For details on the Registration

Shift function and Right Footswitch, see “Registration Shift” on page 102.

Press the [FOOTSWITCH] button.

Left Footswitch

Right Footswitch

Expression Pedal

Left Footswitch

¸<REG.SHIFT>

MODE¿OFF

NOTE

Pressing the

[FOOTSWITCH] button calls

up one of two different

display pages: the

Footswitch Page or the

Regist Shift Page. Press the

[A] button to alternate

between the two pages.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

147

Footswitches

Calls up the Footswitch display.

Pressing the [A] button alternates between the Footswitch Page and Regist Shift

Page.

In this page, you can assign which function the Left Footswitch will control:

Rhythm, Glide, or Rotary speaker. Turning the DATA CONTROL Dial to the

right selects the functions in sequence: Off → Rhythm → Glide → Rotary

speaker. Turning the DATA CONTROL Dial to the left selects in the reverse

order. When Off is selected here, the Left Footswitch is inactive.

1 Off

The Left Footswitch will not control any function.

2 Rhythm

When this is selected, one of the control settings appears at the right bottom of

the display. Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator ﬂash, then use the

DATA CONTROL Dial to select the desired control setting.

2-1 Stop

Switches the rhythm on/off whenever you press the Left Footswitch.

2-2 Break

This function corresponds to the [BREAK] button on the panel. When you

press the Left Footswitch, the Break section turns on.

¸<REG.SHIFT>

MODE¿OFF

Ò<FOOT.SW>

MODE¿OFF

OFF

RHYTHM

GLIDE

ROTARY SPEAKER

Footswitch Page

Reference page

Rhythm Structure (page 58)

Ò<FOOT.SW>

MODE¿RHYTHM ÷STOP

STOP

BREAK

MAIN A – D

INTRO 1 – 3

2-1

2-2

2-3

2-4

ENDING 1 – 3

2-5

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

148

Footswitches

2-3 Main A – Main D

These functions correspond to the MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons on the

panel. For example, when “MAIN A” is selected in this display and you press

the Left Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Main A or Fill In A.

2-4 Intro 1 – Intro 3

These functions correspond to the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons on the panel.

For example, when “INTRO1” is selected in this display and you press the

Left Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Intro 1.

2-5 Ending 1 – Ending 3

These functions correspond to the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons on the panel.

For example, when “ENDING1” is selected in this display and you press the

Left Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Ending 1. After the

ending pattern is played, the rhythm stops.

3 Glide

This lets you control the Glide effect by using the Left Footswitch. Pressing the

Left Footswitch immediately lowers the pitch of the selected Voice or Voices by a

half-step and releasing it slowly returns the pitch to the original.

When the Glide setting is chosen, three separate Glide pages are available, with

the current page number shown at the top right side of the display.

You can select the pages by using the PAGE buttons.

Footswitch – Glide Page 1

Footswitch – Glide Page 2

Footswitch – Glide Page 3

Ò<FOOT.SW> TIME÷1 ⁄

MODE¿GLIDE ”LEAD

3 -2

3 -1

Ò<FOOT.SW> ”UPPER1¤

MODE¿GLIDE ”UPPER2

3 -1

Ò<FOOT.SW> ’LOWER1‹

MODE¿GLIDE ’LOWER2

3 -1

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

149

Footswitches

3-1 Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead

Select the desired Voice section(s) for which the Glide function is to be

applied by pressing the corresponding [A] – [D] buttons.

3-2 Time

Determines the speed of the Glide function, or how gradually the pitch

returns when the Left Footswitch is released. Higher settings produce slower

pitch changes. Press the [B] button to make the “÷” indicator ﬂash, then use

the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting.

Range: 1-5

4 Rotary Speaker

You can control the Rotary Speaker effect (on/off) by using the Left Footswitch.

When the “ROTARY SPEAKER” is selected in this display and you press the

Footswitch, the Rotary Speaker effect is switched on or off. This function

corresponds to the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button on the panel. To use this

function, you’ll need to make the appropriate Rotary Speaker settings for each

Voice section. For details, see page 50.

Ò<FOOT.SW>

MODE¿ROTARY SPEAKER

Reference page

Rotary Speaker (page 50)

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

150

Transpose and Pitch Controls

There are two pitch-related controls on the Electone: Transpose and Pitch.

Transpose allows you to change the key of the instrument and Pitch lets you ﬁnely adjust the

tuning. Transpose and Pitch can be adjusted in the Utility display.

Press the [UTILITY] button.

The Utility display appears.

Select Page 2 of the Utility display by pressing the PAGE buttons.

In this page, you can change the Transpose and Pitch settings by using the [C]

[D] buttons and the DATA CONTROL Dial.

1 Transpose

Determines the coarse pitch setting of all the Voices, and is adjustable in half

steps (semitones). Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator ﬂash, then use

the DATA CONTROL Dial to change the setting

Range: -6 – +6

2 Pitch

Determines the ﬁne pitch setting of all the Voices. Each step changes the pitch

by 0.2 Hz. The default Pitch setting is 440.0 Hz (corresponding to key A3).

Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL Dial to change the setting

Range: 427.2 Hz – 452.6 Hz

You can also change the Transpose and Pitch for each Voice section, in the Voice

Condition display. (See page 43 for details.)

<æy∫/LANGUAGE> ⁄

’i-y∫ ”ENGLISH

Currently selected page

<æy∫/LANGUAGE> ⁄

’i-y∫ ”ENGLISH

<TRANSPOSE> <PITCH>¤

¿ 0 ÷440.0Hz

NOTE

The Transpose setting here

is not applicable for XG

songs (page 136).

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

151

Connections

On the underside and right side of the Electone keyboard is a separate panel equipped with

various input/output terminals and miscellaneous controls, the functions of which are

described below.

This section provides brief explanations for each jack/control on the Electone. For

details on connecting to external devices, see page 153.

1 AUX OUT (L/R) jacks

This set of stereo outputs is for connection to an external ampliﬁer/speaker. The output

level is ﬁxed and cannot be controlled.

2 PHONES jack

For connection of a stereo headphone set. When headphones are connected to this

jack, sound to the Electone’s built-in speaker system is automatically cut off, allowing

you to play without disturbing others.

3 USB TO DEVICE A terminal

For connecting USB storage devices (such as Flash Memory).

Accessory Jacks and Controls

Reference Page

Using Headphones

(page 153)

Reference Pages

Playing the Sounds of the

Electone Through an

External Audio System

(page 153)

Recording the Sounds of the

Electone to an External

Recorder (page 154)

Reference Pages

Connecting USB storage

devices (page 155)

Connections

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

152

4 MIDI IN/OUT terminals

For connecting external MIDI devices such a synthesizer or sequencer. You can also use

these to connect with a computer that has a MIDI Interface.

5 USB TO HOST terminal

For connecting to a computer with a USB cable. To connect to a computer, make sure

that an appropriate USB-MIDI driver is installed to the computer.

6 USB TO DEVICE B terminal

For connecting USB storage devices (such as Flash Memory).

4 56

Reference Pages

Controlling External MIDI

Devices from the Electone

(page 154)

Controlling the Electone

from an External Device

(page 155)

Connection with Computer

(page 156)

What is MIDI (page 157)

Reference Page

Connection with Computer

(page 156)

USB

USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting

a computer with peripheral devices.

Connections

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

153

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Using Headphones

To use headphones, connect them to the PHONES jack (standard 1/4" phone jack).

Playing the Sounds of the Electone Through an

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

External Audio System

By using the AUX OUT jacks (RCA), you can connect your Electone to external

speakers.

Connection Examples — External Devices

Before connecting the Electone to other electronic components, turn off the

power to all the components. Before turning the power of the components

on or off, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or

damage to the components may occur.

PHONES

AUX OUT L

Speaker (Left)

Speaker (Right)

Connections

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

154

Recording the Sounds of the Electone to an External

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Recorder

You can record your Electone performance to an external recorder, such as an MD

recorder or cassette tape recorder, using the AUX OUT jacks.

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Controlling External MIDI Devices from the Electone

You can use the Electone to remotely play the Voices of a MIDI keyboard (or tone

generator), combining them with the Electone and letting you create even richer, more

multi-layered sound textures. (The MIDI receive channels of the MIDI keyboard must

match the transmit channels on your Electone.)

The Electone transmits a variety of performance messages along with note information

as digital data, including values that indicate how far the expression pedal is pressed

down and how hard you play the keyboard. How the connected external device

responds to these messages depends on the particular device.

MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used.

AUX OUT L

LINE IN L

Cassette tape recorder, etc.

Audio cable

Recording

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

Tone generator

MIDI cable

MIDI messages

Reference Page

What is MIDI (page 157)

NOTE

When you are using the

M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be

transmitted.

Connections

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

155

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Controlling the Electone from an External Device

You can use an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer to remotely play the sounds of

your Electone and change its Registrations. (You will need to set the MIDI transmit

channels of the MIDI keyboard to match the ﬁxed receive channels on your Electone.)

MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used.

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Connecting USB storage devices

Using the USB TO DEVICE terminal(s), you can connect USB storage devices (such

as the USB ﬂash memory) for saving your Electone data.

Compatible USB devices

You can connect up to two USB storage devices (such as a USB ﬂash memory device,

ﬂoppy disk, Card-R/RW drive, hard disk and other drives) to the USB TO DEVICE

terminal(s). Before purchasing a USB storage device, please consult your Yamaha

dealer, or an authorized Yamaha distributor for advice.

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

MIDI keyboard or synthesizer

MIDI cable

MIDI messages

NOTE

When you are using the

M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be

received.

Reference Pages

Installing the Floppy Disk

Drive (page 167)

Formatting External Media

(page 109)

NOTE

If necessary, use a USB

hub. Only self-powered

(battery or external power

supply) types can be used.

USB hubs of up to two levels

can be used.

Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminals

•Never turn the USB device’s power on/off and never plug/unplug the USB

cable when the connected USB storage device is of the self-powered type.

Doing so may result in the operation of the Electone “freezing” or hanging

up.

• While the instrument is accessing data (such as Save, Load, and Delete

operations), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media

from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so

may corrupt the data on either or both devices.

•Be careful not to turn the write-protect switch on or off while the USB

device is still connected to the terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction

in the M.D.R. operation since the on/off status may not be recognized

correctly.

Connections

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

156

By using the USB TO HOST terminal or MIDI IN/OUT terminals, you can connect

your Electone to a computer and receive/transmit MIDI data (for more information

about MIDI, see page 157).

Connecting your Electone to a computer opens up a whole new world of musical

possibilities. You can save your original songs to computer and create notation (score

writing application or sequencing software is needed), and even upload your original

Electone song data to your own website, to promote your talents or share songs with

your friends. You can also control the Electone from the computer, for example, by

playing a MIDI ﬁle on the computer to play back the sounds of your Electone.

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Using the USB terminal

Using the Electone’s USB TO HOST terminal and a standard USB cable, connect the

Electone and the computer.

MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used.

Connection with Computer

Before you can actually transfer data between the Electone and a computer

via the USB connection, you will need to install an appropriate MIDI driver.

Download the latest MIDI driver software from the Yamaha web site at

“http://music.yamaha.com/download/.”

NOTE

When you are using the

M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be

transferred to/from the

computer.

Precautions when using the USB TO HOST terminals

When connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, make sure to observe the

following points. Failing to do so may result in freezing of the computer, corrupting data,

and even losing data.

If the computer or the instrument freezes, turn the power to the instrument off or restart the

computer.

•Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, exit from any

power-saving mode (such as suspended, sleep, standby) of the computer.

•Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB

TO HOST terminal.

•Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or

plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB TO HOST terminal.

•Quit any open applications.

•Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is

transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a Song.)

• While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six

seconds or more between these operations: When turning the power of the

instrument off then on again, or when alternately connecting/disconnecting the

USB cable.

USB TO HOST

Computer

USB cable

Connections

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

157

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Using the MIDI IN/OUT terminals

By using an optional MIDI interface such as the UX16, you can connect the Electone

to the computer, with the MIDI IN/OUT terminals on the instrument. Connect the

Electone and the MIDI Interface with two standard MIDI cables (one connecting the

OUT terminal on the Electone to the MIDI IN terminal on the interface, and the

other connecting the IN terminal on the Electone to the MIDI OUT terminal on the

interface). Connect the MIDI interface to the computer with a USB cable.

This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as how you can use

MIDI on your Electone.

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

What is MIDI?

No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument.”

In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider a

grand piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are easy

to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings

and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But

how does a digital instrument go about playing a note?

NOTE

Depending on your particular

MIDI interface, you may have

to connect the MIDI Interface

and the computer with a

serial cable.

MIDI

IN OUT

MIDI OUT MIDI IN

Computer

MIDI Interface

(for example, UX16)

Internal amp

Tone generator

(Electric circuit)

Playing the keyboard

Acoustic guitar note production

Digital instrument note production

Pluck a string and the body resonates

the sound.

Based on playing information from the keyboard,

a sampled note stored in the tone generator is

played through the speakers.

Connections

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

158

As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampled note

(previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is

played based on information received from the keyboard, and output through the

speakers. So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for

note production?

For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the

Electone keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the

electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what

Voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed” and “when was it

released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to

the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored

sampled note.

Example of Keyboard Information

As described above, your keyboard performance and panel operations such as Voice

selection are handled as MIDI events. All rhythm-related data—including rhythm

patterns, auto accompaniment patterns, Rhythm Sequences, etc.—also consist of

MIDI messages.

MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) allows electronic musical instruments to

communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control

Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages.

Voice number (with what Voice) 01 (grand piano)

Note number (with which key) 60 (C3)

Note on (when was it pressed) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note)

Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong)

Connections

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

159

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

MIDI Messages of the Electone

MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: the Channel Messages and System

Messages. Channel Messages consist of data related to the performance on the

keyboard for a speciﬁc channel. System Messages consist of data that allows several

MIDI devices to communicate with each other.

Channel Messages

Each time you play the keyboard on the Electone, channel messages (indicating which

keys are played and how strongly) are transmitted via a speciﬁc channel. Similarly, the

Electone can be played remotely when receiving this data from an external keyboard.

Note On: Indicates which keys are played with the note numbers 0 through 127.

The reception note range is C-2 (0) – G8 (127), C3 = 60.

Note Off: Generated when a key is released.

Velocity: Indicates how strongly the key is played. The range is 1 – 127.

For more detailed information, see “MIDI Data Format” on page 168 and “MIDI

Implementation Chart” on page 178.

• Program Change

Program Change messages allow you to change Voices in the middle of a song. With

these messages you can change the Registrations of the Electone. For more detailed

information, see “MIDI Data Format” on page 168 and “MIDI Implementation

Chart” on page 178.

• Control Change

Control Change Messages let you select Voice banks, control the volume, panning,

modulation, portamento time, brightness and various other sound parameters, through

speciﬁc Control Change numbers.

For more detailed information on the Control Change messages available on the

Electone, see “MIDI Data Format” on page 168 and “MIDI Implementation Chart”

on page 178.

System Messages

• System Exclusive Messages

System Exclusive messages are used to exchange the system and Voice/Registration

data.

Connections

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

160

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

MIDI Channels

MIDI data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 – 16,

the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent

over one MIDI cable.

Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts

over a speciﬁc channel. Your home TV set receives many different programs

simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to

watch the desired program.

MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends MIDI

data on a speciﬁc MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to

the receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive

Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will sound

according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument.

The receive channel of the Electone is ﬁxed at channel 1 for the Upper Keyboard,

channel 2 for the Lower Keyboard, and channel 3 for the Pedalboard. This means that

when you are using another MIDI device to play the Electone’s Voices, you must set

the MIDI transmit channel(s) of the connected device to match the receive channel(s)

of the Electone. You can select the transmit channel for each keyboard (Upper, Lower

and Pedal) from channels 1 – 16. See page 161 for more information.

Weather Report

NEWS

MIDI Transmit channel 2 MIDI Receive channel 2

MIDI

cable

Connections

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

161

When you connect your Electone with a second MIDI device (such as a synthesizer or

computer), you can determine how the Electone controls that MIDI device, or how the

Electone is controlled.

To select the MIDI page:

Press the [UTILITY] button.

The Utility display appears. The MIDI Pages are found on Pages 3 – 5.

Use the PAGE buttons to select Pages 3 – 5.

Internal/External

Switches control over the displayed items between the Electone (Internal) or the

connected device (External).

1 Lead

Determines Internal or External control of the Lead Voice.

Press the [B] button to make the indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to select the setting.

Internal: The Lead Voice is played from the Upper Keyboard of the

Electone. (If the To Lower function is on, it is played from Lower Keyboard.)

External: The Lead Voice is played from the connected instrument via

MIDI channel 4.

2 Synchro

Determines the source of the timing control, for rhythm synchronization

purposes.

Press the [C] button to make the indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to select the setting.

Internal: Pressing the Rhythm [START] or [SYNCHRO START] button

on the panel controls and synchronizes to any connected devices (e.g.,

sequencer, etc.).

External: Starting the rhythm of a connected rhythm machine also starts

the rhythm of the Electone.

MIDI Control

Internal/External Display

<æy∫/LANGUAGE> ⁄

’i-y∫ ”ENGLISH

<INT/EXT> LEAD÷INT.‹

SYNC¿INT. EXP.÷AUTO

Connections

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

162

3 Expression

Determines the control of the expression pedal functions. Ordinarily, this

control is set to Auto. Press the [D] button to make the indicator ﬂash, then

use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the setting.

Auto: Internal and External is automatically switched.

Internal: You can manually control the expression pedal even during

M.D.R. playback.

External: While playing the M.D.R. or receiving MIDI messages, the

expression pedal is invalid. (The volume is controlled by the recorded data in

a USB ﬂash memory or received MIDI data.)

For setting the channels over which MIDI information will be transmitted. Any

channel from 1 through 16 can be assigned to each keyboard, the Upper

Keyboard, the Lower Keyboard and the Pedalboard. The MIDI messages on

each keyboard will be sent on the channels set here. You must set the transmit

channel here to match the receive channel of the connected device.

1 Upper Keyboard

You can select the channel for the Upper Keyboard.

Press the [B] button to make the indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to select the setting.

2 Lower Keyboard

You can select the channel for the Lower Keyboard.

Press the [C] button to make the indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to select the setting.

3 Pedalboard

You can select the channel for the Pedalboard.

Press the [D] button to make the indicator ﬂash, then use the DATA

CONTROL dial to select the setting.

Deletes unnecessary MIDI data and keeps it from being transmitted from the

Electone. Rhythm start/stop messages can be ﬁltered on the Electone.

Successive presses [C] button alternates between being transmitted (Off) and

not transmitted (On).

MIDI Out Channel Display

MIDI Out Filter Display

<MIDI OUT CH> UK÷ 1›

LK¿ 2 PK÷ 3

<MIDI OUT FILTER> ﬁ

’RHYTHM

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

163

Appendix

Carefully read these instructions BEFORE assembling the Electone.

Open the package, take out the two styrofoam pads from the both sides of the package, and carefully

place the main unit on top of the pads as shown.

Take care not to pinch AC power cord plug between the pads and Main unit.

Take out all parts from the package.

Please conﬁrm that all parts shown in the illustration are provided.

When you take out the Speaker Unit, always hold the bottom of the Speaker Unit, not holding the Grill Net.

Assembly Instructions

Be careful not to confuse any of the parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction by following the

procedures given below.

Be sure to assemble the Electone with two or more people.

Don’t use any screws other than the ones speciﬁed and included in this package. Use of incorrect screws can cause

damage and malfunction.

Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing assembly.

Make sure to perform all assembly operations on a ﬂat surface.

To disassemble, reverse the procedures.

You need a Phillips (+) screwdriver to assemble the Electone.

Long screws (ø6 X 25 mm): 4 pcs.

Short screws (ø5 X 12 mm): 8 pcs.

Screw caps: 4 pcs.

Bench Board

Bench

Legs: 4 pcs.

Pedalboard cord clamps: 2 pcs.

Main Unit

Music Rest

Pedalboard Unit

Sideboard

(Left)

Sideboard

(Right)

Speaker

Unit

Grill Net

Attached to the Speaker Unit

Styrofoam pads

Take out the styrofoam pads, and

place the Main Unit on top of the pads.

Dust Cover

Appendix

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

164

Mount the Sideboards onto the Pedalboard

unit.

Be sure not to confuse the Right and Left

Sideboards.

3-1 Raise the Pedalboard as shown in the illustration

below.

3-2 Position each screw hole on both the Pedalboard

and Sideboards as shown in the illustration and

mount the Sideboards onto the Pedalboard using

the 4 short screws (2 screws on each Sideboard).

3-3 Stand the Pedalboard after securing the screws.

Mount the Speaker Unit onto the Sideboards.

4-1 Remove the Grill Net from the Speaker Unit.

4-2 With the help of another person, hold the Speaker

unit horizontally, and slide it from the rear into

place along the brackets.

Take care not to drop the Speaker unit or to pinch your

ﬁnger(s) between the Speaker unit and Sideboard.

4-3 While holding the Sideboard(s) to the Speaker

unit, fasten the four short screws from the rear, to

secure the Speaker unit to the Sideboards. Cover

the four screw holes on the rear side with the

corresponding screw caps.

Mount the Main Unit.

5-1 As shown in the illustration, hold the Main unit

horizontally (with two people), and place it on the

front side of the Speaker unit so that the arm at the

bottom of the Main unit comes in front of the

Sideboards, then slide it to the rear side.

Take care not to drop the Main unit or to pinch your

ﬁnger(s) between the Speaker unit and Main unit.

Push the Sideboard

toward the Pedalboard

Short/black screws

Screw caps

Short screws

Push the Sideboard

toward the Speaker unit

Push the Sideboard

toward the Speaker unit

Short

screws

1. Place down so that

the arm comes in

front of the Sideboard

Arm

2. Slide to the rear side

Appendix

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

165

5-2 Use the four long screws to fasten the Main unit to

the Sideboards as shown in the illustration.

Fit the Grill Net onto the Speaker.

First, align the net with the bottom line, then

secure it to the speaker assembly.

Connect the Pedalboard cord and Speaker

cord to the Main Unit.

Make sure that the latches on each plug of the

cords face toward you, and connect them to each

socket securely.

Fix the Pedalboard cord to the Sideboard

using the Pedalboard cord clamps.

8-1 Afﬁx the two Pedalboard cord clamps to the rear

side of the Speaker unit and the lower inside of the

Left Sideboard as shown in the illustration.

8-2 Insert the Pedalboard cord in the clamps.

Long screw

Fasten the Grill Net by

inserting the knobs

into the holes.

Speaker cord Pedalboard cord

Shut the clamp

after inserting

the cord.

Appendix

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

166

Place the music rest on the Electone.

Turn on the Electone’s power switch and

conﬁrm that the Electone can be played, and

that the assembly is successful.

BENCH ASSEMBLY

Turn the bench board over and put the legs in place,

one by one, at the corners of the bench board, then

tighten each nut using the included wrench. Be sure

to put the washer between each leg and nut as

shown.

Leg

Bench

board

Nut

Washer

After completing the assembly, please check

the following items.

• Are there any parts left over?

→ Review all assembly procedures.

• Is the Electone clear of doors and other movable

ﬁxtures?

→ Move the Electone to an appropriate location.

• Does the Electone make a rattling noise when

you shake it?

→ Tighten all screws.

• Can the Electone be turned on?

→ Conﬁrm that the AC power cord plug is securely

connected to an appropriate power outlet.

• Does the Electone produce sounds?

→ Conﬁrm that the Speaker cord plug and the Pedalboard

cord plug are securely connected to each socket on the Main

unit.

If the Electone creaks or is otherwise unsteady when

you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly

instructions and tighten all screws again.

Appendix

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

167

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Installing the Floppy Disk Drive

The optional UD-FD01 ﬂoppy disk drive can be installed

to the bottom of the instrument by using the included

ﬂoppy disk drive case and screws. Have a Phillips-head (+)

screwdriver ready.

Remove the three backing papers from the

adhesive tape in the case, and ﬁt the ﬂoppy

disk drive into the case.

Fold the USB cable inside the case as

shown.

Attach the drive and case assembly to the

right underside of the instrument, using the

included four screws (4 mm x 10 mm).

Connect the USB cable to the [USB TO

DEVICE B] terminal.

Installing Optional Hardware

Dual-sided

adhesive tape

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

168

Appendix

1. Channel Messages

1.1 EL Mode

MIDI Data Format

Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks

8n, nn, 00-7F Note Off 1ch

2ch

3ch

(4ch)*

5-14ch

15ch

PEDAL

LEAD 1

Keyboard Percussion

9n, nn, 00

9n, nn, 01-7F

Note Off

Note On

1ch

2ch

3ch

(4ch)*

5-14ch

15ch

(1ch)*

(2ch)*

(3ch)*

PEDAL

LEAD 1

Keyboard Percussion

An, nn, 00-7F Polyphonic After Touch 5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 00, 00-7F

Bn, 20, 00-7F

Bank select 5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 01, 00-7F Modulation 5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 04, 00-7F 2nd Expression 16ch

(4ch)*

Control

LEAD 1

Bn, 05, 00-7F Portamento Time 5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 06, 00-7F

Bn, 26, 00-7F

Data Entry 5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 07, 00-7F Volume 5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 0A, 00-7F Pan 5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 0B, 00-7F Expression 16ch

5-14ch

16ch Control

Bn, 40, 00-7F Hold 5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 41, 00-7F Portamento 5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 42, 00-7F Sostenuto 5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 43, 00-7F Soft Pedal 5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 47, 00-7F Resonance 5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 48, 00-7F Release Time 5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 49, 00-7F Attack Time 5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 4A, 00-7F Brightness 5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 4B, 00-7F Decay Time 5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 4C, 00-7F Vibrato Rate 5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 4D, 00-7F Vibrato Depth 5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 4E, 00-7F Vibrato Delay 5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 54, 00-7F Portamento Control 5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 5B, 00-7F Reverb Send Level 5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 5D, 00-7F Chorus Send Level 5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 5E, 00-7F Variation Effect Send Level 5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 60, 00-7F

Bn, 61, 00-7F

Data Increment

Data Decrement

5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 62, 00-7F

Bn, 63, 00-7F

NRPN LSB

NRPN MSB

5-14ch ˛ XG

Bn, 64, 00-7F

Bn, 65, 00-7F

RPN LSB

RPN MSB

5-14ch ˛ XG

“˛” indicates “Not available.”

“

Ø” indicates “Available.”

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

169

Appendix

* Can be changed in the MIDI settings (page 161).

** Can be output when assigned to channel 4.

1.2 XG Mode

Bn, 78, 00

Bn, 79, 00

Bn, 7B, 00

Bn, 7C, 00

Bn, 7D, 00

Bn, 7E, 00

Bn, 7F, 00

All Sound Off

Reset All Controllers

All Note Off

Omni Off

Omni On

Mono

Poly

5-14ch ˛ XG

Cn, nn Program Change 5-14ch

16ch

Control

Dn, 00-7F After Touch 1ch

2ch

3ch

(4ch)*

5-14ch

(1ch)*

(2ch)*

(3ch)*

PEDAL

LEAD 1

En, 00-7F, 00-7F Pitch Bend 5-14ch XG

Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks

8n, nn, 00-7F Note Off 1-16ch ˛

9n, nn, 00

9n, nn, 01-7F

Note On

Note Off

1-16ch

(1ch)*

(2ch)*

(3ch)*

PEDAL

An, nn, 00-7F Polyphonic After Touch 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 00, 00-7F

Bn, 20, 00-7F

Bank select 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 01, 00-7F Modulation

1-16ch

Bn, 04, 00-7F 2nd Expression ˛˛

Bn, 05, 00-7F Portamento Time 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 06, 00-7F

Bn, 26, 00-7F

Data Entry 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 07, 00-7F Volume 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 0A, 00-7F Pan 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 0B, 00-7F Expression

1-16ch

16ch Control

Bn, 40, 00-7F Hold 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 41, 00-7F Portamento 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 42, 00-7F Sostenuto 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 43, 00-7F Soft Pedal 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 47, 00-7F Resonance 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 48, 00-7F Release Time 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 49, 00-7F Attack Time 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 4A, 00-7F Brightness 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 4B, 00-7F Decay Time 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 4C, 00-7F Vibrato Rate 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 4D, 00-7F Vibrato Depth 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 4E, 00-7F Vibrato Delay 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 54, 00-7F Portamento Control 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 5B, 00-7F Reverb Send Level 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 5D, 00-7F Chorus Send Level 1-16ch ˛

Bn, 5E, 00-7F Variation Effect Send Level 1-16ch ˛

Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

170

Appendix

* Can be changed in the MIDI settings (page 161).

** Can be output when assigned to channel 4.

2. Realtime Messages

* Received only when in the Ext. mode

3. System Exclusive Messages

3.1 Format

Universal Realtime Messages

Bn, 60, 00-7F

Bn, 61, 00-7F

Data Increment

Data Decrement

1-16ch ˛

Bn, 62, 00-7F

Bn, 63, 00-7F

NRPN LSB

NRPN MSB

1-16ch ˛

Bn, 64, 00-7F

Bn, 65, 00-7F

RPN LSB

RPN MSB

1-16ch ˛

Bn, 78, 00

Bn, 79, 00

Bn, 7B, 00

Bn, 7C, 00

Bn, 7D, 00

Bn, 7E, 00

Bn, 7F, 00

All Sound Off

Reset All Controllers

All Note Off

Omni Off

Omni On

Mono

Poly

1-16ch ˛

Cn, 00-7F Program Change

1-16ch

16ch Control

Dn, 00-7F After Touch

1-16ch

(1ch)*

(2ch)*

(3ch)*

PEDAL

En, 00-7F, 00-7F Pitch Bend 1-16ch ˛

Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks

EL mode XG mode

F8 Clock Ø* ˛Ø

FA Start Ø˛ Ø

FC Stop Ø˛ Ø

FE Active Sensing ØØ Ø

FF Reset ˛˛ ˛

Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit

F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 01, SS, TT, F7

GM2 Master Volume Ø˛

F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 03, SS, TT, F7

GM2 Master Fine Tuning Ø˛

F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 04, 00, TT, F7

GM2 Master Coarse Tuning Ø˛

F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 05, 01, 01, 01, 01, 01, PP, VV, ..., F7

GM2 Reverb Parameter Ø˛

F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 05, 01, 01, 01, 01, 02, PP, VV, ..., F7

GM2 Chorus Parameter Ø˛

F0, 7F, 7F, 09, 01, 0n, PP, VV, ..., F7

GM2 After Touch Parameter Ø˛

F0, 7F, 7F, 09, 03, 0n, CC, PP, VV, ..., F7

GM2 Control Change Parameter Ø˛

F0, 7F, 7F, 0A, 01, 0n, KK, CC, PP, VV, ..., F7

GM2 Key-Based Controller Ø˛

Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

171

Appendix

Universal Non-Realtime Messages

XG Native

Clavinova Exclusive

Message Exclusive

Electone Exclusive

˛: don’t care N: Device Number (only “0”) ID: Model ID (ELB-01=4FH)

Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit

F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 01, F7

GM ON Ø˛

F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 03, F7

GM2 ON Ø˛

F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 02, F7

GM OFF Ø˛

F0, 7E, 7F, 08, 08, JJ, GG, MM, ..data.., F7

GM2 Scale/Octave Tuning Ø˛

Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit

F0, 43, 1N, 4C, AH, AM, AL, ..data.., F7 XG Parameter Change Ø˛

F0, 43, 0N, 4C, BH, BL, AH, AM, AL, ..data.., cc, F7 XG Bulk Dump Ø˛

F0, 43, 1N, 27, 30, 00, 00, MM, LL, cc, F7 XG Master Tuning Ø˛

Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit

F0, 43, 73, 01, 02, F7

Request for Internal Synch. Mode

Request for External Synch. Mode

Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit

F0, 43, 60, 7A, F7 Rhythm Start Ø˛

F0, 43, 60, 7D, F7 Rhythm Stop Ø˛

Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit

F0, 43, 70, 70, 00, ..data.., F7

Bulk Dump Data Ø

F0, 43, 70, ID, 00, F7 Model ID Data ˛Ø

F0, 43, 70, 70, 30, F7 Request-to-Send Model ID Data Ø˛

F0, 43, 70, 70, 38, 7F, F7

Bulk Dump Acknowledged

Bulk Dump Unacknowledged

F0, 43, 70, 70, 40, nn(*1), 7F, F7

Switch ON

Switch OFF

F0, 43, 70, 70, 40, 50, TL, TH, F7 Tempo ØØ

F0, 43, 70, 78, 41, cc, dd, F7(*2) Panel Switch Events ØØ

F0, 43, 70, 78, 42, 3C, ..data.., F7 Current Registration Data ØØ

F0, 43, 70, 78, 44, ..data..(*3), F7 MIDI Parameters ØØ

F0, 43, 70, 70, 70, nn(*4), F7 MDR Ø˛

F0, 43, 70, 70, 73, F7 EL ON Ø˛

F0, 43, 70, 70, 78, 00, 00, F7 Bar Signal ˛Ø

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

172

Appendix

*1. Switches

*2. Panel Switch Events

Selectors

Volume

To Lower

Sustain

Keyboard Percussion

Disable

nn Switch Receive Transmit

45H Left Footswitch ØØ

47H Knee Lever ØØ

4DH Solo Bar ØØ

cc Switch dd Remarks

Code Receive Rx Range

Transmit

Tx Range

0F Registration Memory [1-16] Ø [00-0F] ˛ -

cc Switch dd Remarks

Code Receive Rx Range

Transmit

Tx Range

12 Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN

13 Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN

14 Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN

15 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN

16 Lead Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN

17 Pedal Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN

18 Pedal Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN

1A Percussion Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN

1B Reverb Depth Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Depth Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN

cc Switch dd Remarks

Code Receive Rx Range

Transmit

Tx Range

36 Lead Voice 1 To Lower

[TO LOWER ▼]

Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

37 Pedal Voice 1 To Lower

[TO LOWER ▲]

Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

38 Pedal Voice 2 To Lower

[TO LOWER ▲]

Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

cc Switch dd Remarks

Code Receive Rx Range

Transmit

Tx Range

50 Upper Sustain [UPPER (KNEE)] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

51 Lower Sustain [LOWER (KNEE)] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

52 Pedal Sustain [PEDAL] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

cc Switch dd Remarks

Code Receive Rx Range

Transmit

Tx Range

5B Keyboard Percussion [1] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

5C Keyboard Percussion [2] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

cc Switch dd Remarks

Code Receive Rx Range

Transmit

Tx Range

5F Disable [D.] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

MIDI Exclusive Format

F0, 43, 70, 78, 41, cc, dd, F7

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

173

Appendix

Rotary Speaker

Rhythm Sequence

*3. MIDI Parameter

Voice Section Parameters

Panel Voice Parameters

(Address mm: 0 – 4, 6 – 7 = UK1

UK2

LK1

LK2

LEAD 1

PEDAL 1

PEDAL 2)

cc Switch dd Remarks

Code Receive Rx Range

Transmit

Tx Range

60 Rotary Speaker Speed

[ROTARY SP SPEED]

Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

cc Switch dd Remarks

Code Receive Rx Range

Transmit

Tx Range

61 Sequence 1 [SEQ.1] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

62 Sequence 2 [SEQ.2] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

63 Sequence 3 [SEQ.3] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

64 Sequence 4 [SEQ.4] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

10 00-07 00-0D 5 00-7F

00-7F

00-02

Voice Assign Number 00-7F

00-7F

00-02

Ø 00-7F

00-7F

00-02

Ø 00-7F

00-7F

10 00-07 10 1 00-0D Voice Selector Number 00-0D Ø 00-0D Ø 00-0D

10 00-07 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F ˛ -

10 00-07 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

10 00-07 14 1 00-04 Feet 00:PRESET

01:16'

02:8'

03:4'

04:2'

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-04

10 00-07 15 1 00-7F Pan 00:LEFT

40:CENTER

7F:RIGHT

Ø 00-7F Ø 08-78

10 00-07 16 1 00-7F Touch Tone Initial Touch 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

10 00-07 19 1 00-7F User Vibrato 00:PRESET

01:USER

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

10 00-07 1A 1 00-7F Vibrato Delay 00:SHORT

7F:LONG

Ø 00-7F Ø 02-1A

10 00-07 1B 1 00-7F Vibrato Depth 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-54

10 00-07 1C 1 00-7F Vibrato Speed 00:SLOW

7F:FAST

Ø 00-7F Ø 3C-6C

10 04-07 1F 1 00-7F TO LOWER▼/▲ 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F ˛ -

10 04-05 20 1 00-02 Slide (On/Knee Lever/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

02:Knee Lever

Ø 00-02 Ø 00-01

10 04-05 21 1 00-7F Slide Time 00:FAST

7F:SLOW

Ø 00-7F Ø 02-7F

10 00-07 22 1 00-7F Tune/Detune 00:Down

40:Center

7F:Up

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

10 00-01/

04-07

23 1 00-7F 2nd Expression Pitch Bend 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F ˛ 00-01

10 00-05 24 1 00-7F Footswitch Glide Control 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

MIDI Exclusive Format

F0, 43, 70, 78, 44, hh, mm, ll, ..., F7

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

174

Appendix

Keyboard Parameters

Sustain Parameters (Address mm: 0 – 2 = UK, LK, PEDAL)

Keyboard Percussion Parameters (Address mm: 1 – 2 = K.B.P. [1], K.B.P. [2])

10 00-07 25 1 3A-46 Transpose 3A:KeyDown

40:Normal

46:KeyUp

Ø 3A-46 Ø 3A-46

10 00-07 2A 1 00-7F Volume Mute 00:Mute OFF

01:Mute ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

10 00-07 40 3 00

00-7F

Effect 1 Type MSB/LSB 00

00-7F

Ø 00

00-7F

Ø 00

00-7F

10 00-07 41 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 1 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 42 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 2 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 43 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 3 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 44 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 4 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 45 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 5 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 46 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 6 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 47 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 7 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 48 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 8 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 49 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 9 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 4A 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 10 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 4B 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 11 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 4C 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 12 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 4D 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 13 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 4E 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 14 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 4F 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 15 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

10 00-07 50 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 16 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

12 00-02 00 1 00-7F Sustain (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F ˛ -

12 00-02 01 1 00-7F Length 00:Short

7F:Long

Ø 00-7F Ø 15-3D

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

12 01-02 10 1 00-7F Keyboard Percussion (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F ˛ -

12 01-02 11 1 00-08 Keyboard Percussion Menu 00:PRESET

01:USER 1

02:USER 2

03:USER 3

04:USER 4

05:USER 5

06:USER 6

07:USER 7

08:USER 8

Ø 00-08 Ø 00-08

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

175

Appendix

Rhythm

Rhythm Parameters

Rhythm Sequence Parameters

Accompaniment Parameters

A.B.C. Function Parameters

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

13 00 00-0B 2 0000-7F7F Rhythm Assign Number 0000-7F7F Ø 00-7F

00-7F

Ø 00-7F

00-7F

13 00 10 1 00-0B Rhythm Selector Number 00-0B Ø 00-0B Ø 00-0B

13 00 11 1 00-7F Percussion Volume 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F ˛ -

13 00 12 1 00-7F Percussion Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

13 00 13 1 00-7F 2nd Expression

Tempo Control (On/Off)

00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F ˛ 00-01

13 00 14 1 00-7F Footswitch Rhythm Control 00:INTRO 1

01:INTRO 2

02:INTRO 3

08:MAIN A

09:MAIN B

0A:MAIN C

0B:MAIN D

18:BREAK

20:ENDING 1

21:ENDING 2

22:ENDING 3

7E:STOP

7F:OFF

(INTRO 1 –

STOP)

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

13 00 15 1 00-7F Add Drum (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 00 16 1 00-7F Main Drum (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 00 17 1 00-7F Chord 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 00 18 1 00-7F Chord 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 00 19 1 00-7F Pad (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 00 1A 1 00-7F Phrase 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 00 1B 1 00-7F Phrase 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 00 1C 1 00-7F Auto Fill (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

13 01 00-03 1 00-7F Sequence [SEQ.1] – [SEQ.4] 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F ˛ -

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

13 02 11 1 00-7F Accompaniment Volume 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

13 02 12 1 00-7F Accompaniment Reverb

(Send Level)

00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

13 03 00 1 00-7F Auto Bass Chord Mode 00:OFF

01:Single Finger

02:Fingered

03:Custom A.B.C.

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03

13 03 01 1 00-7F Lower Memory (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 03 02 1 00-7F Pedal Memory (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

176

Appendix

M.O.C. Function Parameters

Section Parameters

Keyboard Percussion Parameters

Overall

System Parameters

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

13 04 00 1 00-7F Melody On Chord Mode 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 04 01 1 00-7F M.O.C. Knee Lever Control

(On/Off)

00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F ˛ 00-01

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

13 05 00 1 00-7F Intro 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 05 01 1 00-7F Intro 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 05 02 1 00-7F Intro 3 (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 05 08 1 00-7F Main A (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 05 09 1 00-7F Main B (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 05 0A 1 00-7F Main C (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 05 0B 1 00-7F Main D (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 05 18 1 00-7F Break (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 05 20 1 00-7F Ending 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 05 21 1 00-7F Ending 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

13 05 22 1 00-7F Ending 3 (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

13 10 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

13 10 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

14 00 00 1 00-7F Disable (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F ˛ -

14 00 02 1 3A-46 Transpose 3A:KeyDown

40:Normal

46:KeyUp

Ø 3A-46 Ø 3A-46

14 00 03 1 01-0C 2nd Expression Range 01:100 C

0C:1200 C

Ø 01-0C ˛ 01-0C

14 00 04 1 00-7F Footswitch Mode 00:OFF

01:Rhythm

02:Glide

03:

Rotary Speaker

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03

14 00 05 1 00-7F Pitch 00:PitchDown

40:Normal

7F:PitchUp

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F

14 00 06 1 00-7F Footswitch Glide Time 00:FAST

7F:SLOW

Ø 00-7F Ø 04-1C

14 00 08 1 00-7F MIDI Control Expression (INT/EXT) 00:Internal

01:External

Ø 00-7F ˛ -

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

177

Appendix

Effect Parameters (Overall): Reverb

Effect Parameters (Overall): Rotary Speaker

4. MDR

14 00 09 1 00-7F MIDI Control Lead 1 (INT/EXT) 00:Internal

01:External

Ø 00-7F ˛ -

14 00 0A 3 00-05

00-07

00-0B

Registration Menu 00-05

00-07

00-0B

Ø 00-05

00-07

00-0B

Ø 00-05

00-07

00-0B

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

14 01 00 1 00-7F Reverb Depth 00:MIN

7F:MAX

Ø 00-7F ˛ -

14 01 01 1 00-7F Reverb Time (Panel) 00:FAST

7F:SLOW

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-45

14 01 02 3 00

00-7F

Reverb Type (Panel) 00

00-7F

Ø 00

00-7F

Ø 00

00-7F

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

14 03 00 1 00-7F Rotary Speaker Speed (On/Off) 00:OFF

01:ON

Ø 00-7F ˛ -

14 03 01 1 00-7F Rotary Speaker Speed Control

Mode

00:STOP

01:SLOW

Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01

14 03 02 2 0000-

007F

Rotary Speaker Speed Control

Speed

0000:SLOW

007F:FAST

Ø 0000-007F Ø 0040-007F

nn Command Receive Transmit

01H Play Start Ø˛

02H Play Stop Ø˛

03H Record Start Ø˛

04H Record Stop Ø˛

05H Fast Forward Start Ø˛

06H Fast Forward Stop Ø˛

09H Rhythm Pointer Reset Ø˛

Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range

hh mm ll

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

178

Appendix

0, 32

1, 5, 7, 10

6, 38

96, 97

64-67

71-78

84, 91, 93, 94

98-99, 100-101

:True Voice

1, 2, 3, 16

(

1-16

Ø 9nH, v=1-127

˛ 9nH, v=0

(

************************

*1;

*2;

*3;

*4;

*5;

*7;

*9;

*10;

*6; CONTROL only

*8; External Mode only

1ch: UK, 2ch: LK, 3ch: PEDAL, 16ch: CONTROL

1ch: UK, 2ch: LK, 3ch: PEDAL, 4ch: LEAD1, 5-14ch: XG, 15ch: KEYBOARD PERCUSSION, 16ch: CONTROL

UK: 36-96, LK: 36-96, PEDAL: 36-60

UK, LK, PEDAL, LEAD1: 36-96, XG: 0-127, PERCUSSION: 3-127

XG only

UK only

CONTROL: 0-15

UK, LK, PEDAL, CONTROL: 0-15 XG: 0-127

Mode 3

************************

36-96

(

************************

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY

1-3, 5-16

(

Ø 9nH, v=1-127

˛ 9nH, v=0 or 8nH

(

5, 6)

(

10)

(

Ø (120)

(

Ø (121)

(

Ø (123-127)

(

Mode 3

0-127

(

Bank Select

Expression

Data Entry

Expression

Data Entry SW

Sound Controller

NRPN, RPN

(FAH, FCH)

Ø : Yes

˛ : No

Date: 03-Mar-2005

Version: 1.00

YAMAHA [Electone-EL mode] / Model: ELB-01

Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO

Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

TransmittedFunction Recognized Remarks

Basic

Channel

Note

Number

Velocity

After

Touch

Pitch Bend

Control

Change

Program

Change

System Exclusive

System

Common

System

Real Time

Aux

Messages

Notes

Mode

Default

Changed

Note on

Note off

Key's

Ch's

:Clock

:Commands

:All Sound Off

:Reset All Cntrls

:Local On/Off

:All Notes Off

:Active Sense

:Reset

:Song Position

:Song Select

:Tune

:True number

Default

Messages

Altered

MIDI Implementation Chart

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

179

Appendix

MIDI Implementation chart

0, 32

1, 5, 7, 10

6, 38

96, 97

64-67

71-78

84, 91, 93, 94

98-99, 100-101

:True Voice

1, 2, 3, 16

1-16

Ø 9nH, v=1-127

˛ 9nH, v=0

Ø 0-15

************************

*1;

Same as that in the EL mode

Mode3

************************

36-96

************************

1-16

Ø 9nH, v=1-127

˛ 9nH, v=0 or 8nH

Mode 3

0-127

Bank Select

Expression

Data Entry

Expression

Data Entry SW

Sound Controller

NRPN, RPN

Date: 03-Mar-2005

Version: 1.00

YAMAHA [Electone-XG mode] / Model: ELB-01

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY

Ø : Yes

˛ : No

Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO

Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

Ø (120)

Ø (121)

Ø (123-127)

Transmitted

(

Function Recognized Remarks

Basic

Channel

Note

Number

Velocity

After

Touch

Pitch Bend

Control

Change

Program

Change

System Exclusive

System

Common

System

Real Time

Aux

Messages

Notes

Mode

Default

Changed

Note on

Note off

Key's

Ch's

:Clock

:Commands

:Song Position

:Song Select

:Tune

:True number

Default

Messages

Altered

:All Sound Off

:Reset All Cntrls

:Local On/Off

:All Notes Off

:Active Sense

:Reset

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

180

Appendix

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

GENERAL OPERATION

The sound is not heard for about 10 seconds after

turning the power on.

This is normal; the Electone takes a while to start up.

A cracking noise is sometimes heard. Noise may be produced when either an electrical appliance is turned on or an

electric power tool (such as drill) is used in the proximity of the Electone. If this

occurs, plug the Electone into an electrical outlet located as far as possible

from the device that seems to be the source of the problem.

Interference from radio, TV, or other sources occurs. This is caused by the proximity of a high-power broadcasting station, an

amateur ham radio setup or a mobile phone.

The sound of the Electone causes surrounding

objects to resonate.

Because the Electone is capable of producing powerful bass sounds,

resonance may be caused in surrounding objects, such as cabinets or glass

windows. To avoid this, relocate the objects or lower the Electone’s volume.

Some of the LEDs in the DISPLAY SELECT section do

not light.

The lamps above the [RHYTHM SEQUENCE] button and the [SUSTAIN]

button will light up when the function is turned on in the display.

The sound is too small even when the volume is set to

its maximum.

• The MASTER VOLUME dial may be set around the minimum position. Turn it

clockwise.

• The Expression Pedal may not be pressed down. Press it down with your

toe.

The Electone panel does not function normally or the

content of the memorized data has changed.

This happens very rarely. Occasionally, power surges and spikes due to

electrical storms or other reasons may cause the Electone to malfunction and/

or alter the contents of memorized data. If this happens, perform the Factory

Set operation to reset the Electone (page 20).

VOICES/RHYTHMS

When a key is pressed, two or more Voices sound. Perhaps the Voice of the Voice section 2 sounds as for the Lower Keyboard or

Pedalboard. Turn off the Voice of the Voice section 2 in the Voice display, or

set the volume setting to minimum after switching to the Voice section 2 (page

29).

As for the Upper Keyboard, the Lead Voice may sound in addition to the Voice

of the Voice section 2. Turn off the Lead Voice in the Voice display after

switching to the Voice section 2.

The pitch may sound excessively high on the

Pedalboard and low in the higher registers of the

Lower and Upper keyboards.

This may occur when you compare the Electone’s sounds with that of a piano.

Because of the difference of the harmonics structure, the tuning system of the

Electone is different from the piano in the higher and lower ranges.

Some of the Voices may contain cracking and/or noisy

sounds.

You may ﬁnd these mainly in the wind instrument Voices. These are purposely

added effects to the Voices to reproduce the characteristics of the wind

instruments such as the pipe vibrations, breath noises and squeaks.

When too many keys are pressed, not all of the notes

sound.

Total polyphonic capacity (notes sounding for both Upper and Lower

Keyboards) is 10 notes.

Only one sound is heard when two notes of the Lead

or Pedal Voices are simultaneously played.

For practical performance reasons, the Electone has been designed so that

only one note of the Lead or Pedal Voices can be played at a time.

The Pedal Voices do not sound, even though the

volume is properly set.

• The Single Finger or Fingered Chord mode of Auto Bass Chord is on. Turn

off the mode in the display (page 71).

• TO LOWER buttons in the Pedal Voice sections are turned on. Turn the

function off (page 31).

When keys are pressed, the sounds of percussion

instruments are also heard.

The Keyboard Percussion function has been turned on. When not using the

function, be sure to turn it off (page 77).

Even though a User button’s rhythm has been

selected and started, the pattern does not sound.

Since the User buttons contain User rhythms, no rhythm will sound if a pattern

has not been saved to the selected User button.

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

181

Appendix

EFFECTS

The Initial Touch function does not operate. Adjust the Initial Touch settings in the Voice Condition display (page 42).

The Reverb effect is not applied to the desired Voice

sections, even when the Reverb setting in the Voice

Condition display Page 1 set to maximum.

Increase the Reverb depth for the desired Voice sections in Reverb display.

The Rotary Speaker effect cannot be heard, even

when the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button in the DISPLAY

SELECT section is on.

Rotary Speaker must be selected ﬁrst in Voice Condition display.

ACCOMPANIMENT

The pitch in the Single Finger mode does not change,

even when pressing different keys of the keyboard.

Single Finger mode will only produce notes when played within a ﬁxed octave

interval on the Lower keyboard. If notes with the same letter name are pressed

outside of that range, the chords that are sounded will share the same pitch.

While an Intro/Ending pattern is automatically playing,

the Lower keyboard does not produce any sound,

even when the keys are played.

Since the Accompaniment chords play automatically one after another, the

Lower keyboard is designed not to produce any sound during the playback of

an Intro/Ending pattern.

The Accompaniment cannot be heard even when an

appropriate Accompaniment type is selected and the

rhythm has been started.

• The Accompaniment volume may have been set to 0. Be sure to raise the

Accompaniment volume in the Rhythm Condition display (page 70).

• All Accompaniment parts may be set to off (mute). Set the desired part on

(page 68).

The harmony notes of the Melody On Chord function

cannot be heard.

The Upper keyboard has been set to sound only Lead Voices. Increase the

volume of the Upper Keyboard Voices.

REGISTRATION MEMORY

Certain functions have not been memorized to

Registration Memory.

Some functions cannot be memorized. Refer to page 98.

MUSIC DATA RECORDER

Recording or playback cannot be performed. • The part buttons may have been turned off. Turn the desired part to REC or

PLAY.

• The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording

performance data is 1 MB.

• The media is write-protected. Cancel the write-protect.

• The media/folder may contain EL-format songs. You cannot record to the

media/folder that contains EL-format songs. Create a new folder and record

the song to it.

Recording is stopped before the performance is

ﬁnished.

• The amount of recorded data on the media is close to the maximum limit.

Either use another media or delete the data of unnecessary songs.

• When you overwrite the song, the length of a subsequently recorded part

cannot exceed the length of the previously recorded parts. Delete the

previously recorded song, then record again (page 121).

• The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording

performance data is 1 MB.

An error message appears while entering a folder

name or song name.

• The song/folder name is too long. The capacity is 50 characters.

• The song/folder name may be an invalid name. Refer to page 124.

• The path name is too long. The capacity of the path name is 234

characters. Reduce the layer or shorten the song/folder name to shorten

the path.

The rhythm does not start at the beginning of a

recording, or stops in the middle of the performance.

The M.D.R. is designed so that the rhythm cannot be started at the very

beginning of a recording. If you wish to use the rhythm, start it after the time

indicator appears in the display.

The ﬂoppy disk cannot be formatted when you want to

format an unformatted disk.

Recognizing an unformatted disk takes a few seconds after it is inserted.

Wait about 30 seconds, then try to format again.

The notes of the recording are “stuck” and sound

continuously.

During playback, you may have removed the USB ﬂash memory or ﬂoppy

disk. Whenever you wish to stop playback, always press the [STOP] button

before removing the media.

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

182

Appendix

Speciﬁcations and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or

speciﬁcations at any time without prior notice. Since speciﬁcations, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Speciﬁcations

Electone STAGEA

ELB-01

TONE GENERATION

AWM (2)

KEYBOARD

Upper: 49 (C – C)/Lower: 49 (C – C)/Pedal: 20 (C – G)

Keyboard Type

Basic

Initial Touch

Upper, Lower

REGISTRATION Registration Memory

M. (Memory) 1 – 8 (9 – 16), D. (Disable)

Basic Registration

Registration Menu

240 + 90

VOICE Voice Sections

Upper: 2, Lead: 1, Lower: 2, Pedal: 2

Voice Buttons Upper/Lower

STRINGS, BRASS, WOODWIND, TUTTI, PAD, SYNTH, PIANO, ORGAN,

PERCUSSION, GUITAR, CHOIR, WORLD, USER 1, USER 2

Lead

VIOLIN, SYNTH, FLUTE, TRUMPET, USER 1, TO LOWER

Pedal

CONTRABASS, ELEC. BASS, TIMPANI, SYNTH BASS, USER 1, TO LOWER

Preset Voice

245

EFFECT/CONDITION Sustain

Upper, Lower, Pedal

Reverb

Effects

Reverb, Delay, Karaoke, Chorus, Flanger, Phaser, Tremolo/Auto Pan,

Rotary Speaker, Distortion, Wah, Dynamic, EQ/Enhancer, Thru

RHYTHM Preset Rhythm Pattern

133

Rhythm Buttons

MARCH, WALTZ, SWING & JAZZ, POPS, R&B, LATIN, WORLD MUSIC, BALLAD,

ROCK, DANCE, USER 1, USER 2

Parts

Main Drum, Add Drum

Sections

Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3, Main/Fill In A – D, Break, Auto Fill

ACCOMPANIMENT Accompaniment Parts

Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase1, Phrase 2

Auto Bass Chord

OFF, Single Finger, Fingered Chord, Custom A.B.C.

Memory: Lower, Pedal

Melody On Chord

✔

KEYBOARD

PERCUSSION

Settings

Preset 1, 2, User 1 – 8

Kits

Wonderland Kit, EL, Standard Kit 1, 2, Hit, Room, Rock, Electro, Analog, Jazz, Brush,

Symphony, SFX1, 2, Arabic

Assign

✔

CONTROLS Footswitch Left

Rhythm: Stop, Break, Main A – D, Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3

Glide: Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead 1, Glide Time

Rotary Speaker Speed

Registration Shift

Shift, Jump, User (80)

Expression Pedal

✔

Transpose

-6 – +6

Pitch

A = 427.2 – 452.6 Hz

MIDI Control

✔

Main Controls

POWER on/off, MASTER VOLUME

M.D.R.

• Stop, Play, Custom Play, Rec, Pause, Fast Forward, Rewind

• Tempo (50 – 200%), Repeat Setting, Change Song Name, Remaining Memory, Format,

Song Copy, Song/folder Delete, Convert ELB→EL, Convert EL→ELB, Convert To XG,

Registration Load/Save/Delete, Create folder

Utility

Language (English/Japanese), Version

Display Select

VOICE DISPLAY, A.B.C./M.O.C., FOOTSWITCH, UTILITY, RHYTHM SEQUENCE,

SUSTAIN, REVERB, ROTARY SP SPEED

SOUND SYSTEM Power Ampliﬁers

60 W (Stereo)

Speakers

16 cm x 2, 5 cm x 2

OTHERS LCD Display

20 x 2 Character

Storage

USB x 2

Connectors

PHONES, AUX OUT: L/R, MIDI IN/OUT, USB TO HOST, USB TO DEVICE: A, B

Power Consumption

64 W

Dimensions, Weight

1112.3 (W) x 485.8 (D) x 936 (H) mm, 1123.9 (W) mm (with Music Rest), 55 kg

Bench

596 (W) x 296 (D) x 580 (H) mm, 6.2 kg

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

183

Appendix

[A] – [D] buttons ....................................................................... 17

A.B.C......................................................................................... 71

A.B.C./M.O.C. ........................................................................... 71

Accompaniment........................................................................ 68

Add Drum ................................................................................. 68

Auto Bass Chord....................................................................... 71

Auto Fill ..................................................................................... 60

AUX OUT (L/R)........................................................................ 151

AWM Voice ................................................................................. 8

BAR/BEAT................................................................................. 61

BREAK ...................................................................................... 58

Changing the Song/Folder Name ........................................... 122

Channel Messages ................................................................. 159

Chord 1 ..................................................................................... 69

Chord 2 ..................................................................................... 69

CHORUS (Effect) ................................................................ 45, 53

Control Change....................................................................... 159

Convert EL -> ELB .................................................................. 142

Convert ELB -> EL .................................................................. 141

Convert to XG ......................................................................... 144

Custom A.B.C. .......................................................................... 72

[D.] (Disable) ............................................................................ 99

DATA CONTROL dial.......................................................... 11, 17

DELAY (Effect) .................................................................... 45, 52

Delay (Vibrato) .......................................................................... 44

Delete (Registration Shift) ....................................................... 105

Delete (Song/Folder)............................................................... 139

Depth (Reverb) ......................................................................... 48

Depth (Vibrato) ......................................................................... 44

Display Select (Panel)............................................................... 11

DISTORTION....................................................................... 45, 54

DYNAMIC............................................................................ 45, 55

Effect......................................................................................... 45

Effect Category (Voice)............................................................. 45

Effect List .................................................................................. 52

Effect Parameters ............................................................... 46, 52

Effect Type (Voice) ................................................................... 46

ENDING .................................................................................... 58

EQ/ENHANCER .................................................................. 45, 55

Expression Pedal .................................................................... 162

Expression pedal ...................................................................... 13

Factory Set................................................................................ 20

Fast Forward ........................................................................... 134

Feet............................................................................................42

File ...........................................................................................116

FILL IN .......................................................................................58

Fingered Chord .........................................................................72

FLANGER ............................................................................45, 53

floppy disk ...............................................................................107

Folder ..............................................................................113, 116

Folder Delete ...........................................................................139

Folder Name............................................................................122

FOOTSWITCH .................................................................102, 146

Footswitch (Left) ......................................................................146

Footswitch (Right)....................................................................102

Format (M.D.R.) .......................................................................109

Glide ........................................................................................148

Headphones............................................................................153

Icons........................................................................................116

Index........................................................................................183

indicator.....................................................................................17

Initial Touch ...............................................................................42

Initialize (Factory set) ................................................................20

Initialize (Registration Memory) ...............................................100

Internal/External (MIDI)............................................................161

INTRO........................................................................................58

Jacks and Controls..................................................................151

Jump........................................................................................103

KARAOKE............................................................................45, 52

Keyboard Percussion ................................................................77

Language ..................................................................................19

LCD display...............................................................................17

Lead Voice ................................................................................21

LEAD VOICE (Panel) .................................................................10

Lower Keyboard Voice ..............................................................22

LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2 (Panel) ...................................10

[M.] (Memory)............................................................................98

M.D.R.......................................................................................107

M.O.C. .......................................................................................74

MAIN..........................................................................................58

Main Drum .................................................................................68

MAIN/FILL IN .............................................................................60

MASTER VOLUME.....................................................................13

Index

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

184

Appendix

Melody On Chord ..................................................................... 74

Memory (A.B.C.) ....................................................................... 73

Metronome................................................................................ 67

MIDI ........................................................................................ 157

MIDI Control............................................................................ 161

MIDI IN/OUT ................................................................... 152, 157

MIDI Out.................................................................................. 162

Mode (Rotary Speaker)............................................................. 50

Music Data Recorder (MDR) .................................................. 107

Next (Shift End)....................................................................... 106

Next Regist ............................................................................. 129

Pad............................................................................................ 69

PAGE buttons ........................................................................... 18

PAGE Buttons (Panel)............................................................... 11

Panning..................................................................................... 43

Part (M.D.R.) ........................................................................... 119

Part (Rhythm) ............................................................................ 68

Pause ...................................................................................... 134

Pedal Voice............................................................................... 22

PEDAL VOICE 1/2 (Panel) ........................................................ 10

PHASER .............................................................................. 45, 53

PHONES ................................................................................. 151

Phrase 1.................................................................................... 69

Phrase 2.................................................................................... 69

Pitch ........................................................................................ 150

Pitch (Voice section) ................................................................. 43

Playback ................................................................................. 133

POWER ..................................................................................... 12

PRESET (Effect) ........................................................................ 45

Preset (Vibrato) ......................................................................... 44

Preset Keyboard Percussion .................................................... 77

Program Change .................................................................... 159

Protected Song ....................................................................... 139

Punch-in Recording ................................................................ 121

Recording ............................................................................... 117

Recording (Each Part) ............................................................ 118

Registration Memory................................................................. 97

Registration Menu..................................................................... 14

Registration Menu List .............................................................. 15

Registration Shift..................................................................... 102

Rename................................................................................... 122

Repeat .................................................................................... 135

REVERB .................................................................................... 48

Reverb ...................................................................................... 42

Reverb (Accompaniment)......................................................... 70

REVERB (Effect)........................................................................ 52

Reverb (Rhythm)....................................................................... 62

Reverb (Voice condition) .......................................................... 45

Rewind .................................................................................... 134

Rhythm...................................................................................... 56

Rhythm buttons......................................................................... 56

Rhythm Condition ..................................................................... 62

RHYTHM CONTROL (Panel)..................................................... 10

Rhythm List ............................................................................... 67

Rhythm Menu ............................................................................56

Rhythm Sequence .....................................................................75

ROTARY SP SPEED...................................................................50

ROTARY SPEAKER .............................................................45, 54

Rotary Speaker..........................................................................50

section .......................................................................................58

Shift (Registration Shift) ...........................................................103

Shift End ..................................................................................106

Single Finger .............................................................................72

Slide...........................................................................................47

Song ................................................................................111, 116

Song Copy...............................................................................137

Song Delete.............................................................................139

Song Name..............................................................................122

Specifications ..........................................................................182

Speed (Rotary Speaker)............................................................50

Speed (Vibrato) .........................................................................44

START........................................................................................57

Stop (Shift End) .......................................................................106

Style File Format ..........................................................................5

Sustain.......................................................................................49

SYNCHRO START .....................................................................59

System Exclusive Messages ...................................................159

Tempo (Rhythm)........................................................................61

THRU ...................................................................................45, 55

To Lower....................................................................................31

Top (Shift End).........................................................................106

Touch (Initial touch)...................................................................42

Transpose................................................................................150

Transpose (Voice section).........................................................43

TREMOLO/AUTO PAN ........................................................45, 53

Tune (Voice section)..................................................................43

UD-FD01..................................................................................167

Upper Keyboard Voice..............................................................21

UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2 (Panel) ....................................10

USB TO DEVICE A ..................................................................151

USB TO DEVICE B ..................................................................152

USB TO HOST .........................................................................152

User (Registration Shift) ..........................................................103

User (Vibrato) ............................................................................44

User button (Rhythm) ................................................................63

User button (Voice) ...................................................................32

User Keyboard Percussion .......................................................88

UTILITY....................................................................................150

Version.......................................................................................20

Vibrato .......................................................................................44

Voice (Voice section 2)..............................................................29

Voice buttons.............................................................................25

Voice Condition display.......................................................27, 41

Voice Display.............................................................................23

Voice Menu................................................................................25

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual

185

Appendix

VOICE SECTION....................................................................... 25

Voice section 1 ......................................................................... 25

Voices ....................................................................................... 21

Volume (Accompaniment) ........................................................ 70

Volume (Keyboard Percussion) ................................................ 78

Volume (Rhythm) ................................................................ 57, 62

Volume (Voice).................................................................... 26, 42

Volume (XG)............................................................................ 136

WAH.................................................................................... 45, 54

XG ............................................................................................... 5

Memo

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o

el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,

CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL

Tel: 011-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte

Madero Este-C1107CEK

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 011-4119-7000

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK)

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Switzerland in Zürich

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 044-387-8080

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/

ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Austria (Central Eastern Europe Ofﬁce)

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-602039025

POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Poland Ofﬁce

ul. Wrotkowa 14 02-553 Warsaw, Poland

Tel: 022-500-2925

BULGARIA

Dinacord Bulgaria LTD.

Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa

1528 Soﬁa, Bulgaria

Tel: 02-978-20-25

MALTA

Olimpus Music Ltd.

The Emporium, Level 3, St. Louis Street Msida

MSD06

Tel: 02133-2144

THE NETHERLANDS/

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

FRANCE

Yamaha Music Europe

7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités Pariest,

77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal

en España

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany ﬁlial

Scandinavia

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland – ﬁlial

Denmark

Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany -

Norwegian Branch

Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia)

Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow,

121059, Russia

Tel: 495 626 5005

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Sales & Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2313

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,

Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDIA

Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd.

Spazedge building, Ground Floor, Tower A, Sector

47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon, Haryana, India

Tel: 0124-485-3300

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 021-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,

Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3467-3300

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 03-78030900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music (Asia) PRIVATE LIMITED

Blk 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00,

Singapore 530202, Singapore

Tel: 6747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

4, 6, 15 and 16th ﬂoor, Siam Motors Building,

891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,

Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2622

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Sales & Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2313

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Works LTD

P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,

New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Sales & Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2313

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

DMI4

U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division

WF12580 209MWAP*.*-01C1

Printed in China

Yamaha Downloads

http://download.yamaha.com/

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Documenttranscriptie

ELB-01 Owner’s Manual EN PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. Do not open • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Location • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multipleconnector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. Assembly • Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • When setting up the instrument, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. • Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. 2 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual (1)B-9 1/2 Connections Using the bench (If included) • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Handling caution • Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury. • Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury. • Keep special watch over any small children so that they don’t fall off the rear of the bench. Since the bench does not have a backrest, unsupervised use may result in accident or injury. • If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the included tool. Saving data • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. Saving and backing up your data • Always save data to a USB Flash Memory, in order to help prevent the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error. Backing up the USB storage device • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two external media. • Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Model No. ELB-01 Serial No. (bottom) (1)B-9 2/2 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 3 Congratulations! You are the proud owner of a fine electronic organ, the Electone STAGEA ELB-01. The Yamaha Electone combines the most advanced tone generation technology with state-of-the art digital electronics and features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum musical versatility. In order to make the most of your Electone and its extensive performance potential, we urge you to read the manual thoroughly while trying out the various features described. Keep the manual in a safe place for later reference. Accessories • • • • • • 4 Bench Dust Cover Music Rest Owner’s Manual Playing the ELB-01 — Tutorial Guidebook Assembly Instructions ELB-01 Owner’s Manual The ELB-01 is compatible with the following formats. “GM (General MIDI)” is one of the most common Voice allocation formats. “GM System Level 2” is a standard specification that enhances the original “GM” and improves Song data compatibility. It provides for increased polyphony, greater Voice selection, expanded Voice parameters, and integrated effect processing. XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major enhancement of the GM specifically to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects. The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single unified format. AVE-TCP™, a TCP/IP protocol stack by ACCESS Co., Ltd., is installed in this product. Copyright © 1986-2008 ACCESS CO., LTD. AVE™-SSL, an encryption module technology by ACCESS Co., Ltd., is installed in this product. Copyright © 1997-2008 ACCESS CO., LTD. • This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. • Copying of the commercially available music sequence data and/or digital audio files is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • Electone and STAGEA are the trademarks of Yamaha Corporation. • The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 5 Contents Congratulations! ........................................................ 4 Accessories ............................................................... 4 Main Features ............................................................ 8 Accompaniment ....................................................... 68 Automatic Accompaniment —Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.)..................................... 71 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) ...................................... 74 Keyboard Percussion............................................... 77 Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion.......... 77 Changing the Keyboard Percussion volume/ reverb ............................................................. 78 Preset Keyboard Percussion List ................... 80 Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion ...................................................... 88 Recalling the User Keyboard Percussion....... 92 Kit Assign List ................................................. 93 Panel Layout ....................................9 Overview .................................................................... 9 Front Panel............................................................... 10 1 6 Quick Introductory Guide .............12 Getting Started......................................................... 12 Registration Menu.................................................... 14 Selecting Registrations from the Registration Menu .............................................................. 14 Registration Menu List.................................... 15 Using the LCD display............................................. 17 LCD Display and LCD Buttons....................... 17 Changing the Display Page ........................... 18 Selecting a Voice or Rhythm .......................... 18 Basic Operation ....................................................... 19 Selecting the Display Language .................... 19 Factory Set (Initializing the Electone) ............. 20 Confirming the Version of Your Electone ....... 20 2 Voices .............................................21 3 Voice Controls and Effects ...........40 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion .....56 Voices for each keyboard........................................ 21 Voice Display ........................................................... 23 Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons .................. 25 Selecting Voices for Voice section 1 .............. 25 Adjusting the Voice volume............................ 26 On/Off status of Voices .................................. 28 Selecting a Voice for Voice section 2 ...................... 29 Switching between Voice section 1 and Voice section 2........................................ 29 Selecting Voices for Voice Section 2 ............. 30 Selecting Voices from the User buttons .................. 32 Voice List ................................................................. 34 Selecting from the Voice Condition display ............. 41 Selecting from the panel.......................................... 48 Reverb............................................................ 48 Sustain............................................................ 49 Rotary Speaker............................................... 50 Effect List ................................................................. 52 Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm buttons............. 56 To select and play a rhythm ........................... 56 Operating the rhythm from the panel ............. 59 Adjusting the tempo ....................................... 61 Changing the rhythm volume/reverb.............. 62 Selecting rhythms from the User buttons ................ 63 To call up a User rhythm ................................ 64 Selecting Rhythm from an External Media ..... 65 Rhythm List..................................................... 67 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 5 Registration Memory .................... 97 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR)....... 107 Storing Registrations ................................................ 97 Selecting Registrations ............................................ 99 Saving the Registration data to USB flash memory100 Initializing Registration Memory ............................. 100 Registration Shift .................................................... 102 Using the M.D.R. Function ..................................... 108 Formatting External Media ..................................... 109 Selecting a Song .................................................... 111 Recording............................................................... 117 Recording ..................................................... 117 Re-recording (Retry)..................................... 118 Recording Each Part Separately .................. 118 Punch-in Recording...................................... 121 Changing the Song/Folder Name .......................... 122 Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File) .... 124 Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song...................................................... 126 Replacing Registrations ............................... 127 Deleting Registrations .................................. 128 Next Regist Settings (Using more than 16 Registrations in one song)....................... 129 Recalling Recorded Registrations ......................... 131 Loading Registrations................................... 131 Playing Back a Song .............................................. 132 Playing Back the Selected Part(s) ................ 133 Fast Forward, Rewind and Pause................. 134 Changing the Tempo.................................... 134 Repeat Playback .......................................... 135 Playing Back XG Songs................................ 136 Song Copy/Delete/Convert, Folder Create/Delete . 137 Song Copy.................................................... 137 Song Delete/Folder Delete ........................... 139 Creating folders ............................................ 140 Converting ELB format songs to EL ............. 141 Converting EL format songs to ELB ............. 142 Converting to XG format ............................... 144 Checking the Remaining Memory ................ 145 7 8 9 Footswitches................................146 Left Footswitch....................................................... 146 Transpose and Pitch Controls....150 1 Quick Introductory Guide 2 Voices 3 Voice Controls and Effects 4 Rhythm/ Keyboard Percussion 5 Registration Memory 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 7 Footswitches 8 Transpose and Pitch Controls 9 Connections Connections .................................151 Accessory Jacks and Controls .............................. 151 Connection Examples — External Devices ........... 153 Using Headphones ...................................... 153 Playing the Sounds of the Electone Through an External Audio System .............. 153 Recording the Sounds of the Electone to an External Recorder ........................................ 154 Controlling External MIDI Devices from the Electone ....................................................... 154 Controlling the Electone from an External Device ....................................... 155 Connecting USB storage devices ................ 155 Connection with Computer .................................... 156 Using the USB terminal ................................ 156 Using the MIDI IN/OUT terminals ................. 157 MIDI ....................................................................... 157 What is MIDI? ............................................... 157 MIDI Messages of the Electone ................... 159 MIDI Channels.............................................. 160 MIDI Control........................................................... 161 10 Appendix ......................................163 Assembly Instructions............................................ 163 Installing Optional Hardware ................................. 167 Installing the Floppy Disk Drive.................... 167 MIDI Data Format................................................... 168 MIDI Implementation Chart .......................... 178 Troubleshooting ..................................................... 180 Specifications ........................................................ 182 Index ...................................................................... 183 10 Appendix ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 7 Main Features Wide Variety of Registration Menus page 14 The Registration Menu buttons feature a total of 330 Registrations, allowing you to instantly set up the Electone for playing your favorite type of music. The Registrations in Registration Menu are divided into six basic categories for ease of selection. Moreover, you can edit any of the Registrations and customize them to fit your own performance needs. Richly textured, AWM Voices and High Quality Digital Effects pages 21, 52 The ELB-01 contains a huge amount of exceptionally high-quality Voices—245 altogether—created with the AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone generation system. The authentic touch response keyboard lets you play these Voices with all the expressiveness and control of an actual acoustic instrument. What’s more, there are wide variety of the effect types that you can apply to each Voice section—letting you enhance and even completely change the character of the Voices. Dynamic, Contemporary Rhythms and Auto Accompaniment page 56 The exceptionally wide selection of 133 rhythms lets you choose exactly the rhythm you need in your performance. Each rhythm contains 15 variations (sections)—such as Main, Fill In, Intro, Ending, and Break—that you can easily switch while you play, to make your performance even more dynamic and professional. Each rhythm has its own matching accompaniment divided into five instrument parts, providing basic backing as well as embellishments. Keyboard Percussion page 77 This powerful feature allows you to play drum and percussion sounds from the keyboard. A wide range of sounds and drum/percussion kits are available, for performing rhythms in real time. Each sound is assigned to its own key, and the sounds include everything from conventional kicks and snares to a wide variety of ethnic and Latin instruments, as well as special sound effects, such as thunder, laughing, animal cries and more. Versatile Functions of the Music Data Recorder page 107 The Electone also features a Music Data Recorder (MDR) for recording your Registrations and performances to USB flash memory, and playing back those performances using the sounds of the Electone. In addition, the MDR allows you to copy a song from one USB flash memory device to another, letting you archive your important recordings and Registration data. The Electone also allows you to convert the data format, letting you play back songs that were recorded on other model Electones. 8 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Panel Layout Overview Music Rest Upper Keyboard USB TO DEVICE A terminal Front Panel Lower Keyboard MIDI IN/OUT terminals USB TO DEVICE B terminal USB TO HOST terminal Jacks Right Footswitch Speaker Left Footswitch Expression Pedal Pedalboard ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 9 Front Panel MUSIC DATA RECORDER (page 107) Allows recording and playback of your keyboard performances, and lets you store Registration data for future recall LEAD VOICE (page 21) Selects the Lead Voices for Upper Keyboard LCD display (page 17) Shows the current settings of the Electone PEDAL VOICE 1/2 (page 22) Data Control [A] – [D] buttons (page 17) Selects the Voices for Pedalboard Selects the setting in the display [VOICE SECTION] button (page 25) Switches between Voice sections 1 and 2 UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2 (page 21) Selects the Voices for Upper Keyboard LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2 (page 22) Selects the Voices for Lower Keyboard KEYBOARD PERCUSSION (page 77) Turns Keyboard Percussion On or Off RHYTHM CONTROL (page 59) Starts and stops the rhythm, and adds changes to the rhythm RHYTHM (page 56) Sets the rhythm TEMPO buttons (page 61) Adjusts the speed of the rhythm BAR/BEAT display (page 61) Shows the current tempo or position in the measure REGISTRATION MENU (page 14) Set the registration 10 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual DATA CONTROL dial (page 17) REGISTRATION MEORY buttons Selects the setting in the display Records panel settings made on the panel and LCD PAGE buttons (page 18) Selects the Page of the display [M.] (Memory) button (page 97) [D.] (Disable) button (page 99) MASTER VOLUME dial (page 13) USB TO DEVICE A terminal (page 151) Allows communication with USB flash memory devices POWER switch (page 12) For turning the power on or off. Display Select [VOICE DISPLAY] button (page 23) [UTILITY] button (page 19) [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button (page 71) [FOOTSWITCH] button (page 146) [RHYTHM SEQUENCE] button (page 75) [SUSTAIN] button (page 49) [ROTARY SP SPEED] button (page 50) [REVERB] button (page 48) ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 11 1 Quick Introductory Guide Whether you are an advanced performer or have never touched an electronic keyboard in your life, we recommend that you take the time to go through this basic section. It shows you in the simplest possible manner how to start playing your Electone. 1 Quick Introductory Guide 1 Getting Started 1 Plug the power cord into an appropriate electrical outlet. Only use the voltage specified as correct for the Electone. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the Electone. Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you intend to use the instrument in another location, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage, please consult with a qualified technician. 2 Turn on the Electone by pressing the POWER switch. When you turn on the Electone, the following displays will appear one after the other on the LCD display: Electone STãGEã ELB-O1 ¨”Strings1Î”Violin3 Ò”Piano1 ∏”FingrBs1 This last display, Voice Display, shows you the currently assigned voice settings for each Voice section (page 23). 12 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Set the MASTER VOLUME control. The MASTER VOLUME control is an overall control that affects the volume of the entire instrument. Decreases the volume 4 1 Quick Introductory Guide 3 Increases the volume Press the Expression pedal down with your foot. Once you have set the MASTER VOLUME control to a suitable level, you can use the Expression pedal to change the volume with your foot as you play. Maximum volume Minimum volume ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 13 2 Registration Menu 1 NOTE Quick Introductory Guide Additional basic Registrations are preset on the Registration Memory locations from 1 to 16. See page 97 for details. The Registration Menu is a simple, highly convenient way to instantly change all the Electone settings for playing in specific music styles. A Registration consists of panel settings including the selected Upper Keyboard Voices, Lower Keyboard Voices, Pedal Voices, the assigned rhythm and so on. Each Registration Menu button (1 – 5) includes 48 “hidden” Registrations (90 Registrations for the [★] button), with each Registration specially suited for playing in a different music style. Selecting Registrations from the Registration Menu ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 2 Press one of the REGISTRATION MENU buttons. Each button has different Registrations for different music genres. For example, if you want to play Jazz, press the [4] button. For details on the Registration Menu, see page 15. 1 Kids 2 Pops & Rock 3 Dance & Ballad 4 Jazz & Latin 5 Symphony & World ★ Lesson From this main category, select the specific Registration you want to use. Each Registration Menu button actually contains many hidden Registrations, and only the currently selected Registration is shown in the display. Select the hidden Registrations in sequence by turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise. Turning the DATA CONTROL dial counter-clockwise selects in the reverse order. ¸˛˝<KIDS> ¿01:Simple 8Beat 1 3 14 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Play your favorite song with the selected Registration. Registration Menu List ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Regist. Name Simple 8Beat 1 Simple 8Beat 2 Light Step Sunny Pop Kids March 1 Kids March 2 Kids March 3 Synth. Rock Symphon.March 1 Symphon.March 2 Bluegrass Sea Carnival Basic Waltz Brass Ensemble Pure Waltz Rococo Ensemble Pop Cha Cha Comical Rumba Comical Samba Toy Orchestra Charleston Winter Swing Snow Waltz 1 Snow Waltz 2 Alpine Polka *A Alpine Polka *B Alpine Polka *C Alpine Polka *D Dream Ballad *A Dream Ballad *B Dream Ballad *C Dream Ballad *D Pops Orches. *A Pops Orches. *B Pops Orches. *C Pops Orches. *D Kids On Stage*A Kids On Stage*B Kids On Stage*C Kids On Stage*D Galaxy March *A Galaxy March *B Galaxy March *C Galaxy March *D SE *A SE *B SE *C SE *D [2] POPS & ROCK No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Regist. Name Dynamic 8Beat NY Ballad British Pop 8Beat Modern Rock Band Detroit Pop Techno Pop Sheriff Reggae Rock&Roll Power Rock 60's GuitarRock Unplugged Motor City Lovely Shuffle Gospel Shuffle Joyful Gospel Frankly Soul Soul Gospel 6/8 Soul Hit Pop New Country Eternal Pop Ground Beat Bounce Pop *A Bounce Pop *B Bounce Pop *C Bounce Pop *D Blues Jam *A Blues Jam *B Blues Jam *C Blues Jam *D Evergre.Waltz*A Evergre.Waltz*B Evergre.Waltz*C Evergre.Waltz*D 16Beat Pop *A 16Beat Pop *B 16Beat Pop *C 16Beat Pop *D Top Gear Rock*A Top Gear Rock*B Top Gear Rock*C Top Gear Rock*D Southern Pop *A Southern Pop *B Southern Pop *C Southern Pop *D [3] DANCE & BALLAD No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Regist. Name Organ Ballad Dramatic Ballad Love Ballad Smooth Lead Pop Ballad Guitar Ballad Acoustic Ballad Healing Guitar Chillout Sweetheart 1 Sweetheart 2 Slow & Easy Euro Trance 6/8 Trance Cool Hip Hop Latin House Dance Beat Euro Dance Pop UK Pop Jive Disco Queen Disco Soul Pop Disco Hot Disco Ibiza *A Ibiza *B Ibiza *C Ibiza *D Power House *A Power House *B Power House *C Power House *D Dance Latino *A Dance Latino *B Dance Latino *C Dance Latino *D TwilightDisco*A TwilightDisco*B TwilightDisco*C TwilightDisco*D Love Song *A Love Song *B Love Song *C Love Song *D Movie Ballad *A Movie Ballad *B Movie Ballad *C Movie Ballad *D [4] JAZZ & LATIN No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 1 Regist. Name Blow On Sax Sax Ensemble Moonlight Big Band Clarinet Swing Jazz Combo Medium Jazz Organ Session Guitar Combo Tender Ballad Jazz Waltz Five-Four Big Band Samba Mambo Brass Mambo Tenor Montuno Bossa Nova Pop Bossa Sweet Rumba Beguine Cha Cha Cha Mellow Groove Modern R&B Dixieland Jazz Jungle Drum *A Jungle Drum *B Jungle Drum *C Jungle Drum *D Jazz Club *A Jazz Club *B Jazz Club *C Jazz Club *D Afro Session *A Afro Session *B Afro Session *C Afro Session *D ChaChaGrandee*A ChaChaGrandee*B ChaChaGrandee*C ChaChaGrandee*D 3/4 FastJazz *A 3/4 FastJazz *B 3/4 FastJazz *C 3/4 FastJazz *D Twilight Sax *A Twilight Sax *B Twilight Sax *C Twilight Sax *D ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Quick Introductory Guide [1] KIDS 15 [5] SYMPHONY & WORLD 1 Quick Introductory Guide No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 16 Regist. Name Fanfare StringOrchestra Romantic Violin Baroque Flute&Harp Serenade Fast March Wild West Vienna Waltz Polka Chanson Club Theatre Organ Flamenco Pop Flamenco Mexican Dance Mariachi Celtic Dance Folk Step Italiano Musette Country Hawaiian ChineseNocturne Japanese Sound Orches.March *A Orches.March *B Orches.March *C Orches.March *D Pasodoble *A Pasodoble *B Pasodoble *C Pasodoble *D Tango *A Tango *B Tango *C Tango *D Show Time *A Show Time *B Show Time *C Show Time *D Majes. Sound *A Majes. Sound *B Majes. Sound *C Majes. Sound *D Orches.Swing *A Orches.Swing *B Orches.Swing *C Orches.Swing *D ELB-01 Owner’s Manual [★] LESSON No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Regist. Name Simple 1 St/St Simple 2 St/Hr Simple 3 Cl/St Simple 4 Cl/Hr Simple 5 Tp/St Simple 6 Tp/Hr Simple 7 Ob/St Simple 8 Ob/Bsn Simple 9 Fl/St Simple 10 Fl/Cl Simple 11 Cl/Cl Simple 12 Pf/Pf Sound Effect 1 Sound Effect 2 Sound Effect 3 Sound Effect 4 Sound Effect 5 Sound Effect 6 Sound Effect 7 Sound Effect 8 Sound Effect 9 Sound Effect 10 Sound Effect 11 Sound Effect 12 Sound Effect 13 Sound Effect 14 Sound Effect 15 Sound Effect 16 Strings Combi.1 Strings Combi.2 Strings Combi.3 Strings Combi.4 Strings Combi.5 Strings Combi.6 Strings Combi.7 Strings Combi.8 Strings Combi.9 StringsCombi.10 StringsCombi.11 StringsCombi.12 StringsCombi.13 StringsCombi.14 StringsCombi.15 Brass Combi. 1 Brass Combi. 2 Brass Combi. 3 Brass Combi. 4 Brass Combi. 5 No. 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 Regist. Name Brass Combi. 6 Brass Combi. 7 Brass Combi. 8 W.Wind Combi. 1 W.Wind Combi. 2 W.Wind Combi. 3 W.Wind Combi. 4 W.Wind Combi. 5 W.Wind Combi. 6 W.Wind Combi. 7 W.Wind Combi. 8 W.Wind Combi. 9 W.Wind Combi.10 W.Wind Combi.11 W.Wind Combi.12 W.Wind Combi.13 W.Wind Combi.14 W.Wind Combi.15 W.Wind Combi.16 W.Wind Combi.17 Decay 1 Decay 2 Decay 3 Decay 4 Decay 5 Decay 6 Decay 7 Sustained 1 Sustained 2 Sustained 3 Sustained 4 Synth. 1 Synth. 2 Synth. 3 Synth. 4 Synth. 5 Comping 1 Comping 2 Comping 3 Comping 4 Comping 5 Comping 6 3 Using the LCD display Many of the Electone’s operations are done from the LCD display. Pressing a button on the panel automatically calls up the relevant function for the corresponding button in the display. Depending on the display that appears, you can conveniently perform various functions and change values/settings by using the [A] – [D] buttons (located at either side of the LCD) and the DATA CONTROL dial (at the right of the LCD). Quick Introductory Guide 1 LCD Display and LCD Buttons ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The functions of the [A] – [D] buttons differ depending on the selected display. Keep in mind that three types of indicators are used with the functions and parameters: a flashing indicator (¿ or ÷) a continuously lit indicator (¿ or ÷) and a square on/off indicator (” or ’). 1 Ò<FOOT.SW> MODE¿GLIDE TIME÷1 ⁄ ”LEAD 2 1 3 Flashing indicator (¿ or ÷) When the indicator at an item is flashing, you can directly select the item or parameter (in this case, “Time”) by turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise. (When the final item is reached, turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise does not “wrap around” to the first item.) Turning the DATA CONTROL dial counter-clockwise selects in the reverse order. (Similarly, when the first item is reached, turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise does not “wrap around” to the last item.) Also, you can change the desired value/setting by successively pressing the corresponding [A] –[D] button (in this case, the [B] button). The value or setting changes (in steps) each time the button is pressed. 2 Continuously lit indicator (¿ or ÷) This indicates that the corresponding item/parameter is not currently selected for change. When the ¿/÷ indicator at an item is continuously lit, pressing the corresponding [A] – [D] button (in this case, the [C] button, corresponding to the Mode setting) switches to a flashing indicator, letting you change value/setting with the DATA CONTROL dial. Also, you can change the desired value/setting by successively pressing the corresponding [A] – [D] button (in this case, the [C] button). 3 On/off indicator (” or ’) A solid square (”) next to an item indicates that the corresponding function (in this case, “Lead”) is on. A hollow square (’) indicates that the function is off. Pressing the [A] – [D] button corresponding to the desired item or parameter (in this case, the [D] button) alternates between On and Off. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 17 Changing the Display Page ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 Ò<FOOT.SW> MODE¿GLIDE TIME÷1 ⁄ ”LEAD Quick Introductory Guide PAGE buttons are used to select the various ‘pages’ of the display (when available), with the currently selected page number appearing in highlight at the top right of the LCD. Use the PAGE [▲] button to select the next page, and PAGE [▼] to select the previous page. Simultaneously pressing both buttons selects Page 1. Selecting a Voice or Rhythm ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 Press the desired Voice/Rhythm button on the panel (in this example, the [STRINGS] button in Upper Keyboard Voice 1). Contains various Strings Voices <STRINGS/VIOLIN> ¿01:Strings 1 ¨1 Indicates currently selected Voice The selected Voice/Rhythm is shown in the display. 2 Select the desired Voice/Rhythm by turning the DATA CONTROL dial. <STRINGS/VIOLIN> ¨1 ¿08:Pizzicato Strs 1 When the final item is reached, turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise does not “wrap around” to the first item. Similarly, when the first item is reached, turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise does not “wrap around” to the last item. 18 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Selecting from a recommended set of Voices/Rhythms The Electone has a huge amount of available Voices and Rhythms—so many that it may be difficult to find the ones you want. To help you find the best Voice/Rhythm for the selected instrument category, we’ve prepared some “recommended” or popular selections in that category. Simply press the [A], [B] or [D] button while the Voice/Rhythm menu is displayed to call up one of the recommended selections. Quick Introductory Guide 1 <STRINGS/VIOLIN> ¨1 ¿13:Strings&Violin 4 Basic Operation Selecting the Display Language ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The LCD display can be shown in two languages, English and Japanese. The default setting is English. 1 Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel. The Utility display appears. The language can be set in the Utility display Page 1. <æy∫/LANGUAGE> ⁄ ’i-y∫ ”ENGLISH 2 Press the [C] or [D] button to select the corresponding language: [C] for Japanese, or [D] for English. <æy∫/LANGUAGE> ⁄ ’i-y∫ ”ENGLISH NOTE The Language setting is not actually set for the instrument until you switch to another display. Make sure to switch to another display before turning the power off. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 19 Factory Set (Initializing the Electone) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Reference Page 1 Storing Registrations (page 97) All current settings including Registration Memory and LCD Display settings can be deleted at once by the following procedure. Be careful when executing Factory Set, since it erases all your existing data. Always save your important data to external media, such as a USB flash memory. Quick Introductory Guide 1 Turn off the power. 2 While holding down the ENDING [1] button, turn the power back on. 3 Release the ENDING [1] button after the Voice Display appears. Confirming the Version of Your Electone ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can confirm the version of your Electone by the following procedure. 1 Press the [UTILITY] button. The Utility display appears. 2 Select Page 7 by using the PAGE buttons. The Version appears in the display. VERSIONx.xx 20 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual ‡ 2 Voices This Electone features hundreds of high quality Voices. Any of these Voices can be used on the Upper Keyboard, Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard. Up to three Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard for playing together in a layer, while the Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard each have two Voice sections. Voices 2 1 Voices for each keyboard Voices for the Upper Keyboard Up to three different Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard for playing together: Upper Keyboard Voice 1, Upper Keyboard Voice 2 and Lead Voice. Upper Keyboard Voice 1 and Upper Keyboard Voice 2 can be selected from the panel’s Upper Keyboard Voice 1/2 section, while the Lead Voice is selected from the Lead Voice section. Reference Page Switching between Voice section 1 and Voice section 2 (page 29) Reference Page Selecting Voices for Voice Section 2 (page 30) Voices for the Upper Keyboard 1 and Upper Keyboard 2 Voices for the Lead Voice The Lead Voice sounds only the highest note (or last note played) if two or more keys are played together. This makes the Lead Voices ideal for solo instruments such as Trumpet and Saxophone—instruments that play the “leading” or highest part in an orchestra or band. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 21 Voices for the Lower Keyboard Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Lower Keyboard for playing together: Lower Keyboard Voice 1 and Lower Keyboard Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel’s Lower Keyboard Voice 1/2 section. 2 Voices Voices for the Lower Keyboard 1 and Lower Keyboard 2 Voices for Pedalboard Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Pedalboard for playing together: Pedal Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel’s Pedal Voice 1/2 section. The Pedal Voice sounds one note at a time; when you simultaneously press two or more keys, only the highest note will sound. Voices for the Pedal Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 2 22 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 2 Voice Display The Voice Display allows you to easily check which Voices are being used for each keyboard. It also allows you to set whether the Voice for each section sounds or not by changing the On/Off status in the display. Reference Page On/Off status of Voices (page 28) 2 How to call up the Voice Display: Voices Pressing the [VOICE DISPLAY] button in the Display Select section selects the Voice Display. (The Voice Display always appears when the Electone is turned on.) ¨”Strings1Î”Violin3 Ò”Piano1 ∏”FingrBs1 Each of the keyboards and Pedalboard have two basic Voice sections: Voice section 1 and Voice section 2. To select a Voice, you need to first select the desired Voice section. For this reason, the Voice Display actually has two separate displays: one for checking the Voice selected in Voice section 1, and the other for Voice section 2. To switch between the Voice sections, press the [VOICE SECTION] button at the top left on the panel. Successive presses of the [VOICE SECTION] button at the top left on the panel alternate between the two displays. Reference Page Voices for each keyboard (page 21) Reference Page Switching between Voice section 1 and Voice section 2 (page 29) Selected Voice section number’s lamp is lit ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 23 When the Voice section [1] lights up Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Lead Voice ¨”Strings1Î”Violin3 Ò”Piano1 ∏”FingrBs1 2 Voices Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Pedal Voice 1 From this display, you can check which Voices have been selected for Voice section 1 on each keyboard (Upper Keyboard Voice 1, Lower Keyboard Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 1). The Lead Voice, which only has one section, is shown only in the Voice section 1 display. When the Voice section [2] lights up Upper Keyboard Voice 2 ¨”Piano1 Ò”Strings1∏”ContBs1 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Pedal Voice 2 From this display, you can check which Voices have been selected for Voice section 2 on each keyboard (Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lower Keyboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2). The Lead Voice is not shown in this display. 24 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 3 Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons Selecting Voices for Voice section 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Since selection of Voices follows the same procedure throughout all Voice sections (except Lead Voice), instructions for only the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 of the Voice section 1 are given here. For details on how to select a Voice of Voice section 2, see page 30. Voices 1 2 Make sure that the lamp of the Voice section [1] is lit. If the Voice section [2] lamp is lit instead, press the [VOICE SECTION] button so that Voice section [1] lights. Indicates that you can select a Voice for Voice section 1 (in this case, Upper Keyboard Voice 1) When the Voice section [1] lamp is lit, you can select a Voice for Voice section 1 (in this case, the Upper Keyboard Voice 1), from the panel’s Upper Keyboard Voice 1/2 section. The Lead Voice can be selected regardless of whether Voice section [1] or Voice section [2] is lit. 2 Reference Page Switching between Voice section 1 and Voice section 2 (page 29) Press one of the Voice buttons in the Upper Keyboard Voice 1/2 section. For example, if you have pressed the [ORGAN] button, the following display (Voice Menu) will appear. <ORGAN> ¿01:Pipe Organ 1 ¨1 HINT You can select the ideal Voice by simply pressing the [A]/ [B]/ [D] buttons when the Voice menu is displayed. Each Voice button has so many Voices that this function helps you selecting the Voices. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 25 The Voice menu contains many Organ Voices, and only the currently selected Organ Voice appears in the display. 3 2 Select the Voice in the Voice Menu display. You can select other “hidden” Organ Voices in sequence by turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise. Turning the DATA CONTROL dial counterclockwise selects in the reverse order. Voices <ORGAN> ¿03:Pipe Organ 3 ¨1 Here we’ve selected Pipe Organ 3 for Upper Keyboard Voice 1. You can also select other Voices in the Voice Menu display by pressing the [C] button (once or repeatedly). Each press of the [C] button selects another hidden Voice. If you press the [C] button when the last voice is shown, selection “wraps around” back to the first voice. Now go on to select voices for the Lower keyboard and Pedalboard as you did for the Upper keyboard above. Adjusting the Voice volume ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● There are two ways to set the Voice volume: using the Volume buttons on the panel and setting the volume in the display. The Volume buttons let you make coarse adjustments to the volume while the setting in the display gives you fine control. Using the VOLUME buttons on the panel (coarse) Press one of the Volume buttons of each Voice section on the panel to set the desired level for each Voice. The controls have seven volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to a maximum of full volume. Increasing the volume Decreasing the volume 26 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Setting the Volume in the display (fine) Pressing the same Voice button on the panel again after selecting the Voice calls up the Voice Condition display. The Volume is displayed in the top left of the Voice Condition display Page 1. You can change the Volume by using the DATA CONTROL dial when the arrow indicator (“¿” or “÷”) next to the Volume value is flashing. If the arrow indicator is not flashing, press one of the [A] – [D] buttons corresponding to the item or parameter you want to change to make the indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the desired control setting. The range of the Fine volume control is 0 – 24. NOTE Depending on the volume value (set in the display), two adjacent Volume button lamps may be lit at the same time, indicating an intermediate position. 2 Reference Page Voices Selecting from the Voice Condition display (page 41) Voice Condition Display VOL.¿24 REV.÷20 ¨1⁄ TOUCH¿ 8 FEET÷PRESET Pressing a Voice button once calls up the Voice Menu display for the selected button. Pressing it a second time calls up the Voice Condition display. Successive presses alternate between the two displays. Voice Menu Display <STRINGS/VIOLIN> ¿01:Strings 1 Voice Condition Display ¨1 VOL.¿24 REV.÷20 ¨1⁄ TOUCH¿ 8 FEET÷PRESET From the Voice Condition display, you can control Voice-related parameters such as Pan, Effect, Volume, and so on. For more information on the Voice Condition display, see page 41. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 27 On/Off status of Voices ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can set the whether the Voice sounds or not by setting the On/Off status in the Voice display. To call up the Voice display, press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button. Reference Page Voice Display (page 23) 2 Voices Voice Display (Voice section [1] lit) Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Lead Voice ¨”Strings1Î”Violin3 Ò”Piano1 ∏”FingrBs1 Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Pedal Voice 1 Two different displays are available, depending on whether Voice section 1 or Voice section 2 is lit. The instructions below use Voice section 1 as an example; however, the method for changing the On/Off setting is same in both Voice section 1 and Voice section 2. On/Off settings: Press the [A] – [D] buttons corresponding to the items or parameters you want to change to alternate between On and Off. Selecting Off effectively mutes the sound of the corresponding Voice, even when the keys are played. ¨’Strings1Î”Violin3 Ò”Piano1 ∏”FingrBs1 Setting this to Off results in a Volume value of 0. If you increase the Volume by using the Volume buttons, the On/Off status here changes to On. The On/Off status for other Voices can be set in the other Voice Displays. 28 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 3 Selecting a Voice for Voice section 2 This feature lets you blend two Voices together—Voice section 1 with a different Voice in Voice section 2. This is useful for creating rich textures in the sound, playing the two Voices in a layer. For details on how to select a Voice for Voice section 1, see page 25. The instructions below explain how to selecting a Voice (Upper Keyboard Voice 2) for Voice section 2. 2 Voices Switching between Voice section 1 and Voice section 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To switch between Voice section 1 and Voice section 2, press the [VOICE SECTION] button on the panel. For the Voice section which is indicated as “xxx Voice 1/2” (Voice section name is written in xxx) on the panel, you can select the Voice from each section by switching between sections 1 and 2 by pressing the [VOICE SECTION] button. NOTE Switching between Voice sections 1 and 2 has no effect on which Voice is sounded by the keyboard. [VOICE SECTION] button Each press of the [VOICE SECTION] button alternates between the available Voice sections 1 and 2. The lamp of the selected (available) Voice section number lights up. When Voice section [1] is lit Since the Voice section 1 is selected, you can select the Upper Keyboard Voice 1, Lower Keyboard Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 1. When Voice section [2] is lit Since the Voice section 2 is selected, you can select the Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lower Keyboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2. Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Lead Voice Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Lead Voice Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Pedal Voice 1 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Pedal Voice 2 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 29 Selecting Voices for Voice Section 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Since selection of Voices for Voice section 2 follows the same procedure throughout all Keyboard sections, instructions for only the Upper Keyboard, Upper Keyboard Voice 2, are given here. 1 2 Make sure that the lamp of Voice section [2] is lit. If the Voice section [1] lamp is lit instead, press the [VOICE SECTION] button so that Voice section [2] lights. Voices Indicates that you can select a Voice for Voice section 2 (in this case, Upper Keyboard Voice 2) 2 Press one of the Voice buttons in the Upper Keyboard Voice 1/2 section. NOTE Indicates Upper Keyboard Voice 2 is selected. Once calling up the Voice Menu display, it has no change even when you switch the Voice section 1 or 2. <PERCUSSION> ¿01:Vibraphone 1 3 Select the Voices you want to play by using the DATA CONTROL dial. <PERCUSSION> ¿03:Marimba 30 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual ¨2 ¨2 4 Press one of the Volume buttons of the Upper Keyboard Voice 1/2 section on the panel to increase the Volume level for the Upper Keyboard Voice 2. Voices 2 Since the default Volume level for Voice section 2 is set to minimum, the Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lower Keyboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2 will produce no sound even after you select the Voices for Voice section 2. To play the Voices for Voice section 2, make sure to press the Volume buttons of the selected Voice 1/2 section on the panel to increase the Volume level. When the lamp of the Voice section [2] is lit, the Volume buttons of the Voice sections (except the Lead Voice) can be used to set the Volume level specifically for Voice section 2. Now set the Voices for Lower keyboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2 as you did for Upper keyboard Voice 2 above. If you want to turn off the Voices of Voice section 2, set the volume level to minimum by using the Volume buttons of the selected Voice sections on the panel, or select the Off status in the Voice Display when the lamp of the Voice section [2] is lit. Reference Page On/Off status of Voices (page 28) About the To Lower function Voices selected for the Lead Voice, Pedal Voice 1, and Pedal Voice 2 sections can also be played on the Lower Keyboard when the [TO LOWER] button in each section is on. Keep in mind that when [TO LOWER] is on, the Lead Voice and Pedal Voice cannot be played on the Upper Keyboard and Pedalboard, respectively. Also, Initial Touch is not effective on Pedal Voices played on the Lower Keyboard. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 31 4 Selecting Voices from the User buttons This Electone has a variety of Voices from which you can choose—greater than what is immediately apparent from the front panel controls. You’ve already learned (in “Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons” above) how to select different Voices that are available in the Voice Menu display of each panel voice. The Electone also has User buttons in each voice section, giving you access to even more voices. These User buttons function as ‘wild card’ Voice Menu selectors; any internal voices can be selected from these buttons. 2 Voices User buttons The User buttons have two basic uses: • For playing any Voice of the Voice Menus from any of the keyboards or Pedalboard. You can play on the Upper Keyboard, for example, Voices from the sixteen Voice Menu pages (including the four Voice Menu pages of the Pedal Voice section), and not be limited to only the twelve buttons (equivalent to twelve Voice Menu pages) that make up the Upper Voice section. • For having two different Voices from the same Voice Menu page available for selection in the same song. For example, you can assign one of the Voices to a User button in the Upper Keyboard Voice 1/2 section, the second Voice to the other User button in the same section. For example, select Bell Pad 3 for User button [1] in Upper Keyboard Voice 1. 1 32 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Make sure that the lamp of Voice section [1] is lit. If the Voice section [2] lamp is lit instead, press the [VOICE SECTION] button so that Voice section [1] lights. 2 Press one of the User buttons in any of the Voice sections. The name of the selected category (Woodwind/Flute) is displayed. Voices 2 <WOODWIND/FLUTE>¨1 › ¿17:Alto Sax 1 3 Select one of the sixteen Pages (categories) with the PAGE buttons (in this case, “Pad,” Page 7). Currently selected Page <PAD> ¨1 ‡ ¿01:Smooth Pad 1 Directly selecting the category To directly select the desired category, hold down one of the User buttons and simultaneously press the desired Voice button. 1. While holding down the User button... 2. Press the Voice button. 4 Select Bell Pad 3 by using the DATA CONTROL dial. Now you’ve assigned Bell Pad 3 to be called up by User button [1] in Upper Keyboard Voice 1. You can set voices to the User buttons in any other Voice sections just as you did for Upper keyboard Voice 1 above. <PAD> ¿12:Bell Pad 3 ¨1 ‡ ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 33 6 Voice List The letters A, B and D printed at the right side of each Voice name in this list indicate the corresponding DATA CONTROL button’s name. Pressing that button selects the corresponding Voice. Category 2 STRINGS/VIOLIN Voices CONTRABASS BRASS/TRUMPET 34 Voice Name Description 01 Strings 1 02 Strings 2 03 Strings 3 04 Strings 4 05 Strings 5 06 Chamber Strs 1 07 Chamber Strs 2 08 Pizzicato Strs 1 09 Pizzicato Strs 2 10 Tremolo Strings Tremolo strings. 11 Strings1&5 Combination of Strings 1 and Strings 5. 12 Strings&Viola 13 Strings&Violin 14 Violin&Cello String ensemble consisting of Violin 3 and Cello. 15 Octave Strings Strings ensemble sound with octave unison voices playable from a single key. 16 Violin 1 17 Violin 2 18 Violin 3 19 Viola Slightly larger (and deeper) than a violin. Used for mid-range parts. 20 Cello Warm and deep sounds. 21 Pizzicato Violin Violin sound played by plucking. 01 Contrabass 1 02 Contrabass 2 03 Contrabass 3 04 These voices feature string ensemble sounds, with accurate simulation of all string instruments, including contrabass, cello, viola and violin. Variations include light plucking sounds, bow scratching noises and deep resonant sounds. Strings ensemble for chamber music. A The sound of stringed instruments being plucked instead of bowed. Combination of Strings 2 and Viola. B D Combination of Strings 5 and Violin 3 with deep vibrato. Deeply expressive sounds, suitable not only for classical music but also jazz and country & western. Tonal variations include bright voices and soft ones. A Used for the lowest pitched parts. Variations range from deep to solo-type sounds. Acoustic Bass B Acoustic bass sound ideal for jazz. This instrument goes by many different names, including “standup bass” and “upright bass.” 05 Pizzicato Bass D Contrabass sound played by plucking. 01 Brass Section 1 02 Brass Section 2 03 Brass Section 3 04 Brass Section 4 05 Trombone Sec 1 06 Trombone Sec 2 07 Brass&Trp 1 08 Brass&Trp 2 Combination of Brass Section 2 and Trumpet 4. 09 Horn 1&3 Combination of Horn 1 and Horn 3. 10 Octave Brass 1 11 Octave Brass 2 Octave brass with variations. Features rich variations from strong, dynamic impact voices with quick attack, to soft, warm voices that enrich the overall sound. 12 Octave Brass 3 13 Octave Brass 4 14 Trumpet 1 15 Trumpet 2 16 Trumpet 3 17 Trumpet 4 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual A Trumpet-based brass section. Variations include sounds for classical, big band and other music. Trombone brass section. Variations include a deep sound for classical music and a sweet, smooth sound for jazz ballads. Combination of Brass Section 1 and Trumpet 4. B Bright, multi-purpose trumpet sounds. WOODWIND/ FLUTE Voice Name Description 18 Muted Trumpet This recreates the distinctive sound that results when a mute is inserted in the bell of trumpet. The normal “blasting” sound of the trumpet is suppressed, and the resulting sound is thin and metallic. 19 Flugel Horn A brass instrument with a characteristically warm and soft sound. 20 Trombone 1 21 Trombone 2 The slide trombone has a distinctive “stretching” and “shrinking” sound and features a wide range of expressional power, from brilliant and strong to soft and sweet. 22 Trombone 3 23 Muted Trombone 24 Horn 1 25 Horn 2 26 Horn 3 27 Horn 4 28 Muted Horn This horn has a sound that is made sharp and metallic by using a mute, and is even capable of mimicking the sound of a human voice. 29 Tuba This instrument is meant to be played in the lower octaves and has a rich, stable sound that supports brass band and orchestra. It has a wide expressive range, and is often used in playing humorous phrases. 30 Euphonium Features a characteristically broad and deep—even noble—sound, and is frequently used as a solo instrument. 31 Brass Bass 1 32 Brass Bass 2 Brass ensemble for playing in the lower octaves. Brass Bass 2 also has a timpani sound in unison. 01 Flute 1 02 Flute 2 03 Flute 3 04 Piccolo This instrument is one octave higher than flute and is meant to be played in the higher octaves. 05 Recorder This basic flute instrument is used in grade school music classes, and can be heard in some medieval and baroque music. It has a relatively hard and round sound. 06 Ocarina This instrument has a long history and features a simple, warm sound. The pitch and the sound quality are changed by the strength of the breath. 07 Whistle 08 Clarinet 1 09 Clarinet 2 10 Clarinet 3 11 Bass Clarinet 12 Oboe 1 13 Oboe 2 14 English Horn Also known as “cor anglais,” this is larger than the oboe, and its timbre is well-suited to performance of expressive, melancholic solos in slow orchestral pieces. 15 Bassoon 1 16 Bassoon 2 This belongs to the double reed family and is used in the lower range. It is known for its humorous, expressive character as well as its wide range and agility, and can also be used as a solo instrument. It is also called “fagott,” from the German word meaning “bundle of sticks.” 17 Alto Sax 1 18 Alto Sax 2 19 Tenor Sax 1 20 Tenor Sax 2 21 Soprano Sax 1 22 Baritone Sax Soft and low baritone sax sound, also used in R&B music. 23 Sax Ens 1 24 Sax Ens 2 Saxophone ensemble with variations, such as mellow sounds for classical and sax section for big band. 25 Woodwind Ens 1 26 Woodwind Ens 2 2 A mute effect makes the volume softer and alters the characteristics of this trombone voice. D A These voices are all recreations of horns with coiled tubing, and feature a soft, mellow sound. The voices are indispensable for orchestra and brass band since they blend well with virtually any instrument sound, woodwind or brass. Voices Category BRASS/TRUMPET A light and transparent instrument voice that sounds like a bird singing. This instrument is equally good for both fast, quickly executed passages and smooth melodies. Recreation of a human whistling sound. B This instrument has a wide sound range and distinctive character—with rich sound in the low end and crisp, bright tones in the high. It is used extensively in a variety of music styles including classical chamber music and swing jazz. This instrument has a thick, deep voice and is played one octave lower than the normal clarinet. D An instrument of the woodwind double reed family, this has a high, reedy, sometimes nasal tone—yet it is also rich and warm, and can handle a wide range of expression and emotion. Among the woodwind instruments, this is capable of the loudest sound, and plays a highly prominent role. Its wide expressional power makes it ideal for both classical music and jazz. This voice is active in a wide range of genres, including classical and jazz. It is often used in soul and R&B music, or in slow, moody pieces. Features a characteristic high, ‘stretching’ sound, perfect for legato phrasing and sweet, emotional passages. Woodwind ensemble sound that varies the instrument depending on the register played. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 35 Category TUTTI 2 CHOIR Voices PAD SYNTH 36 Voice Name Description 01 Strings&Winds A Unison strings and woodwind ensemble. 02 03 Strings&Brass B Unison strings and brass ensemble. Strings&Horn D Strings and horn ensemble. 04 Brass&Sax 1 05 Brass&Sax 2 06 Brass&Winds Brass and woodwind tutti. 07 Orchestra Hit A popular, widely used sampled sound in which the many instruments of the orchestra play together on one chord or note. Used for dramatic hits and accents. Vocal chorus sound. Variations include a male “ooh” sound, female “ahh,” and mixed choirs. Brass and sax tutti. 01 Choir 1 02 Choir 2 03 Choir 3 A 04 Choir 4 B 05 Choir 5 D 06 Choir 6 07 Vocal 01 Smooth Pad 1 02 Smooth Pad 2 03 Smooth Pad 3 04 Smooth Pad 4 05 Resonance Pad 1 06 Resonance Pad 2 07 Resonance Pad 3 08 Resonance Pad 4 09 Resonance Pad 5 10 Bell Pad 1 11 Bell Pad 2 12 Bell Pad 3 13 Bell Pad 4 14 Bell Pad 5 15 Space Pad 1 16 Space Pad 2 17 Space Pad 3 18 Space Pad 4 19 Noisy Pad 1 20 Noisy Pad 2 21 Noisy Pad 3 22 Noisy Pad 4 01 Synth Lead 1 02 Synth Lead 2 03 Synth Lead 3 04 Synth Lead 4 05 Synth Lead 5 06 Synth Lead 6 07 Pop Lead 1 08 Pop Lead 2 09 Pop Lead 3 10 Pop Lead 4 11 Pop Lead 5 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Solo human voice singing “ahh.” A These continuous, sustained synth sounds feature a smooth, warm character that help support the other voices in a passage, and often serve as transition sounds. These voices have more of unique character and distinctiveness than the other synth pads, and feature sweeping filter effects and other dynamic sound variations when held. B D These continuous pad voices feature gentle, bell sounds. There are several types of voices here—including an initial bell sound, as a bright bell that pulses softly and continuously. This pad features a mysterious, spacey sound. Bright, buzzy continuous synth sound with soft pad. A These special synth sounds are designed for solo parts and lead lines. Included is a synth voice that has a strong layered fourth interval below the main pitch. A light and round synth sound, appropriate for solos and leads. ORGAN PIANO Voice Name 12 Synth Cla 1 13 Synth Cla 2 14 Synth Cla 3 15 Synth Cla 4 16 Synth Brass 1 17 Synth Brass 2 18 Synth Brass 3 19 Synth Brass 4 20 Synth Brass 5 21 Synth Brass 6 22 Synth Strs 1 23 Synth Strs 2 24 Synth Strs 3 25 Synth Strs 4 26 Synth Bell 1 27 Synth Bell 2 28 Synth Bell 3 29 Synth Bell 4 30 Synth Decay Description A bright, round and fresh synth sound, reminiscent of the clarinet. B An abundant variety of synth brass voices, from conventional sounds and octave unisons to unique, comical sounds. 2 Voices Category SYNTH Spacious synth strings sound. Synth sounds with variations including crisp, clangorous bright bell and soft, glassy sounds. D Unique decaying synth sound. 01 Pipe Organ 1 02 Pipe Organ 2 A The pipe organ has its roots in churches and cathedrals, and features a solemn, rich, majestic sound. The voices here range from soft to powerful. 03 Pipe Organ 3 04 Harmonica 1 B This instrument has a wide expressive range, and can be used for emotional, soft ballads and solos. 05 Harmonica 2 06 Theatre Organ 1 07 Theatre Organ 2 08 Accordion 1 09 Accordion 2 10 Bandoneon This musical instrument is often used for tango, and features a characteristic initial attack. 11 Reed Organ This is a small organ without pipes and features a warm sound. 12 Jazz Organ 1 13 Jazz Organ 2 These electric organ sounds—great for jazz and R&B—are designed to be used with the rich rotary speaker effect. 14 Jazz Organ 3 15 Pop Organ 1 16 Pop Organ 2 17 Pop Organ 3 18 Rock Organ 1 19 Rock Organ 2 20 Organ Bass 1 21 Organ Bass 2 22 Organ Bass 3 23 Organ Bass 4 01 Piano 1 02 Piano 2 03 Honkytonk Piano 04 Harpsichord This instrument evokes feelings of nostalgia, having been used extensively in silent movie theaters, skating rinks, restaurants (especially pizzerias) and baseball stadiums. D A versatile, multi-purpose instrument that has a home in a wide variety of genres, including French chanson, Argentinian tango, polka and Tex-Mex music. Multi-purpose organ sounds. Hard, overdriven, distorted organ sound, ideal for rock. Pipe organ bass and jazz organ bass sounds for lower register parts. A Multi-purpose piano sounds. Purposely out-of-tune piano sound, used in ragtime, older jazz and blues and country rock music. B The definitive instrument for baroque music. Since harpsichord uses plucked strings, there is no touch response. There is, however, a characteristic additional sound when the keys are released. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 37 Category PIANO 2 Voices GUITAR PERCUSSION TIMPANI ELECTRIC BASS 38 Voice Name Description 05 Clavichord Soft keyboard instrument for classical music, with unique sound when keys are released. 06 DX E.Piano 1 07 DX E.Piano 2 08 Stage E.Piano 1 09 Stage E.Piano 2 10 Stage E.Piano 3 11 Stage E.Piano 4 12 Stack E.Piano This bright electric piano is characterized by its sharp attack sound. 13 Clavi 1 Funky clavi. 14 Clavi 2 01 Nylon Guitar 02 Steel Guitar Acoustic guitar. Steel string. 03 12Str Guitar 12-string classic guitar with gorgeous sounds. 04 Jazz Guitar 05 Harp 1 06 Harp 2 07 Elec Guitar 1 08 Elec Guitar 2 09 Elec Guitar 3 10 Muted Guitar Muted guitar. 11 Distortion Gtr 1 Distorted guitar. 12 Distortion Gtr 2 13 Banjo For country and dixieland jazz. 14 Mandolin This instrument is used in much Italian music and features a realistic plucked sound. 15 Pedal Steel Gtr Hawaiian guitar. Effective when used with the glide function. D Electric piano sounds from the popular DX-7 synthesizer. These electric piano voices feature the characteristic hammer and tine sound, with a bright yet warm feel. The #2 sound also has a tremolo effect. A Acoustic guitar. Nylon string. This soft electric guitar is good for jazz solo passages. B The gentle, beautiful sound of this instrument makes it ideal for soft passages, and is often played glissando for dramatic effect. D These electric guitar sounds include distortion and overdrive effects, as well a clean electric guitar with realistic decay. 01 Vibraphone 1 02 Vibraphone 2 03 Marimba 04 Xylophone Dry and tight sounds. 05 Glockenspiel 1 This is the sound of a small glockenspiel, and features a soft, shining sound. 06 Glockenspiel 2 07 Celesta The celesta is similar in structure to the piano. Hammers move and hit metal bars (similar to the glockenspiel) when the keys are played, producing a pretty, somewhat fragile bell sound. 08 Music Box Music box 09 Chime 1 Chime 10 Chime 2 01 Timpani 02 Timpani Roll 01 Fingered Bass 1 02 Fingered Bass 2 03 Fingered Bass 3 04 Slap Bass 1 05 Slap Bass 2 06 Slap Bass 3 07 Picked Bass 1 08 Picked Bass 2 09 Fretless Bass ELB-01 Owner’s Manual A This percussion instrument utilizes resonators fitted with metal discs, which in turn are connected by rod to a motor—which produces the distinctive, warm tremolo effect heard in some jazz music. B This instrument is similar to the xylophone and has resonant tubes under the sound plates. However, the wooden keys give it a soft, more organic sound, and it has an especially rich lower register-giving it a wide expressive range and making it useful as a solo instrument. D A B/D This dramatic sounding percussion instrument is unlike most drums in that it produces a definite pitch. It adds extra power and dynamic impact when played in unison with other instruments and plays a very important role in orchestral music. Timpani played with a drum roll technique. A Electric bass played with fingers. B Percussive, slapped bass sounds. These slap bass voices feature variations in the ‘thickness’ of the sounds and differences in how the strings are played. D These electric bass voices feature the bright attack of playing with a pick, and have variations in the ‘thickness’ of the sounds. Smooth fretless bass. This fretless bass voice has a unique sound, and is best used with subtle, sliding pitch changes. WORLD Voice Name Description 01 Funk Bass 1 A Synth bass suitable for rock and blues. 02 Funk Bass 2 03 Funk Bass 3 04 Dance Bass 1 05 Dance Bass 2 B Synth bass suitable for dance music. 06 Smooth Bass 1 07 Smooth Bass 2 08 Smooth Bass 3 01 Pan Flute 02 Bagpipe A traditional Scottish instrument, usually played with a continuous, low drone. The sound can be melancholy as well dramatic and inspiring. 03 Dulcimer A characteristically clear and beautiful voice. 04 Shakuhachi Traditional Japanese recorder made of bamboo. 05 Yokobue Traditional Japanese flute. 06 Shamisen 07 Koto 08 Taishokoto 09 Erhu 10 Sheng The Chinese sheng is a mouth-blown free reed instrument consisting of vertical tubes, and apparently inspired the invention of the harmonica, accordion and reed organ. 11 Pipa A Chinese lute with a pear-shaped body, it is used often for solo parts as well as accompaniment and ensemble. 12 Sitar Indian (or Hindustani) classical instrument with different resonances in the lower and mid/ high ranges. 13 Steel Drum This pitched percussion instrument, originating in Trinidad in the West Indies, is made from 55-gallon oil drums and is apparently the only acoustic instrument invented in the 20th century. It has a bright and joyful tropical sound that belies its industrial source. 14 Kalimba African instrument. Contemporary, “cool” synth bass sounds. 2 D A B The panflute (also known as “pan pipes”) is a simple instrument used in folk music of various countries, and consists of several stopped pipes of increasing length bound together in one line. It is a beautiful instrument that evokes the sound of wind in nature and is named after the Greek mythological god Pan. Voices Category SYNTH BASS This traditional Japanese instrument features three strings and a small body covered with animal skin. The bright, slightly buzzy sound is similar to the banjo, yet has a very strong Oriental flavor. Japanese Koto. Japanese Taisho Koto. D Also known as the “Chinese violin,” this is a two-stringed bowed instrument, capable of producing sad, mysterious, or joyful melodies. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 39 3 Voice Controls and Effects The Electone is equipped with two general kinds of functions that can be used to change the sound of the Voices: Voice Controls and Effects. Each Voice has been given certain factory-preset effect settings to best enhance its sound. However, if you wish, you can change the sound to suit your preferences by using the controls and effects described in this section. All built-in effects are digital. The chart below shows the various Voice controls and effects for the individual Voice sections. Available functions are indicated by circles. The controls and effects are applied differently according to the different types: independently for each Voice section, independently for each keyboard or globally for the entire system. 3 Voice Controls and Effects Controls and Effects Reference page for changing the settings Voice sections to which the controls/effects are applied Upper Keyboard Lead Voice Lower Keyboard Pedal board Upper Keyboard Voice 1, 2 Lead Voice Lower Keyboard Voice 1, 2 Pedal board Voice 1, 2 Volume page 42 O O O O Reverb (send level) page 42 O O O O Initial Touch page 42 O O O – Feet page 42 O O O O Pan page 43 O O O O Tune page 43 O O O O Transpose page 43 O O O O Vibrato page 44 O O O O Reverb page 45 O O O O Delay page 45 O O O O Karaoke page 45 O O O O Chorus page 45 O O O O Flanger page 45 O O O O Phaser page 45 O O O O Tremolo/Auto Pan page 45 O O O O Rotary Speaker page 45 O O O O Distortion page 45 O O O O Wah page 45 O O O O Dynamic page 45 O O O O EQ/Enhancer page 45 O O O O Slide page 47 – O – – Reverb page 48 Sustain page 49 O – O O Rotary Speaker page 50 O O O O Selecting from the Voice Condition display, Pages 1-6 Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4/5 Selecting from the panel Page 6 40 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual O 1 Selecting from the Voice Condition display To call up the Voice Condition display: Choose a Voice on the panel, then press the same button on the panel again. The Voice Condition display appears. Voice Condition Display Voice Controls and Effects 3 Currently selected page VOL.¿24 REV.÷20 ¨1⁄ TOUCH¿ 8 FEET÷PRESET Each voice group’s Voice Condition (except for Lead Voice) is consists of five display pages. Voice Condition of the Lead Voice consists of six pages. Setting and adjusting the parameters You can change the items or parameters when the arrow indicator “¿(÷)” in the display is flashing. Press the [A] – [D] buttons corresponding to the items or parameters you want to change to make the indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the desired control setting. With the indicator flashing, you can also directly change the items or parameters by using the DATA CONTROL dial. For details, see “Using the LCD display” on page 17. NOTE After pressing one of the [A] – [D] buttons (to make the indicator flash), you can continue pressing the same button to change the item or parameter. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 41 Voice Condition [Page 1] 1 2 VOL.¿24 REV.÷20 ¨1⁄ TOUCH¿ 8 FEET÷PRESET 3 4 In this display, you can adjust the basic Voice controls, including panning, touch sensitivity and volume. The items included in this page differ between the Pedal Voice sections and the other sections. Initial Touch is not applied to the Pedal Voices. 3 Voice Controls and Effects 1 Volume Fine adjustment of the Voice volume. See page 26 for more information. 2 Reference Page Reverb (page 48) Determines the amount of reverb applied to each Voice section. When the Reverb Depth setting in the Reverb display is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect. See page 48 for details. Press the [B] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. 3 NOTE Initial Touch may not be effective on some Voices, such as Organ Voices. Reverb Touch Controls volume and timbre according to the velocity at which you play the keys. The harder you play the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter the timbre will become. Higher settings make the change wider. The minimum setting produces no effect. This function is not applied to the Pedal Voices. Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Range: 0 – 14 4 Feet Determines the octave setting of the Voice, letting you use the Voice over a wide register. There are three settings: 4', 8' and 16' (4' is highest and 16' is lowest). A 2' setting is added to the Pedal Voice sections. Preset is the original (factory) setting. Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. 42 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Voice Condition [Page 2] Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 2. 1 PAN ¿C TUNE¿ 0 2 1 ¨1¤ TRANSP.÷ 0 3 3 Panning Voice Controls and Effects Determines the position of the Voice in the stereo image. Seven pan positions are available. Press the [A] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Range: L3 – C – R3 2 Tune Determines the fine pitch settings for each Voice section, letting you create a warmer, richer sound by slightly detuning one Voice relative to another. Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Reference Page Pitch (for entire instrument); (page 150) Range: -64 – +63 3 Transpose Changes the pitch in semitones for each Voice section. Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Reference Page Transpose (for entire instrument); (page 150) Range: -6 – +6 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 43 Voice Condition [Page 3] Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 3. 1 VIB¿PRESET ¨1‹ Vibrato The Vibrato function varies the level of the Voices, making them sound warmer and more animated. This effect is applied independently to each Voice section. For some Voices, vibrato may not be effective at all or the effect may not sound as expected. Voice Controls and Effects 1 Preset/User Vibrato Control Speed Each press of the [A] button toggles Delay between Preset and User. Selecting Preset calls up the original (factory) vibrato settings for the Voice. When Preset is selected, the Delay, Depth and Speed parameters cannot be edited. Selecting User lets you adjust the vibrato settings for yourself. 1 Depth 3 2 VIB¿USER DEPTH÷ 0¨1‹ DELAY¿ 0 SPEED÷ 0 3 2 4 Depth Determines the intensity of the vibrato effect. Higher settings result in a more pronounced vibrato. The minimum setting cancels the vibrato effect. Press the [B] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Range: 0 – 14 3 Delay Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the delay of the vibrato onset. Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Range: 0 – 14 4 Speed Determines the speed of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the speed of the vibrato. Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Range: 0 – 14 44 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Voice Condition [Page 4] Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 4. EFFECT¿PRESET EFFECT¿REVERB EFFECT¿EQ/ENHANCE EFFECT¿THRU EFFECT¿PRESET TYPE¿01:THRU 3 ¨1› Voice Controls and Effects 1 2 Effect You can select the effects applied to each Voice section. 1 Effect Category You can select the Effect Category applied to each Voice section. Press the [A] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then you can select the Effect Categories in sequence: Preset → Reverb → Delay → ... → Dynamic → EQ/Enhancer → Thru by turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise. Turning the DATA CONTROL dial counter-clockwise selects in the reverse order. PRESET The effect type that best matches and is most suited to the currently selected sound is automatically selected. REVERB Produces a gentle “wash” of aftertones in the sound, recreating the subtle ambience and depth of actual performance spaces and rooms. DELAY Produces delayed distinct repeats of the sound, or echoes. This is also useful for creating rhythmic repeats in the sound. KARAOKE Produces a deep echo effect like that used in Karaoke sing-along applications. CHORUS Creates a warm effect as if several of the same sound were playing at once. Makes the overall sound richer, “fatter” and more animated. FLANGER This creates a metallic periodic “sweeping” effect, similar to Chorus but with a brighter more resonant sound. PHASER Similar to Flanger, this produces rolling timbre changes and a pronounced up/down filter sweep effect. TREMOLO/ AUTO PAN This periodically changes the volume and has the effect of moving the sound image both front and back, and left and right. ROTARY SPEAKER This popular effect (used mainly for electronic organ sounds) recreates the rich, animated pulsing sound of a rotating speaker horn. DISTORTION This effect adds distortion to the sound. WAH This uses an automatic up/down filter sweep to change the timbre of the sound, producing a “wah-wah” sound. DYNAMIC This effect (also called compression) “squeezes” the overall dynamic range of the sound, and has a gain control—letting you make soft sounds louder, and thus give more “punch” to the sound. EQ/ENHANCER EQ: This processing tool lets you change the level for specific frequency ranges in the sound, and affects the overall sound quality. Enhancer: This effect emphasizes and enhances the overtones in the high frequency sound range overtone—not merely making the sound brighter, but giving it more clarity and presence. THRU Bypass control. This cancels the effect processing. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 45 When Preset is selected, the original (factory) effect category for the selected Voice is automatically set. Selecting Thru bypasses the effect (no effect is added to the selected Voice). Reference Page Effect List (page 52) 2 Effect Type Effect types are displayed corresponding to the selected effect category. Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Voice Condition [Page 5] 3 Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 5. Currently selected Effect Type Voice Controls and Effects TYPE:Hall 1 ¿Time Time Dry/Wet ¨1ﬁ ÷2.1s ÷2.1s ÷D24>W Effect Parameters You can set the parameters of effect type selected in the Voice Condition display, Page 4. Generally, the effect parameters settings are automatically well-balanced to the selected effect type, so there is no need to follow the steps below unless you want to change the setting. If you want to change the setting, select the parameter, then change the value. Since selection of Parameters and setting of value follow the same procedure throughout all Effect Type, instructions for only “Hall 1” of Reverb are given here. For details, see page 52. TYPE:Hall 1 ¿Time 1 1 ¨1ﬁ ÷2.1s 2 Parameters Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the selected effect type.Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the parameters. In this case, the Time parameter is selected. 2 Value setting Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. 46 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Voice Condition [Page 6] (only for Lead Voice) Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 6. 1 ’SLIDE SLIDE TIME¿ 0 Î ﬂ 2 In this Page, determines whether or not the Slide function is applied to the Lead Voice. 3 Slide 1 Voice Controls and Effects Applies a portamento effect to notes played in legato. The Slide function is effective within a one-octave range for the Lead Voice. Slide On/Off Determines the on/off status of the Slide effect. Each press of the [A] button toggles between On and Off. 2 Slide Time Determines the speed of the slide or portamento effect. The higher the value, the slower the speed. Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Range: 0 – 14 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 47 2 Selecting from the panel The Reverb, Sustain and Rotary Speaker displays are called up by pressing the respective buttons on the panel. Reverb ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Reverb adds an echo-like effect to the sound, giving the impression of a performance in a large room or concert hall. You can adjust the reverb volume for each Voice section or the entire system. Also, you can adjust the reverb volume for rhythm and accompaniment separately. Call up the Reverb display to set the Reverb effect by pressing the [REVERB] button on the panel. 3 Voice Controls and Effects Reference Pages Changing the rhythm volume/reverb (page 62) Reverb (page 42) Each press of the [REVERB] button toggles between On and Off. When set to On, the lamp of the button lights up to indicate that Reverb is on. Reverb Display 2 <REVERB> ¿XG HALL 1 1 DEPTH÷ 0 TIM÷ 2.1 3 1 Type Selects the Reverb Type. Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. 2 Depth Determines the depth of reverberation or the level of the reflected sounds. This allows fine control over the depth. When this parameter is set to the minimum, the settings in Voice Condition display, Page 2 (page 43) have no effect. Press the [B] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Range: 0 - 24 3 Time Determines the reverb length for each of the Voice sections. Higher settings result in a longer reverb sound. Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Range: 0.3s – 30.0s 48 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Sustain ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The sustain effect, selectable for the Upper, Lower and Pedal Voices, causes Voices to gradually fade out when the keys are released. The sustain on/off and sustain length settings are independent for each keyboard, providing maximum expressive control. Call up the Sustain display to set the Sustain effect by pressing the [SUSTAIN] button on the panel. 3 <SUSTAIN> ’LOWER¿10 Voice Controls and Effects Sustain Display ’UPPER÷10 ’PEDAL÷ 6 Sustain On/Off For Upper Voices, press the corresponding [B] button to toggle between On and Off. For Lower Voices, press the corresponding [C] button to toggle between On and Off. For Pedal Voices, press the corresponding [D] button to toggle between On and Off. Sustain cannot be applied to the Lead Voices. The lamp of the [SUSTAIN] button lights up when you turn on the Sustain effect for one of the Upper, Lower and Pedal Voices in the Sustain display. When you turn off the Sustain effect for all Voices in the Sustain display, the lamp turns off. Remember to check whether the sustain effects are on or off in the Sustain display before you start to play. Sustain Length The display shows the current sustain length values for each keyboard. Press the appropriate button to make the “¿(÷)” indicator flash (Upper Keyboard: [B] button; Lower Keyboard: [C] button; Pedal Keyboard: [D] button), then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 49 Rotary Speaker ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Rotary Speaker recreates the rich, swirling sound of the popular rotating speaker effect. The Rotary Speaker effect can be switched in real time as you play, with either the front panel button or the Left Footswitch (when properly set for Footswitch operation). Keep in mind that the Rotary Speaker effect CANNOT be turned on only by turning on the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button. To use the Rotary Speaker effect, follow the steps below. 1 3 Select the Rotary Speaker effect from the desired Voice. When you want to set Rotary Speaker for one of the Voice sections, you can select the effect category of Rotary Speaker in the Voice Condition display, Page 4. See page 45 for details. Voice Controls and Effects Select “Rotary Speaker” here EFFECT¿ROTARY SP.¨1› TYPE¿01:XG ROTARY SP 2 Adjust the rotating speed and mode of the Rotary Speaker. Press the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button to call up the Rotary Speaker display. The settings in this display are common to all Voice sections. <ROTARY SPEAKER> SPEED¿4.88 MODE÷SLOW 1 1 2 Speed Determines the speed of the speaker rotation. Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Range: 2.69Hz – 39.7Hz 2 Mode Determines the slow/stop mode when the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button is off. If Slow is selected, a slow chorus effect is applied when you turn off the button on the panel. If Stop is selected, the Rotary Speaker effect turns off (stops completely) when you turn off the button on the panel. Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Once the Rotary Speaker effect has been turned on and set, you can control the effect in real time from the panel or from the Left Footswitch. 50 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Control the Rotary Speaker effect from the panel or from the Left Footswitch. You can control Rotary Speaker on/off not only from the panel but also by using the Left Footswitch, if the Footswitch has been properly assigned. See “4 Rotary Speaker” on page 149 for details. 3 Voice Controls and Effects 3 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 51 3 Effect List PRESET Parameter Range Description R DelayTime 0.1 – 743.0 msec Echo: 0.1 – 371.5 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat in the right channel. C DelayTime 0.1 – 743.0 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat in the center of the stereo image. REVERB L>R Delay 0.1 – 371.5 msec Produces a gentle “wash” of aftertones in the sound, recreating the subtle ambience and depth of actual performance spaces and rooms. Determines the time for the sound to move from left to right (when using Cross Delay). R>L Delay 0.1 – 371.5 msec Determines the time for the sound to move from right to left (when using Cross Delay). DelayTime 16th – 8th. When using Tempo Delay, this sets the time between delayed repeats to match the tempo of the rhythm/song. InputSelect L, R, L/R Determines the input configuration. FB Delay 0.1 – 743.0 msec Determines the feedback time of the delayed repeats. The larger the value, the longer the time between delayed repeats. (For Delay LR, the left and right channels can be set independently.) FB Level -63 – +63 Determines the amount of delayed repeats in the sound. When this is set to 0%, the delayed repeat from the second time will not sound. Dry/Wet D63>W – D<W63 Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound. The effect type that best matches and is most suited to the currently selected sound is automatically selected. 3 Voice Controls and Effects No. Type No. Type 01 HALL 1 14 STAGE 2 02 HALL 2 15 PLATE 1 03 HALL 3 16 PLATE 2 04 HALL M 17 XG HALL 1 05 HALL L 18 XG HALL 2 06 ROOM 1 19 XG ROOM 1 07 ROOM 2 20 XG ROOM 2 08 ROOM 3 21 XG ROOM 3 09 ROOM 4 22 XG STAGE 1 10 ROOM S 23 XG STAGE 2 11 ROOM M 24 XG PLATE 12 ROOM L 25 GM PLATE 13 STAGE 1 Parameter Range Description Time 0.3 – 30.0 s Determines the decay time of the reverb. KARAOKE Dry/Wet D63>W – D<W63 Determines the balance of the original sound (dry) and the effect sound (wet). Produces a deep echo effect like that used in Karaoke sing-along applications. No. Type DELAY 01 KARAOKE 1 Produces delayed distinct repeats of the sound, or echoes. This is also useful for creating rhythmic repeats in the sound. 02 KARAOKE 2 03 KARAOKE 3 Parameter No. 52 Type 01 DELAY LCR 02 XG DLY LCR 03 DELAY LR 04 ECHO 05 CROSS DELAY 06 TEMPO DELAY Parameter Range Description L DelayTime 0.1 – 743.0 msec Echo: 0.1 – 371.5 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat in the left channel. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Range Description DelayTime 0.1 – 400 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat. FB Level -63 – +63 Determines the amount of delayed repeats in the sound. When this is set to 0%, the delayed repeat from the second time will not sound. Dry/Wet D63>W – D<W63 Determines the balance of the original sound and effect sound. Parameter Creates a warm effect as if several of the same sound were playing at once. Makes the overall sound richer, “fatter” and more animated. No. Type No. CHORUS 1 10 GM CHORUS 4 02 CHORUS 2 11 FB CHORUS 03 XG CHORUS 1 12 CELESTE 1 04 XG CHORUS 2 13 CELESTE 2 05 XG CHORUS 3 14 CELESTE 3 06 XG CHORUS 4 15 CELESTE 4 07 GM CHORUS 1 16 SYMPHONIC 08 GM CHORUS 2 17 XG SYMPHONIC 09 GM CHORUS 3 Value Description Determines the frequency of oscillation, or the speed of the wavering effect. LFO Depth 0 – 127 Determines the depth of oscillation, or the amount of the wavering effect. FB Level -63 – +63 Determines the amount of output sound (with the flanging effect) that is returned to the input. The larger the value, the more complex and pronounced the flanging effect becomes. Dry/Wet D63>W – D<W63 Determines the original sound and the effect sound. Similar to Flanger, this produces rolling timbre changes and a pronounced up/down filter sweep effect. 0.00 – 39.7 Hz Determines the frequency of oscillation, or the speed of the wavering effect. LFO Depth 0 – 127 Determines the depth of oscillation, or the amount of the wavering effect. 01 PHASER 02 EP PHASER 1 Determines the balance of the original sound and the effect sound. 03 EP PHASER 2 04 EP PHASER 3 Input Mode D63>W – D<W63 Mono/Stereo No. Type 18 ENS DETUNE Parameter Value Determines the input configuration. Description Detune -50 – +50 cent Determines the amount of detuning (or pitch shifting) is applied to the delayed repeats. L DelayTime 0.0 – 50.0 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat in the left channel. R DelayTime 0.0 – 50.0 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat in the right channel. Dry/Wet D63>W – D<W63 Determines the balance of the original sound and the effect sound. FLANGER This creates a metallic periodic “sweeping” effect, similar to Chorus but with a brighter more resonant sound. No. Type Type Parameter Value Description LFO Freq. 0.00 – 39.7 Hz Determines the frequency of oscillation, or the speed of the wavering effect. L/R Depth 0 – 127 Determines the depth of oscillation, or the amount of the wavering effect. Phase Shift 0 – 127 Determines the phase relationship between the processed signal and the original. This changes the sound characteristics of the Phaser effect. FB Level -63 – +63 Determines the amount of output sound (with the phasing effect) that is returned to the input. The larger the value, the more complex and pronounced the phasing effect becomes. Dry/Wet D63>W – D<W63 Determines the balance of the original sound and the effect sound. TREMOLO/AUTO PAN This periodically changes the volume and has the effect of moving the sound image both front and back, and left and right. No. No. 3 PHASER LFO Freq. Dry/Wet Description 0.00 – 39.7 Hz Type 01 Parameter Value LFO Freq. Voice Controls and Effects CHORUS Type 01 TREMOLO 1 01 FLANGER 1 02 TREMOLO 2 02 FLANGER 2 03 XG TREMOLO 03 XG FLANGER 1 04 EP TREMOLO 04 XG FLANGER 2 05 GT TREMOLO 1 05 XG FLANGER 3 06 GT TREMOLO 2 06 GM FLANGER 07 ORGAN TREM. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 53 Parameter Range Description LFO Freq. 0.00 – 39.7 Hz Determines the tremolo speed. AM Depth 0 – 127 Determines the amount of volume change. PM Depth 0 – 127 Determines the amount of pitch change in the sound. Input Mode Mono/Stereo Determines the input configuration. LFO Depth 0 – 127 Determines the depth of the Tremolo effect. L/R Depth 0 – 127 Determines the depth of panning between the left and right channels. F/R Depth 0 – 127 Front/rear. Determines the depth of the front and rear panning effect. This controls both level and pitch at the same time. 3 Voice Controls and Effects No. Type 08 AUTO PAN 09 XG AT PAN 10 EP AUTO PAN Parameter Parameter Value Determines the frequency of the Auto Pan effect, or how fast the sound shifts between the left and right channels. L/R Depth 0 – 127 Determines the depth of the left/ right panning effect. F/R Depth 0 – 127 Determines the depth of the front/ rear panning effect. This controls both level and pitch at the same time. Pan L<->R L->R L<-R Lturn Rturn L/R Determines the Auto Pan type. (“L<->R” is a sine wave and “L/R” is a sawtooth wave.) This effect adds distortion to the sound. No. Type 01 DIST HARD 02 DIST SOFT 03 OVERDRIVE 04 XG DIST 05 XG AMP SIM This popular effect (used mainly for electronic organ sounds) recreates the rich, animated pulsing sound of a rotating speaker horn. 02 ROTARY SP 1 03 ROTARY SP 2 04 ROTARY SP 3 05 ROTARY SP 4 54 Value Description EQ LowFreq. 32 – 2.0k Hz Determines the central frequency of the low frequency range that is boosted or cut. EQ Low Gain -12 – +12 dB Determines the amount over which the low frequency range is boosted or cut. EQ Hi.Freq. 500 – 16k Hz Determines the central frequency of the high frequency range that is boosted or cut. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Description 0 – 127 Determines the amount or degree of distortion in the sound. Amp. Type Off Stack Combo Tube Determines the type of amplifier that is simulated. LPF Cutoff 1.0 – 18k Hz Thru Determines the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter. Frequencies above this value are cut or filtered out. OutputLevel 0 – 127 Determines the level or volume of the processed sound. EQ Low Gain -12 – +12 dB Determines the amount of EQ boost or cut in the low frequency range. EQ Mid.Gain -12 – +12 dB Determines the amount of EQ boost or cut in the mid frequency range. Dry/Wet D63>W – D<W63 Determines the balance of the original sound and the effect sound. This uses an automatic up/down filter sweep to change the timbre of the sound, producing a “wahwah” sound. No. Type XG ROTARY SP Value Drive WAH ROTARY SPEAKER 01 Description Determines the amount over which the high frequency range is boosted or cut. DISTORTION Description 0.00 – 39.7 Hz Parameter -12 – +12 dB Parameter LFO Freq. No. Value EQ Hi.Gain Type 01 AUTO WAH 02 XG AUTO WAH 03 TOUCH WAH 1 04 TOUCH WAH 2 05 CLAVI TC WAH 06 EP TOUCH WAH Parameter Value Description LFO Freq. 0.00 – 39.7 Hz Determines the speed of the Wah effect. LFO Depth 0 – 127 Determines the depth of the Wah effect. Cutoff 0 – 127 Determines the central frequency that the wah filter acts upon. Resonance 1.0 – 12.0 Determines the frequency bandwidth (around the central frequency set in Cutoff above) that the wah filter affects. Value Description Parameter Value Description 0 – 127 Determines the degree to which the wah filter is affected by your playing touch. EQ LowFreq. 50 – 2.0k Hz ST 2Band EQ: 32 – 2.0k Hz Determines the central frequency of the low frequency range that is to be boosted or cut. Dry/Wet D63>W – D<W63 Determines the balance of the original sound and the effect sound. EQ Low Gain -12 – +12 dB Determines the amount over which the low frequency range is boosted or cut. EQ Mid.Freq 100 – 16k Hz Determines the central frequency of the middle frequency range that is to be boosted or cut. EQ Mid.Gain -12 – +12 dB Determines the amount over which the middle frequency range is boosted or cut. EQ M Width 0.1 – 12.0 Determines the bandwidth or the range of frequencies around the specific middle frequency that is to be boosted or cut. Lower values let you narrow in on a specific frequency, while higher values select a broader range of frequencies to be affected. DYNAMIC This effect (also called compression) “squeezes” the overall dynamic range of the sound, and has a gain control—letting you make soft sounds louder, and thus give more “punch” to the sound. No. Type 01 COMPRESSOR 02 NOISE GATE Parameter Value Description Attack 1 – 40 msec Determines how soon the compression effect is applied, once the compressor has been triggered (as a result of Threshold below. Release 10 – 680 msec Determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain, once the trigger signal drops below the Threshold point. Threshold Compressor: -48 – -6 dB Noise Gate: -72 – -30 dB Determines the level of the input signal required to trigger the compressor. Signals at a level below the Threshold pass through unaffected; signals at and above the Threshold are compressed. Ratio 1.0 – 20.0 OutputLevel 0 – 127 Determines the amount of compression of the sound (for signals passing the Threshold). This is expressed as a ratio—the change in output signal relative to the change in input. The range here is 1/1 (no change in output signal, hence no compression) to 20/1. Higher ratios result in greater compression. Determines the overall output of the compressed signal. Use this to bring up the overall level after you’ve reduced the dynamic range with compression. EQ/ENHANCER EQ Hi.Freq 500 Hz – 16k Hz Determines the central frequency of the high frequency range that is to be boosted or cut. EQ Hi.Gain -12 – +12 dB Determines how much increase/ decrease the wave frequency point of EQ high frequency. 3 Voice Controls and Effects Parameter Sensitivity ENHANCER This effect emphasizes and enhances the overtones in the high frequency sound range overtone—not merely making the sound brighter, but giving it more clarity and presence. No. Type 06 HM ENHANCER 07 XG HM ENHNCE Parameter Value Description HPF Cutoff 500 Hz – 16k Hz Determines the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter. Frequencies above this value are cut or filtered out. Drive 0 – 127 Determines the amount or depth of the Enhancer effect. Mix Level 0 – 127 Determines how much of the processed enhanced sound is mixed together with the original sound. THRU Bypass control. This cancels the effect processing. EQ This processing tool lets you change the level for specific frequency ranges in the sound, and affects the overall sound quality. No. No. 01 Type Thru Type 01 ST 2BAND EQ 02 ST 3BAND EQ 03 XG 3BAND EQ 04 EQ DISCO 05 EQ TEL ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 55 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion This Electone features 133 different real rhythms featuring actual drum and percussion sampled sounds. Automatic Accompaniment functions are used with the rhythms, providing appropriate and completely automatic accompaniment to match the style of the selected rhythm. Moreover, the Electone has a Keyboard Percussion feature that allows you to directly play drum and percussion sounds from the Upper/Lower keyboards and Pedalboard. 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 1 Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm buttons A total of 133 rhythms can be instantly selected with the ten rhythm buttons on the front panel. To select and play a rhythm ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 Press one of the Rhythm buttons in the RHYTHM section on the front panel. For example, if you have pressed the [DANCE] button, the following display (Rhythm Menu) will appear. Rhythm Menu display <DANCE> ¿01:Ibiza The Rhythm Menu contains many Dance rhythms, and the currently selected Dance rhythm is shown in the display. 56 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 2 Select the Rhythm in the Rhythm Menu display. You can select the hidden dance rhythms in sequence (forward or reverse) by using the DATA CONTROL dial. <DANCE> ¿04:UK Pop Here, we’ve selected “UK Pop.” You can select the rhythm in the Rhythm Menu display by pressing the [C] button one or more times. Each press of the [C] button selects subsequent hidden rhythms. When the final item is reached, pressing the [C] button “wraps around” to the first item. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 3 4 Press the [START] button to immediately start the rhythm. Reference Page Operating the rhythm from the panel (page 59) To stop the rhythm, press this button again. You can turn the rhythm on/off and switch the sections as desired by pressing the buttons on the panel—and add the accompaniment to the rhythm. 4 Set the volume using the panel rhythm volume buttons. The buttons have seven volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to a maximum of full volume. Fine adjustments in the volume of the rhythm can also be made from the Rhythm Condition display (page 62). Reference Page Accompaniment (page 68) Reference Page Changing the rhythm volume/reverb (page 62) ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 57 Rhythm Structure Each rhythm is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a variation of the basic rhythm, you can use them to add “spice” to your performance and mix up the beats while you are playing. You can freely change the section while the rhythm is played back. INTRO This is used for the beginning of the song. There are three Intro sections that can be selected with INTRO [1] – [3] buttons. When the Intro finishes playing, the rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section. Selected Intro section’s lamp is lit MAIN 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion This is used for playing the main part of the song. There are four Main sections that can be selected with MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons. The rhythm pattern of several measures repeats indefinitely. Selected Main section’s lamp is lit FILL IN This is designed for use as a temporary and regular rhythmic pattern to spice up a repeating rhythm. There are four Fill In sections that can be played by pressing the selected (lit) MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons as desired. When one measure pattern of Fill In finishes playing, the rhythm is automatically shifts to the Main section. Selected Fill In section’s lamp flashes BREAK This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm pattern. The Break section is selected by pressing the [BREAK] button. When the one-measure Break pattern finishes playing, the rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section. The lamp is lit when the Break section is selected ENDING This is used for the ending of the song. When the ending is finished, the rhythm automatically stops. There are three Ending sections that can be selected with the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons. Selected Ending section’s lamp is lit 58 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Operating the rhythm from the panel ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can turn the rhythm on/off and switch the sections as desired by pressing the buttons on the panel. Using the Fill Ins and Break patterns let you add dynamic interest and “spice” to your performance. To start/stop the rhythm: START The rhythm begins as soon as the [START] button is pressed. To stop the rhythm, press the button again. 4 SYNCHRO START INTRO NOTE Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion The [SYNCHRO START] button puts the rhythm in “standby.” The rhythm starts when you press a note on the Lower keyboard or Pedalboard. When you start the rhythm with the [SYNCHRO START] button, pressing this button again stops the rhythm. When you start the rhythm with [SYNCHRO START] button, set the Lower/Pedal Memory to on. When Memory is off, releasing your fingers from Lower keyboard stops the rhythm. For details on Memory and the A.B.C. function, see page 71. Pressing one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons automatically adds a short introduction before starting the actual (Main) rhythm. First press one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons, then press the [START] or [SYNCHRO START] button to actually start the rhythm. While the introduction is playing, the BAR/BEAT display shows the countdown to the first measure of the pattern. For example, if there is a four-measure lead-in for a pattern in 4/4 time, the display at right appears: ENDING Pressing one of the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons automatically adds an ending phrase before stopping the rhythm. When you press the Ending button while rhythm is playing back, the rhythm will automatically stop after the ending phrase is played. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the ENDING button once again, while the ending is playing. NOTE Pressing the ENDING [1] button during playback of the Main section will first call up the Fill In pattern, then the Ending 1 pattern. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 59 To switch the rhythm sections: You can change the rhythm section of the Main phrase by pressing the desired MAIN/ FILL IN [A] – [D] button. The selected section's lamp (above the button) lights. To use the Fill In patterns: As you play the Electone along with the rhythm, occasionally press the selected MAIN/ FILL button as desired. The Fill In pattern (one measure) will be played and the selected Fill In section’s lamp (above the button) flashes. 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Reference Page To select and play a rhythm (page 56) When you use the Auto Fill In function, Fill Ins will be played automatically. The Auto Fill In function is set in the Page 1 of the Rhythm Condition display. To call up the Rhythm Condition display, select the desired rhythm and press the same rhythm button again. <PERCUSSION>”AUTO.F⁄ VOL.¿12 REV.÷ 8 When Auto Fill is set to On (”) in the right side of the display, the Fill In pattern is automatically played whenever you switch the Main sections. Each press of the [B] button toggles between On (”) and Off (’). To use the Break patterns: As you play the Electone along with the rhythm, occasionally press the [BREAK] button. This lets you vary a repeating rhythm with dynamic breaks. 60 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Adjusting the tempo ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can adjust the rhythm tempo by pressing the TEMPO buttons. 3 TEMPO Indicator 1 1 TEMPO 2 buttons For adjusting the speed of the rhythm. Pressing the right button increases the tempo and pressing the left button decreases it. Each rhythm has its original (preset) tempo. Press the TEMPO buttons simultaneously to restore the tempo to the original setting. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 2 TEMPO 4 Display (BAR/BEAT Indicator) TEMPO display shows the current tempo. Displayed values are given in beats per minute. The tempo range is 40 to 240 beats per minute. When the rhythm begins playing, the TEMPO indicator changes function to a BAR/ BEAT indicator. BAR/BEAT Indicator Bar (measure) Beat The number on the left in the BAR/BEAT indicator indicates the current bar or measure and the one on the right indicates the current beat in the bar. 3 BAR/BEAT indicator The beat indicator lamp above the TEMPO display also indicates the beats. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 61 Changing the rhythm volume/reverb ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can adjust the rhythm volume or amount of reverb applied to the rhythms and the percussion sounds used in the rhythms in the Rhythm Condition display. You can also have a Fill In play automatically by setting the Auto Fill function to ON. To call up the Rhythm Condition display, select the desired rhythm and press the same rhythm button again. 4 [Page 1] Rhythm Condition Display 1 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion <PERCUSSION>”AUTO.F⁄ VOL.¿12 REV.÷ 8 2 3 The buttons at the right and left side of the display and DATA CONTROL dial can control the rhythm volume and reverb. 1 Auto Fill When Auto Fill is set to On (”) in the display, the Fill In pattern is automatically played whenever you switch the Main sections. For details on how to set to On, see page 17. NOTE Depending on the volume value (set in the display), two adjacent Volume button lamps may be lit at the same time, indicating an intermediate position. 2 Volume Fine Adjustment of rhythm volume. Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Range: 0 – 24 3 Reference Page Reverb Depth (page 48) Reverb Determines the amount of reverb applied to the rhythm. Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. When the Reverb Depth (for entire instrument) is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect. Range: 0 – 24 62 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 2 Selecting rhythms from the User buttons As with the Voice sections, the Rhythm section also has User buttons (numbered 1 or 2) from which rhythms can be selected. You can select original User rhythms that have been created with this Electone or other models equipped with the Rhythm Pattern Program function (such as the ELS-01/01C/01X). For details on selecting original User rhythms, see next page. This also allows you to assign two or three rhythms from the same category to be selected from different buttons; one from the original Rhythm button, and the others from the User buttons. For example, to call up “Modern R&B,” select the R&B category. Press one of the User buttons at the right of the Rhythm buttons. 4 <USER> ¿01:User 1 2 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 1 [FILE]⁄⁄ Select one of the pages with the Page buttons. Currently selected Page <R&B> ¿01:Motor City ﬁ In this case, select Page 5 “R&B.” 3 Select the “Modern R&B” rhythm with the DATA CONTROL dial. <R&B> ¿06:Modern R&B ﬁ This step assigns “Modern R&B” to the User button [1]. You can call up the “Modern R&B” the next time you press the [1] button. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 63 To call up a User rhythm ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● User rhythms created on other Electones that have Rhythm Pattern Programming functions, such as the ELS-01/01C/01X, can be selected and played from the User buttons in the panel Rhythm section. To call up the User rhythm, load back the registration containing the User rhythm to Electone in advance. For details on loading back the Registration, see “Playing Back a Song” on page 132. This procedure assigns the User rhythms to the User numbers 1 – 48. 4 1 Press one of the User buttons at the right of the Rhythm buttons. 2 Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 11 (User Page). Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion <USER> ¿01:User 1 3 Select the User rhythm number by turning the DATA CONTROL dial. <USER> ¿04:User 4 64 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual [FILE]⁄⁄ [FILE]⁄⁄ Selecting Rhythm from an External Media ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can load rhythms from a USB storage device, and select them as User Rhythms. Style File Format files (extension: STY or ST2) can also be loaded. 1 Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal. 2 Press one of the User buttons at the right of the Rhythm buttons. 3 Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 11 (User Page). <USER> ¿01:User 1 4 [FILE]⁄⁄ Select the User number to which you want to load back the pattern file. <USER> ¿04:User 4 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 4 [FILE]⁄⁄ Press the [B] button corresponding to [FILE] in the display to turn on the file loading function. <USER> ¿04:User 4 [FILE]⁄⁄ <FILE SELECT> ¿Ã001:USB 01 The File Select display appears. ⁄⁄ [Õ] NOTE File loading cannot be done while the M.D.R. function is used or sequence data is playing back. The rhythm stops automatically if the File Select display is called up while the rhythm is being played. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 65 6 Select the pattern file you want to load to the Electone. File selection is done in the same way as song selection on page 111. <FILE SELECT> [˜]⁄⁄ ¿ 001:SoftRock [EXE] 7 NOTE To play back the User rhythm, first quit the File Select display. 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 66 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 8 Press the [D] button corresponding to the [EXE] in the display to load the file back to the Electone. This step assigns the pattern file to the User number selected in the step 4. For details on playing back the User rhythm, see “To call up a User rhythm” on page 64. Rhythm List ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This list shows all available rhythms on the Electone. Numbers written at the left side of each column in this list indicate the numbered buttons displayed in the Rhythm Menu. The letters A, B and D printed at the right side of each column in this list indicate the corresponding DATA CONTROL button’s name. Pressing that button selects the corresponding rhythm. 08 Easy Ballad DANCE 09 Guitar Ballad 01 Ibiza 10 Organ Ballad 02 Euro Trance Frankly Soul 11 Chart Ballad 03 Techno Party Jazz Funk 12 Analog Ballad 04 UK Pop 05 Detroit Pop 13 8Beat Modern 05 Swing House 6/8 Organ March 06 Modern R&B 14 Chillout 06 US Hip Hop 07 Broadway 07 New Gospel 15 Slow&Easy 07 Ground Beat 08 SF March 08 Gospel Shuffle 16 6/8 Slow Rock 08 Hip Hop Pop 09 Wild West 09 Gospel Sisters ROCK 09 Club Latin 10 Baroque 10 6/8 Soul 01 Power Rock 10 Latin Disco 11 Metronome 2/4 11 Blues Shuffle 02 Southern Rock 11 Garage 03 60's Rock 12 6/8 Trance 04 Hard Rock B 13 80's Dance D 01 Marching Band 1 02 Marching Band 2 03 Marching Band 3 04 6/8 March 05 R&B A 01 Motor City 02 Soul 03 04 6/8 Kids 06 B D A B D B D A A WALTZ LATIN 01 Gentle Waltz 01 Big Band Samba 02 Guitar Serenade 02 Light Samba 05 Rock Shuffle 14 Pop Beat 03 Snow Waltz 03 Bossa Nova 06 Tears Rock 1 15 Disco Philly 04 Classic Waltz 04 Pop Bossa 07 Tears Rock 2 16 70's Disco 05 Mariachi 05 Mambo 1 08 British Rock 17 Disco Chocolate 06 Musette 06 Mambo 2 09 New Country 07 Jazz Waltz 1 07 Montuno 10 Rock&Roll 08 Jazz Waltz 2 08 Calypso 11 Jive 09 Metronome 3/4 09 Cha Cha Cha 10 Big Band Cha Cha 11 Pop Cha Cha A B D SWING&JAZZ 01 Big Band 1 A 02 Big Band 2 12 Rumba 03 Big Band Bop 13 Beguine 04 Orch. Big Band 14 Tango 1 05 Orchestra Swing 15 Tango 2 06 Jungle Drum 07 Medium Jazz 01 Bolero 08 Afro Cuban 02 Flamenco 09 Five-Four 03 Pop Flamenco 10 Jazz Ballad 04 Pasodoble 11 Moonlight 05 Polka 1 Winter Song 06 Polka 2 13 Dixieland 07 Banda Polka 15 Dixieland Jazz Charleston 08 D POPS 09 10 Irish Dance 8Beat Light 2 12 Bluegrass Folk Rock 13 Hoedown 04 Asian Pops 14 Hawaiian 05 Unplugged 15 Mexican Dance 06 Bubblegum Pop BALLAD 07 Guitar Pop 08 British 16Beat 09 02 03 A 01 Power Ballad 02 Dramatic Ballad Fusion Shuffle 03 Movie Ballad 10 Jazz Pop 04 Carpenters Pop 11 Pop Shuffle 05 Love Song 12 British Pop 06 16Beat Ballad 1 13 Metronome 4/4 07 16Beat Ballad 2 B D D 4 Certain rhythms that have been created for use with slow, soft songs or for songs that do not use a bass part at the beginning, may not have drum sections. To use these rhythms, refer to the following information. The following rhythms/sections do not contain a drum part. To play back these rhythms/sections, make sure to turn the accompaniment parts on. A Category MARCH B WALTZ WORLD MUSIC Enka Sheriff Reggae 8Beat Light 1 D Tarantella 11 01 B WORLD MUSIC B 12 14 A B Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion MARCH BALLAD D A Rhythm Sections 6/8 Organ March Main A, Main B Baroque All sections except Intro 1 Guitar Serenade All sections except Intro 1 Banda Polka Main A, Fill In A Mexican Dance Main A, Fill In A Dramatic Ballad Main A Some sections of the following three rhythms do not contain an Auto Bass part. This means that even though the Auto Bass Chord is turned on, the bass part will not sound. • WALTZ: Guitar Serenade • WORLD MUSIC: Pop Flamenco • ROCK: New Country • Metronome 2/4 • Metronome 3/4 • Metronome 4/4 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 67 3 Accompaniment The Accompaniment function provides arpeggiated chords and other instrumental embellishments when rhythms are used. This control is selected from Page 3 and Page 4 of the Rhythm Condition display. 1 Select the desired rhythm and press the same button on the panel again. The Rhythm Condition display appears. 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion <PERCUSSION>”AUTO.F⁄ VOL.¿12 REV.÷ 8 2 Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 3 or Page 4. <PERCUSSION>”AUTO.F⁄ VOL.¿12 REV.÷ 8 [Page 3] Rhythm Condition Display ”MAIN DR. ’CHORD1 ”ADD DR.‹ ’CHORD2 Accompaniment [Page 4] Rhythm Condition Display ’PAD ’PHRASE1 › ’PHRASE2 Accompaniment Each rhythm consists of seven parts, and you can visually confirm the On/Off status for all parts in Page 3 and Page 4 of the Rhythm Condition display. These parts, with the exception of the Main Drum and Add Drum, are Accompaniment parts. The Accompaniment consists of five parts, Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase 1, and Phrase 2, and each of them can be set to on or off by pressing corresponding button. If you turn all the parts off, the Accompaniment does not sound. 68 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 3 Turn the desired parts on. Successive presses of the [A] – [D] buttons corresponding to the desired accompaniment parts alternates between On and Off. [Page 3] Rhythm Condition Display ”MAIN DR. ’CHORD1 1 ”ADD DR.‹ ’CHORD2 2 [Page 4] Rhythm Condition Display 3 4 › ”PHRASE2 4 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion ’PAD ’PHRASE1 1 Chord 1 2 Chord 2 These are the rhythmic chord backing parts. To set the On/Off status for Chord 1, use the [C] button in Page 3 of the Rhythm Condition display; for Chord 2, use the [D] button. 3 Pad This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds, such as strings and organ. To set the On/Off status for Pad, use the [A] button in Page 4 of the Rhythm Condition display. 4 Phrase 1 5 Phrase 2 These parts are used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song, such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios. To set the On/Off status for Phrase 1, use the [C] button in Page 4 of the Rhythm Condition display; for Phrase 2, use the [D] button. Not all parts contain accompaniment data. Some parts may be empty depending on the selected rhythm and rhythm section. Main Drum and Add Drum contains the drum and percussion rhythm patterns. When you turn both Main Drum and Add Drum off, the drum and percussion do not sound. Generally, Main Drum contains the main part of the rhythm and Add Drum has additional percussion sounds, such as tambourine. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 69 4 Press the [START] button to start the rhythm, and then play the Lower Keyboard. To adjust the volume and amount of reverb applied to the Accompaniment: Make settings in Page 2 of the Rhythm Condition display. 4 Reference Page Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Rhythm Condition display (page 62) 1 2 Select the desired rhythm and then press the same rhythm button on the panel again. The Rhythm Condition display appears. Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 2. <PERCUSSION>”AUTO.F⁄ VOL.¿12 REV.÷ 8 [Page 2] Rhythm Condition Display <ACCOMPANIMENT> ¤ VOL.¿16 REV.÷ 8 1 2 Determine the reverb and volume settings. 1 Volume Determines the accompaniment volume. Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Range: 0 – 24 2 Reference Page Reverb Depth (page 48) Reverb Determines the amount of reverb applied to accompaniment. When the Reverb Depth (for entire instrument) is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect. Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Range: 0 – 24 70 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 4 Automatic Accompaniment—Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) The Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) function works with the Rhythm section of the Electone to automatically produce bass accompaniment as you play. It adds an entirely new dimension to your performance by effectively putting a full backing band at your disposal. There are three modes used for producing Automatic Accompaniment patterns. You can select the desired mode in Page 1 of the A.B.C. display. To set the A.B.C. function: Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 4 The A.B.C. display appears. [Page 1] A.B.C. Display <ABC> ¿OFF ’L.MEMORY⁄ ’P.MEMORY 1 OFF 2 SINGLE 3 FINGERED 4 CUSTOM Select the desired mode by turning the DATA CONTROL dial. A.B.C. Mode You can select modes in sequence: Off → Single Finger → Fingered Chord → Custom A.B.C. by turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise. Turning the DATA CONTROL dial counter-clockwise selects in the reverse order. When you start the rhythm with the [SYNCHRO START] button, set the Lower/ Pedal Memory to on. When Memory is off, releasing your fingers from Lower keyboard stops the rhythm. For details, see “Memory” on page 73. 1 Off Cancels the Auto Bass Chord function. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 71 NOTE When the A.B.C. function mode is set to Single or Fingered Chord, the bass part will not sound even if you play the pedals of the Pedalboard. 2 Single You can produce major, minor, 7th, and minor 7th chords by simply using one, or at most, two or three fingers to play the chords. The Single Finger mode provides the fastest and easiest means to obtain many different chord/bass combinations. The chord produced will sound in the same octave regardless of where it is played on the Lower keyboard. Key of C C Major chords: Press the root of the chord (the note that corresponds to the chord’s name). Cm Minor chords: Simultaneously press the root and any one black key to the left of it. C7 7th chords: Simultaneously press the root and any one white key to the left of it. 4 Cm7 Minor 7th chords: Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Simultaneously press the root as well as any black key and any white key to the left of it. Playing single finger chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous chords to your performance. 3 Fingered Chord The Fingered Chord mode automatically produces bass accompaniment for chords played in the Lower keyboard. It allows you to use a wider range of chord types than in the Single Finger mode. In the Fingered Chord mode, you play full chords while the Auto Bass Chord function automatically selects the appropriate bass pattern. If you play only one or two notes in the Lower keyboard, the appropriate chord will sound on the basis of the previously played chord. Key of C NOTE When playing certain chords (aug, dim7, sus4, 6, and m6), make sure that the lowest not you play is the root of the chord. C Cm C7 Cm7 Cmaj7 Cm maj7 Caug Cdim Cdim7 Csus4 C7sus4 Cm7-5 C6 Cm6 Cadd9 Playing fingered chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous chords to your performance. 4 Custom A.B.C. The Custom A.B.C. mode is a slight variation on the Fingered Chord mode. It allows you to determine what bass notes will be played in the accompaniment by playing notes on the Pedalboard along with the chords you play in the Lower keyboard. 72 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Memory The Memory function is a convenient performance tool in the A.B.C. features that makes playing with the accompaniment even smoother and more fluid. It is available separately for both the Lower keyboard and Pedalboard. To use it, turn Memory on, start the rhythm and play chords and bass notes according to the selected A.B.C. mode. With Memory on, the accompaniment continues to play, even when you release your fingers (and foot). When you want to change to the next chord, simply play it and release it, and the auto accompaniment keeps playing with the new chord and bass note. This means that you can play a chord/bass note briefly, release it, and take your time before playing the next—you don’t have to hold a chord down to keep the accompaniment going. When A.B.C. is turned off (but Memory is on), the auto accompaniment of the rhythmic chords and bass pattern do not sound, but the sound of the Lower keyboard and/or Pedalboard continues until you play the next chord/bass note. 4 1 ’L.MEMORY⁄ ’P.MEMORY Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion <ABC> ¿OFF 2 1 Lower Memory When this is set to on, the Lower keyboard Voices and chord accompaniment keep playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard, while the rhythm plays. Successive pressing of the [B] button alternates between On and Off. 2 Pedal Memory When this is set to on, the Pedalboard Voices and bass accompaniment keep playing even after you release your foot from the Pedalboard, while the rhythm plays. Successive pressing of the [D] button alternates between On and Off. (In the Single Finger and Fingered modes:) When this is set to on, the bass accompaniment of the Pedalboard Voices keeps playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 73 5 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) The Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) feature automatically adds a harmony part to the melodies you play on the Upper keyboard. The harmony is derived from the chords you play on the Lower keyboard—or from the chords that are played for you, if you use Automatic Accompaniment. To set the M.O.C. function: 1 4 Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button. The A.B.C. display appears. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 2 Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 2. <ABC> ¿OFF ’L.MEMORY⁄ ’P.MEMORY [Page 2] M.O.C. Display <MOC> MODE¿OFF ¤ M.O.C. display appears. 3 Turn the M.O.C. on. Successive pressing of the [C] button alternates between On and Off. <MOC> MODE¿ON ¤ On: Produces harmonies of up to two notes in a range close to the melody played. Off: Cancels the Melody On Chord function. Melody On Chord can be heard only when the Upper Keyboard Voice section’s volume is set to the appropriate value. Melody On Chord does not apply to the Lead Voice. 74 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Rhythm Sequence Rhythm Sequence lets you create your own rhythm compositions, connecting together any of the Electone’s existing rhythms as well as original rhythms created on other Electones that have the Rhythm Sequence Program function (such as ELS-01). Although the ELB-01 does not have the full Rhythm Sequence Program function, you can load four rhythm compositions to Sequence numbers 1 – 4 in the display for future recall, using the steps below. When the rhythm sequence contains Registration Sequence data or Next Registration data, these data also can be loaded and played on the ELB-01. While a rhythm is playing, sequence data in the Registration data cannot be loaded. 2 Press the [MDR] button and select the desired song you want to load back to Electone. This is necessary because the rhythm sequence data is stored as part of the registration data in the song. ÃUSB 01 ¿ 001:SONG 1 3 4 Insert the media that contains the desired rhythm sequence data into the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 1 Reference Pages Songs (page 116) Selecting a Song (page 111) [˜] ⁄ Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button in the MDR section to load back the desired registration. Now the rhythm sequence data has been loaded to Sequence numbers 1—4. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 75 4 NOTE 5 Sequence numbers 1 – 4 can be turned on at the same time. 4 Press the [RHYTHM SEQUENCE] button to call up the Rhythm Sequence display. Select the sequence by pressing the [A] – [D] buttons corresponding to the desired sequence number in the display to be played back. Successive pressing of the [A] – [D] buttons alternates between On and Off. Use the [A] button for Sequence 1, [B] for Sequence 2, [C] for Sequence 3 and [D] for Sequence 4. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion ”SEQ.1 ’SEQ.3 6 76 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual ”SEQ.2 ’SEQ.4 Press the [START] button in the Rhythm section to play back the rhythm sequence. Only those sequences set to On can be played. Two or more rhythm sequences can be played back in succession in numeric order. After playing back, the solid square indication turns to a hollow square in the display. 6 Keyboard Percussion The Keyboard Percussion function provides many different drum and percussion sounds, playable from the keyboards and Pedalboard. Keyboard Percussion has two different modes, Preset and User. Preset Keyboard Percussion lets you play the preset drum kit sounds from the keyboards (assigned beforehand to the keys), while the User Keyboard Percussion lets you freely assign the drum sounds to any key or pedal you wish. Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 Turn off the Upper, Lower and/or Pedal Voices by setting each Voice’s volume to MIN. Reference Page 4 On/Off status of Voices (page 28) Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the Keyboard Percussion [1] or [2] button. Press the [1] button to play Percussion sounds on the Upper/Lower keyboards, and press the [2] button for the Pedalboard. [Page 1] Keyboard Percussion Display <KBP1> ¿PRE1 KIT÷Wonder Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 1 NOTE ⁄ Two Keyboard Percussion sets, [1] and [2], can be played at the same time by setting both buttons to on. Select the desired percussion kit. You can select a kit from a total of 15 different kits. Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the kit. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 77 3 Select the desired percussion kit. You can select a kit from a total of 15 different kits. Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the kit. <KBP1> ¿PRE1 KIT÷Wonder 4 ⁄ Play some notes on the keyboards and/or Pedalboard. For details of percussion assignments for each kit, see the “Preset Keyboard Percussion List” on page 80. 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Changing the Keyboard Percussion volume/reverb ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Reference Page On/Off status of Voices (page 28) Reference Pages Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion (page 77) Recalling the User Keyboard Percussion (page 92) You can make settings in Page 2 of the Keyboard Percussion display. 1 Turn off the Upper, Lower and/or Pedal Voices by setting each Voice’s volume to MIN. 2 Press the Keyboard Percussion button. <KBP1> ¿PRE1 KIT÷Wonder 3 Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 2 of the Keyboard Percussion display. <KBP1> VOL.¿16 78 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual ⁄ ¤ REV.÷ 8 [Page 2] Keyboard Percussion Display <KBP1> VOL.¿16 1 ¤ REV.÷ 8 2 You can adjust the Keyboard Percussion volume/reverb in the display. 1 Volume Determine the Keyboard Percussion volume. Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the kit. 4 2 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Range: 0 – 24 Reverb Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Keyboard Percussion. When the Reverb depth (for entire instrument) is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect. Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the kit. Reference Page Reverb Depth (page 48) Range: 0 – 24 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 79 Preset Keyboard Percussion List ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Indicates the drum/percussion sounds and their key assignments. Wonderland Kit Preset 2 (PK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK) Laser Beam BD Heavy Horse Laser Shot SD BrRoll Bass Drum Water Phone SD Heavy Footsteps Bubble SD BrShot 1 Snare Puddle SD Reverb 1 Snare Roll Thunder SD Light Footsteps Shower Tom 3 Synth Tom 3 Lion Beach SD Rim 1 Concert BD Footsteps Stream Tom 2 Synth Tom 2 Oxen Footsteps HH Close BD Heavy Footsteps Door Squeak Tom 1 Synth Tom 1 B1 Door Slam Door Slam HH Open BD Light C2 Big Clock Bass Drum Bass Drum Ride Cym 1 SD Heavy – Footsteps Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Synth Tom 3 SD BrRoll – Starship Tom 2 Tom 2 Crash Cym 1 SD Heavy – Footsteps Tom 1 Tom 1 Synth Tom 2 SD BrShot 1 – E2 Train Snare Snare Orch Cym SD Reverb 1 – F2 Car Crash Snare Roll Snare Roll SD Light – Footsteps HH Closed HH Closed Tom 3 – Puddle Cymbal Cymbal SD Rim 1 – HH Open HH Open Tom 2 – Tambourine Tambourine HH Close – FingerSnaps FingerSnaps Tom 1 – B2 Castanet Castanet HH Open – C3 Triangle M Triangle M Ride Cym 1 – Woodblock L Woodblock L Orch SD – Triangle O Triangle O Crash Cym 1 – Woodblock H Woodblock H SD Roll – E3 Handclap Handclap Orch Cym – F3 Jingle Bell Jingle Bell OrchCymRoll – Bell Tree Bell Tree Triangle M – Alarm Bell Alarm Bell Tambourine – Train Train Triangle O – Horn 1 Horn 1 Castanet – Horn 2 Horn 2 Cowbell 1 – B3 Siren Siren Timbale 1 L – C4 Car Engine Car Engine Timbale 1 H – Car Crash Car Crash WoodBlock L – Helicopter Helicopter Conga L – Starship Starship WoodBlock H – E4 Sheep Sheep Conga H – F4 Goat Goat Bongo L – Oxen Oxen Agogo L – Whinny Whinny Bongo H – Horse Horse Agogo H – Lion Lion Cuica L – Dog Dog Hand Claps – B4 Cat Cat Cuica H – C5 Rooster Rooster Shaker – C1 D1 D1 E1 F1 F1 G1 G1 A1 A1 C2 D2 D2 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion F2 G2 G2 A2 A2 C3 D3 D3 F3 G3 G3 A3 A3 C4 D4 D4 F4 G4 G4 A4 A4 C5 Synth Tom 1 Claves Owl – Insects – Frog – E5 Tweet 1 – F5 Tweet 2 – CuckooClock – Big Clock – Bell – Telephone – Camera – B5 Gnaw – C6 Applause – D5 D5 F5 G5 G5 A5 A5 : Indicates the keys of the keyboard. 80 Preset 1 (UK) Thunder C1 4 EL Drum Kit Preset 1 (LK) ELB-01 Owner’s Manual C1 Preset 1 (LK) Kick C1 Standard Kit 2 Preset 1 (UK) – Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Kick Short Preset 1 (UK) – Side Stick Surdo Mute SideStick L Surdo Mute Snare Surdo Open Snare Short Surdo Open Hand Clap Hi Q Hand Clap Hi Q Snare Tight Whip Slap SnareTightH Whip Slap Floor Tom L Scratch H Floor Tom L Scratch H HH Closed Scratch L HH Closed Scratch L Floor Tom H Finger Snap Floor Tom H Finger Snap HH Pedal Click Noise HH Pedal Click Noise Low Tom Metro.Click Low Tom Metro.Click HH Open Metro.Bell HH Open Metro.Bell B1 Mid Tom L Seq Click L Mid Tom L Seq Click L C2 Mid Tom H Seq Click H – Mid Tom H Seq Click H – Crash Cym 1 Brush Tap – Crash Cym 1 Brush Tap – High Tom Brush Swirl – High Tom Brush Swirl – Ride Cym 1 Brush Slap – Ride Cym 1 Brush Slap – Chinese Cym Br TapSwirl – Chinese Cym Br TapSwirl – RideCym Cup Snare Roll – RideCym Cup Snare Roll – Tambourine Castanet – Tambourine Castanet – Splash Cym Snare Soft – Splash Cym SnareSoft 2 – Sticks – Sticks – Kick Soft – Kick Soft – OpenRimShot – OpRimShot H – B2 Kick Tight – Kick Tight C3 Kick Bongo H Kick Short Bongo H Side Stick Bongo L SideStick L Bongo L Snare CongaH Mute Snare Short CongaH Mute Hand Clap CongaH Open Hand Clap CongaH Open E3 Snare Tight Conga L SnareTightH Conga L F3 Floor Tom L Timbale H Floor Tom L Timbale H HH Closed Timbale L HH Closed Timbale L Floor Tom H Agogo H Floor Tom H Agogo H HH Pedal Agogo L HH Pedal Agogo L Low Tom Cabasa Low Tom Cabasa HH Open Maracas HH Open Maracas B3 Mid Tom L SambaWhis.H Mid Tom L SambaWhis.H C4 Mid Tom H SambaWhis.L Mid Tom H SambaWhis.L Crash Cym 1 Guiro Short Crash Cym 1 Guiro Short High Tom Guiro Long High Tom Guiro Long Ride Cym 1 Claves Ride Cym 1 Claves E4 Chinese Cym WoodBlock H Chinese Cym WoodBlock H F4 RideCym Cup WoodBlock L RideCym Cup WoodBlock L Tambourine Cuica Mute Tambourine Cuica Mute Splash Cym Cuica Open Splash Cym Cuica Open Cowbell Triangle M Cowbell Triangle M Crash Cym 2 Triangle O Crash Cym 2 Triangle O Vibraslap Shaker Vibraslap Shaker Ride Cym 2 JingleBells Ride Cym 2 D1 D1 E1 F1 F1 G1 G1 A1 A1 C2 D2 D2 E2 F2 F2 G2 G2 A2 A2 C3 D3 D3 F3 G3 G3 A3 A3 C4 D4 D4 F4 G4 G4 A4 A4 B4 C5 – C5 Bell Tree – JingleBells – Bell Tree – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – B5 – – C6 – – D5 D5 E5 F5 F5 G5 G5 A5 A5 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Standard Kit 1 Preset 2 (PK) ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 81 Hit Kit Preset 2 (PK) C1 C1 KickTight H – Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Kick Preset 1 (UK) – Surdo Mute Side Stick Surdo Mute SnareAmbien Surdo Open SnareSnappy Surdo Open Hand Clap Hi Q Hand Clap Hi Q SnareTight2 Whip Slap SnrTightSnp Whip Slap HybridTom 1 Scratch H Tom Room 1 Scratch H HH Closed 2 Scratch L HH Closed Scratch L HybridTom 2 Finger Snap Tom Room 2 Finger Snap HH Pedal 2 Click Noise HH Pedal Click Noise HybridTom 3 Metro.Click Tom Room 3 Metro.Click HH Open 2 Metro.Bell HH Open Metro.Bell B1 HybridTom 4 Seq Click L Tom Room 4 Seq Click L C2 HybridTom 5 Seq Click H – Tom Room 5 Seq Click H – Crash Cym 1 Brush Tap – Crash Cym 1 Brush Tap – HybridTom 6 Brush Swirl – Tom Room 6 Brush Swirl – Ride Cym 1 Brush Slap – Ride Cym 1 Brush Slap – E2 Chinese Cym Br TapSwirl – Chinese Cym Br TapSwirl – F2 RideCym Cup Snare Roll – RideCym Cup Snare Roll – TambourineL Castanet – Tambourine Castanet – Splash Cym Snr Electro – Splash Cym Snare Soft – Sticks – Sticks – KickTight L – Kick Soft – Snare Pitch – OpenRimShot – B2 Kick Wet – Kick Tight C3 KickTight H Bongo H Kick Bongo H StickAmbien Bongo L Side Stick Bongo L SnareAmbien CongaH Mute SnareSnappy CongaH Mute Hand Clap CongaH Open Hand Clap CongaH Open E3 SnareTight2 Conga L SnrTightSnp Conga L F3 HybridTom 1 Timbale H Tom Room 1 Timbale H HH Closed 2 Timbale L HH Closed Timbale L HybridTom 2 Agogo H Tom Room 2 Agogo H HH Pedal 2 Agogo L HH Pedal Agogo L HybridTom 3 Cabasa Tom Room 3 Cabasa HH Open 2 Maracas HH Open Maracas B3 HybridTom 4 SambaWhis.H Tom Room 4 SambaWhis.H C4 HybridTom 5 SambaWhis.L Tom Room 5 SambaWhis.L Crash Cym 1 Guiro Short Crash Cym 1 Guiro Short HybridTom 6 Guiro Long Tom Room 6 Guiro Long Ride Cym 1 Claves Ride Cym 1 Claves E4 Chinese Cym WoodBlock H Chinese Cym WoodBlock H F4 RideCym Cup WoodBlock L RideCym Cup WoodBlock L TambourineL Cuica Mute Tambourine Cuica Mute Splash Cym Cuica Open Splash Cym Cuica Open Cowbell Triangle M Cowbell Triangle M Crash Cym 2 Triangle O Crash Cym 2 Triangle O Vibraslap Shaker Vibraslap Shaker Ride Cym 2 JingleBells Ride Cym 2 D1 E1 F1 F1 G1 G1 A1 A1 C2 D2 D2 F2 G2 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion G2 A2 A2 C3 D3 D3 F3 G3 G3 A3 A3 C4 D4 D4 F4 G4 G4 A4 A4 B4 C5 C5 – Bell Tree – – JingleBells Bell Tree – – – – – – E5 – – F5 – – – – – – – – – – – – B5 – – C6 – – D5 D5 F5 G5 G5 A5 A5 82 Room Kit Preset 1 (UK) StickAmbien D1 4 Preset 1 (LK) ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Rock Kit C1 C1 Preset 1 (LK) Kick Gate Electro Kit Preset 1 (UK) – Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) KickGateHvy Preset 1 (UK) – Side Stick Surdo Mute Side Stick Surdo Mute Snare Rock Surdo Open SnareNoisy2 Surdo Open Hand Clap Hi Q Hand Clap Hi Q SnRockTight Whip Slap SnareNoisy3 Whip Slap Tom Rock 1 Scratch H TomElectro1 Scratch H HH Closed Scratch L HH Closed Scratch L Tom Rock 2 Finger Snap TomElectro2 Finger Snap HH Pedal Click Noise HH Pedal Click Noise Tom Rock 3 Metro.Click TomElectro3 Metro.Click HH Open Metro.Bell HH Open Metro.Bell B1 Tom Rock 4 Seq Click L TomElectro4 Seq Click L C2 Tom Rock 5 Seq Click H – TomElectro5 Seq Click H – Crash Cym 1 Brush Tap – Crash Cym 1 Brush Tap – Tom Rock 6 Brush Swirl – TomElectro6 Brush Swirl – Ride Cym 1 Brush Slap – Ride Cym 1 Brush Slap – E2 Chinese Cym Br TapSwirl – Chinese Cym Reverse Cym – F2 RideCym Cup Snare Roll – RideCym Cup Snare Roll – Tambourine Castanet – Tambourine Hi Q 2 – Splash Cym Snare Noisy – Splash Cym SnrSnapElec – Sticks – Sticks – Kick Soft – Kick 3 – OpenRimShot – OpenRimShot – B2 Kick 2 – Kick Gate C3 Kick Gate Bongo H KickGateHvy Bongo H Side Stick Bongo L Side Stick Bongo L Snare Rock CongaH Mute SnareNoisy2 CongaH Mute Hand Clap CongaH Open Hand Clap CongaH Open E3 SnRockTight Conga L SnareNoisy3 Conga L F3 Tom Rock 1 Timbale H TomElectro1 Timbale H HH Closed Timbale L HH Closed Timbale L Tom Rock 2 Agogo H TomElectro2 Agogo H HH Pedal Agogo L HH Pedal Agogo L Tom Rock 3 Cabasa TomElectro3 Cabasa HH Open Maracas HH Open Maracas B3 Tom Rock 4 SambaWhis.H TomElectro4 SambaWhis.H C4 Tom Rock 5 SambaWhis.L TomElectro5 SambaWhis.L Crash Cym 1 Guiro Short Crash Cym 1 Guiro Short Tom Rock 6 Guiro Long TomElectro6 Guiro Long Ride Cym 1 Claves Ride Cym 1 Claves E4 Chinese Cym WoodBlock H Chinese Cym WoodBlock H F4 RideCym Cup WoodBlock L RideCym Cup WoodBlock L Tambourine Cuica Mute Tambourine Scratch H 2 Splash Cym Cuica Open Splash Cym Scratch L 2 Cowbell Triangle M Cowbell Triangle M Crash Cym 2 Triangle O Crash Cym 2 Triangle O Vibraslap Shaker Vibraslap Shaker Ride Cym 2 JingleBells Ride Cym 2 D1 D1 E1 F1 F1 G1 G1 A1 A1 C2 D2 D2 F2 G2 G2 A2 A2 C3 D3 D3 F3 G3 G3 A3 A3 C4 D4 D4 F4 G4 G4 A4 A4 B4 C5 C5 – Bell Tree – JingleBells – Bell Tree – – – – – – E5 – – F5 – – – – – – – – – – – – B5 – – C6 – – D5 D5 F5 G5 G5 A5 A5 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Preset 2 (PK) ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 83 Analog Kit Preset 2 (PK) C1 C1 Kick Analog – Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Kick Jazz Preset 1 (UK) – Surdo Mute SideStick L Surdo Mute SnareAnalog Surdo Open SnareJazz L Surdo Open Hand Clap Hi Q Hand Clap Hi Q SnareAnlg 2 Whip Slap SnareJazz M Whip Slap TomAnalog 1 Scratch H Floor Tom L Scratch H Hat CloseAn Scratch L HH Closed Scratch L TomAnalog 2 Finger Snap Floor Tom H Finger Snap HatCloseAn2 Click Noise HH Pedal Click Noise TomAnalog 3 Metro.Click Low Tom Metro.Click Hat Open An Metro.Bell HH Open Metro.Bell B1 TomAnalog 4 Seq Click L Mid Tom L Seq Click L C2 TomAnalog 5 Seq Click H – Mid Tom H Seq Click H – CrashAnalog Brush Tap – Crash Cym 1 Brush Tap – TomAnalog 6 Brush Swirl – High Tom Brush Swirl – Ride Cym 1 Brush Slap – Ride Cym 1 Brush Slap – E2 Chinese Cym Reverse Cym – Chinese Cym Br TapSwirl – F2 RideCym Cup Snare Roll – RideCym Cup Snare Roll – Tambourine Hi Q 2 – Tambourine Castanet – Splash Cym SnareNoisy4 – Splash Cym SnareJazz H – Sticks – Sticks – Kick 3 – Kick Soft – OpenRimShot – OpenRimShot – B2 KickAnlgSht – Kick Tight C3 Kick Analog Bongo H Kick Jazz Bongo H SideStickAn Bongo L SideStick L Bongo L SnareAnalog CongaAnlg H SnareJazz L CongaH Mute Hand Clap CongaAnlg M Hand Clap CongaH Open E3 SnareAnlg 2 CongaAnlg L SnareJazz M Conga L F3 TomAnalog 1 Timbale H Floor Tom L Timbale H Hat CloseAn Timbale L HH Closed Timbale L TomAnalog 2 Agogo H Floor Tom H Agogo H HatCloseAn2 Agogo L HH Pedal Agogo L TomAnalog 3 Cabasa Low Tom Cabasa Hat Open An Maracas 2 HH Open Maracas B3 TomAnalog 4 SambaWhis.H Mid Tom L SambaWhis.H C4 TomAnalog 5 SambaWhis.L Mid Tom H SambaWhis.L CrashAnalog Guiro Short Crash Cym 1 Guiro Short TomAnalog 6 Guiro Long High Tom Guiro Long Ride Cym 1 Claves 2 Ride Cym 1 Claves E4 Chinese Cym WoodBlock H Chinese Cym WoodBlock H F4 RideCym Cup WoodBlock L RideCym Cup WoodBlock L Tambourine Scratch H 2 Tambourine Cuica Mute Splash Cym Scratch L 2 Splash Cym Cuica Open CowbellAnlg Triangle M Cowbell Triangle M Crash Cym 2 Triangle O Crash Cym 2 Triangle O Vibraslap Shaker Vibraslap Shaker Ride Cym 2 JingleBells Ride Cym 2 D1 E1 F1 F1 G1 G1 A1 A1 C2 D2 D2 F2 G2 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion G2 A2 A2 C3 D3 D3 F3 G3 G3 A3 A3 C4 D4 D4 F4 G4 G4 A4 A4 B4 C5 C5 – Bell Tree – – JingleBells Bell Tree – – – – – – E5 – – F5 – – – – – – – – – – – – B5 – – C6 – – D5 D5 F5 G5 G5 A5 A5 84 Jazz Kit Preset 1 (UK) SideStickAn D1 4 Preset 1 (LK) ELB-01 Owner’s Manual C1 C1 Preset 1 (LK) Kick Jazz Symphony Kit Preset 1 (UK) – Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) GranCassa M Preset 1 (UK) – SideStick L Surdo Mute Side Stick Surdo Mute BrushSlap 3 Surdo Open Band Snare Surdo Open Hand Clap Hi Q Hand Clap Hi Q Brush Tap 2 Whip Slap BandSnare 2 Whip Slap Tom Brush 1 Scratch H Floor Tom L Scratch H HH Closed Scratch L HH Closed Scratch L Tom Brush 2 Finger Snap Floor Tom H Finger Snap HH Pedal Click Noise HH Pedal Click Noise Tom Brush 3 Metro.Click Low Tom Metro.Click HH Open Metro.Bell HH Open Metro.Bell B1 Tom Brush 4 Seq Click L Mid Tom L Seq Click L C2 Tom Brush 5 Seq Click H – Mid Tom H Seq Click H – Crash Cym 1 Brush Tap – Hand Cymbal Brush Tap – Tom Brush 6 Brush Swirl – High Tom Brush Swirl – Ride Cym 1 Brush Slap – Hand Cym S Brush Slap – E2 Chinese Cym Br TapSwirl – Chinese Cym Br TapSwirl – F2 RideCym Cup Snare Roll – RideCym Cup Snare Roll – Tambourine Castanet – Tambourine Castanet – Splash Cym BrushSlap 2 – Splash Cym Snare Soft – Sticks – Sticks – Kick Soft – Kick Soft 2 – OpenRimShot – OpenRimShot – B2 Kick Tight – Gran Cassa C3 Kick Jazz Bongo H GranCassa M Bongo H SideStick L Bongo L Side Stick Bongo L BrushSlap 3 CongaH Mute Band Snare CongaH Mute Hand Clap CongaH Open Hand Clap CongaH Open E3 Brush Tap 2 Conga L BandSnare 2 Conga L F3 Tom Brush 1 Timbale H Floor Tom L Timbale H HH Closed Timbale L HH Closed Timbale L Tom Brush 2 Agogo H Floor Tom H Agogo H HH Pedal Agogo L HH Pedal Agogo L Tom Brush 3 Cabasa Low Tom Cabasa HH Open Maracas HH Open Maracas B3 Tom Brush 4 SambaWhis.H Mid Tom L SambaWhis.H C4 Tom Brush 5 SambaWhis.L Mid Tom H SambaWhis.L Crash Cym 1 Guiro Short Hand Cymbal Guiro Short Tom Brush 6 Guiro Long High Tom Guiro Long Ride Cym 1 Claves Hand Cym S Claves E4 Chinese Cym WoodBlock H Chinese Cym WoodBlock H F4 RideCym Cup WoodBlock L RideCym Cup WoodBlock L Tambourine Cuica Mute Tambourine Cuica Mute Splash Cym Cuica Open Splash Cym Cuica Open Cowbell Triangle M Cowbell Triangle M Crash Cym 2 Triangle O Hand Cym 2 Triangle O Vibraslap Shaker Vibraslap Shaker Ride Cym 2 JingleBells HandCym 2 S D1 D1 E1 F1 F1 G1 G1 A1 A1 C2 D2 D2 F2 G2 G2 A2 A2 C3 D3 D3 F3 G3 G3 A3 A3 C4 D4 D4 F4 G4 G4 A4 A4 B4 C5 C5 – Bell Tree – – JingleBells Bell Tree – – – – – – E5 – – F5 – – – – – – – – – – – – B5 – – C6 – – D5 D5 F5 G5 G5 A5 A5 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Brush Kit Preset 2 (PK) ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 85 SFX1 Preset 2 (PK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK) – Phone Call – CutingNoiz2 – Door Squeak – – – Door Slam – – Scratch Cut – – – Scratch H 3 – – – Wind Chime – – – Phone Ring – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – B1 – – – – C2 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – CarEngnIgni – – – – – CarTiresSql – – – – – Car Passing – – – – – Car Crash – – – – – – – – – – – – – – B2 – – – C3 CutingNoiz1 – Phone Call Burst CutingNoiz2 – Door Squeak Coaster – – Door Slam Submarine – Scratch Cut – C1 D1 D1 String Slap E1 F1 F1 G1 G1 A1 A1 C2 D2 D2 E2 F2 Fl.KeyClick F2 G2 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion G2 A2 A2 C3 D3 D3 String Slap – E3 – – Scratch H 3 – F3 – – Wind Chime – – – Phone Ring – – – F3 G3 G3 – – – Shower – Laugh – Thunder – Scream – Wind – Punch B3 – Stream – Heart Beat C4 – Bubble – Foot Steps – Feed – – A3 A3 C4 D4 – – – – – – – – – CarEngnIgni – – – CarTiresSql – – – Car Passing – – – Car Crash – – – Siren – – – Train – – – Jet Plane – B4 – – Starship C5 – Dog – Machine Gun – Horse – Laser Gun D4 E4 F4 Fl.KeyClick F4 G4 G4 A4 A4 C5 D5 D5 Bird Tweet – Explosion – Firework E5 – – F5 – – F5 G5 G5 Ghost – Maou – – – – – – – B5 – – C6 – – A5 A5 86 Preset 1 (UK) CutingNoiz1 C1 4 SFX2 Preset 1 (LK) ELB-01 Owner’s Manual ArabicKit C1 C1 D1 D1 E1 F1 F1 G1 G1 A1 A1 Preset 1 (LK) Kick Soft – Side Stick – Snare Soft – Arabic Clap – Snare Drum – Floor Tom L – HH Closed – Floor Tom H – HH Pedal – Low Tom – HH Open – Preset 1 (UK) B1 Mid Tom L – C2 Mid Tom H Nakarazan D – Crash Cym 1 Cabasa – High Tom Nakarazan E – Ride Cym 1 Hager Dom – E2 Crash Cym 2 Hager Edge – F2 Duhulla Dom Bongo H – Tambourine Bongo L – Duhulla Tak CongaH Mute – CongaH Open – Conga L – Zagrouda H – C2 D2 D2 F2 G2 G2 A2 A2 B2 Zagrouda L C3 Kick Soft Katem Dom Side Stick Katem Tak Snare Soft Katem Sak Arabic Clap Katem Tak E3 Snare Drum Doff Tak F3 Floor Tom L Tabla Dom HH Closed Tabla Tak 1 Floor Tom H Tabla Tik HH Pedal Tabla Tak 2 Low Tom Tabla Sak HH Open Tabla Roll B3 Mid Tom L Tabla Flam C4 Mid Tom H Sagat 1 Crash Cym 1 Tabel Dom High Tom Sagat 3 Ride Cym 1 Tabel Tak E4 Crash Cym 2 Sagat 2 F4 Duhulla Dom Rik Dom Tambourine Rik Tak 2 Duhulla Tak Rik Finger1 Cowbell Rik Tak 1 Duhulla Sak Rik Finger2 Claves Rik Tremolo C3 D3 D3 F3 G3 G3 A3 A3 C4 D4 D4 F4 G4 G4 A4 A4 B4 C5 D5 D5 E5 F5 – Doff Dom C5 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Preset 2 (PK) Rik Sak – Rik Tik – – – – F5 G5 G5 A5 A5 – – – – – – B5 – C6 – ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 87 Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can assign any desired drum and percussion sound to any key or pedal, and your original setups can be saved to eight memory locations: User 1 through User 8. The User setting saved in the User memory location can be called up by using the Keyboard Percussion [1] or [2] buttons. In the instructions below, drum sounds are assigned to User 1 and called up with Keyboard Percussion [1] button. 1 Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the Keyboard Percussion [1] button. The Keyboard Percussion display appears. 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion [Page 1] Keyboard Percussion Display <KBP1> ¿PRE1 KIT÷Wonder 2 Select “User 1” here. Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select “User 1.” <KBP1> ¿USER1 KIT÷Wonder 3 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual ⁄ Select the desired percussion kit. Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the kit. Refer to the “Kit Assign List” on page 93. <KBP1> ¿USER1 KIT÷EL 88 ⁄ ⁄ 4 Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 3. <KBP1> ¿USER1 KIT÷EL ⁄ [Page 3] Keyboard Percussion Display 1 3 ¿<CYMBAL> [SET]‹ ¿01:Crash Cym 1[CLR] 2 4 4 In this Page, you can assign specific drum sounds to any of the keys. Category Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 1 This allows you to select the desired percussion category using the [A] buttons. Refer to the “Kit Assign List” on page 93. 2 Instrument Names The individual instruments are shown in the display and can be selected with the appropriate [A] – [D] buttons. Refer to the “Kit Assign List” on page 93. 3 Set Assigns the selected instrument to the desired key. (See the following explanation in step 7.) 4 Clear This function is used to erase the User assignment for User 1. Clear works in two ways: either to erase a single instrument, or to erase all instruments. (See the following explanation on page 91.) 5 Select the desired percussion group. Press the [A] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the category. ¿<BASS DRUM> ¿01:BD light [SET]‹ [CLR] ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 89 6 Select the desired instruments. Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select instrument. ¿<BASS DRUM> ¿02:BD Heavy NOTE 7 Though eight User Keyboard Percussion setups can be created, they cannot be memorized to Registration Memory. Only on/off data and the Keyboard Percussion Menu are memorized to Registration Memory. 4 [SET]‹ [CLR] To assign an instrument to a particular key or pedal. Simultaneously hold down the Data Control button corresponding to [Set] and press the key (or pedal) to which the instrument is to be assigned. The currently displayed instrument will be assigned to the key you press down as a part of User 1. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion ¿<BASS DRUM> ¿02:BD Heavy [SET]‹ [CLR] 1. While holding down [B] button... 2. Press the key. 8 90 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Repeat the operation steps above as necessary to construct your own User Keyboard Percussion set. To erase one instrument: Simultaneously hold down the [D] button corresponding to the [Clear] in the display and press the key (or pedal) corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase. (A short ‘beep’ sound indicates that the instrument has been erased.) ¿<BASS DRUM> ¿02:BD Heavy [SET]‹ [CLR] Press the [D] button… Press the key. 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Do not turn the power off while the Keyboard Percussion settings are being saved. To erase all instruments: You can clear all assignments in Page 3 of the Keyboard Percussion display. 1 Press, then release the [D] button corresponding to [CLEAR] in the display. The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] button corresponding to [Cancel]. ¿<BASS DRUM> ¿02:BD Heavy 2 [SET]‹ [CLR] Press the [C] button to erase all data. When the [C] button is pressed, a “Completed” message momentarily appears on the display. The Keyboard Percussion setting you have created is automatically saved when you switch to another display. ≤Clear assignments?≤ ≤[Clear] [Cancel]≤ ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 91 Recalling the User Keyboard Percussion ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 2 4 Press the Keyboard Percussion button. Select the desired User Keyboard percussion kit. Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the desired User number. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion <KBP1> ¿USER1 KIT÷Wonder ⁄ Play some notes on the keyboards and/or Pedalboard. 92 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Kit Assign List ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● SFX Laser Beam Laser Shot Water Phone Bubble Puddle NATURE Thunder Shower Beach Stream DAILY Footsteps Door Squeak Door Slam Alarm Bell CuckooClock Big Clock Bell Telephone Camera Gnaw Applause PERCUSSION Bass Drum Gran Cassa Tom 1 Tom 2 Snare Snare Roll HH Closed HH Open Cymbal Tambourine FingerSnaps Castanet Triangle M Triangle O Woodblock L Woodblock H Handclap Jingle Bell Bell Tree VEHICLE Train Horn 1 Horn 2 Siren Car Engine Car Crash Helicopter Starship ANIMAL Sheep Goat Oxen Whinny Horse Lion Dog Cat Rooster Owl Insects Frog Tweet 1 Tweet 2 EL Drum Kit CYMBAL Crash Cym 1 Crash Cym 2 Crash Cym M Ride Cym 1 Ride Cym 2 RideCym Cup Orch Cym OrchCymRoll Orch Cym M Cym March Cym BrShot Tam-Tam HIHAT HH Open HH Close HH Pedal 1 HH Pedal 2 Analog HH O Analog HH C SNARE DRUM SD Light SD Heavy SD Rim 1 SD Rim 2 SD Accent 1 SD Accent 2 SD Reverb 1 SD Reverb 2 Synth SD Orch SD SD Roll Analog SD SNARE BRUSH SD BrShot 1 SD BrShot 2 SD BrRoll TOM Tom 1 Tom 2 Tom 3 Tom 4 TomBrShot 1 TomBrShot 2 TomBrShot 3 TomBrShot 4 Synth Tom 1 Synth Tom 2 Synth Tom 3 BASS DRUM BD Light BD Heavy BD Attack Synth BD BD March Concert BD Analog BD S Analog BD L CONGA/BONGO Conga H Conga L Conga Slap Conga Muff Conga Slide Bongo H Bongo L Bongo Slap Bongo Mute CUICA/SURDO Cuica H Cuica M Cuica L Tamborim O Tamborim M Surdo Open Surdo Mute Surdo Rim Surdo Muff TIMBALE/COWBELL Timbale 1 H Timbale 1 L Timbale 2 H Timbale 2 L Timbale 3 H Timbale 3 L Timbale 4 H Timbale 4 L Cowbell 1 Cowbell 2 Cowbell 3 Cowbell 4 Snare Tight Snare Soft Snare Roll Side Stick OpenRimShot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Br TapSwirl TOM Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom PERCUSSION 1 BASS DRUM Cabasa Shaker Maracas H Maracas L Guiro Short Guiro Long WoodBlock H WoodBlock M WoodBlock L Claves Castanet Vibraslap Kick Kick Tight Kick Soft PERCUSSION 2 Agogo H Agogo L Triangle O Triangle M WindbellDwn Windbell Up Tambourine Pandeiro Bells Hand Claps Finger Snap Scratch Noise Perc. PERCUSSION 3 Kotsuzumi 1 Kotsuzumi 2 Kotsuzumi 3 Kotsuzumi 4 Ohtsuzumi 1 Ohtsuzumi 2 Taiko 1 Taiko 2 Ohdaiko 1 Ohdaiko 2 Kakegoe 1 Kakegoe 2 Kakegoe 3 Standard Kit 1 CYMBAL Crash Cym 1 Crash Cym 2 Splash Cym Chinese Cym Ride Cym 1 Ride Cym 2 RideCym Cup HH Open HH Closed HH Pedal SNARE DRUM Snare 4 PERCUSSION 1 CongaH Open Conga L CongaH Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Wonderland Kit PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L SambaWhis.H SambaWhis.L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet JingleBells Bell Tree Triangle O Triangle M WoodBlock H WoodBlock L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metro.Click Metro.Bell Standard Kit 2 CYMBAL Crash Cym 1 Crash Cym 2 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 93 Splash Cym Chinese Cym Ride Cym 1 Ride Cym 2 RideCym Cup HH Open HH Closed HH Pedal SNARE DRUM Snare Short SnareTightH SnareSoft 2 Snare Roll SideStick L OpRimShot H Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Br TapSwirl CYMBAL Crash Cym 1 Crash Cym 2 Splash Cym Chinese Cym Ride Cym 1 Ride Cym 2 RideCym Cup HH Open 2 HH Closed 2 HH Pedal 2 SNARE DRUM Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom BASS DRUM TOM Kick Short Kick Tight Kick Soft HybridTom 1 HybridTom 2 HybridTom 3 HybridTom 4 HybridTom 5 HybridTom 6 BASS DRUM KickTight H Kick Wet KickTight L Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion PERCUSSION 1 CongaH Open Conga L CongaH Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L SambaWhis.H SambaWhis.L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet JingleBells Bell Tree Triangle O Triangle M WoodBlock H WoodBlock L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metro.Click 94 Hit Kit SnareAmbien SnareTight2 Snr Electro Snare Roll StickAmbien Snare Pitch Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Br TapSwirl TOM 4 Metro.Bell ELB-01 Owner’s Manual PERCUSSION 1 CongaH Open Conga L CongaH Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L SambaWhis.H SambaWhis.L PERCUSSION 3 TambourineL Castanet JingleBells Bell Tree Triangle O Triangle M WoodBlock H WoodBlock L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metro.Click Metro.Bell Room Kit CYMBAL Crash Cym 1 Crash Cym 2 Splash Cym Chinese Cym Ride Cym 1 Ride Cym 2 RideCym Cup HH Open HH Closed HH Pedal SNARE DRUM SnareSnappy SnrTightSnp Snare Soft Snare Roll Side Stick OpenRimShot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Br TapSwirl WoodBlock H WoodBlock L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metro.Click Metro.Bell Rock Kit CYMBAL Crash Cym 1 Crash Cym 2 Splash Cym Chinese Cym Ride Cym 1 Ride Cym 2 RideCym Cup HH Open HH Closed HH Pedal SNARE DRUM Tom Room 1 Tom Room 2 Tom Room 3 Tom Room 4 Tom Room 5 Tom Room 6 Snare Rock SnRockTight Snare Noisy Snare Roll Side Stick OpenRimShot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Br TapSwirl BASS DRUM TOM Kick Kick Tight Kick Soft Tom Rock 1 Tom Rock 2 Tom Rock 3 Tom Rock 4 Tom Rock 5 Tom Rock 6 TOM PERCUSSION 1 CongaH Open Conga L CongaH Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L SambaWhis.H SambaWhis.L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet JingleBells Bell Tree Triangle O Triangle M BASS DRUM Kick Gate Kick 2 Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 CongaH Open Conga L CongaH Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L SambaWhis.H SambaWhis.L Tambourine Castanet JingleBells Bell Tree Triangle O Triangle M WoodBlock H WoodBlock L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metro.Click Metro.Bell Electro Kit CYMBAL Crash Cym 1 Crash Cym 2 Splash Cym Chinese Cym Ride Cym 1 Ride Cym 2 RideCym Cup HH Open HH Closed HH Pedal SNARE DRUM SnareNoisy2 SnareNoisy3 SnrSnapElec Snare Roll Side Stick OpenRimShot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Reverse Cym TOM TomElectro1 TomElectro2 TomElectro3 TomElectro4 TomElectro5 TomElectro6 BASS DRUM KickGateHvy Kick Gate Kick 3 PERCUSSION1 CongaH Open Conga L CongaH Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L SambaWhis.H SambaWhis.L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Hi Q 2 JingleBells Bell Tree Triangle O Triangle M WoodBlock H WoodBlock L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metro.Click Metro.Bell Analog Kit CYMBAL CrashAnalog Crash Cym 2 Splash Cym Chinese Cym Ride Cym 1 Ride Cym 2 RideCym Cup Hat Open An Hat CloseAn HatCloseAn2 SNARE DRUM SnareAnalog SnareAnlg 2 SnareNoisy4 Snare Roll SideStickAn OpenRimShot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Reverse Cym TOM TomAnalog 1 TomAnalog 2 TomAnalog 3 TomAnalog 4 TomAnalog 5 TomAnalog 6 BASS DRUM Kick Analog KickAnlgSht Kick 3 PERCUSSION 1 CongaAnlg M CongaAnlg L CongaAnlg H Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L CowbellAnlg Claves 2 Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas 2 Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L SambaWhis.H SambaWhis.L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Hi Q 2 JingleBells Bell Tree Triangle O Triangle M WoodBlock H WoodBlock L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metro.Click Metro.Bell Jazz Kit CYMBAL Crash Cym 1 Crash Cym 2 Splash Cym Chinese Cym Ride Cym 1 Ride Cym 2 RideCym Cup HH Open HH Closed HH Pedal SNARE DRUM SnareJazz L SnareJazz M SnareJazz H Snare Roll SideStick L OpenRimShot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Br TapSwirl Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L SambaWhis.H SambaWhis.L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet JingleBells Bell Tree Triangle O Triangle M WoodBlock H WoodBlock L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metro.Click Metro.Bell Brush Kit CYMBAL Crash Cym 1 Crash Cym 2 Splash Cym Chinese Cym Ride Cym 1 Ride Cym 2 RideCym Cup HH Open HH Closed HH Pedal SNARE DRUM Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom BrushSlap 3 Brush Tap 2 BrushSlap 2 Snare Roll SideStick L OpenRimShot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Br TapSwirl BASS DRUM TOM Kick Jazz Kick Tight Kick Soft Tom Brush 1 Tom Brush 2 Tom Brush 3 Tom Brush 4 Tom Brush 5 Tom Brush 6 TOM PERCUSSION 1 CongaH Open Conga L CongaH Mute 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion PERCUSSION 3 BASS DRUM ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 95 Kick Jazz Kick Tight Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 CongaH Open Conga L CongaH Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L SambaWhis.H SambaWhis.L 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet JingleBells Bell Tree Triangle O Triangle M WoodBlock H WoodBlock L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metro.Click Metro.Bell Symphony Kit CYMBAL Hand Cymbal Hand Cym 2 Splash Cym Chinese Cym Hand Cym S HandCym 2 S RideCym Cup HH Open HH Closed HH Pedal SNARE DRUM Band Snare BandSnare 2 Snare Soft Snare Roll Side Stick OpenRimShot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Br TapSwirl TOM 96 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom BASS DRUM GranCassa M Gran Cassa Kick Soft 2 PERCUSSION 1 CongaH Open Conga L CongaH Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L SambaWhis.H SambaWhis.L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet JingleBells Bell Tree Triangle O Triangle M WoodBlock H WoodBlock L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metro.Click Metro.Bell SFX1 SFX CutingNoiz1 CutingNoiz2 String Slap Fl.KeyClick Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Ghost Maou Dog Horse Bird Tweet SFX2 SFX 1 Phone Call Phone Ring Wind Chime Door Squeak Door Slam Scratch Cut Scratch H 3 Laugh Scream Punch Heart Beat Foot Steps SFX 2 CarEngnIgni CarTiresSql Car Passing Car Crash Siren Train Jet Plane Starship Burst Coaster Submarine Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Arabic Kit ARABIC 1 Nakarazan D Nakarazan E Hager Dom Hager Edge Zagrouda H Zagrouda L Arabic Clap Duhulla Dom Duhulla Tak Duhulla Sak Doff Dom Doff Tak ARABIC 2 Katem Dom Katem Tak Katem Sak Tabla Dom Tabla Tak 1 Tabla Tak 2 Tabla Sak Tabla Tik Tabla Roll Tabla Flam Tabel Dom Tabel Tak ARABIC 3 Sagat 1 Sagat 2 Sagat 3 Rik Dom Rik Tak 1 Rik Tak 2 Rik Sak Rik Tik Rik Finger1 Rik Finger2 Rik Tremolo CYMBAL/SNARE DRUM Crash Cym 1 Crash Cym 2 Ride Cym 1 HH Open HH Closed HH Pedal Snare Drum Snare Soft Side Stick TOM/BASS DRUM Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom Kick Soft PERCUSSION CongaH Open Conga L CongaH Mute Bongo H Bongo L Cowbell Claves Cabasa Tambourine 5 Registration Memory Registration Memory is a powerful performance tool that helps you sound like a professional. It lets you store virtually all the settings you make on the panel and LCD, conveniently allowing you to instantly change all Voice settings and rhythms while you're playing—simply by pressing a single Registration Memory button. The buttons are conveniently located at the top right on the panel for easy access while playing. Just press the numbered button that corresponds to the Registration you wish to select. Moreover, you can also recall the settings using the right footswitch. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to USB flash memory. Various types of basic Registrations have been programmed to the numbered Registration Memory buttons [1] – [8], with additional Registration Memory presets 9 – 16 which can also be called up easily. You can of course record your own Registration settings to a numbered button, but keep in mind that the preset Registration for that button will be overwritten and erased. You can recall the original factory preset settings (and delete your own) by initializing the Registration Memory. Registration Memory 5 Basic Registration No. 1 Image No. Image Strings ensemble 9 Big band jazz 2 Brass ensemble 10 Rock band 3 Woodwind ensemble 11 Fun time 4 Orchestra 12 Synth pop 5 Flute combo 13 Pop organ 6 Piano ballad 14 Cathedral 7 Jazz combo 15 Synth bell 8 Pop ballad 16 Music box 1 Storing Registrations Your newly created Registrations you make can be stored to the Registration Memory panel buttons. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to USB flash memory. 1 Create your original Registration by making all desired panel settings. Reference Pages Selecting a Voice (page 25) Selecting a Rhythm (page 56) Voice Controls and Effects (page 40) ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 97 2 While holding down the [M.] (Memory) button in the Registration Memory section, press the numbered button to which you wish to save your Registration. 1. While holding down [M.] button... 2. Press desired numbered button. When the Registration is stored, the LED above the numbered the numbered button flashes momentarily. Although the ELB-01 has just eight Registration Memory buttons, up to sixteen Registrations can be stored. To store Registrations 9 – 16, simultaneously hold down both the [VOICE DISPLAY] button in the Display Select section and the [M.] (Memory) button in the Registration Memory, and press the desired numbered button (in this case, indicated as [1] – [8]) to which you wish to save your Registration. When the Registration is stored, the numbered button’s LED flashes momentarily 5 Registration Memory Do not turn the power off while the Registration is being saved. Functions and settings that cannot be memorized: • Pitch (page 150) • MIDI Control settings (page 161) • LCD related settings (page 19) Reference Page Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File); (page 124) 98 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual The following settings are common to all Registration Memory numbers 1 – 16 and cannot be stored individually for each number. • Transpose (page 150) • Registration Shift (page 102) • Auto Fill setting (page 60) • Reverb type (page 48) • User rhythms (page 64) • User Keyboard Percussion (page 92) • Rhythm Sequences (page 75) • Disable setting (page 99) 2 Selecting Registrations Simply press the numbered button ([1] – [8]) that corresponds to the Registration you wish to select. (The selected button’s LED lights.) To call up one of the Registrations 9 – 16, simultaneously hold down the [VOICE DISPLAY] button in the Display Select section and press the appropriate numbered button. (For Registrations 9 – 16, the LEDs do not light.) Example: Calling up Registration Number 11 Corresponding Registration Memory Number 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 5 press the desired numbered button. Registration Memory While holding down the [VOICE DISPLAY] button, You can also recall Registrations in a pre-programmed order by using the right footswitch. This function is called “Registration Shift” (page 102). Using the [D.] (Disable) button: Keep in mind that rhythm and automatic accompaniment patterns also change when you select different Registration Memory buttons. There may be times during your performance when you want to keep the same rhythm going, even when you make Registration Memory changes. Pressing the [D.] (Disable) button allows you to keep the same rhythm, accompaniment patterns, tempo, and so on throughout all your Registration changes, or make your own rhythm selections if you want to. When the [D.] button is on, the following functions will not change, even when you change the Registration Memory number. [D.] (Disable) button • Rhythm menu, Rhythm section, Rhythm tempo, Rhythm volume, Rhythm reverb • Accompaniment volume, Accompaniment reverb, On/Off status of Accompaniment parts • A.B.C. mode, A.B.C. memory • M.O.C. mode ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 99 3 Initializing Registration Memory If you want to restore the original factory-programmed Registration Memory presets, you can initialize the Electone settings. Keep in mind that this deletes any of your custom Registration Memory and LCD Display settings. Always save your important data to external media, such as USB flash memory. When turning the power on after initializing the Electone, the preset settings will be recalled and your own Registration setting(s) will be erased and replaced with the factory defaults. For details on how to initialize the Electone, refer to “Factory Set (Initializing the Electone)” on page 20. 4 5 Reference Page Songs (page 116) Saving the Registration data to USB flash memory You can save your Registration Memory settings to an external storage device, such as USB flash memory, with sixteen Registrations stored to a single file. Registration Memory For details about using other external storage devices, see Chapter 6, Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.). The instructions below explain how to save the Registration data to a USB flash memory. Reference Page USB TO DEVICE terminal (page 151) 1 2 Insert the USB flash memory into the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Press the [MDR] button. The MDR display appears. <SONG SELECT> ¿Ã001:USB 01 100 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual ⁄ [Õ] 3 Select the song to which you want to save the Registration data (page 111). ÃUSB 01 [˜] ⁄ ¿ ___:new song 4 Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 9. The Registration Save Page is displayed. ÃUSB 01 [˜] ⁄ ¿ ___:new song <REG.SAVE> [EXE] · ___:new song ¸:__ Press the [B] button corresponding to the [EXE] (Execute) in the display. A message appears, indicating the Registration data is currently being saved. When the operation is completed, the message closes. Your Registration Memory settings are saved to the external storage device, with sixteen Registrations stored to a single file. <REG.SAVE> [EXE] · ___:new song ¸:__ 5 Registration Memory 5 Reference Pages Recalling Recorded Registrations (page 131) Changing the Song/Folder Name (page 122) <REG.SAVE> [EXE] · 001:SONG 1 ¸÷01 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 101 5 Registration Shift The Registration Shift function conveniently allows you to change Registrations without taking your hands from the keyboards. By using the Right Footswitch on the expression pedal, you can “jump” to a specified Registration or step through the panel Registrations in sequence, either in numeric order or in any order you specify. You can set the Registration Shift order in the Registration Shift display. Right Footswitch Expression Pedal 5 NOTE 1 Registration Memory Pressing the [FOOTSWITCH] button calls up one of two different displays, the Registration Shift Display or Footswitch Display. These displays can be switched by pressing the A button. When you press the [FOOTSWITCH] button, the previously selected display will appear. Press the [FOOTSWITCH] button. ¸<REG.SHIFT> MODE¿OFF If the Footswitch Page is displayed, press the [A] button to switch to the Registration Shift Page. 2 102 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Registration Shift has three modes: Shift, Jump and User. These are set in the Regist Shift display by turning the DATA CONTROL dial. Select each in order (Shift → Jump → User) by turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise. Turning the DATA CONTROL dial counter-clockwise selects in the reverse order. The [C] button can also be used to select the modes. ¸<REG.SHIFT> MODE¿OFF 1 OFF 2 SHIFT 3 JUMP 4 USER 1 Off Turns off the Registration Shift assignment. When Off is selected, Registrations cannot be changed by using the Right Footswitch. ¸<REG.SHIFT> MODE¿OFF 2 Shift 5 ¸<REG.SHIFT> MODE¿SHIFT Registration Memory In the Shift mode, each press of the Right Footswitch selects the Registration Memory presets in their numerical order. After the last Registration is reached, the function ‘wraps around’ to select the first preset again. The LEDs of numbered buttons ([1] – [8]) light up as they are selected. Keep in mind that the numbered buttons’ LEDs do not light up if Registrations 9 – 16 are selected. 1˘ 2 Next Registration 3 Jump Pressing the Right Footswitch jumps to select the designated panel Registration. Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then select the Jump “destination” with the DATA CONTROL dial or [D] button. ¸<REG.SHIFT> MODE¿JUMP REGIST÷ 1 Registration number of the destination 4 User In the User mode, each press of the Right Footswitch selects Registrations according to the order you’ve specified. You can also specify an end point for the Registration Shift function. User Shift can be set in Page 2, and Shift End can be set in Page 1 of the Registration Shift display. ¸<REG.SHIFT> ⁄ MODE¿USER END÷STOP ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 103 To set the User Registration order: 1 Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 2. ¸<REG.SHIFT> ⁄ MODE¿USER END÷STOP ¸<REG.SHIFT> T: ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ [INS]¤ [DEL] Enter the Registration Number NOTE When you want to set Registration Memory 9 – 16, press the desired numbered button while holding down the [VOICE DISPLAY] button. (The Voice display appears.) Press the [FOOTSWITCH] button to call up Page 2 of the Registration Shift display. 5 Registration Memory 2 Press the desired numbered button in the Registration Memory section. 3 Press the [B] button corresponding to the [INS] (Insert) in the display. ¸<REG.SHIFT> T: ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ [INS]¤ [DEL] Flashing cursor indicates the data entry position. 4 The Registration number appears in the display, indicating that the Registration is entered. ¸<REG.SHIFT> T: 3 ~ ~ ~ ~ 5 104 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual [INS]¤ [DEL] Repeat steps 2 through 4 above to set additional numbers in the Registration order. Up to 80 steps (Registrations) can be memorized. Move the cursor to the desired point with the [C] button or DATA CONTROL dial, then insert or delete the desired number by using the [B] and [D] buttons. Insert the number ¸<REG.SHIFT> T: 3 2 5 ~ ~ Move the cursor position [INS]¤ [DEL] Delete the number Data Entry Position: Flashing cursor indicates the current data entry position. If you want to move the cursor to the left, press the [C] button or turn the DATA CONTROL dial counter-clockwise. If you want to move the cursor to the right, turn the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise. Insert can also be used to insert a Registration number just before the current cursor position. To perform the operation, first move the data entry position to a numbered position. Then, press the desired Registration Memory button, and press the [B] button corresponding to [INS] (Insert) in the display. The new Registration number is inserted at the cursor position and all other numbers to the right of the cursor are moved to accommodate the new numbers. Registration numbers cannot be entered beyond the Registration Shift function’s capacity of 80. If the insert operation exceeds this capacity, a “Cannot insert additional data” message appears and the operation cannot be executed. Delete: Use the [D] button. To delete the unnecessary number, move the cursor to a numbered position and press the [D] button corresponding to [DEL] (Delete) in the display. NOTE Registration data cannot be added or deleted the when the cursor position is at the “T” (found at the lower left of the screen) after inputting the number. Add or delete the data after moving the cursor by rotating the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise. 5 Registration Memory Insert: Use the [B] button. This is for initially entering a Registration number to a blank space in the Registration row, or for replacing a number at the current cursor position. To enter a number, press the desired Registration Memory button, then press the [B] button corresponding to [INS] (Insert) in the display. The entered Registration number will appear in the Registration row. After using [INS] to enter Registrations, the cursor can be moved among the numbers. NOTE Up to six Registration numbers can be displayed at once in the LCD; however, screen scrolling is enabled when five or more Registration numbers are input. Turn the DATA CONTROL dial counterclockwise to scroll back toward the beginning. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 105 Shift End: Determines the end point for the Registration Shift function. Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 1. Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. ¸<REG.SHIFT> MODE¿USER END÷STOP STOP TOP NEXT Stop: Selects the last Registration and quits the operation. Top: After the last preset is reached, the first preset is called up again, starting the sequence over again from the beginning. 5 Reference Page Registration Memory Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song (page 126) NOTE In order to playback a song on the MDR used by the next Registration, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button (not the [CUSTOM PLAY] button), then start the MDR. 106 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Next Regist: After the last preset is reached, the next Registration data in the Song is called up. This function is available only when two or more Registration data sets are saved in one Song. This function is handy when you need to play a song with more than sixteen Registrations. The Shift End mark (¯: Top, N: Next) will automatically be put at the end of the Registrations you entered when Top or Next Regist is selected as the Shift End. 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) The Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) is a sophisticated recording system built into the Electone that lets you record your performances and Registration settings to a USB flash memory device or other external media. Moreover, the M.D.R. allows you to perform various other operations to your song data (such as copy, delete and convert). Before purchasing any USB storage device, you should check with your Yamaha dealer or an authorized Yamaha distributor for advice on compatibility. Copy Song data Delete USB flash memory Convert 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) By installing the optional UD-FD01 floppy disk drive to the ELB-01, you can play songs stored to floppy disks. For information on how to install the UD-FD01, see page 167. Keep in mind, however, that you cannot save special Protected Original Songs or the Protected Edit Songs to floppy disks. For details about these protected songs, see page 139. Before using a USB device, read through the important section “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminals” on page 155. About USB devices compatible with the Electone, see “Compatible USB devices” on page 155. To protect your data (write-protect switch): Some USB flash memory devices are equipped with a write-protect switch. To prevent accidental erasure of important data saved in USB flash memory, slide the write-protect switch on the device to the “protect” position. When saving data, make sure that the write-protect switch is set to the “overwrite” position. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 107 1 Using the M.D.R. Function Press the [MDR] button in the panel to call up the M.D.R. display. All operations related to the M.D.R., such as recording and playing your performances, can be done in the M.D.R. display. NOTE If you press the [MDR] button even when no media is inserted into the USB TO DEVICE terminal, the selection “Internet” appears at the bottom of the display. However, the Internet function is not available. MDR Display <SONG SELECT> ¿Ã001:USB 01 ⁄ [Õ] The M.D.R. display consists of thirteen display Pages. Each Page is devoted to a specific function, and you can call up the desired function or operation by selecting the appropriate Page. (For example, select Page 4 to change the name of the recorded song, or Page 8 to recall the recorded registrations.) Pressing any button other than the [MDR] button while the M.D.R. display is open exits from the M.D.R. display. If you exit from the function inadvertently, simply press the [MDR] button again to recall the M.D.R. display. After executing operations such as deleting or converting songs, make sure to return to Page 1 (Song Select display). 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) Display 108 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Page Function Page 1 Song Select Select a song. Page 2 Playback Setting Set the playback tempo or order. Page 3 Part Set the recording status for Lead or KBP. Page 4 Rename Change the name of a song/folder. Page 5 Copy Copy a song. Page 6 Delete Delete a song/folder. Page 7 Convert Convert the data format. Page 8 Registration Load Load Registration data back to the ELB-01. Page 9 Registration Save Save Registration data to external media. Page 10 Registration Delete Delete Registrations from a song. Page 11 Create Folder Create a folder. Page 12 Format Format the media. Page 13 Remain Check the remaining memory. 2 Formatting External Media If you find that you are unable to use new, blank USB flash memory/floppy disks or old ones that have been used with other devices, you may need to format them. Formatting erases all the data in the media and makes it ready to record. The data erased by formatting will be lost permanently. Check whether or not the media contains any important data you wish to keep before executing the operation 1 Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal. 2 Press the [MDR] button on the panel to call up the M.D.R. display. <SONG SELECT> ¿Ã001:USB 01 3 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 6 ⁄ [Õ] Select the desired media you want to format. <SONG SELECT> ¿Ã001:USB 01 ⁄ [Õ] To format a USB flash memory device, select “USB xx” (xx indicates the number of the device). If you insert two media/devices, the media inserted first will be shown as “USB 01” and the latter one will be shown as “USB 02.” Select the desired media by turning the DATA CONTROL dial or by successive pressing of the [C] button when the desired media is not displayed NOTE By installing the optional UD-FD01 floppy disk drive to the ELB-01, you can format floppy disks. Floppy disks will be shown in the display as “USB-FDxx” (xx indicates the number of the disk). ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 109 4 Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 12. <SONG SELECT> ¿Ã001:USB 01 <FORMAT> USB 01 ⁄ [Õ] [EXE]⁄¤ Currently selected media name The Format display appears. 5 Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the display. <FORMAT> USB 01 [EXE]⁄¤ ≤OK to format? ≤ ≤[Format] [Cancel]≤ 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] button corresponding to [Cancel]. 6 CAUTION Do not remove the media while the formatting operation is in process. Press the [C] button, corresponding to [Format] in the display, to format the media. ≤OK to format? ≤ ≤[Format] [Cancel]≤ When the operation is completed, the LCD returns to Page 12 (Format display). Simultaneously press the PAGE buttons to return to Page 1 (Song Select display). <FORMAT> USB 01 <SONG SELECT> ¿Ã001:USB 01 110 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual [EXE]⁄¤ ⁄ [Õ] 3 Selecting a Song In order to record your performance to the media or to load Registrations in the media back to the Electone, you will need to select a song, as described below. What is a Song? Registration data You can think of a song as a “container” for storing the Electone data for a piece of music, recorded to external media. A single song can contain both the recorded performance and Registrations. Performance data Song Reference Page Media Contents: Folders, Songs, and Files (page 116) To record your performance, you will need to specify a Song for recording. To copy or convert songs, you will need to specify not only the song to be copied or converted but also the song to which you want to save the newly created data. To select the desired song: Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal, then press the [MDR] button. <SONG SELECT> ¿Ã001:USB 01 Media icon CAUTION 6 While the instrument is accessing data, do NOT remove the media. (Some USB flash memory devices are equipped with an LED. The LED will flash while the media is being accessed.) Music Data Recorder (MDR) 1 ⁄ [Õ] Currently selected media The Song Select display (Page 1) appears. In the Song Select display, you can select a blank song for recording your performance or saving the Registration settings, or you can select a desired song for playback. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 111 2 Select the desired media. <SONG SELECT> ¿Ã001:USB 01 ⁄ [Õ] To use a USB flash memory device, select “USB xx” (xx indicates the number of the device). If you insert two USB flash memory devices, the device inserted first will be shown as “USB 01” and the latter one will be shown as “USB 02.” To use a floppy disk, select “USB-FD xx” (xx indicates the number of the disk). Select the desired media by turning the DATA CONTROL dial or by successive pressing of the [C] button when the desired media is not displayed. When selecting the media, the selection “Internet” will appear at the bottom of the display. However, the Internet function is not available. 3 Select a Song Press the [D] button corresponding to the [Õ] in the display, to call up the desired song or folder in the selected media. <SONG SELECT> ¿Ã001:USB 01 6 ⁄ [Õ] Music Data Recorder (MDR) ÃUSB 01 [˜] ⁄ ¿ ___:new song Select the desired song here If the selected media has no data, “new song” (blank song) will be selected automatically. If the selected media contains both folders and songs, the folder will be selected first, and you can use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the following items in sequence: folders → new song → songs (containing data) by turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise. You can also select the song (folder) by successively pressing the [C] button. For details about how to select songs in a folder, see “Selecting a Song in a Folder” on page 113. 112 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Select a “new song” (blank song) if you want to make a new recording or save data. NOTE The new song is a blank song which is automatically created in the media/folder, if the number of the songs in the media/folder is less than 100. ÃUSB 01 [˜] ⁄ ¿ ___:new song Reference Page Recording (page 117) To simply play an existing song, select the desired song (containing data), referring to the song name and icons ÃUSB 01 ¿ 001:SONG 1 Reference Pages Changing the Song/Folder Name (page 122) Song Icons (page 116) [˜] ⁄ ´ Reference Page Playing Back a Song (page 132) Selecting the Song in the Folder: Keep in mind that, depending on much data stored in your device and how many folders have been created, the song you want to use may be easily located in the media’s root directory, or it may be buried deep in the folder hierarchy with other songs. The illustrations below shows you how to use the display to access a specific song in a folder of a storage device (in this case, calling up the song “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star”). 6 The new song is a blank song which is automatically created in the media/folder unless the number of the songs in the media/folder is under 100. FOLDER_002 FOLDER_001 new song Music Data Recorder (MDR) NOTE USB flash memory (USB 01) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star new song SONG 1 The illustration below shows the levels of folders and songs in the device. Follow the dark arrows and the accompanying instruction steps to select the desired song, “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.” First level (root directory) USB flash memory (USB 01) 1. Press the [D] button Second level in the root directory 2. Use the DATA CONTROL dial or the [C] button FOLDER_001 FOLDER_002 new song SONG 1 3. Press the [D] button Third level in the root directory 4. Use the DATA CONTROL dial or the [C] button new song Twinkle Twinkle Little Star Songs or folders in the same level can be selected in sequence by turning the DATA CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the [C] button. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 113 Here is the actual procedure again, in linear form: 1 Press the [D] button to call up the folder in the selected media at the bottom of the display. <SONG SELECT> ¿Ã001:USB 01 ⁄ [Õ] ÃUSB 01 [˜] ⁄ ¿¶001:FOLDER_001 [Õ] FOLDER_001 is displayed. 2 Select the FOLDER_002 by turning the DATA CONTROL dial or successively pressing the [C] button. ÃUSB 01 [˜] ⁄ ¿¶002:FOLDER_002 [Õ] 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 3 Press the [D] button to call up the song in the FOLDER_002 at the bottom of the display. In this case, “new song” is displayed. ÃUSB 01 [˜] ⁄ ¿¶002:FOLDER_002 [Õ] Ã¶FOLDER_002 [˜] ⁄ ¿ ___:new song 4 Select the desired song, “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star,” by turning the DATA CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the [C] button. Ã¶FOLDER_002 ¿ 001:Twinkle 114 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual [˜] ⁄ ´ To change the Media/Folder: Make sure to select Song Select display (Page 1) when you want to change the media/ folder/song. 3 5 4 Ã¶FOLDER_002 [˜] ⁄ ¿ 003:FOLDER_003 [Õ] 2 1 1 6 Current media/folder/song Displays the currently selected media/folder/song. In this case, the folder named “FOLDER_003” is shown. 2 Changing the current media/folder/song The current media/folder/song can be selected by turning the DATA CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the [C] button. 3 Display the entire song name To show the entire name of the currently selected folder/song (up to 36 characters) in the display, hold down the [A] button. 4 Upper level folder or media 6 5 Music Data Recorder (MDR) This shows the upper level folder/media which contains the currently selected folder/ song. The media icon (Ã) and the folder icon (¶) shown at the top left of the display indicates the current location in the media. For example, “Ã¶FOLDER_002” indicates that the folder named “FOLDER_002” in the root directory of the media. For folders deeper in the hierarchy (lower than the third level), the folder icon “Ã...¶” is shown. Move to upper level Select the upper level by pressing the [B] button. If you are at a level lower than the second level, you can instantly jump back to the first level by holding down the [B] button (for more than two seconds). 6 Move to lower level Select the lower level by pressing the [D] button. If a song is selected, [Õ] is not shown in the display. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 115 Song Icons These icons are shown when you select a media, folder, and song. Icons Description Ã ¶ Indicates media such as a USB flash memory or a floppy disk. Indicates a Protected Song unavailable for editing. See page 139 for details. À Indicates a Protected Song available for editing. ˛ Indicates a song that has been converted from a song in media for which write-protect or copy-protect is effective. For details, see “Converting EL format to ELB” on page 142. ´ Indicates that the performance data is contained in the song. Indicates a folder. E001:SONG 1 Indicates a song that has been created with an EL-series Electone, such as the EL-900 or EL-100. X001:XGSONG001 Indicates an XG song. Media Contents: Folders, Songs, and Files Folders: A folder is a storage location in the media, used to organize multiple songs in groups. If you've saved hundreds of songs to a USB flash memory device, it may be difficult to find the desired song quickly. Organizing your songs in folders, with similar songs grouped together (for example, according to genre or tempo), makes it easier to find the songs you want. 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) Song 1 Song 2 Song 3 Song 4 Song 5 Song 6 Song 1 2 Folder 001 Creating folders Song Song Song USB flash memory 3 Song 4 5 6 Folder 002 USB flash memory Songs: A song is a “container” for storing the Electone data for a piece of music, recorded to external media. A single song can contain both the recorded performance and Registrations. A blank song containing no data is displayed as a “new song.” When a song containing the performance data is selected, a note icon (´) appears in the display. Files: A file is an element of data in a song. For example, a single song consists of various files, such as Registration files and performance files.The file types listed below are created with the M.D.R. (The extension will not appear in the Electone display. They will, however, be displayed on a computer.) 116 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Files in the song File Explanation Extension Performance data This file contains performance data, played on the keyboards and pedals of the Electone. .mid Registration data This file contains Registration settings, User Voices, User rhythms, and Rhythm Sequences. .b00 XG-converted data This file contains XG song data, for which Electone performance data is converted to XG-compatible format. .mid 4 Recording Recording ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Before recording, set up the Electone just as you’ll need it for the entire recording. Set the desired Registrations you’ll use throughout the performance/recording in Registration Memory and make sure also to select the Registration that you will use at the beginning of the song Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Select the blank song (new song) for recording your performance. For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112. ÃUSB 01 [˜] ⁄ ¿ ___:new song 3 4 5 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 1 2 6 NOTE When you record the song using the Next Regist function, make sure to press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button before pressing the [RECORD] button. For details, see page 129. Press the [RECORD] button. The lamp above the [RECORD] button lights, indicating that the Electone is ready to record. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [STOP] button. Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. The lamp above the [PLAY/PAUSE] button lights up and a small arrow indicator flashes across from left to right at the top right of the LCD display. This indicates that the M.D.R. is reading the registrations. After “REC~~” appears at the top right of the LCD display, begin playing. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 117 CAUTION 6 Do not remove the media from the instrument during recording (while the message is shown). 7 When you finish playing, press the [STOP] button. Recording stops and your performance is written to the song. The song to which your performance is recorded is automatically named “SONG xx” (xx indicates the number). You can change the song name as desired. (For details, see page 122.) To hear your newly recorded performance, press the [PLAY/ PAUSE] button. Playback will begin after a couple of seconds, as the Electone reads the Registration. For more information on playback and other playback-related functions, see page 132. Re-recording (Retry) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● If you make a mistake during recording, you can re-record the song from the beginning. 1 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 2 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button while the song is still running. This automatically stops recording and returns you to the starting point of the song. The lamp above the [PLAY/PAUSE] button starts flashing, indicating that you can re-record the song. Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button again. Re-recording starts from the beginning of the song and replaces the previously recorded performance with the newly recorded performance. Recording Each Part Separately ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can also record the parts of your performance independently. This function lets you record Keyboard Percussion and performance control data, such as Registration changes and expression pedal operation, separately from the other parts of the song. Even Keyboard Percussion and Lead Voice can be recorded separately. The following instruction is an example: First, record the chords and bass to the song using the Lower and Pedalboard, and then record the melody using the Upper Keyboard. 1 118 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Follow steps 1 through 3 on page 117 to call up the Rec Standby display. 2 Select the parts for recording. Each press of a part button switches the status: Play (green LED), Off (LED is off ) and Rec (red LED). Press each part button to turn off the parts you don’t want to record, and make sure the green LED is lit for the parts you want to play and the red lit for the part you want to record. Play (green LED): Playback of parts that have been recorded. Off (LED is off ): Recording or playback is not active. Record (red LED): Recording of the part. To record the performances on the Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard, turn off the LED above the [UPPER] button, and make sure that the red LEDs above the [LOWER] button and the [PEDAL] button are lit, as shown in the lower illustration above. 4 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. After “REC~~” appears at the top right of the LCD display, begin playing. 6 Press the [Stop] button when you are finished with your performance to stop recording. Now you’ve recorded the first parts of your performance. Music Data Recorder (MDR) 3 Setting up recording of the next part—Upper part in this case. 5 6 Press the [RECORD] button. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. To overwrite, press the [C] button corresponding to [OK] in the display. Select the parts for recording. Set the parts you want to record next (in this case, the Upper part) to “Rec” (red LED). Also set the part already recorded (in this case, the Lower and Pedal parts) to “Play” (green LED), so that you can hear the previously recorded parts as you record new ones. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 119 7 Press the [CUSTOM PLAY] button to start recording of the new part or parts. Playback of the previously recorded parts starts immediately. The [CUSTOM PLAY] button is used here to record only the parts that have been selected for recording, and plays back only those parts that have been selected for playback. While you listen to the parts being played back, start playing the melody on the Upper Keyboard. When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback is automatically stopped. The length of a subsequently recorded part cannot exceed the length of the previously recorded parts. NOTE When you record the Keyboard Percussion, make sure that the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] and/or [2] button is set to on. 6 Separately recording for Lead Voice and/or Keyboard Percussion parts: The Lead voice and the Keyboard Percussion can be recorded/played back separately although there are no buttons for these parts. Set these in the display shown in step 2 on page 119. Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 3. <PART> LEAD÷PLAY‹ XG VOL.¿100 KBP÷OFF Music Data Recorder (MDR) Press the [B] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the status for the Lead Voice. Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the status for Keyboard Percussion. You cannot set both Upper and Lead to “Rec” at the same time; neither can the Lower and Keyboard Percussion parts be recorded at the same time. 120 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Punch-in Recording ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This lets you re-record over a specific phrase or section—either that of a specific part(s) or all parts. 2 3 4 5 Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Select the song which contains the phrase you want to change. For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112. Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback of the song. Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button at the point you want to execute punch-in recording. The current song is stopped momentarily. Press the [RECORD] button. The lamp above the [RECORD] button lights, indicating that the M.D.R. is ready to record. 6 Set the parts which you want to change to “Rec” status and other parts to “Play.” 7 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start punch-in recording. Play the new phrase, as you want it to be changed. 8 Press the [STOP] button to quit the punch-in recording as soon as you reach the end of the phrase. NOTE This function is best used when the phrase to be rerecorded has definite beginning and end points, with slight pauses before and after. 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 1 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 121 5 Changing the Song/Folder Name Even though the Electone automatically assigns a generic name to each recorded song, it’s best to give each song a “meaningful” name, such as an original title or even a date indicating when it was recorded. 1 2 Select the song/folder whose name you want to change. For details on selecting a song or a folder, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112. 3 Use the PAGE buttons to select the Rename display (Page 4). The Rename display appears. <RENAME> [EXE] › « 001:SONG 1 » _ NOTE A blank song cannot be named. Once a song contains data, it can be named. Cursor 4 6 Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Move the cursor to the desired point by using the [C] [D] buttons. Pressing the [D] button moves the cursor one step to the right, while pressing the [C] button moves it to the left Music Data Recorder (MDR) <RENAME> [EXE] › « 001:SONG » _ 1 Cursor 5 Change the character at the cursor position. Replace the current character at the cursor by using the DATA CONTROL dial. Turn it clockwise to select the characters in order, and counter-clockwise for reverse order. <RENAME> [EXE] › « 001:SONH » _ 1 122 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Blank A – Z (capital) a – z (lower case) Japanese Katakana: NOTE If “English” is selected as the Language in the Utility display (page 19), Japanese katakana characters are unavailable. Marks Number 0 – 9 To delete a character: Move the cursor to the character you want to delete, and press the [C] button while holding down the [A] button. When the character is deleted, all other numbers to the right of the cursor are moved one step to the left. To insert a space: Move the cursor to the position at which you want to enter the space, and press the [D] button while holding down the [A] button. 7 8 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 6 6 Repeat steps 4 through step 5 above to finish entering the song name. Up to 36 characters can be entered. After finishing, press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the display. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] button. To actually enter the change, press the [C] button corresponding to [Rename] in the display. ≤Rename? ≤[Rename] ≤ [Cancel]≤ The renamed song/folder is displayed. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 123 An error message (“This name is not available”) may appear when pressing the [C] button to finish entering the name. If this message appears, the name is invalid and you’ll need to enter a different name. The following names cannot be used. (The letters “xx” indicate numbers.) MDR_xx.EVT MDR_xx.MID MDR_xx.Bxx MDR_xx.Vxx SONG.NAM 6 Reference Page Functions and settngs that cannot be memorized (page 98) 6 ELS_SONG.NAM MDR_xxx.MID REG_xxx.B00 SONG_xxx.C02 MDR_xxx.TMP REG_xxx.TMP ELS_SONG.TMP TMP TMP.E02 Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File) You can also record Registrations by themselves to a song, without having to record them along with a performance. All Registrations 1 – 16 stored to the Registration Memory buttons as well as the Registration Shift settings and so on can be saved to the song. Even if you’ve only created a couple of Registrations yourself, 16 separate Registration Memory settings are always stored when saving to a song—the factory preset Registrations being stored if no new settings have been made to the numbers. Music Data Recorder (MDR) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Registrations 1 – 16 stored to the numbered buttons are saved together as a bank Save Registrations There are two ways to save the Registrations. Method 1 124 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 1 Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal. 2 First make all the desired Electone settings to create your original Registration. 3 4 Press the [MDR] button, and select the destination (blank song). Select the blank song. For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112. Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 9. <REG.SAVE> [EXE] · ___:new song ¸:__ 5 Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the display. A message appears, indicating that the Registration data is currently being saved. After the message disappears, the song to which the Registration is recorded is automatically named “SONG xx” (“xx” indicates the number). Reference Page Changing the Song/Folder Name (page 122) Method 2 First make all the desired settings you want to save, then select the destination (blank song) as you did in steps 1 and 3 above. 2 Press the [RECORD] button to enable recording on the M.D.R. 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 1 3 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to record the Registrations, then press the [STOP] button before the “REC~~” indication is shown at the top right of the display. This is the same procedure as the one shown when you start recording. The “REC~~” at the top right of the display indicates that the M.D.R. is recording the Registrations and being set up for normal recording; pressing the [STOP] button interrupts this process. ÃUSB 01 »~~ ⁄ ¿ ___:new song ÃUSB 01 REC~~⁄ ¿ ___:new song ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 125 Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● When you save the Registrations, Registrations 1 – 16 will be saved as a Registration bank. When you want to use more than 16 Registration numbers in a song, you can save additional Registration banks—up to a maximum of 50 in a single song—with the following procedure. R:01 Registration 1 2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 3 4 5 6 7 8 Registrations Bank Add R:02 Registration to be added 1 2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 3 4 Song 7 8 1 2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 3 4 1 First make all the desired settings you want to save. 6 2 Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Music Data Recorder (MDR) 3 4 6 ... ... R:50 Registration to be added 5 5 6 7 8 Press the [MDR] button, and select the destination song (the one that already contains the previous Registrations). For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112. Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 9. <REG.SAVE> [EXE] · 001:SONG 1 ¸÷01 Any Registration banks previously been saved to the song are indicated in the display (as “¸÷01” or similar). 5 Select the blank Registration bank “¸÷__” to which you want to save the additional Registration bank, by using the DATA CONTROL dial. You can also select the blank bank by successively pressing the [D] button. <REG.SAVE> [EXE] · 001:SONG 1 ¸÷__ 126 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual If you select a numbered bank, such as “01” instead of “_ _”, this procedure will overwrite the numbered bank. For details, see step 6 of “Replacing Registrations” on page 128. 6 Reference Page Files (page 116) Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the display. The Registration bank will be added and follows previously contained banks. When you play back this song, the top Registration in this display will be loaded to the Electone. Replacing Registrations ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The M.D.R. also lets you change the Registrations of an existing song without changing the performance data. First make all the desired settings you want to save to the new Registration. 2 Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal. 3 4 Press the [MDR] button, and then select the desired song containing the Registration you wish to replace. For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112. 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 1 Reference Page Song Icons (page 116) Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 9. The Registration bank number will be shown at the bottom right of the display. <REG.SAVE> [EXE] · 001:SONG 1 ¸÷01 Registration 5 Select the Registration bank number you wish to overwrite by using the DATA CONTROL dial. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 127 6 Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the display. <REG.SAVE> [EXE] · 001:SONG 1 ¸÷01 A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] button. 7 Press the [C] button corresponding to [OK] in the display to overwrite (replace). Deleting Registrations ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This function lets you delete the Registration banks saved to a song. 1 2 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 3 Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Press the [MDR] button, and then select the song containing the Registrations you wish to delete. For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112. Use the PAGE buttons to select the Registration Delete display (Page 10). The Registration Delete display appears. <REG.DEL> [EXE]⁄‚ 001:SONG 1 ¸÷01 4 Select the Registration bank number you want to delete by using the DATA CONTROL dial. You can also select the Registration bank number by successively pressing the [D] button. <REG.DEL> [EXE]⁄‚ 001:SONG 1 ¸÷01 128 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 5 6 Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the display. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] button. Press the [C] button corresponding to [Delete] in the display to delete the Registration. When several Registrations are stored to a song, the Registrations following the deleted one are moved back to replace it in the order Next Regist Settings (Using more than 16 Registrations in one song) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You’ve learned in an earlier section that by using a bank of 16 Registrations, you can program a maximum of 80 settings to be recalled in a specified order, with the Regist Shift function described on page 106. When playing back a song which uses more than 16 Registration numbers, you can have two or more Registration banks saved to a single song and recall them one by one as you play the song. This function that makes this possible is called Next Regist. MEMORY MEMORY MEMORY 1 16 1 16 R:01 1 2 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) MEMORY R:02 Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Set the Registration Shift mode to User, and select Next as the Shift End in Page 1 of the Registration Shift display. In Page 2, set the Use Registration order. For details, see “Registration Shift” on page 103. 3 Press the [MDR] button, and select the destination song. For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112. 4 Save the Registrations. Press the PAGE buttons to select Page 9. <REG.SAVE> [EXE] · ___:new song ¸:__ Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the display. A message appears, indicating that the Registration data is currently being saved. After the message disappears, the song to which the Registration is recorded is automatically named “SONG xx” (“xx” indicates the number). ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 129 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 above to save the Registration banks in the order you want to recall them in the same song. When making new Registration Shift setting, delete the previous settings, then continue. For details, see “Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song” on page 126. Once the Next Regist function has been turned on and set, you can use the function, following the steps below. 6 7 6 NOTE Music Data Recorder (MDR) While a rhythm is playing, sequence data and User rhythm in the Registration data created on the Electone such as ELS-01/ 01C/01X cannot be loaded. 8 Press the [MDR] button, and select the song for which the Next Regist function has been set. See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting Songs. Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. If the song contains more than two Registration banks, the first one (¸:01) will be loaded. You can check the Registration order in Page 2 of the Registration Shift display. As you play the Electone, press the Right Footswitch. Each press of the Right Footswitch selects Registrations according to the order you’ve specified. After finishing the play back of the “¸:01,” the next Registration bank “¸:02” begins loading automatically, and can be selected by pressing the Right Footswitch. Right Footswitch Expression Pedal When you record or play the song using the Next Regist function, make sure to load the top Registration bank (R:01) to the Electone by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button after selecting the desired song. If you begin the recording procedure instead by pressing the [RECORD] button, even as another bank (R:02, etc.) is loading, R:01 is overwritten by the current panel settings and will be lost. 130 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 7 Recalling Recorded Registrations Registrations (and bulk data) recorded to song numbers can be easily loaded back to the Electone. Use this function if you want to recall a specific Registration bank (R:02~) from a song which contains more than two Registration banks Loading Registrations ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 2 3 Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Press the [MDR] button and select the song containing the Registrations you want to load back to the Electone. For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112. Use the PAGE buttons to select the Registration Load display (Page 8). <REG.LOAD> [EXE] ° 001:SONG 1 ¸÷01 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 4 6 Select the Registration bank you want to load to the Electone. Select the desired Registration bank number by turning the DATA CONTROL dial. <REG.LOAD> [EXE] ° 001:SONG 1 ¸÷02 5 Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the display. A message appears, indicating the Registration data is currently being loaded. After the Registration data is loaded, the LCD returns to the Registration Load display. NOTE If you load a Registration while a rhythm is playing, User rhythms in the Registration data cannot be loaded. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 131 8 Playing Back a Song This operation lets you automatically load the Registration data saved to a song when playing back your recorded performances. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Loading the 16 Registrations to the numbered buttons on the panel. Load Registrations Song 1 2 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 3 Reference Page 4 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Play back Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Press the [MDR] button, then select the desired song for playback. For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 112. Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to load the Registration data. “»~~” appears at the top right of the display, indicating the Registration data is currently being loaded. If the song contains more than two Registration banks, the first one will be loaded. Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song (page 126) 132 Performance data Playback starts automatically after reading the Registration data. The elapsed time will be showed on the display, and song playback starts (if the song contains performance data). In general, all parts recorded to the song are played back; however, you can mute specific parts and playback only selected parts (page 133). When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback automatically stops. You can, however, stop playback in the middle of the song by pressing the [STOP] button. If the song contains no performance data, after loading the Registration data, the LCD returns to the Song Select display. Custom Play If you want to play back the song without resetting the Registrations, press the [CUSTOM PLAY] button instead of the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. This displays the song time and starts playback immediately. When you play the song using the Next Regist function, make sure to press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start the song, not the [CUSTOM PLAY] button. Playing Back the Selected Part(s) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can also play back selected parts of your recorded performance, while other parts are temporarily turned off. This function is especially useful for playing a single part, such as the melody, over previously recorded accompaniment parts. 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) To play back the selected part(s): Before or during playback, press each part button to turn the part you want to playback to “Play” and the part you want to mute to “Off.” Reference Page Recording Each Part Separately (page 118) ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 133 Fast Forward, Rewind and Pause ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Fast Forward and Rewind: During playback, press the [FF] (Fast forward) button or [REW] (Rewind) button and hold it down until the time reaches the desired position. When the button is released, playback is paused at the desired position. To resume playback from the point you’ve advanced or reversed to, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button or [CUSTOM PLAY] button. Pause: If you want to temporarily stop playback of the song or songs, press the [PLAY/ PAUSE] button. To resume playback from the point at which the song was paused, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button again or press the [CUSTOM PLAY] button. Changing the Tempo 6 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Music Data Recorder (MDR) You can change the tempo of the song as the song is playing in the M.D.R. display, either while the song is stopped or while it is playing. The TEMPO buttons on the panel cannot be used to change the tempo for the Music Data Recorder.) To Change the Tempo: 1 Press the [MDR] button. The Song Select display appears. 2 Select the song to be played back. See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs. 3 Use the PAGE buttons to select the Playback Setting display (Page 2). The tempo value is shown at the bottom left of the display <PLAYBACK SETTING> ¤ TMP¿100% RPT÷OFF 4 134 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Changing the Tempo. Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. The range is 50 – 200%. The original recorded tempo is 100%; values less than 100% result in a slower tempo, while values greater than 100% result in a faster tempo. Repeat Playback ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This feature allows you to repeatedly play back either all songs on a folder or only one specific song. 1 2 Select the song you wish to repeatedly play back. If you wish to play back all songs on a folder, select the first song that will be played back. See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs. Use the PAGE buttons to select the Playback Setting display (Page 2). The Repeat mode is shown at the bottom right of the display. <PLAYBACK SETTING> ¤ TMP¿100% RPT÷OFF 1 OFF 2 ALL 3 SINGLE 4 RANDOM 6 1 Music Data Recorder (MDR) Select the repeat mode. Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the setting. Off Cancels repeat playback. 2 All Repeats all songs in the currently selected folder in order. 3 Single Repeats the currently selected song indefinitely. 4 Random Repeats all songs in the currently selected folder randomly. 3 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to begin playback. When you stop playback, the repeat setting is automatically cancelled. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 135 Playing Back XG Songs ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Reference Page Converting to XG format (page 144) The Electone allows you to playback XG song data, created on the computer or converted from Electone song format to XG format. Naturally, you can use the fast forward, rewind and pause controls, just as with songs (performances) recorded on the Electone. 1 2 3 Insert the media containing the XG song data, then press the [MDR] button. Select the media that contains the desired XG song in the Song Select display, and then select the desired song for playback. See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs. Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 3. You can set the volume or mute settings for each part. ALL CH1 CH2 ... 6 1 CH16 Music Data Recorder (MDR) <PART>¿ALL VOL.¿100 2 ÷PLAY‹ 3 1 Part Select the desired channel “CH1” through “CH16” or “ALL” to specify the part to mute/play or to change the volume. Press the [A] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the setting. 2 Playback/Off Sets the selected part for playback or mute (off ). Select “Play” for the part you want to play back and select “Off ” for the part you want to mute. Press the [B] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the setting. 3 Volume You can adjust the volume for the selected part within a range of 0 – 100. Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the setting. The item “Volume” will be changed to “XG Volume” when the selected song contains an XG part, even when the song has been created on the ELB-01 or EL-900. You can adjust the XG part volume from Page 3, in the same way as you did with the XG songs. 136 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 9 Song Copy/Delete/Convert, Folder Create/Delete These operations let you copy, delete or convert song data, as well as create or delete folders. Song Copy ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This function lets you copy recorded data from one song to another song. Songs created with the ELS-01/01C/01X or XG songs can be copied. (Only songs created with the EL-series, such as the EL-900, cannot be copied.) This function also lets you copy and exchange data between two different media. Make sure to check the remaining memory of the destination media in advance. If memory space is insufficient, or if the folder already contains 100 songs, Song Copy is not available. 2 3 Insert the media into the USB TO DEVICE terminal. If you want to copy the song between two different media, you will need to insert the appropriate destination media. 6 Press the [MDR] button, then select the song to be copied. See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs. Music Data Recorder (MDR) 1 Use the PAGE buttons to select the Copy display (Page 5). <COPY> [EXE] ﬁ 001:SONG 1 4 Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the display. <COPY> [EXE] ﬁ 001:SONG 1 <COPY DEST> [˜] ﬁ ¿ ___:new song [EXE] The Copy Destination display appears. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 137 5 Select the destination song. <COPY DEST> [˜] ﬁ ¿ ___:new song [EXE] The new song or the folder that contains the source song will be automatically displayed at the bottom of the display as the destination. If the folder is displayed, select the new song. See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs. If you want to copy an XG song, you’ll need to select another folder as the destination, since the same folder containing the source XG song cannot be selected as the destination. If the remaining memory of the destination media is insufficient, XG Song Copy cannot be executed. (An error message will appear and the operation is cancelled.) Up to 120 XG songs can be saved in one folder About Copying Protected Songs Reference Page About Protected Songs (page 139) 6 Protected Original songs or Protected Edit songs can be copied as long as you select the same folder that contains the source Protected Song as the destination. If you select another folder/media, the message “Move?” will be displayed. If you select [OK] by pressing the [C] button, the currently selected Protected Original song and Protected Edit song created from a Protected Original song are all moved to another folder/media you have specified. In this case, the data is not copied, but moved. Music Data Recorder (MDR) 6 138 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Press the [D] button to execute Song Copy. When the operation is completed, the LCD returns to the Copy display. The name of the destination song is the same as the one of the source song, except that “*” is attached at the beginning (not including XG songs). For instructions on changing the song name, see page 122. About Protected Songs If you buy or download song data, it may be protected from being deleted (to prevent accidental erasure) or from being copied (to protect copyright ownership). These are called “Protected songs.” A Protected song can be played back in the same way as songs you’ve created, but it cannot be converted to XG format or EL format. Registration data in the Protected song cannot be edited, nor can the performance data be overwritten. If you want to edit a Protected song, first copy it within one media/folder, then edit the copy. (You cannot copy to another media/folder.) The copied song (called “Protected Edit song”) is available only when the original song (called “Protected Original song”) exists in the same folder. Be careful not to delete the Protected Original song. Folder Protected Original Song Protected Edit Song Copy CAUTION This song can be edited, but only when it is in the folder that contains the related If you move or copy the protected song data on the computer without the Musicsoft Downloader application, the song cannot be played back. Always use the Musicsoft Downloader when moving or copying protected songs on the computer. Musicsoft Downloader can be obtained at the following Internet address: http://music.yamaha.com/download/ When you want to edit a protected song, turn the power to the instrument off and back on again, then select the song to be edited. (The Registration data of the previous protected song will be initialized.) Otherwise the edited protected song may not be saved. 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) This song cannot be edited Song Delete/Folder Delete ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● These operations let you delete songs and folders. (Only songs created with the EL-series, such as the EL-900, cannot be deleted.) 1 2 3 Insert the media, then press the [MDR] button. Select the song/folder you want to delete. See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs/folders. Use the PAGE buttons to select the Delete display (Page 6). Confirm that the desired song/folder to be deleted is shown at the bottom of the display. If you want to change the song, return to Page 1 by pressing both PAGE buttons simultaneously, and then select the desired song. <DELETE> [EXE] ﬂ 001:SONG 1 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 139 4 5 Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the display. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] button. Press the [C] button to execute the operation. When the operation is completed, the LCD returns to the Delete display. To prevent inadvertent erasure of important data, make sure to return to the Page 1 by pressing both PAGE buttons simultaneously. Creating folders ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 6 1 Insert the media, then press the [MDR] button. 2 Select the media/folder in which you want to create the folder, then press the [D] button. 3 Use the PAGE buttons to select the Create Folder display (Page 11). Music Data Recorder (MDR) <CREATE FLD> [EXE]⁄⁄ 4 Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the display. To see the newly created folder, first return to Page 1 by pressing both PAGE buttons simultaneously, then select the newly created folder. The newly created folder is automatically named “FOLDER_xxx” (xxx indicates the number). For instructions on changing the folder name, see page 122. ÃUSB 01 [˜] ⁄ ¿¶001:FOLDER_001 [Õ] 140 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Converting ELB format songs to EL ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can convert songs created on the ELB-01 to the EL-series format, and save them to a floppy disk. The converted data can be used with EL-series Electones, such as the EL900. This function is not available for Protected songs. To use floppy disks with the Electone, install the optional UD-FD01 floppy disk drive. Make sure to check the remaining memory of the destination media in advance. If memory space is insufficient, the Convert operation is not available. 1 2 3 Insert the media containing the song created with the Electone, and the floppy disk as the destination. Press the [MDR] button, then select the song to be converted to the EL-series format. See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs. Reference Page About Protected Songs (page 139) Installing the Floppy Disk Drive (page 167) NOTE ELB songs can be used on Electone models such as the ELS-01/01C/01X with no need for conversion. Use the PAGE buttons to select the Convert display (Page 7). <CONV>¿EL [EXE] ‡ 001:SONG 1 ´ Music Data Recorder (MDR) 4 6 Select the conversion format. Select “EL” by using the DATA CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the [A] button. XG EL <CONV>¿EL [EXE] ‡ 001:SONG 1 ´ ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 141 5 Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the display. <CONV>¿EL [EXE] ‡ 001:SONG 1 ´ <CONV DEST> ‡ ¿ ___:new song [EXE] The new song is displayed as the destination in the floppy disk. When a new song is not displayed, select a new song by turning the DATA CONTROL dial or successively pressing the [C] button. 6 7 6 Press the [D] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the display. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] button. Music Data Recorder (MDR) Press the [C] button corresponding to [Convert] in the display to start conversion. After conversion is finished, the LCD returns to the Convert display. The song converted to EL format is automatically named “EXXX: SONG x” (x indicates the number). Converting EL format songs to ELB ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Reference Page Installing the Floppy Disk Drive (page 167) NOTE When converting protected EL data to the ELB format, make sure to set the writeprotect tab of the EL disk to the “overwrite” position (tab closed). 142 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual You can convert the songs in a floppy disk created with an EL-series Electone, such as the EL-900, to the ELB-01 format, and save it to a USB flash memory device. The songs in write-protected or copy-protected media for the EL series can be converted only one time. To use a floppy disk, you’ll need to install the optional UD-FD01 floppy disk drive. Depending on the original song data, the sound or tempo of the converted song may differ from the original, and/or the Next Song function of the original song may not be effective. Make sure to check the remaining memory of the destination media in advance. If memory space is insufficient, the Convert operation is not available. 1 2 Insert the floppy disk that containing the song you want to convert to the ELB format, and insert the USB flash memory device for use as the destination. Press the [MDR] button, then select the song you want to convert to ELB format. See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs. 3 Use the PAGE buttons to select the Convert display (Page 7). 4 Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the display. <CONV>:ELB [EXE] ‡ E001:SONG 1 <CONV DEST> [˜] ‡ ¿ ___:new song [EXE] 6 5 6 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) The Convert Destination display appears. Select the blank song as the destination in the USB flash memory device. Press the [D] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the display. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] button. Press the [C] button corresponding to [Convert] in the display to start conversion. After conversion is finished, the LCD returns to the Convert display. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 143 Converting to XG format ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This function allows you to convert ELB-01 song data to XG format data. You can play back the data using XG devices. The converted XG song data may not sound the same as the original data. Make sure to check the remaining memory of the destination media in advance. If memory space is insufficient, the Convert operation is not available. Protected songs cannot be converted to XG format. 1 2 Select the song to be converted to the XG format. See steps 2 and 3 on page 112 for instructions on selecting songs. Use the PAGE buttons to select the Convert display (Page 7). <CONV>¿EL [EXE] ‡ 001:SONG 1 ´ 3 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 4 Select the conversion format. Select “XG” by using the DATA CONTROL dial or successively pressing the [A] button. Press the [B] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the display. The Convert Destination display appears. 5 Select the blank song as destination. 6 Press the [D] button corresponding to [EXE] (Execute) in the display. 7 A message will appear, prompting confirmation of the converted data. Press the [C] button to play back the data. ≤Check the data. ≤ ≤[OK] [Cancel]≤ After playback is finished, the LCD return to the Convert display. The song converted to XG format is automatically named “XGSONGxxx” (xxx indicates the number). For instructions on changing the song name, see page 122. 144 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Checking the Remaining Memory ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can check the remaining memory in the media. 1 Insert the media, and press the [MDR] button. 2 Select the desired media by using the DATA CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the [C] button. 3 Use the PAGE buttons to select Page 13. The remaining memory is displayed. ⁄‹ xx.xx MB 6 Music Data Recorder (MDR) <REMAIN> USB 01 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 145 7 Footswitches These leg- and foot-operated controls allow you to execute various performance functions and switch the effects on/off, without taking your hands from the keyboard. Left Footswitch The Electone has two Footswitches on the expression pedal. The Right Footswitch is used for the Registration Shift function, while the Left Footswitch can be set to control one of three functions: Rhythm, Glide, or Rotary Speaker. Instructions for setting the Left Footswitch (in the Footswitch Page) are given here. For details on the Registration Shift function and Right Footswitch, see “Registration Shift” on page 102. Left Footswitch Right Footswitch Expression Pedal 1 7 Press the [FOOTSWITCH] button. Footswitches NOTE Pressing the [FOOTSWITCH] button calls up one of two different display pages: the Footswitch Page or the Regist Shift Page. Press the [A] button to alternate between the two pages. 146 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual ¸<REG.SHIFT> MODE¿OFF Calls up the Footswitch display. Pressing the [A] button alternates between the Footswitch Page and Regist Shift Page. ¸<REG.SHIFT> MODE¿OFF Footswitch Page Ò<FOOT.SW> MODE¿OFF 1 OFF 2 RHYTHM 3 GLIDE 4 ROTARY SPEAKER In this page, you can assign which function the Left Footswitch will control: Rhythm, Glide, or Rotary speaker. Turning the DATA CONTROL Dial to the right selects the functions in sequence: Off → Rhythm → Glide → Rotary speaker. Turning the DATA CONTROL Dial to the left selects in the reverse order. When Off is selected here, the Left Footswitch is inactive. 1 Off The Left Footswitch will not control any function. 2 7 Rhythm When this is selected, one of the control settings appears at the right bottom of the display. Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL Dial to select the desired control setting. Footswitches 2 Reference page Rhythm Structure (page 58) Ò<FOOT.SW> MODE¿RHYTHM ÷STOP 2 -1 STOP 2 -2 BREAK 2 -3 MAIN A – D 2 -4 INTRO 1 – 3 2 -5 ENDING 1 – 3 2-1 Stop Switches the rhythm on/off whenever you press the Left Footswitch. 2-2 Break This function corresponds to the [BREAK] button on the panel. When you press the Left Footswitch, the Break section turns on. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 147 2-3 Main A – Main D These functions correspond to the MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons on the panel. For example, when “MAIN A” is selected in this display and you press the Left Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Main A or Fill In A. 2-4 Intro 1 – Intro 3 These functions correspond to the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons on the panel. For example, when “INTRO1” is selected in this display and you press the Left Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Intro 1. 2-5 Ending 1 – Ending 3 These functions correspond to the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons on the panel. For example, when “ENDING1” is selected in this display and you press the Left Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Ending 1. After the ending pattern is played, the rhythm stops. 3 Glide This lets you control the Glide effect by using the Left Footswitch. Pressing the Left Footswitch immediately lowers the pitch of the selected Voice or Voices by a half-step and releasing it slowly returns the pitch to the original. When the Glide setting is chosen, three separate Glide pages are available, with the current page number shown at the top right side of the display. You can select the pages by using the PAGE buttons. Footswitch – Glide Page 1 3 -2 7 Ò<FOOT.SW> MODE¿GLIDE TIME÷1 ⁄ ”LEAD Footswitches 3 -1 Footswitch – Glide Page 2 3 -1 Ò<FOOT.SW> MODE¿GLIDE ”UPPER1¤ ”UPPER2 3 -1 Footswitch – Glide Page 3 3 -1 Ò<FOOT.SW> MODE¿GLIDE ’LOWER1‹ ’LOWER2 3 -1 148 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 3-1 Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead Select the desired Voice section(s) for which the Glide function is to be applied by pressing the corresponding [A] – [D] buttons. 3-2 Time Determines the speed of the Glide function, or how gradually the pitch returns when the Left Footswitch is released. Higher settings produce slower pitch changes. Press the [B] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. Range: 1-5 4 Rotary Speaker You can control the Rotary Speaker effect (on/off ) by using the Left Footswitch. When the “ROTARY SPEAKER” is selected in this display and you press the Footswitch, the Rotary Speaker effect is switched on or off. This function corresponds to the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button on the panel. To use this function, you’ll need to make the appropriate Rotary Speaker settings for each Voice section. For details, see page 50. Reference page Rotary Speaker (page 50) 7 Footswitches Ò<FOOT.SW> MODE¿ROTARY SPEAKER ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 149 8 Transpose and Pitch Controls There are two pitch-related controls on the Electone: Transpose and Pitch. Transpose allows you to change the key of the instrument and Pitch lets you finely adjust the tuning. Transpose and Pitch can be adjusted in the Utility display. 1 Press the [UTILITY] button. Currently selected page <æy∫/LANGUAGE> ⁄ ’i-y∫ ”ENGLISH The Utility display appears. 2 Select Page 2 of the Utility display by pressing the PAGE buttons. <æy∫/LANGUAGE> ⁄ ’i-y∫ ”ENGLISH <TRANSPOSE> <PITCH>¤ ¿ 0 ÷440.0Hz 8 1 2 Transpose and Pitch Controls In this page, you can change the Transpose and Pitch settings by using the [C] [D] buttons and the DATA CONTROL Dial. NOTE The Transpose setting here is not applicable for XG songs (page 136). 1 Transpose Determines the coarse pitch setting of all the Voices, and is adjustable in half steps (semitones). Press the [C] button to make the “¿” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL Dial to change the setting Range: -6 – +6 2 Pitch Determines the fine pitch setting of all the Voices. Each step changes the pitch by 0.2 Hz. The default Pitch setting is 440.0 Hz (corresponding to key A3). Press the [D] button to make the “÷” indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL Dial to change the setting Range: 427.2 Hz – 452.6 Hz You can also change the Transpose and Pitch for each Voice section, in the Voice Condition display. (See page 43 for details.) 150 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 9 Connections On the underside and right side of the Electone keyboard is a separate panel equipped with various input/output terminals and miscellaneous controls, the functions of which are described below. 1 Accessory Jacks and Controls This section provides brief explanations for each jack/control on the Electone. For details on connecting to external devices, see page 153. 1 2 Reference Pages 1 AUX OUT (L/R) jacks This set of stereo outputs is for connection to an external amplifier/speaker. The output level is fixed and cannot be controlled. 2 PHONES jack For connection of a stereo headphone set. When headphones are connected to this jack, sound to the Electone’s built-in speaker system is automatically cut off, allowing you to play without disturbing others. Playing the Sounds of the Electone Through an External Audio System (page 153) Recording the Sounds of the Electone to an External Recorder (page 154) Reference Page Using Headphones (page 153) Connections 9 3 Reference Pages 3 USB TO DEVICE A terminal For connecting USB storage devices (such as Flash Memory). Connecting USB storage devices (page 155) ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 151 4 5 6 Reference Pages Controlling External MIDI Devices from the Electone (page 154) Controlling the Electone from an External Device (page 155) Connection with Computer (page 156) What is MIDI (page 157) Reference Page Connection with Computer (page 156) 4 MIDI IN/OUT terminals For connecting external MIDI devices such a synthesizer or sequencer. You can also use these to connect with a computer that has a MIDI Interface. 5 USB TO HOST terminal For connecting to a computer with a USB cable. To connect to a computer, make sure that an appropriate USB-MIDI driver is installed to the computer. 6 USB TO DEVICE B terminal For connecting USB storage devices (such as Flash Memory). USB USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral devices. 9 Connections 152 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 2 Connection Examples — External Devices Before connecting the Electone to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the power of the components on or off, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may occur. Using Headphones ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To use headphones, connect them to the PHONES jack (standard 1/4" phone jack). PHONES Playing the Sounds of the Electone Through an External Audio System ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● By using the AUX OUT jacks (RCA), you can connect your Electone to external speakers. Speaker (Left) 9 R Connections AUX OUT L Speaker (Right) ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 153 Recording the Sounds of the Electone to an External Recorder ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can record your Electone performance to an external recorder, such as an MD recorder or cassette tape recorder, using the AUX OUT jacks. Cassette tape recorder, etc. LINE IN L R AUX OUT L R Audio cable Recording Controlling External MIDI Devices from the Electone ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can use the Electone to remotely play the Voices of a MIDI keyboard (or tone generator), combining them with the Electone and letting you create even richer, more multi-layered sound textures. (The MIDI receive channels of the MIDI keyboard must match the transmit channels on your Electone.) The Electone transmits a variety of performance messages along with note information as digital data, including values that indicate how far the expression pedal is pressed down and how hard you play the keyboard. How the connected external device responds to these messages depends on the particular device. Tone generator Reference Page What is MIDI (page 157) MIDI IN NOTE MIDI OUT When you are using the M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be transmitted. 9 MIDI cable MIDI messages MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used. Connections 154 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Controlling the Electone from an External Device ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can use an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer to remotely play the sounds of your Electone and change its Registrations. (You will need to set the MIDI transmit channels of the MIDI keyboard to match the fixed receive channels on your Electone.) MIDI keyboard or synthesizer NOTE MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER When you are using the M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be received. MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI cable MIDI messages MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used. Connecting USB storage devices ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Using the USB TO DEVICE terminal(s), you can connect USB storage devices (such as the USB flash memory) for saving your Electone data. You can connect up to two USB storage devices (such as a USB flash memory device, floppy disk, Card-R/RW drive, hard disk and other drives) to the USB TO DEVICE terminal(s). Before purchasing a USB storage device, please consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized Yamaha distributor for advice. Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminals • Never turn the USB device’s power on/off and never plug/unplug the USB cable when the connected USB storage device is of the self-powered type. Doing so may result in the operation of the Electone “freezing” or hanging up. • While the instrument is accessing data (such as Save, Load, and Delete operations), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. Reference Pages Installing the Floppy Disk Drive (page 167) Formatting External Media (page 109) NOTE If necessary, use a USB hub. Only self-powered (battery or external power supply) types can be used. USB hubs of up to two levels can be used. 9 Connections Compatible USB devices • Be careful not to turn the write-protect switch on or off while the USB device is still connected to the terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction in the M.D.R. operation since the on/off status may not be recognized correctly. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 155 3 Connection with Computer By using the USB TO HOST terminal or MIDI IN/OUT terminals, you can connect your Electone to a computer and receive/transmit MIDI data (for more information about MIDI, see page 157). Before you can actually transfer data between the Electone and a computer via the USB connection, you will need to install an appropriate MIDI driver. Download the latest MIDI driver software from the Yamaha web site at “http://music.yamaha.com/download/.” NOTE When you are using the M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be transferred to/from the computer. Connecting your Electone to a computer opens up a whole new world of musical possibilities. You can save your original songs to computer and create notation (score writing application or sequencing software is needed), and even upload your original Electone song data to your own website, to promote your talents or share songs with your friends. You can also control the Electone from the computer, for example, by playing a MIDI file on the computer to play back the sounds of your Electone. Using the USB terminal ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Using the Electone’s USB TO HOST terminal and a standard USB cable, connect the Electone and the computer. Computer USB TO HOST USB cable MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used. Precautions when using the USB TO HOST terminals When connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so may result in freezing of the computer, corrupting data, and even losing data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, turn the power to the instrument off or restart the computer. • Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, exit from any power-saving mode (such as suspended, sleep, standby) of the computer. • Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB TO HOST terminal. • Quit any open applications. • Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a Song.) • While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: When turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. 9 Connections 156 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Using the MIDI IN/OUT terminals ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● By using an optional MIDI interface such as the UX16, you can connect the Electone to the computer, with the MIDI IN/OUT terminals on the instrument. Connect the Electone and the MIDI Interface with two standard MIDI cables (one connecting the OUT terminal on the Electone to the MIDI IN terminal on the interface, and the other connecting the IN terminal on the Electone to the MIDI OUT terminal on the interface). Connect the MIDI interface to the computer with a USB cable. NOTE Depending on your particular MIDI interface, you may have to connect the MIDI Interface and the computer with a serial cable. Computer IN OUT MIDI MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI Interface (for example, UX16) 4 MIDI This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as how you can use MIDI on your Electone. What is MIDI? ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument.” In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider a grand piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note? Connections Acoustic guitar note production 9 Digital instrument note production L Internal amp Tone generator Internal amp (Electric circuit) R Playing the keyboard Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound. Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampled note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 157 As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampled note (previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on information received from the keyboard, and output through the speakers. So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production? For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the Electone keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what Voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed” and “when was it released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored sampled note. Example of Keyboard Information Voice number (with what Voice) 01 (grand piano) Note number (with which key) 60 (C3) Note on (when was it pressed) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note) Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong) As described above, your keyboard performance and panel operations such as Voice selection are handled as MIDI events. All rhythm-related data—including rhythm patterns, auto accompaniment patterns, Rhythm Sequences, etc.—also consist of MIDI messages. MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages. 9 Connections 158 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual MIDI Messages of the Electone ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: the Channel Messages and System Messages. Channel Messages consist of data related to the performance on the keyboard for a specific channel. System Messages consist of data that allows several MIDI devices to communicate with each other. Channel Messages Each time you play the keyboard on the Electone, channel messages (indicating which keys are played and how strongly) are transmitted via a specific channel. Similarly, the Electone can be played remotely when receiving this data from an external keyboard. Note On: Indicates which keys are played with the note numbers 0 through 127. The reception note range is C-2 (0) – G8 (127), C3 = 60. Note Off: Generated when a key is released. Velocity: Indicates how strongly the key is played. The range is 1 – 127. For more detailed information, see “MIDI Data Format” on page 168 and “MIDI Implementation Chart” on page 178. • Program Change Program Change messages allow you to change Voices in the middle of a song. With these messages you can change the Registrations of the Electone. For more detailed information, see “MIDI Data Format” on page 168 and “MIDI Implementation Chart” on page 178. • Control Change Control Change Messages let you select Voice banks, control the volume, panning, modulation, portamento time, brightness and various other sound parameters, through specific Control Change numbers. For more detailed information on the Control Change messages available on the Electone, see “MIDI Data Format” on page 168 and “MIDI Implementation Chart” on page 178. 9 System Messages Connections • System Exclusive Messages System Exclusive messages are used to exchange the system and Voice/Registration data. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 159 MIDI Channels ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● MIDI data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 – 16, the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable. Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts over a specific channel. Your home TV set receives many different programs simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired program. Weather Report NEWS 1 2 NEWS 2 MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a specific MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will sound according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument. MIDI cable MIDI Transmit channel 2 MIDI Receive channel 2 The receive channel of the Electone is fixed at channel 1 for the Upper Keyboard, channel 2 for the Lower Keyboard, and channel 3 for the Pedalboard. This means that when you are using another MIDI device to play the Electone’s Voices, you must set the MIDI transmit channel(s) of the connected device to match the receive channel(s) of the Electone. You can select the transmit channel for each keyboard (Upper, Lower and Pedal) from channels 1 – 16. See page 161 for more information. 9 Connections 160 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 5 MIDI Control When you connect your Electone with a second MIDI device (such as a synthesizer or computer), you can determine how the Electone controls that MIDI device, or how the Electone is controlled. To select the MIDI page: 1 Press the [UTILITY] button. The Utility display appears. The MIDI Pages are found on Pages 3 – 5. <æy∫/LANGUAGE> ⁄ ’i-y∫ ”ENGLISH Use the PAGE buttons to select Pages 3 – 5. Internal/External Display 1 <INT/EXT> LEAD÷INT.‹ SYNC¿INT. EXP.÷AUTO 2 3 Internal/External Switches control over the displayed items between the Electone (Internal) or the connected device (External). 1 Lead Determines Internal or External control of the Lead Voice. Press the [B] button to make the indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the setting. Internal: The Lead Voice is played from the Upper Keyboard of the Electone. (If the To Lower function is on, it is played from Lower Keyboard.) 9 External: The Lead Voice is played from the connected instrument via MIDI channel 4. Connections 2 2 Synchro Determines the source of the timing control, for rhythm synchronization purposes. Press the [C] button to make the indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the setting. Internal: Pressing the Rhythm [START] or [SYNCHRO START] button on the panel controls and synchronizes to any connected devices (e.g., sequencer, etc.). External: Starting the rhythm of a connected rhythm machine also starts the rhythm of the Electone. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 161 3 Expression Determines the control of the expression pedal functions. Ordinarily, this control is set to Auto. Press the [D] button to make the indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the setting. Auto: Internal and External is automatically switched. Internal: You can manually control the expression pedal even during M.D.R. playback. External: While playing the M.D.R. or receiving MIDI messages, the expression pedal is invalid. (The volume is controlled by the recorded data in a USB flash memory or received MIDI data.) MIDI Out Channel Display 1 <MIDI OUT CH> UK÷ 1› LK¿ 2 PK÷ 3 2 3 For setting the channels over which MIDI information will be transmitted. Any channel from 1 through 16 can be assigned to each keyboard, the Upper Keyboard, the Lower Keyboard and the Pedalboard. The MIDI messages on each keyboard will be sent on the channels set here. You must set the transmit channel here to match the receive channel of the connected device. 1 Upper Keyboard You can select the channel for the Upper Keyboard. Press the [B] button to make the indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the setting. 2 Lower Keyboard You can select the channel for the Lower Keyboard. Press the [C] button to make the indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the setting. 9 3 Pedalboard Connections You can select the channel for the Pedalboard. Press the [D] button to make the indicator flash, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the setting. MIDI Out Filter Display <MIDI OUT FILTER> ’RHYTHM ﬁ Deletes unnecessary MIDI data and keeps it from being transmitted from the Electone. Rhythm start/stop messages can be filtered on the Electone. Successive presses [C] button alternates between being transmitted (Off ) and not transmitted (On). 162 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 10 Appendix Assembly Instructions Carefully read these instructions BEFORE assembling the Electone. Be careful not to confuse any of the parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction by following the procedures given below. Be sure to assemble the Electone with two or more people. Don’t use any screws other than the ones specified and included in this package. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage and malfunction. Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing assembly. Make sure to perform all assembly operations on a flat surface. To disassemble, reverse the procedures. You need a Phillips (+) screwdriver to assemble the Electone. 1 Open the package, take out the two styrofoam pads from the both sides of the package, and carefully place the main unit on top of the pads as shown. Take care not to pinch AC power cord plug between the pads and Main unit. Take out all parts from the package. Please confirm that all parts shown in the illustration are provided. When you take out the Speaker Unit, always hold the bottom of the Speaker Unit, not holding the Grill Net. Music Rest Dust Cover Main Unit Long screws (ø6 X 25 mm): 4 pcs. Short screws (ø5 X 12 mm): 8 pcs. Styrofoam pads Take out the styrofoam pads, and place the Main Unit on top of the pads. Pedalboard cord clamps: 2 pcs. Speaker Unit 10 Screw caps: 4 pcs. Grill Net Attached to the Speaker Unit Sideboard (Left) Bench Sideboard (Right) Pedalboard Unit Appendix 2 Bench Board Legs: 4 pcs. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 163 3 Mount the Sideboards onto the Pedalboard unit. 4-3 Be sure not to confuse the Right and Left Sideboards. 3-1 3-2 Raise the Pedalboard as shown in the illustration below. Position each screw hole on both the Pedalboard and Sideboards as shown in the illustration and mount the Sideboards onto the Pedalboard using the 4 short screws (2 screws on each Sideboard). While holding the Sideboard(s) to the Speaker unit, fasten the four short screws from the rear, to secure the Speaker unit to the Sideboards. Cover the four screw holes on the rear side with the corresponding screw caps. Push the Sideboard toward the Speaker unit Push the Sideboard toward the Pedalboard Short screws Push the Sideboard toward the Speaker unit Screw caps Short screws Screw caps Short/black screws 3-3 Stand the Pedalboard after securing the screws. 4 Mount the Speaker Unit onto the Sideboards. 4-1 4-2 5 5-1 Mount the Main Unit. As shown in the illustration, hold the Main unit horizontally (with two people), and place it on the front side of the Speaker unit so that the arm at the bottom of the Main unit comes in front of the Sideboards, then slide it to the rear side. Remove the Grill Net from the Speaker Unit. With the help of another person, hold the Speaker unit horizontally, and slide it from the rear into place along the brackets. 1. Place down so that the arm comes in front of the Sideboard 10 Arm Appendix 2. Slide to the rear side Take care not to drop the Main unit or to pinch your finger(s) between the Speaker unit and Main unit. Take care not to drop the Speaker unit or to pinch your finger(s) between the Speaker unit and Sideboard. 164 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 5-2 Use the four long screws to fasten the Main unit to the Sideboards as shown in the illustration. 7 Connect the Pedalboard cord and Speaker cord to the Main Unit. Make sure that the latches on each plug of the cords face toward you, and connect them to each socket securely. Long screw Speaker cord 8 8-1 Pedalboard cord Fix the Pedalboard cord to the Sideboard using the Pedalboard cord clamps. Affix the two Pedalboard cord clamps to the rear side of the Speaker unit and the lower inside of the Left Sideboard as shown in the illustration. Long screw Fit the Grill Net onto the Speaker. First, align the net with the bottom line, then secure it to the speaker assembly. 8-2 Insert the Pedalboard cord in the clamps. 10 Fasten the Grill Net by inserting the knobs into the holes. Appendix 6 Shut the clamp after inserting the cord. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 165 9 Place the music rest on the Electone. After completing the assembly, please check the following items. • Are there any parts left over? → Review all assembly procedures. • Is the Electone clear of doors and other movable fixtures? → Move the Electone to an appropriate location. • Does the Electone make a rattling noise when you shake it? → Tighten all screws. • Can the Electone be turned on? → Confirm that the AC power cord plug is securely connected to an appropriate power outlet. • Does the Electone produce sounds? → Confirm that the Speaker cord plug and the Pedalboard cord plug are securely connected to each socket on the Main unit. 10 Turn on the Electone’s power switch and confirm that the Electone can be played, and that the assembly is successful. BENCH ASSEMBLY Turn the bench board over and put the legs in place, one by one, at the corners of the bench board, then tighten each nut using the included wrench. Be sure to put the washer between each leg and nut as shown. Leg 10 Appendix Bench board 166 Washer Nut ELB-01 Owner’s Manual If the Electone creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly instructions and tighten all screws again. Installing Optional Hardware Installing the Floppy Disk Drive ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The optional UD-FD01 floppy disk drive can be installed to the bottom of the instrument by using the included floppy disk drive case and screws. Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready. 3 Fold the USB cable inside the case as shown. Attach the drive and case assembly to the right underside of the instrument, using the included four screws (4 mm x 10 mm). Dual-sided adhesive tape 4 Connect the USB cable to the [USB TO DEVICE B] terminal. 10 Appendix 1 Remove the three backing papers from the adhesive tape in the case, and fit the floppy disk drive into the case. 2 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 167 MIDI Data Format 1. Channel Messages 1.1 EL Mode “˛” indicates “Not available.” “Ø” indicates “Available.” Code (Hexadecimal) 10 Appendix 168 Receive Transmit 8n, nn, 00-7F Note Off Function 1ch 2ch 3ch (4ch)* 5-14ch 15ch ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ UK LK PEDAL LEAD 1 XG Keyboard Percussion Remarks 9n, nn, 00 9n, nn, 01-7F Note Off Note On 1ch 2ch 3ch (4ch)* 5-14ch 15ch (1ch)* (2ch)* (3ch)* ˛ ˛ ˛ UK LK PEDAL LEAD 1 XG Keyboard Percussion An, nn, 00-7F Polyphonic After Touch 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 00, 00-7F Bn, 20, 00-7F Bank select 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 01, 00-7F Modulation 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 04, 00-7F 2nd Expression 16ch (4ch)* ˛ ˛ Control LEAD 1 Bn, 05, 00-7F Portamento Time 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 06, 00-7F Bn, 26, 00-7F Data Entry 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 07, 00-7F Volume 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 0A, 00-7F Pan 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 0B, 00-7F Expression 16ch 5-14ch 16ch Bn, 40, 00-7F Hold 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 41, 00-7F Portamento 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 42, 00-7F Sostenuto 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 43, 00-7F Soft Pedal 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 47, 00-7F Resonance 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 48, 00-7F Release Time 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 49, 00-7F Attack Time 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 4A, 00-7F Brightness 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 4B, 00-7F Decay Time 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 4C, 00-7F Vibrato Rate 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 4D, 00-7F Vibrato Depth 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 4E, 00-7F Vibrato Delay 5-14ch ˛ XG Control XG Bn, 54, 00-7F Portamento Control 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 5B, 00-7F Reverb Send Level 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 5D, 00-7F Chorus Send Level 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 5E, 00-7F Variation Effect Send Level 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 60, 00-7F Bn, 61, 00-7F Data Increment Data Decrement 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 62, 00-7F Bn, 63, 00-7F NRPN LSB NRPN MSB 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 64, 00-7F Bn, 65, 00-7F RPN LSB RPN MSB 5-14ch ˛ XG ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks Bn, 78, 00 Bn, 79, 00 Bn, 7B, 00 Bn, 7C, 00 Bn, 7D, 00 Bn, 7E, 00 Bn, 7F, 00 All Sound Off Reset All Controllers All Note Off Omni Off Omni On Mono Poly 5-14ch ˛ XG Cn, nn Program Change 5-14ch 16ch ˛ 16ch XG Control Dn, 00-7F After Touch 1ch 2ch 3ch (4ch)* 5-14ch (1ch)* (2ch)* (3ch)* UK LK PEDAL LEAD 1 XG En, 00-7F, 00-7F Pitch Bend 5-14ch XG * Can be changed in the MIDI settings (page 161). ** Can be output when assigned to channel 4. 1.2 XG Mode Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive 1-16ch Transmit 8n, nn, 00-7F Note Off 9n, nn, 00 9n, nn, 01-7F Note On Note Off An, nn, 00-7F Polyphonic After Touch 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 00, 00-7F Bn, 20, 00-7F Bank select 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 01, 00-7F Modulation Remarks ˛ (1ch)* (2ch)* (3ch)* UK LK PEDAL 1-16ch ˛ 1-16ch Bn, 04, 00-7F 2nd Expression ˛ ˛ Bn, 05, 00-7F Portamento Time 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 06, 00-7F Bn, 26, 00-7F Data Entry 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 07, 00-7F Volume 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 0A, 00-7F Pan 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 0B, 00-7F Expression 16ch Control 1-16ch Hold 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 41, 00-7F Portamento 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 42, 00-7F Sostenuto 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 43, 00-7F Soft Pedal 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 47, 00-7F Resonance 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 48, 00-7F Release Time 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 49, 00-7F Attack Time 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 4A, 00-7F Brightness 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 4B, 00-7F Decay Time 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 4C, 00-7F Vibrato Rate 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 4D, 00-7F Vibrato Depth 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 4E, 00-7F Vibrato Delay 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 54, 00-7F Portamento Control 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 5B, 00-7F Reverb Send Level 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 5D, 00-7F Chorus Send Level 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 5E, 00-7F Variation Effect Send Level 1-16ch ˛ 10 Appendix Bn, 40, 00-7F ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 169 Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Bn, 60, 00-7F Bn, 61, 00-7F Data Increment Data Decrement 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 62, 00-7F Bn, 63, 00-7F NRPN LSB NRPN MSB 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 64, 00-7F Bn, 65, 00-7F RPN LSB RPN MSB 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 78, 00 Bn, 79, 00 Bn, 7B, 00 Bn, 7C, 00 Bn, 7D, 00 Bn, 7E, 00 Bn, 7F, 00 All Sound Off Reset All Controllers All Note Off Omni Off Omni On Mono Poly 1-16ch ˛ Cn, 00-7F Program Change Remarks 16ch Control (1ch)* (2ch)* (3ch)* UK LK PEDAL 1-16ch Dn, 00-7F After Touch En, 00-7F, 00-7F Pitch Bend 1-16ch 1-16ch ˛ * Can be changed in the MIDI settings (page 161). ** Can be output when assigned to channel 4. 2. Realtime Messages Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit EL mode XG mode F8 Clock Ø* ˛ Ø FA Start Ø ˛ Ø FC Stop Ø ˛ Ø FE Active Sensing Ø Ø Ø FF Reset ˛ ˛ ˛ Remarks * Received only when in the Ext. mode 3. System Exclusive Messages 3.1 Format Universal Realtime Messages Code (Hexadecimal) 10 Appendix 170 Receive Transmit F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 01, SS, TT, F7 XN GM2 Master Volume Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 03, SS, TT, F7 XN GM2 Master Fine Tuning Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 04, 00, TT, F7 XN GM2 Master Coarse Tuning Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 05, 01, 01, 01, 01, 01, PP, VV, ..., F7 XN GM2 Reverb Parameter Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 05, 01, 01, 01, 01, 02, PP, VV, ..., F7 XN GM2 Chorus Parameter Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 09, 01, 0n, PP, VV, ..., F7 XN GM2 After Touch Parameter Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 09, 03, 0n, CC, PP, VV, ..., F7 XN GM2 Control Change Parameter Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 0A, 01, 0n, KK, CC, PP, VV, ..., F7 XN GM2 Key-Based Controller Ø ˛ ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Message Universal Non-Realtime Messages Receive Transmit F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 01, F7 XN Code (Hexadecimal) GM ON Message Ø ˛ F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 03, F7 XN GM2 ON Ø ˛ F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 02, F7 XN GM OFF Ø ˛ F0, 7E, 7F, 08, 08, JJ, GG, MM, ..data.., F7 XN GM2 Scale/Octave Tuning Ø ˛ XG Native Receive Transmit F0, 43, 1N, 4C, AH, AM, AL, ..data.., F7 Code (Hexadecimal) XG Parameter Change Message Ø ˛ F0, 43, 0N, 4C, BH, BL, AH, AM, AL, ..data.., cc, F7 XG Bulk Dump Ø ˛ F0, 43, 1N, 27, 30, 00, 00, MM, LL, cc, F7 XG Master Tuning Ø ˛ Receive Transmit Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Clavinova Exclusive Code (Hexadecimal) F0, 43, 73, 01, 02, F7 03 Message Request for Internal Synch. Mode Request for External Synch. Mode Message Exclusive Receive Transmit F0, 43, 60, 7A, F7 Code (Hexadecimal) Rhythm Start Message Ø ˛ F0, 43, 60, 7D, F7 Rhythm Stop Ø ˛ Electone Exclusive Receive Transmit Bulk Dump Data Ø Ø Ø ˛ Ø ˛ F0, 43, 70, ID, 00, F7 Model ID Data ˛ Ø F0, 43, 70, 70, 30, F7 Request-to-Send Model ID Data Ø ˛ F0, 43, 70, 70, 38, 7F, F7 00 Bulk Dump Acknowledged Bulk Dump Unacknowledged ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø F0, 43, 70, 70, 40, nn(*1), 7F, F7 00 Switch ON Switch OFF Ø Ø Ø Ø F0, 43, 70, 70, 40, 50, TL, TH, F7 Tempo Ø Ø F0, 43, 70, 78, 41, cc, dd, F7(*2) Panel Switch Events Ø Ø F0, 43, 70, 78, 42, 3C, ..data.., F7 Current Registration Data Ø Ø F0, 43, 70, 78, 44, ..data..(*3), F7 MIDI Parameters Ø Ø F0, 43, 70, 70, 70, nn(*4), F7 MDR Ø ˛ F0, 43, 70, 70, 73, F7 EL ON Ø ˛ Bar Signal ˛ Ø F0, 43, 70, 70, 78, 00, 00, F7 ˛: don’t care N: Device Number (only “0”) Message 10 Appendix Code (Hexadecimal) F0, 43, 70, 70, 00, ..data.., F7 78 ID ID: Model ID (ELB-01=4FH) ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 171 *1. Switches nn Switch Receive Transmit 45H Left Footswitch Ø Ø 47H Knee Lever Ø Ø 4DH Solo Bar Ø Ø *2. Panel Switch Events MIDI Exclusive Format F0, 43, 70, 78, 41, cc, dd, F7 Selectors cc Switch Code 0F Registration Memory [1-16] dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Ø [00-0F] ˛ - Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Volume cc Switch Code dd Remarks 12 Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 13 Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 14 Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 15 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 16 Lead Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 17 Pedal Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 18 Pedal Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 1A Percussion Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 1B Reverb Depth Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Depth Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN To Lower cc Switch Code dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 36 Lead Voice 1 To Lower [TO LOWER ▼] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 37 Pedal Voice 1 To Lower [TO LOWER ▲] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 38 Pedal Voice 2 To Lower [TO LOWER ▲] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Sustain cc Switch Code 10 dd Remarks 50 Upper Sustain [UPPER (KNEE)] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 51 Lower Sustain [LOWER (KNEE)] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 52 Pedal Sustain [PEDAL] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON Keyboard Percussion Appendix cc Switch Code dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 5B Keyboard Percussion [1] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 5C Keyboard Percussion [2] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] Disable cc Switch Code 5F 172 Disable [D.] ELB-01 Owner’s Manual dd Remarks 00:OFF, 01:ON Rotary Speaker cc Switch dd Code 60 Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] Rotary Speaker Speed [ROTARY SP SPEED] 00:OFF, 01:ON Rhythm Sequence cc Switch dd Code *3. Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 61 Sequence 1 [SEQ.1] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 62 Sequence 2 [SEQ.2] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 63 Sequence 3 [SEQ.3] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 64 Sequence 4 [SEQ.4] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON MIDI Parameter Voice Section Parameters MIDI Exclusive Format F0, 43, 70, 78, 44, hh, mm, ll, ..., F7 Address Size Data Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 00-0D 5 00-7F 00-7F 00-02 00 00 Voice Assign Number 00-7F 00-7F 00-02 00 00 Ø 00-7F 00-7F 00-02 00 00 Ø 00-7F 00-7F 00 00 00 00-07 10 1 00-0D Voice Selector Number 00-07 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN 7F:MAX 00-0D Ø 00-0D Ø 00-0D Ø 00-7F ˛ - 10 00-07 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 10 00-07 14 1 00-04 Feet 00:PRESET 01:16' 02:8' 03:4' 04:2' Ø 00-7F Ø 00-04 10 00-07 15 1 00-7F Pan 00:LEFT 40:CENTER 7F:RIGHT Ø 00-7F Ø 08-78 10 00-07 16 1 00-7F Touch Tone Initial Touch 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 10 00-07 19 1 00-7F User Vibrato 00:PRESET 01:USER Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 10 00-07 1A 1 00-7F Vibrato Delay 00:SHORT 7F:LONG Ø 00-7F Ø 02-1A 10 00-07 1B 1 00-7F Vibrato Depth 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-54 10 00-07 1C 1 00-7F Vibrato Speed 00:SLOW 7F:FAST Ø 00-7F Ø 3C-6C 10 04-07 1F 1 00-7F TO LOWER▼/▲ 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ - 10 04-05 20 1 00-02 Slide (On/Knee Lever/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON 02:Knee Lever Ø 00-02 Ø 00-01 10 04-05 21 1 00-7F Slide Time 00:FAST 7F:SLOW Ø 00-7F Ø 02-7F 10 00-07 22 1 00-7F Tune/Detune 00:Down 40:Center 7F:Up Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 10 00-01/ 04-07 23 1 00-7F 2nd Expression Pitch Bend 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ 00-01 10 00-05 24 1 00-7F Footswitch Glide Control 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 hh mm ll 10 00-07 10 10 Parameter ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 10 Appendix Panel Voice Parameters (Address mm: 0 – 4, 6 – 7 = UK1, UK2, LK1, LK2, LEAD 1, PEDAL 1, PEDAL 2) 173 Address Size Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 25 1 3A-46 Transpose 3A:KeyDown 40:Normal 46:KeyUp Ø 3A-46 Ø 3A-46 00-07 2A 1 00-7F Volume Mute 00:Mute OFF 01:Mute ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 10 00-07 40 3 00 00-7F 00-7F Effect 1 Type MSB/LSB 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F 10 00-07 41 2 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 42 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 1 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 2 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 43 2 10 00-07 44 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 3 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 4 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 45 0000-7F7F 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 5 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 0000-7F7F 46 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 6 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 10 00-07 47 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 7 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 00-07 48 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 8 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 49 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 9 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 4A 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 10 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 4B 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 11 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 4C 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 12 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 4D 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 13 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 4E 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 14 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 4F 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 15 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 50 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 16 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F hh mm ll 10 00-07 10 Parameter Data Keyboard Parameters Sustain Parameters (Address mm: 0 – 2 = UK, LK, PEDAL) Address Size Data 00 1 00-7F Sustain (On/Off) 01 1 00-7F Length hh mm ll 12 00-02 12 00-02 Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ - 00:Short 7F:Long Ø 00-7F Ø 15-3D Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Keyboard Percussion Parameters (Address mm: 1 – 2 = K.B.P. [1], K.B.P. [2]) Address Size Data 10 1 00-7F Keyboard Percussion (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ - 11 1 00-08 Keyboard Percussion Menu 00:PRESET 01:USER 1 02:USER 2 03:USER 3 04:USER 4 05:USER 5 06:USER 6 07:USER 7 08:USER 8 Ø 00-08 Ø 00-08 hh mm ll 12 01-02 12 01-02 10 Appendix 174 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Parameter Data Rhythm Rhythm Parameters Address Size Data Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 00-0B 2 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F Ø 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00-7F 00-7F 00 10 1 00-0B Rhythm Selector Number 00 11 1 00-7F Percussion Volume 00:MIN 7F:MAX 00-0B Ø 00-0B Ø 00-0B Ø 00-7F ˛ - 13 00 12 1 00-7F Percussion Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 13 00 13 1 00-7F 2nd Expression Tempo Control (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ 00-01 13 00 14 1 00-7F Footswitch Rhythm Control 00:INTRO 1 01:INTRO 2 02:INTRO 3 08:MAIN A 09:MAIN B 0A:MAIN C 0B:MAIN D 18:BREAK 20:ENDING 1 21:ENDING 2 22:ENDING 3 7E:STOP 7F:OFF (INTRO 1 – STOP) Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 13 00 15 1 00-7F Add Drum (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 16 1 00-7F Main Drum (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 17 1 00-7F Chord 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 18 1 00-7F Chord 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 19 1 00-7F Pad (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 1A 1 00-7F Phrase 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 1B 1 00-7F Phrase 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 1C 1 00-7F Auto Fill (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Ø 00-7F ˛ - Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm ll 13 00 13 13 Parameter Rhythm Assign Number Rhythm Sequence Parameters Address hh mm ll 13 01 00-03 Size Data 1 00-7F Parameter Sequence [SEQ.1] – [SEQ.4] Data 00:OFF 01:ON Accompaniment Parameters Size Data 11 1 00-7F Accompaniment Volume 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 12 1 00-7F Accompaniment Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F mm ll 13 02 13 02 Parameter Data 10 Appendix Address hh A.B.C. Function Parameters Address Size Data Parameter 00 1 00-7F 03 01 1 03 02 1 hh mm ll 13 03 13 13 Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Auto Bass Chord Mode 00:OFF 01:Single Finger 02:Fingered 03:Custom A.B.C. Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03 00-7F Lower Memory (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 00-7F Pedal Memory (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 175 M.O.C. Function Parameters Address Size Data 00 1 00-7F Melody On Chord Mode 01 1 00-7F M.O.C. Knee Lever Control (On/Off) Size Data hh mm ll 13 04 13 04 Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ 00-01 Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Section Parameters Address Parameter Data hh mm ll 13 05 00 1 00-7F Intro 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 01 1 00-7F Intro 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 02 1 00-7F Intro 3 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 08 1 00-7F Main A (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 09 1 00-7F Main B (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 0A 1 00-7F Main C (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 0B 1 00-7F Main D (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 18 1 00-7F Break (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 20 1 00-7F Ending 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 21 1 00-7F Ending 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 22 1 00-7F Ending 3 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Keyboard Percussion Parameters Address Size Data Parameter Data hh mm ll 13 10 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 13 10 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F Size Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Overall System Parameters Address 10 Appendix 176 Parameter Data hh mm ll 14 00 00 1 00-7F Disable (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ - 14 00 02 1 3A-46 Transpose 3A:KeyDown 40:Normal 46:KeyUp Ø 3A-46 Ø 3A-46 14 00 03 1 01-0C 2nd Expression Range 01:100 C 0C:1200 C Ø 01-0C ˛ 01-0C 14 00 04 1 00-7F Footswitch Mode 00:OFF 01:Rhythm 02:Glide 03:Rotary Speaker Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03 14 00 05 1 00-7F Pitch 00:PitchDown 40:Normal 7F:PitchUp Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 14 00 06 1 00-7F Footswitch Glide Time 00:FAST 7F:SLOW Ø 00-7F Ø 04-1C 14 00 08 1 00-7F MIDI Control Expression (INT/EXT) 00:Internal 01:External Ø 00-7F ˛ - ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Address Size Data 09 1 00-7F MIDI Control Lead 1 (INT/EXT) 0A 3 00-05 00-07 00-0B Registration Menu hh mm ll 14 00 14 00 Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 00:Internal 01:External Ø 00-7F ˛ - 00-05 00-07 00-0B Ø 00-05 00-07 00-0B Ø 00-05 00-07 00-0B Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Effect Parameters (Overall): Reverb Address Size Data Parameter Data hh mm ll 14 01 00 1 00-7F Reverb Depth 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F ˛ - 14 01 01 1 00-7F Reverb Time (Panel) 00:FAST 7F:SLOW Ø 00-7F Ø 00-45 14 01 02 3 00 00-7F 00-7F Reverb Type (Panel) 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Effect Parameters (Overall): Rotary Speaker Address Size Data 00 1 00-7F Rotary Speaker Speed (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ - 03 01 1 00-7F Rotary Speaker Speed Control Mode 00:STOP 01:SLOW Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 03 02 2 0000007F Rotary Speaker Speed Control Speed 0000:SLOW 007F:FAST Ø 0000-007F Ø 0040-007F hh mm ll 14 03 14 14 Data MDR Receive Transmit 01H nn Play Start Command Ø ˛ 02H Play Stop Ø ˛ 03H Record Start Ø ˛ 04H Record Stop Ø ˛ 05H Fast Forward Start Ø ˛ 06H Fast Forward Stop Ø ˛ 09H Rhythm Pointer Reset Ø ˛ 10 Appendix *4. Parameter ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 177 MIDI Implementation Chart Date: 03-Mar-2005 Version: 1.00 YAMAHA [Electone-EL mode] / Model: ELB-01 Function Transmitted Basic Channel Default Changed 1, 2, 3, 16 (*1) 1-16 1-3, 5-16 (*2) 4 Mode Default Messages Altered Mode 3 ˛ ************************ Mode 3 ˛ ˛ 0-127 (*4) :True Voice 36-96 (*3) ************************ Ø 9nH, v=1-127 ˛ 9nH, v=0 Ø 9nH, v=1-127 ˛ 9nH, v=0 or 8nH ˛ Ø Ø (*5) Ø Ø Ø (*5) ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø (*6) ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø (*5) Ø (*5) Ø (*6) Ø (*5) Ø (*5, 6) Ø (*5) Ø (*5) Ø (*5) Ø (*5) Ø (*5) Ø (*9) ************************ Ø (*10) Ø Ø Note Number Velocity Note on Note off After Touch Key's Ch's Pitch Bend Control Change Program Change 0, 32 1, 5, 7, 10 4 6, 38 11 96, 97 64-67 71-78 84, 91, 93, 94 98-99, 100-101 :True number System Exclusive 10 System Common :Song Position :Song Select :Tune ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ System Real Time :Clock :Commands Ø Ø Ø (*8) Ø :All Sound Off :Reset All Cntrls :Local On/Off :All Notes Off :Active Sense :Reset ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ Ø (120) (*5) Ø (121) (*5) ˛ Ø (123-127) (*5) Ø ˛ Appendix Aux Messages Notes Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY 178 Recognized ELB-01 Owner’s Manual *1; *2; *3; *4; *5; *7; *9; *10; Remarks Bank Select 2nd Expression Data Entry Expression Data Entry SW Sound Controller NRPN, RPN (FAH, FCH) 1ch: UK, 2ch: LK, 3ch: PEDAL, 16ch: CONTROL 1ch: UK, 2ch: LK, 3ch: PEDAL, 4ch: LEAD1, 5-14ch: XG, 15ch: KEYBOARD PERCUSSION, 16ch: CONTROL UK: 36-96, LK: 36-96, PEDAL: 36-60 UK, LK, PEDAL, LEAD1: 36-96, XG: 0-127, PERCUSSION: 3-127 *6; CONTROL only XG only *8; External Mode only UK only CONTROL: 0-15 UK, LK, PEDAL, CONTROL: 0-15 XG: 0-127 Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO Ø : Yes ˛ : No Date: 03-Mar-2005 Version: 1.00 YAMAHA [Electone-XG mode] / Model: ELB-01 Function Transmitted (*1) Recognized Basic Channel Default Changed 1, 2, 3, 16 1-16 1-16 1-16 Mode Default Messages Altered Mode3 ˛ ************************ Mode 3 ˛ ˛ 36-96 ************************ 0-127 :True Voice Ø 9nH, v=1-127 ˛ 9nH, v=0 Ø 9nH, v=1-127 ˛ 9nH, v=0 or 8nH ˛ Ø Ø Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø Ø ˛ Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø 0-15 ************************ Ø System Exclusive Ø Ø System Common :Song Position :Song Select :Tune ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ System Real Time :Clock :Commands Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Aux Messages :All Sound Off :Reset All Cntrls :Local On/Off :All Notes Off :Active Sense :Reset ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ Ø (120) Ø (121) ˛ Ø (123-127) Ø ˛ Note Number Note on Note off Velocity Key's Ch's After Touch Pitch Bend Control Change Program Change 0, 32 1, 5, 7, 10 4 6, 38 11 96, 97 64-67 71-78 84, 91, 93, 94 98-99, 100-101 :True number Notes Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY *1; Remarks Bank Select 2nd Expression Data Entry Expression Data Entry SW Sound Controller NRPN, RPN 10 Appendix MIDI Implementation chart Same as that in the EL mode Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO Ø : Yes ˛ : No ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 179 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution GENERAL OPERATION The sound is not heard for about 10 seconds after turning the power on. This is normal; the Electone takes a while to start up. A cracking noise is sometimes heard. Noise may be produced when either an electrical appliance is turned on or an electric power tool (such as drill) is used in the proximity of the Electone. If this occurs, plug the Electone into an electrical outlet located as far as possible from the device that seems to be the source of the problem. Interference from radio, TV, or other sources occurs. This is caused by the proximity of a high-power broadcasting station, an amateur ham radio setup or a mobile phone. The sound of the Electone causes surrounding objects to resonate. Because the Electone is capable of producing powerful bass sounds, resonance may be caused in surrounding objects, such as cabinets or glass windows. To avoid this, relocate the objects or lower the Electone’s volume. Some of the LEDs in the DISPLAY SELECT section do not light. The lamps above the [RHYTHM SEQUENCE] button and the [SUSTAIN] button will light up when the function is turned on in the display. The sound is too small even when the volume is set to its maximum. • The MASTER VOLUME dial may be set around the minimum position. Turn it clockwise. • The Expression Pedal may not be pressed down. Press it down with your toe. The Electone panel does not function normally or the content of the memorized data has changed. This happens very rarely. Occasionally, power surges and spikes due to electrical storms or other reasons may cause the Electone to malfunction and/ or alter the contents of memorized data. If this happens, perform the Factory Set operation to reset the Electone (page 20). VOICES/RHYTHMS When a key is pressed, two or more Voices sound. Perhaps the Voice of the Voice section 2 sounds as for the Lower Keyboard or Pedalboard. Turn off the Voice of the Voice section 2 in the Voice display, or set the volume setting to minimum after switching to the Voice section 2 (page 29). As for the Upper Keyboard, the Lead Voice may sound in addition to the Voice of the Voice section 2. Turn off the Lead Voice in the Voice display after switching to the Voice section 2. The pitch may sound excessively high on the Pedalboard and low in the higher registers of the Lower and Upper keyboards. This may occur when you compare the Electone’s sounds with that of a piano. Because of the difference of the harmonics structure, the tuning system of the Electone is different from the piano in the higher and lower ranges. Some of the Voices may contain cracking and/or noisy You may find these mainly in the wind instrument Voices. These are purposely sounds. added effects to the Voices to reproduce the characteristics of the wind instruments such as the pipe vibrations, breath noises and squeaks. 10 Appendix 180 When too many keys are pressed, not all of the notes sound. Total polyphonic capacity (notes sounding for both Upper and Lower Keyboards) is 10 notes. Only one sound is heard when two notes of the Lead or Pedal Voices are simultaneously played. For practical performance reasons, the Electone has been designed so that only one note of the Lead or Pedal Voices can be played at a time. The Pedal Voices do not sound, even though the volume is properly set. • The Single Finger or Fingered Chord mode of Auto Bass Chord is on. Turn off the mode in the display (page 71). • TO LOWER buttons in the Pedal Voice sections are turned on. Turn the function off (page 31). When keys are pressed, the sounds of percussion instruments are also heard. The Keyboard Percussion function has been turned on. When not using the function, be sure to turn it off (page 77). Even though a User button’s rhythm has been selected and started, the pattern does not sound. Since the User buttons contain User rhythms, no rhythm will sound if a pattern has not been saved to the selected User button. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Problem Possible Cause and Solution EFFECTS The Initial Touch function does not operate. Adjust the Initial Touch settings in the Voice Condition display (page 42). The Reverb effect is not applied to the desired Voice sections, even when the Reverb setting in the Voice Condition display Page 1 set to maximum. Increase the Reverb depth for the desired Voice sections in Reverb display. The Rotary Speaker effect cannot be heard, even when the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button in the DISPLAY SELECT section is on. Rotary Speaker must be selected first in Voice Condition display. ACCOMPANIMENT The pitch in the Single Finger mode does not change, even when pressing different keys of the keyboard. Single Finger mode will only produce notes when played within a fixed octave interval on the Lower keyboard. If notes with the same letter name are pressed outside of that range, the chords that are sounded will share the same pitch. While an Intro/Ending pattern is automatically playing, the Lower keyboard does not produce any sound, even when the keys are played. Since the Accompaniment chords play automatically one after another, the Lower keyboard is designed not to produce any sound during the playback of an Intro/Ending pattern. The Accompaniment cannot be heard even when an appropriate Accompaniment type is selected and the rhythm has been started. • The Accompaniment volume may have been set to 0. Be sure to raise the Accompaniment volume in the Rhythm Condition display (page 70). • All Accompaniment parts may be set to off (mute). Set the desired part on (page 68). The harmony notes of the Melody On Chord function cannot be heard. The Upper keyboard has been set to sound only Lead Voices. Increase the volume of the Upper Keyboard Voices. REGISTRATION MEMORY Certain functions have not been memorized to Registration Memory. Some functions cannot be memorized. Refer to page 98. MUSIC DATA RECORDER Recording or playback cannot be performed. • The part buttons may have been turned off. Turn the desired part to REC or PLAY. • The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording performance data is 1 MB. • The media is write-protected. Cancel the write-protect. • The media/folder may contain EL-format songs. You cannot record to the media/folder that contains EL-format songs. Create a new folder and record the song to it. Recording is stopped before the performance is finished. • The amount of recorded data on the media is close to the maximum limit. Either use another media or delete the data of unnecessary songs. • When you overwrite the song, the length of a subsequently recorded part cannot exceed the length of the previously recorded parts. Delete the previously recorded song, then record again (page 121). • The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording performance data is 1 MB. An error message appears while entering a folder name or song name. • The song/folder name is too long. The capacity is 50 characters. • The song/folder name may be an invalid name. Refer to page 124. • The path name is too long. The capacity of the path name is 234 characters. Reduce the layer or shorten the song/folder name to shorten the path. The M.D.R. is designed so that the rhythm cannot be started at the very beginning of a recording. If you wish to use the rhythm, start it after the time indicator appears in the display. Appendix The rhythm does not start at the beginning of a recording, or stops in the middle of the performance. 10 The floppy disk cannot be formatted when you want to Recognizing an unformatted disk takes a few seconds after it is inserted. format an unformatted disk. Wait about 30 seconds, then try to format again. The notes of the recording are “stuck” and sound continuously. During playback, you may have removed the USB flash memory or floppy disk. Whenever you wish to stop playback, always press the [STOP] button before removing the media. ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 181 Specifications Electone STAGEA ELB-01 TONE GENERATION AWM (2) KEYBOARD Upper: 49 (C – C)/Lower: 49 (C – C)/Pedal: 20 (C – G) Keyboard Type Basic Initial Touch REGISTRATION VOICE Upper, Lower Registration Memory 16 Registration Menu 240 + 90 Voice Sections Voice Buttons Upper: 2, Lead: 1, Lower: 2, Pedal: 2 Upper/Lower RHYTHM VIOLIN, SYNTH, FLUTE, TRUMPET, USER 1, TO LOWER Pedal CONTRABASS, ELEC. BASS, TIMPANI, SYNTH BASS, USER 1, TO LOWER 245 Sustain Upper, Lower, Pedal Reverb 25 Effects Reverb, Delay, Karaoke, Chorus, Flanger, Phaser, Tremolo/Auto Pan, Rotary Speaker, Distortion, Wah, Dynamic, EQ/Enhancer, Thru Preset Rhythm Pattern Rhythm Buttons Main Drum, Add Drum Sections Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3, Main/Fill In A – D, Break, Auto Fill Accompaniment Parts Auto Bass Chord ✔ Settings Preset 1, 2, User 1 – 8 Kits Wonderland Kit, EL, Standard Kit 1, 2, Hit, Room, Rock, Electro, Analog, Jazz, Brush, Symphony, SFX1, 2, Arabic ✔ Assign CONTROLS Footswitch Left Rhythm: Stop, Break, Main A – D, Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3 Glide: Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead 1, Glide Time Rotary Speaker Speed Registration Shift Shift, Jump, User (80) ✔ Expression Pedal Transpose -6 – +6 Pitch A = 427.2 – 452.6 Hz MIDI Control ✔ Main Controls POWER on/off, MASTER VOLUME M.D.R. 10 • Stop, Play, Custom Play, Rec, Pause, Fast Forward, Rewind • Tempo (50 – 200%), Repeat Setting, Change Song Name, Remaining Memory, Format, Song Copy, Song/folder Delete, Convert ELB→EL, Convert EL→ELB, Convert To XG, Registration Load/Save/Delete, Create folder Utility Language (English/Japanese), Version Display Select Appendix SOUND SYSTEM VOICE DISPLAY, A.B.C./M.O.C., FOOTSWITCH, UTILITY, RHYTHM SEQUENCE, SUSTAIN, REVERB, ROTARY SP SPEED Power Amplifiers 60 W (Stereo) Speakers OTHERS Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase1, Phrase 2 OFF, Single Finger, Fingered Chord, Custom A.B.C. Memory: Lower, Pedal Melody On Chord KEYBOARD PERCUSSION 133 MARCH, WALTZ, SWING & JAZZ, POPS, R&B, LATIN, WORLD MUSIC, BALLAD, ROCK, DANCE, USER 1, USER 2 Parts ACCOMPANIMENT STRINGS, BRASS, WOODWIND, TUTTI, PAD, SYNTH, PIANO, ORGAN, PERCUSSION, GUITAR, CHOIR, WORLD, USER 1, USER 2 Lead Preset Voice EFFECT/CONDITION M. (Memory) 1 – 8 (9 – 16), D. (Disable) Basic Registration 16 cm x 2, 5 cm x 2 LCD Display 20 x 2 Character Storage USB x 2 Connectors PHONES, AUX OUT: L/R, MIDI IN/OUT, USB TO HOST, USB TO DEVICE: A, B Power Consumption 64 W Dimensions, Weight 1112.3 (W) x 485.8 (D) x 936 (H) mm, 1123.9 (W) mm (with Music Rest), 55 kg Bench 596 (W) x 296 (D) x 580 (H) mm, 6.2 kg Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. 182 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Index [A] – [D] buttons ....................................................................... 17 A.B.C......................................................................................... 71 A.B.C./M.O.C. ........................................................................... 71 Accompaniment........................................................................ 68 Add Drum ................................................................................. 68 Auto Bass Chord....................................................................... 71 Auto Fill ..................................................................................... 60 AUX OUT (L/R)........................................................................ 151 AWM Voice ................................................................................. 8 B BAR/BEAT................................................................................. 61 BREAK ...................................................................................... 58 Feet............................................................................................42 File ...........................................................................................116 FILL IN .......................................................................................58 Fingered Chord .........................................................................72 FLANGER ............................................................................45, 53 floppy disk ...............................................................................107 Folder ..............................................................................113, 116 Folder Delete ...........................................................................139 Folder Name............................................................................122 FOOTSWITCH .................................................................102, 146 Footswitch (Left) ......................................................................146 Footswitch (Right)....................................................................102 Format (M.D.R.) .......................................................................109 G C Glide ........................................................................................148 Changing the Song/Folder Name ........................................... 122 Channel Messages ................................................................. 159 Chord 1 ..................................................................................... 69 Chord 2 ..................................................................................... 69 CHORUS (Effect) ................................................................ 45, 53 Control Change....................................................................... 159 Convert EL -> ELB .................................................................. 142 Convert ELB -> EL .................................................................. 141 Convert to XG ......................................................................... 144 Custom A.B.C. .......................................................................... 72 H D [D.] (Disable) ............................................................................ 99 DATA CONTROL dial.......................................................... 11, 17 DELAY (Effect) .................................................................... 45, 52 Delay (Vibrato) .......................................................................... 44 Delete (Registration Shift) ....................................................... 105 Delete (Song/Folder)............................................................... 139 Depth (Reverb) ......................................................................... 48 Depth (Vibrato) ......................................................................... 44 Display Select (Panel)............................................................... 11 DISTORTION....................................................................... 45, 54 DYNAMIC............................................................................ 45, 55 E Effect......................................................................................... 45 Effect Category (Voice)............................................................. 45 Effect List .................................................................................. 52 Effect Parameters ............................................................... 46, 52 Effect Type (Voice) ................................................................... 46 ENDING .................................................................................... 58 EQ/ENHANCER .................................................................. 45, 55 Expression Pedal .................................................................... 162 Expression pedal ...................................................................... 13 F Factory Set................................................................................ 20 Fast Forward ........................................................................... 134 Headphones............................................................................153 I Icons........................................................................................116 Index........................................................................................183 indicator.....................................................................................17 Initial Touch ...............................................................................42 Initialize (Factory set) ................................................................20 Initialize (Registration Memory) ...............................................100 Internal/External (MIDI)............................................................161 INTRO........................................................................................58 J Jacks and Controls..................................................................151 Jump........................................................................................103 K KARAOKE............................................................................45, 52 Keyboard Percussion ................................................................77 L Language ..................................................................................19 LCD display...............................................................................17 Lead Voice ................................................................................21 LEAD VOICE (Panel) .................................................................10 Lower Keyboard Voice ..............................................................22 LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2 (Panel) ...................................10 10 Appendix A M [M.] (Memory)............................................................................98 M.D.R.......................................................................................107 M.O.C. .......................................................................................74 MAIN..........................................................................................58 Main Drum .................................................................................68 MAIN/FILL IN .............................................................................60 MASTER VOLUME.....................................................................13 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 183 Melody On Chord ..................................................................... 74 Memory (A.B.C.) ....................................................................... 73 Metronome................................................................................ 67 MIDI ........................................................................................ 157 MIDI Control............................................................................ 161 MIDI IN/OUT ................................................................... 152, 157 MIDI Out.................................................................................. 162 Mode (Rotary Speaker)............................................................. 50 Music Data Recorder (MDR) .................................................. 107 N Next (Shift End)....................................................................... 106 Next Regist ............................................................................. 129 P Pad............................................................................................ 69 PAGE buttons ........................................................................... 18 PAGE Buttons (Panel)............................................................... 11 Panning..................................................................................... 43 Part (M.D.R.) ........................................................................... 119 Part (Rhythm) ............................................................................ 68 Pause ...................................................................................... 134 Pedal Voice............................................................................... 22 PEDAL VOICE 1/2 (Panel) ........................................................ 10 PHASER .............................................................................. 45, 53 PHONES ................................................................................. 151 Phrase 1.................................................................................... 69 Phrase 2.................................................................................... 69 Pitch ........................................................................................ 150 Pitch (Voice section) ................................................................. 43 Playback ................................................................................. 133 POWER ..................................................................................... 12 PRESET (Effect) ........................................................................ 45 Preset (Vibrato) ......................................................................... 44 Preset Keyboard Percussion .................................................... 77 Program Change .................................................................... 159 Protected Song ....................................................................... 139 Punch-in Recording ................................................................ 121 R 10 Appendix 184 Recording ............................................................................... 117 Recording (Each Part) ............................................................ 118 Registration Memory................................................................. 97 Registration Menu..................................................................... 14 Registration Menu List .............................................................. 15 Registration Shift..................................................................... 102 Rename................................................................................... 122 Repeat .................................................................................... 135 REVERB .................................................................................... 48 Reverb ...................................................................................... 42 Reverb (Accompaniment)......................................................... 70 REVERB (Effect)........................................................................ 52 Reverb (Rhythm)....................................................................... 62 Reverb (Voice condition) .......................................................... 45 Rewind .................................................................................... 134 Rhythm...................................................................................... 56 Rhythm buttons......................................................................... 56 Rhythm Condition ..................................................................... 62 RHYTHM CONTROL (Panel)..................................................... 10 Rhythm List ............................................................................... 67 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual Rhythm Menu ............................................................................56 Rhythm Sequence .....................................................................75 ROTARY SP SPEED...................................................................50 ROTARY SPEAKER .............................................................45, 54 Rotary Speaker..........................................................................50 S section .......................................................................................58 Shift (Registration Shift) ...........................................................103 Shift End ..................................................................................106 Single Finger .............................................................................72 Slide...........................................................................................47 Song ................................................................................111, 116 Song Copy...............................................................................137 Song Delete.............................................................................139 Song Name..............................................................................122 Specifications ..........................................................................182 Speed (Rotary Speaker)............................................................50 Speed (Vibrato) .........................................................................44 START........................................................................................57 Stop (Shift End) .......................................................................106 Style File Format ..........................................................................5 Sustain.......................................................................................49 SYNCHRO START .....................................................................59 System Exclusive Messages ...................................................159 T Tempo (Rhythm)........................................................................61 THRU ...................................................................................45, 55 To Lower....................................................................................31 Top (Shift End).........................................................................106 Touch (Initial touch)...................................................................42 Transpose................................................................................150 Transpose (Voice section).........................................................43 TREMOLO/AUTO PAN ........................................................45, 53 Tune (Voice section)..................................................................43 U UD-FD01..................................................................................167 Upper Keyboard Voice..............................................................21 UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2 (Panel) ....................................10 USB TO DEVICE A ..................................................................151 USB TO DEVICE B ..................................................................152 USB TO HOST .........................................................................152 User (Registration Shift) ..........................................................103 User (Vibrato) ............................................................................44 User button (Rhythm) ................................................................63 User button (Voice) ...................................................................32 User Keyboard Percussion .......................................................88 UTILITY....................................................................................150 V Version.......................................................................................20 Vibrato .......................................................................................44 Voice (Voice section 2)..............................................................29 Voice buttons.............................................................................25 Voice Condition display.......................................................27, 41 Voice Display.............................................................................23 Voice Menu................................................................................25 VOICE SECTION....................................................................... 25 Voice section 1 ......................................................................... 25 Voices ....................................................................................... 21 Volume (Accompaniment) ........................................................ 70 Volume (Keyboard Percussion) ................................................ 78 Volume (Rhythm) ................................................................ 57, 62 Volume (Voice).................................................................... 26, 42 Volume (XG)............................................................................ 136 W WAH.................................................................................... 45, 54 X XG ............................................................................................... 5 Appendix 10 ELB-01 Owner’s Manual 185 Memo For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Music Europe 7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités Pariest, 77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal en España Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte Madero Este-C1107CEK Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 011-4119-7000 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK) Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 044-387-8080 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/ ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria (Central Eastern Europe Office) Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Poland Office ul. Wrotkowa 14 02-553 Warsaw, Poland Tel: 022-500-2925 BULGARIA Dinacord Bulgaria LTD. Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa 1528 Sofia, Bulgaria Tel: 02-978-20-25 MALTA Olimpus Music Ltd. The Emporium, Level 3, St. Louis Street Msida MSD06 Tel: 02133-2144 DMI4 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial Scandinavia J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 DENMARK Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland – filial Denmark Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 NORWAY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany Norwegian Branch Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow, 121059, Russia Tel: 495 626 5005 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2313 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDIA Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd. Spazedge building, Ground Floor, Tower A, Sector 47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon, Haryana, India Tel: 0124-485-3300 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 021-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3467-3300 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 03-78030900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music (Asia) PRIVATE LIMITED Blk 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00, Singapore 530202, Singapore Tel: 6747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2622 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2313 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2313 Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division © 2012 Yamaha Corporation WF12580 209MWAP*.*-01C1 Printed in China